Expert Cut Manual (En)

Lantek Expert Cut
USER MANUAL
METAL Platform FACTORY Management SYNERGY Intelligence

CAD/CAM MES ERP+ ADVANCED MANUFACTURING
Copyright
The contents of this user manual and graphics
are protected by Spanish law regarding the
intellectual and industrial property right of
Parque Tecnológico de Álava Lantek. The reproduction, distribution, public

communication and transformation wholly or
Ferdinand Zeppelin 2, Ed. Lantek
partially of the information contained herein, is
01510 Miñano - Álava (ESPAÑA) forbidden without the express authorization of
www.lanteksms.com Lantek.
info@lanteksms.com
Disclaimer
The information contained herein is subject to
Parque Tecnológico de Álava change. While every effort has been taken to
provide accurate information, Lantek is not liable
Ferdinand Zeppelin 2, Ed.Lantek
for any errors or damage resulting from incorrect
01510 Miñano - Álava (ESPAÑA) use of the information contained herein. All
www.lanteksms.com product names used in this manual are the
info@lanteksms.com property of Lantek.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 CONFIGURE CUTTING MACHINES & TOOLS ................................................................. 6
MULTIHEAD DATA........................................................................................... 6
GRID ..................................................................................................... 11
SHEET CLAMPS............................................................................................ 14
FIXTURES ................................................................................................. 19
EXTRACTIONS ............................................................................................. 20
LIFT/GRIP ................................................................................................ 22
UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD SHEETS .............................................................................. 26
WORK ZONE .............................................................................................. 27
FROM POINT ............................................................................................. 28
REPOSITION .............................................................................................. 29
SHEET PARAMETERS ....................................................................................... 34
SHEET TURN OVER ........................................................................................ 36
BEVEL HEAD DATA ........................................................................................ 38
GENERAL ................................................................................................. 42
STARTUP ................................................................................................. 48
CNC ..................................................................................................... 51
SHEET REMNANTS ......................................................................................... 52
SAVE OPTIONS ............................................................................................ 54
MATERIAL/THICKNESS DEPENDENT DATA .................................................................... 63
CUTTING PARAMETERS .................................................................................... 79
COMMON CUTTING PARAMETERS........................................................................... 84
TECHNOLOGY ............................................................................................. 87
AUTOMATIC NESTING...................................................................................... 98
AUTOMATIC MACHINING ................................................................................. 114
TIME CALCULATION ...................................................................................... 143
COST CALCULATION ...................................................................................... 152
INK-JET ................................................................................................. 154
POSTPROCESSOR ......................................................................................... 156
2 JOBS (CAM) MODULE ..................................................................................... 163
JOBS ................................................................................................... 163

HOME ................................................................................................. 212
MANAGE .............................................................................................. 230
UTILITIES .............................................................................................. 245
3
Table of Contents
VIEW .................................................................................................. 251

ADD-INS ............................................................................................... 253
3 DRAWING MODULE ....................................................................................... 255
DRAWING WINDOW...................................................................................... 255

STATUS BAR ............................................................................................. 256
CUSTOMIZE QUICK ACCESS TOOLBAR ....................................................................... 256
CONTEXTUAL MENU ...................................................................................... 257
PARTS .................................................................................................. 259
HOME .................................................................................................. 305
TECHNOLOGY ............................................................................................ 347
MACHINING ............................................................................................. 366
VIEW ................................................................................................... 407
SIMULATION ............................................................................................. 417
NOTES .................................................................................................. 420
UTILITIES ................................................................................................ 426
DRAGGING OPTIONS ..................................................................................... 430
SELECTION OPTIONS ...................................................................................... 431
4 NESTING AND MACHINING MODULE ..................................................................... 433
TITLE BAR ............................................................................................... 433

DRAWING WINDOW...................................................................................... 434
STATUS BAR ............................................................................................. 434
CUSTOMIZE QUICK ACCESS TOOLBAR ....................................................................... 434
CONTEXTUAL MENU ...................................................................................... 435
SUBJOBS ................................................................................................ 442
HOME .................................................................................................. 475
TECHNOLOGY ............................................................................................ 503
MACHINING ............................................................................................. 528
VIEW ................................................................................................... 575
SIMULATION ............................................................................................. 586
APPLICATIONS ........................................................................................... 588
UTILITIES ................................................................................................ 593
DRAGGING OPTIONS ..................................................................................... 593
SELECTION OPTIONS ...................................................................................... 593
5 CUTTING EXAMPLE ........................................................................................ 594
4
Introduction
INTRODUCTION
Welcome to Lantek Expert Cut Reference Manual. This manual introduces all the
important modules, basic concepts, and important functionalities of Lantek Expert software. We
recommend the user to go through this manual to use the software effectively.
After reading this manual, the user will be familiar with the different modules and concepts of
Expert II to use it proficiently, making the management process a pleasant activity.
What is ?
Lantek Expert Cut is a CAD/CAM nesting software specially designed to automate the
CNC programming of sheet metal cutting machines (oxycut, plasma, laser, water jet). All the
applications related to cutting such as creating part, nesting, generating the CNC, and so on are
fully integrated into a single program.
It is the result of more than 25 years’ experience in close collaboration with both manufacturers
and users of these types of machines. It perfectly combines machine technology with customer´s
programming and management requirements.
The current manual is structured into the following five chapters, which are organized
following the logical execution order:
Configure Cutting Machines and Tools

• Configure the machine to be managed by Lantek
Jobs (CAM) Module

• Create a job, import parts, manage parts/materials/sheets, manage
Databases, customize ribbon.
Drawing Module
• Design your parts
Nesting and Machining Module

• Position the parts on the sheet, calculate the machining sequence
and create the CNC program
Cutting Example
• Practice your skills
5
Configure Cutting Machines & Tools
1 CONFIGURE CUTTING MACHINES & TOOLS

The main step to take prior to working with Lantek is to configure properly the machine that we
are going to manage as well as its tools. It is essential that the user configures all the parameters
appropriately so that the system works as per our requirements.
Figure 1: Configure Machine window
Multihead Data
The configuration of the multihead of the selected machine appears in the present window.
6
Figure 2: Multihead data configuration
• Number of heads: It shows and allows configuring the number of heads of the machine.
The system supports to use up to 20 heads at the same time. It is possible to define a
different number of heads per each type of cutting technology.
• Head capabilities: Each head may have different capabilities for cut, mark or for machine
bevels or notches. In this dialogue box, the user can choose the capabilities of each head:
Figure 3: Heads table
In the example, the first head can be used for all kinds of machines, but the second, third or the
fourth can only be used for normal cut. When it comes to perform the machining, the system will
consider this configuration to machine each one of the cutting technology types with the
maximum number of heads, as it is done with the rest of technologies. Water cu
• Multihead on axis Y: Depending on each machine, the heads can be placed on X axis (by
default), or in Y axis. It is important to specify to system which kind of heads placement
the machine uses.
7
• Control head: It establishes the reference head. The CNC program is built for this head
and the other heads follow the movements of this head. The options depend on the
previous parameter. If the heads are on axis X, the possible movements are Right and
Left. If the heads are on axis Y, the possible movements are Up and Down.
• Minimum distance between heads: This is the minimum distance allowed between two
heads.
• Maximum distance between heads: This is the maximum distance allowed between two
heads.
• View configuration in "Do all": The multihead configuration is shown each time the user
clicks Do All option in the Nesting module, which makes the nesting and machining
process automatically for all jobs depending on the configurations of Automatic Nesting
and Automatic Machining. This dialogue box is shown when the user uses Sheets /
Multihead too.
In the dialogue box, the list of heads along with the capabilities and distances of each head is
displayed:
The capabilities of each head are shown with icons:
It is possible to activate the heads that the user would like to use. If the icon near the number is
in red color ( ), the system can use that head. The user can deactivate head by clicking this
icon. The icon is turned to black color ( ). Click the black colored icon to activate the head
again.
• Positioning: When clicking this button, Heads positions dialogue box with following
parameters is displayed:
8
Figure 4: Heads positions dialog box
• Test this data before machining: Select this to test the possibility of doing multihead
cutting by position when the system detects multihead cutting. The system verifies if the
heads can reach the specified position before performing the machining or not. If the
part is not correct, then the system exploits the part and its corresponding multihead
parts.
• Index of the reference head: The reference head is the head with the motor, and the rest
of them depend on this head. It is possible to set the index of the master head here.
• Initial position of the reference head: The reference head is fixed in the carriage. It
cannot be moved. It is possible to set the position of the reference head with the value
that the user enters here.
• Minimal position of heads with respect to zero point of the carriage: The rest of the
heads (other than the reference head) can be placed along the carriage but they must
keep some distance from the reference head. The nearest to the reference head can be
placed at the distance specified here. The distance is referred to the zero point of the
head.
• Maximal position of heads with respect to zero point of the carriage: The maximal
position along the carriage where the farthest head to the reference head can be placed.
The distance is referred to the zero point of the head.
9
• Maximum length that can move to negative the zero of the carriage: The carriage can be
placed in different positions between the physical limits. This value is the maximum
length to which the zero point of the carriage can be moved towards negative direction.
• Maximum length that can move to positive the zero of the carriage: It is the maximum
distance to which the zero point of the carriage can be moved towards positive direction.
• Coordinates of the zero of the carriage respect the zero of the sheet: This value is the
distance between the zero point of the sheet and the zero point of the carriage. If the
reference head is placed in the middle of the carriage, and the sheet is placed in the work
zone, this is the distance between the reference head and the zero point of the sheet.
• Head movement length: Select whether the head movement length should be
independent of the separation (the distance between two heads) or depend on that.
▪ Independent of the separation: It allows cutting parts even when any of the heads is out
of its Maximal position of the heads with respect to the zero point of the carriage.
▪ Dependent of the separation: If any of the heads is out of its Maximal position of the
heads respect of the zero point of the carriage, the parts are not cut (even if the part
keeps the minimum distance with the previous one).
• Assignation of the dimensions of the contour:
▪ By contours: The system decides, depending on the carriage limits, which heads to use
for machining problematic contours.
▪ By Parts: The part is always machined with the same head (interior and exterior
contours).
10
Grid
This is used for cutting machines that have a work support grid. It is possible to specify the
visualization parameters for the support grid.
Figure 5: Grid configuration
• The machine has grid: First of all, the user must check this option for enabling the rest of
grid configuration parameters:
• Visualize: Select this check box to simulate the grid. It is also possible to see the positions
of the parts and modify them, if required.
The parameters to configure are 2D Points and Continuous Line/Arc.
▪ X and Y: the coordinates of the first point.
▪ d1 and d2: the horizontal and vertical distances between points respectively.
▪ n1 and n2: the number of horizontal and vertical points respectively.
11
The other parameter to configure is File. The user has an option to define the grid with his own
parameters in MEC format. The grid in MEC format with the desired geometry can be imported to
the system. Select File check box to import your MEC file. Use the Navigation button to select the
particular MEC file.
• Parameters for destroying holes: This option is for cutting or combination machines with
grid. The system executes a process for destroying the holes on the sheet. The sheet is
placed over the table's grid. Depending on the distance of the grid's lines, sometimes
while cutting a hole, it may remain on the table instead of falling down. If it remains in
horizontal position there is no problem, but if it inclines between two grid lines, it may
stand out and the head can collide with it resulting in head damage.
To prevent this, the system provides the option of cutting the holes into small parts to ensure
they always fall down the grid.
The following four parameters delimit the size of the holes to be destroyed:
• Maximum length of the hole
• Minimum length of the hole
• Maximum width of the hole
• Minimum width of the hole
The following example explains how to use this option. In the nesting, there are some parts with
big holes. The grid lines are shown in violet color:
12
The hole of the upper-left part is bigger than the values given (X:150-450, Y:150-450), and the
smaller holes are not between the defined lengths and widths.
So, if the user executes the order for destroying the holes from the CAM module before doing
the machining in Machining / Contours / Destroy sheet holes, it asks for confirmation of
previously entered data, and also the length and the width of the grid lines.
The system calculates and introduces the required machining orders, which destroy the
problematic holes:
Figure 6: Problematic holes example
The big hole of the part is too big and stays over the grid without problems, and the other holes
are too small fall into the table without problems.
• Automatic micro-joints in unstable contours: It is possible to configure automatic micro-

joints. The user will be provided with the following options:
▪ No: Do not place any micro-joint.
▪ The part has no support on the grid: The micro-joints are only placed on parts without
grid anchorage.
▪ The part can be partially overturned: The part may finish partially overturned.
▪ Both: Both previous options will be selected.
13
Sheet Clamps
Position
Figure 7: Sheet clamps – Position configuration
• Number of clamps: The user can select the number of clamps from the drop-down list.
• Positions: Positions indicate the distance between different clamp positions.
• Offset: The offset is the minimum distance where the clamp can be placed from the side
of the sheet. For example, if the value is 70mm, and the clamp is to be placed at 40 mm,
the system places it at 70 mm. The clamp must have a sensor for executing this.
• Positioning: The user can set up the positions of the clamps in this section.
• Any: When selecting this, the clamps can be placed anywhere. This option is used for
machines whose clamps must be placed manually with screws.
14
• Fixed: When the clamps are placed into the linear turret, they take positions with fixed
distance increments between them. In this case, the position of the clamps can be
configured easily with the following parameters:
▪ First position variable: Although the turret has fixed positions, if the user selects this,
the first clamp site can be in different position each time, and the rest of the clamps are
placed after it.
▪ First position: The distance between the first clamp position and the reference point.
From this first position, the rest of the clamps are placed as per the next two
parameters:
▪ Number of positions: Total number of positions of the linear turret.
▪ Position distance: Distance between each turret position. The system calculates every
clamp position adding to the first position the value given here.
For example:
Figure 8: Sheet clamps position distance example
• Reference point: The user will be able to select between the following options:
▪ Left sheet: The reference point is the left side of the sheet.
▪ Right sheet: The reference point is the right side of the sheet.
▪ Left work zone: The left side of the work zone is the reference point.
▪ Right work zone: The right side of the work zone is the reference point.
15
• Place the clamps automatically: If enabled, the system will calculate the position of the
clamps automatically during the machining initialization.
• Place the clamps with the mouse: This is used frequently when the user works with the
whole sheet without using lower sheet margin. In this case, it is normal to have parts or
holes to avoid, and this is difficult, if the clamp placement was done inserting distances
with the keyboard. But if the placement is done with the mouse, it is possible to slide the
clamps and place them in a position which allows machining the whole part of the sheet.
With this, reposition orders will be avoided.
The system prompts to place the clamps with the mouse when the Machining / Initialize order is
selected.
• Prompt for this data when initializing: When selecting this option, the system shows the
Sheet Clamps - Position dialogue box when the initialization instruction is executed.
Please refer Machining / Initialize.
• More: When clicking More button, a dialog box is displayed, where it is possible to
configure each clamp's properties like Minimum position, Maximum position, Minimum
distance, and Maximum distance. It is possible to indicate whether the clamp has sensor
or not. The user can also select the Type of the clamp from the drop-down list. The
options available in the drop-down list are Fixed, Movable, Auto-retractable, and Movable
- 2positions. When selecting Movable - 2positions, Distance field is activated, and it is
possible to define the distance the clamps can move.
16
Clamp Zone
Figure 9: Sheet clamps – Clamp zone configuration
• Clamp zone: It is possible to set up the measurements of the clamp zone.
• Clamp size: The clamp size can be set up here based on the three parameters: L, R, and U.
These settings configure the real clamps size, which are used for the automatic
repositions. The system tests if the clamp is to be placed in a hole or not. If the clamp is to
be placed in a hole, the clamp cannot take the sheet properly.
• Simulation: When clicking the Simulation button, a dialog box is displayed. The system
simulates the clamps size depending on the values given in the following dialog box:
17
Figure 10: Clamp zone simulation
• Offset of clamps zone: When clicking the Offset of clamps zone button, a dialog box is
displayed. It is possible to add the safety distance required to the clamp's work zone.
• Prompt for this data when initializing: When selecting this option, the system shows the
Sheet Clamps - Clamp zone dialogue box when the initialization instruction is executed.
Please refer Machining / Initialize.
Auxiliar
It is possible to configure the auxiliary details of the clamps here.
Figure 11: Sheet Clamps – Auxiliar configuration
• Move from point interactively: Select this checkbox to change the from point of the
machining.
• The clamps take up turret position: With this option, the clamps are placed in the turret.
18
• Maximum length of the sheet to enable the pin 2 automatically: Enter the required value
to enable the pin2 automatically.
• Initial offset of the work zone: Enter the Initial offset value of the work zone.
• Offset to avoid the clamps: Enter the Offset value for the punch to avoid the clamps.
• Pin 2: Select this checkbox to activate the minimum length of the sheet, clicking on
Navigation button. The user can configure Move from point interactively in the window
displayed. It will be possible to configure the Move from point interactively (Center, Left,
Right) and define the Offset.
• Allow collision test for clamps: Select this checkbox to allow collision test.
• Apply clamp check: Select this checkbox to apply clamp check.
• Prompt for this data when initializing: When selecting this option, the system will show
the Sheet Clamps - Auxiliar dialogue box when the initialization instruction is executed.
Refer Machining / Initialize.
Fixtures
With this option, it is possible to configure the fixtures or the fixed clamps of the machine. The
fixed clamps work similar to the clamps. The machine will only have clamps or fixed clamps, they
will never be together in the same machine. To configure the fixed clamps, the clamps number
must be 0 otherwise the Fixtures option will not be displayed. If after configuring the fixed
clamps, the user modifies the number of clamps bigger than 0, the fixed clamps parameters will
be avoided.
During the machining initialization, it is possible to configure the fixed clamps with the keyboard
and with the mouse. The changes made during the initialization with the keyboard (using the
configuration panel) will be saved as standard in machine configuration parameters.
• Positions.
• Number of fixtures: The clamps can be located in any position. This option is used for
machines whose clamps can be placed automatically.
19
Figure 12: Fixtures dialog box
• Fixture zone: When the machine is initialized, this is the clamp zone which the system will
use before starting the machining.
• Place the fixtures with the mouse: This is used frequently when the user is working with
the whole sheet without using lower sheet margin. In this case, is normal to have parts or
holes to avoid, and this is difficult if the clamp placement was done inserting distances
with the keyboard. But if the placement is done with the mouse, the user can slide the
clamps and place them in a correct position which allows to machining the most part of
the sheet. The user can avoid reposition orders thanks to this option.
• Prompt for this data when initializing: The machine initialization process must be done
always before making any machine instruction.
Extractions
Extractions is used for cutting machines with clamps to fix the sheet, because in these machines
the sheet moves, and the parts must be evacuated. If the cutting head moves alone on the sheet,
there is no need to evacuate the parts and the traps configuration is not required.
20
Figure 13: Extractions configuration
• Number of traps: The user can configure here the number of traps of the machine.
Depending on this number, the system shows the boxes needed to specify the respective
coordinates (all the distances are referred to the cutting/punching center):
▪ Minimum X & Minimum Y: These are the coordinates for the lower left corner of the
trap.
▪ Maximum X & Maximum Y: These are the coordinates for the upper-right corner of the
trap.
▪ Increment X & Increment Y: The machine makes one movement after receiving one trap
open instruction while trying to center the part into the trap. This increment of
movement is configured here.
• The machine has an extraction hammer: If the machine has an extraction hammer and
extraction hammer2, these must be configured here. This hammer is used to hit the trap
to make sure it opens properly. The hammer is defined by the coordinates X and Y and
the radius.
• Extraction hammer 2: This option will be enabled when the machine has an extraction
hammer is activated. Here the user can specify the X, Y coordinates and the radius of
extraction hammer 2.
21
Lift/Grip
Figure 14: Lift/Grip configuration
• The machine has up/downloading by lift: The machine uses lift system for uploading and
downloading sheets and/or parts. When enabled, many other options will be displayed:
• MEC file with suction cups carriage geometry: The system allows defining a maximum of
five movable strips with suction cups to load/download and evacuate parts by lift. Each
strip is movable in X and Y directions and it is placed in the desired position.
• There are movable strips in the suction cups carriage: The system allows defining a
maximum of five movable strips with suction cups to load/download and evacuate parts
by lift. Each strip is movable in X and Y directions and it is placed in the desired position.
• Number of strips: When the previous checkbox is enabled, this one is displayed. Here the
user is able to select the number of strips.
• Number of suction cups: Number of suction cups of the lift system. The maximum of
suction cups groups is twelve and each group can have up to twelve suction cups, making
a total of 144 suction cups.
• Lift could rotate: This option manages the lift evacuations where the lift can be moved. If
this parameter is configured, the system will ask for the rotation angle of the lift for the
specific evacuation during manual or semiautomatic evacuation.
22
• X displacement of the suction cups while uploading: This is the offset between the
cutting head and the cups carriage.
• Y displacement of the suction cups while uploading: This is the Y offset for the suction
cups while loading the sheet.
• Minimum X position of the suction cups: This is the minimum position in X where the
carriage can physically arrive.
• Minimum X and Maximum X position while downloading: This is the minimum and
maximum X position where the carriage can download a part.
• Minimum Y and Maximum Y position while downloading: This is the minimum and
maximum Y position where the carriage can download a part.
• The machining has downloading by grip: The machine uses lift system for downloading
parts.
• More: Click this button to display additional parameters related to lift system. Configure
these details in the dialog box which is displayed:
Figure 15: Lift dialog box
• Speed & Acceleration: The speed and the acceleration that the lift system applies for
uploading the sheet.
• Pressing position: X position where the lift picks the sheet.
• Waiting position: At the beginning, the lift goes to sheet pallet and gets one carries it to
the machine. The second time, the sheet cannot be located in the same place because the
previous has not been machined yet and it has not yet been evacuated from the machine.
23
In this case, the lift places the sheet in a wait position whose objective is to make the
upload faster. The next sheet can be uploaded as soon as the previous sheet has been
evacuated.
• Cycle of unstuck of sheets: Sometimes the lift gets two sheets instead of just one
because of suction. When selecting this parameter, the lift, after getting the sheet makes
up and down movements to unstuck the sheets.
• Control of double sheets: If this parameter is selected, the sensor measures the width of
the part being carried. If the width is not correct, the machine will execute the Cycle of
unstuck of sheets again and will remove the extra sheets. It is a security level related to
the previous parameter, but a step higher than that.
• Transfer position: The position in the pallet where the sheet is to be left.
• Use a percentage of sheet length: Enabled, the user will be able to define a percentage of
sheet length.
• Use a percentage of sheet width: Enabled, the user will be able to define a percentage of
sheet width.
• Speed & Acceleration: The speed and the acceleration that the system applies for
downloading the sheet.
• Head up/down: The user should select this to have the head raised while moving the part
for security purpose.
• Press on the table of the machine: This option allows leaving the part on the table
instead of the pallet.
• Downloading with ejection: When selecting this, the lift leaves the part from a certain
height specified in the following parameters.
• Show pressing cylinders: If the user has selected Move the pressing point interactively,
this parameter will be displayed. Select this option to display the cylinders and/or the
pressing head at the evacuation point.
• Move the pressing point interactively: Select this option to define the zone to avoid
collisions. When selecting the Navigation button, Suction cups carriage data dialog box
will be displayed.
24
• Ejection height: When the system tries to download parts on the pallet, if there are a few
parts already places, the lift cannot arrive to the surface of the pallet. In this case, this
parameter is the height to which the lift leaves the part to the pallet.
• Pressing position (X): This is the X distance of the lift zero point where the lift leaves the
part.
• Pressing position (Y): The Y distance of the zero point for getting the part. This
parameter is for lift systemts which has movement in Y axis.
• Copy nesting: Select this option to copy the nesting during evacuation.
• Downloading position offset (X and Y): With this option, it is possible to define the point
from where the copying of nesting is performed.
• Scale factor (X and Y): If the download zone is bigger than the working zone, a scale
factor can be defined (in X and/or Y) to get more distance between parts on the pallet.
25
Upload/Download Sheets
Figure 16: Upload/Download Sheets configuration
• Process the number of sheets automatically: If the loading is automatic, the system will
calculate the number of sheets and will order them to load whenever it is required.
• Number of sheets: By means of this option the user can choose the number of sheets
which will be loaded into the machine instead of using the previous parameter.
• Upload sheets: If activated, Sheet uploading parameter will become activated, where the
user will be able to select between Manual, Automatic and Lift.
▪ Manual: The system will not use the loader. The process must be done manually.
▪ Lift: If the machine is equipped with a lift system, the sheet upload can be executed
with it.
o Suction cups are selected automatically: The system will calculate which cups are
the best for uploading the sheet.
o Suction cups: In order to select them manually, Suction cups button will display a
window where the user will be able to select the required ones.
▪ Automatic: If this option is selected, the following parameters will become enabled:
o Store station: If the loader system allows it, it is possible to specify the station
from which the sheet will be taken.
26
o Sheet peeling: Sometimes, when loading a sheet, the loader gets two sheets
instead of just one. With this active, the loader will execute a cycle of movements
to unstuck the sheets.
o Control of double sheets: In some loader systems there is a sensor for the sheet
width. This can detect if there is more than one sheet. If this occurs, the sheet
peeling cycle will be executed again.
• Sheet downloading: If activated, Sheet downloading parameter will become activated,
where the user will be able to select between Manual, Automatic and Lift, as well as
introducing the X and Y values.
always before making any machine instruction. With this option enabled, the system will
show the upload/download sheet dialog always when the initialization instruction is
executed.
Work Zone
Figure 17: Work zone configuration
• The machine has a work zone: Maximum area the machine is able to process without
doing any sheet reposition. The user will be able to define the Length and the Width. It is
necessary to enable this option so as to display the rest of options.
27
• Margins: The user will be able to introduce the Left, Right, Upper and Lower margins of
the sheet.
• Fitting: Related to the previous parameters, places/fits the work zone to the Origin, Left,
Right or Center, as required.
If the user selects to Center a sheet that is bigger than the Work Center, the system will adjust the
sheet automatically to the border and the user can select between the following two options:
From Point
Figure 18: From Point configuration
• Zero point of the CNC equal to from point: Select this option to enable the zero point of
the CNC as from point.
• Prompt for this data when initializing: As for other parameters, the system can show this
configuration window when the Initialization process is executed.
28
Reposition
General
Figure 19: Reposition – General configuration
• Retract value in Y: This is the back off distance in Y when opening the clamps. It is applied
before the X carriage is moved providing a clearance between the clamps and the edge of
the sheet.
• Advance value in Y: This is the value that the Y axis moves back after repositioning.
Normally is the same as retract value, but sometimes is smaller to prevent the sheet
being "nudged" by the work clamps if the edge of the sheet is uneven.
• Speed in X: It defines the feed rate in X of the machine when moving the sheet during
repositioning.
• Speed in Y: The feed rate applied to the back off move.
• Fixed value of repositions and value: With this option enabled, the user can specify the
distance to move in a reposition. If this value is bigger than the work zone, the system
will not do any reposition.
• X position of reposition: Using this parameter, the user can define the sheet fixture point
during the automatic repositions. It is only valid when the sheet is fixed by the head or
the pistons. This parameter has the following two options:
▪ Fit to the edge of active work zone
29
▪ Sheet center
• X position offset: The user will be able to define the X position offset.
• Y position of reposition is fixed: The user will be able to select between Fit to the edge of
active work zone and Sheet center.
• Look for a correct Y position of reposition: The system will check for an appropriate
position of the Y axis. It is important to hold the sheet strongly while the clamps are
relocated, for this, the pistons must be in contact with the sheet and not placed over a
previously cut hole.
If the user configures upper and lower margin and an increment, the system will scan between
these limits for a valid position, altering the Y value each time by the stated until a suitable
position is found.
• Test for sheet clamps in holes when repositioning: When doing repositions, sometimes
the clamps are placed inside holes resulting in a bad sheet catch. With this parameter
enabled, the system will test each clamp position before placing it on the sheet. The
distance increment for testing must be set up in “Increment of search of correct position”
option.
The system will not allow reposition movements if there is not a Minimum number of clamps
catching the sheet properly.
• Minimum number of sheet clamps to grip the sheet: Here the user will be able to set the
minimum number of sheet clamps that will grip the sheet.
• Maximum number of reposition & Maximum increment of reposition: The user can
specify the number repositions to do while machining and the maximum length for any
reposition. The machining will be stopped after reaching the number in maximum
number of reposition instead of making more repositions.
30
Advanced
Figure 20: Reposition – Advanced configuration
• Sheet hold mode when displacing movable clamps: Using this option the user can fit the
sheet with the turret head and with the pistons while moving clamps. The user can select
between: No hold and Pistons.
• Y minimum position: This configuration parameter, which defines Y minimum position,

avoids or shows a warning when the user executes a manual reposition below this Y. The
user will be able to select between: No, Avoid and Ask.
Device
Figure 21: Reposition – Device configuration
• Type of reposition: There are three different types of repositions: Pistons, Head or Both
of them. When selecting Pistons, the user will be able to define the Number of pistons
and Coordinates:
31
• Number of pistons: The user will be able to introduce the required number of pistons.
• Coordinates: Defines the X and Y position of each piston, and the radius values must be
configured here. These values are measured from the cut head center. When selecting
Head, the head will go down to catch the sheet for performing reposition. The system will
need to know the Head radius:
• Head radius: Introduce here the required value in millimeters. If the user selects Both of
them, the reposition will be done with pistons and with head at the same time. The
parameters to configure are Number of pistons and Head radius.
Strategy
Figure 22: Reposition – Strategy configuration
• Mode: The user will be able to select between the following options:
▪ Normal: Standard one for the machine.
▪ Go home: This mode will perform the repositions as the standard way, but at the end of
the machining the machine will make another reposition to go back to the home
position.
▪ Inverse: Selecting this mode changes the direction of the sheet. Clicking on Inverse
mode displays four parameters:
o Edge of sheet and not go home: The reposition is made to the edge of the sheet
first and when the machine finishes the cut it will not make any reposition at the
home point.
32
o Not edge of sheet and not go home: The machine goes and cuts the parts directly.
Here home point and edge of the sheet are not considered for reposition.
o Edge of sheet and go home: The machine moves to the edge of the sheet when
the parts have been cut and the head goes back to the home point.
o Not edge of sheet and go home: The head moves directly when the machine starts
to cut the parts and when it finishes the reposition goes to home point.
• Strategy:
▪ Normal: The system will perform machining of all the work zone and the rest after the
reposition.
▪ Maximum rigidity: The system will perform one small percent of the work zone and the
rest after the reposition. Using this reposition strategy with maximum rigidity, the
repositions can be improved for all the combined machines. It is possible to configure
the length up to the end of the machining or up to the sheet’s edge. In case of combined
machines, the system can configure the strategy with maximum rigidity in order to use
it for cutting, punching or both.
o Maximum rigidity: The user will be able to select between By parts or By length.
o Maximum length: The user will be able to select between Machining and Sheet
borders.
33
Sheet Parameters
Figure 23: Sheet Parameters configuration
• Sheet margins: This allows the user to specify margins around the sheet. This ensures the
machine is not going to cut out of the sheet and leave enough material to support the
parts.
• Point 0 of the sheet: Proceed to select the 0,0 point of the sheet between the four
corners highlighted. This will be the reference point for the coordinates. The selected
corner will be displayed in red color as shown below:
• X & Y: In these fields the user may introduce a displacement in X and Y for the previously
detailed point 0 of the sheet.
• Remnant margin: When a remnant is generated from the current sheet, if there is any
value here, the remnant will be created with these margins.
• Respect sheet margins on remnants: This dialogue allows the user to specify margins
around the sheet. This ensures the machine is not going to cut or punch out of the sheet
34
and leave enough material to support the parts. In the example shown, the lower margin
is larger to avoid the clamp zone. The X and Y values are the coordinates that the system
will take for the selected red point. Normally this point is the 0,0 because it is the point
where the head will be placed before cutting.
• Display sheet reference in status bar: If this parameter is activated, the reference of the
sheet will be displayed in the status area while working on the nesting.
• Sheet status: Indicate the fold status of the sheet through one of the numbers in the list.
(0 = completely flat, 9 = very irregular). This parameter may be useful if the postprocessor
uses it to calculate the distance that the head must come down in order to cut/punch for
trying to avoid collisions with sheet.
• Anti-scratch: This parameter's objective is that the rapid movements are done at a higher
distance for not scratching the sheet. When the movement is from one hole to another
with the head down, instead of the normal height, with this enabled it will go a little
higher.
• Rotation: With this option the user can visualize the sheet rotated 900, 1800, and 2700. It
also allows making sheet symmetry around the X or Y axis. This parameter is not
configurable through the system yet. It is possible to configure it modifying the
parameter A266 of the selected machine CT file.
• Minimum length and width: Using these parameters the user can limit the minimum
dimensions of a sheet.
• Maximum length and width: Using this parameter the user can limit the maximum
dimensions of a sheet.
35
Sheet Turn Over
Figure 24: Sheet Turn Over configuration
• The machine has automatic turn over device: If enabled, many other parameters will
become activated.
• Center of rotation: With this parameter the user can configure the Center of rotation
point in X and Y direction.
• Rotation sense: The user can select between three options: Clock wise, Counter clock wise
and Both of them.
• Pistons 1, 2, 3, 4, 5: The user can select the piston position as Circular or Rectangular. The
X and Y position of each piston. In case of circular pistons, the user will have to introduce
the Radius and Angle, while rectangular ones will require the Length and Width. These
values are measured from the cut head center.
• Turn over type: The user can select between the following options: Request, Manual
rotation of 180°, Manual rotation of 90°, Manual symmetry, Automatic rotation of 180° and
Automatic rotation of 90°.
36
• Rotation sense: The user can select between three options: Request, Clock wise and
Counter clock wise.
• Pressing position: The user can select between three options: Request, Fixed and Sheet
center.
• Sheet rotation point: The user can select between four options: Request, Fixed, Equal to
pressing point and Avoiding collisions with clamps.
• Previous position point to turn over: The user can select between the following options:
▪ Request: It allows the user to select the previous position point to turn over.
▪ Fixed point of the sheet: The user can specify the Fixed point in X and Y direction.
▪ From point: The user can specify the Displacements in X and Y direction.
▪ Lower left corner of the sheet: The user can specify the Displacements in X and Y
direction.
▪ Lower right corner of the sheet: The user can specify the Displacements in X and Y
direction.
▪ Upper right corner of the sheet: The user can specify the Displacements in X and Y
direction.
▪ Upper left corner of the sheet: The user can specify the Displacements in X and Y
direction.
▪ Sheet center: The user can specify the Displacements in X and Y direction.
• Cancel repositions when executing the turn over: Using this option the user can cancel
reposition. If there were any reposition before the sheet turnover, after executing it, all
the reposition will be cancelled keeping the working zone as it was at the beginning.
37
Bevel Head Data
Head Data
Figure 25: Bevel Head Data- Head Data configuration
• Type: Using this option it is possible to specify the head type that the user will use. The
head bevel data will be of a different type depending on its use.
▪ Normal: With this option it is possible to make straight cuts in 3 axes only without any
inclination.
▪ Triple head: As in Normal, the machine is configured with three heads in order to work
with three heads at once.
▪ 5 Axis: In this, it is possible to define two angles to rotate head part depending upon the
type of head that the user has selected.
o When selecting Type A the AB corresponds to X axis and CC to Z axis.
o When selecting Type B the AB corresponds to Y axis and CC to Z axis.
When selecting Others then the AB and CC correspond to the axis that the user indicates.
▪ Tangential: Using this option, it is possible to rotate the head only over one axis, and it
is also possible to define the maximum and the minimum angle of the rotation.
▪ Tangential 5X: This option is the same as 5 axis with a tangential sensor that measure
the height of the sheet, because of that the head can cut only in one direction.
38
▪ Tangential as triple: This is for bevel machines with one head that work tangentially. In
this type of machines, the coordinates required for each pass are the same. Whether
the machine is cutting the upper bevel, the lower bevel or the straight cut, the
reference coordinates will be the same and will correspond with the ones in the straight
cut (maximum of the part). The system will calculate the passes irrespective of the
cutting angle offset.
• Use machining dimension on nesting: When selecting Three heads, this option is
displayed. It enables selecting between No, Yes and Orthogonal.
Bevels Management
Figure 26: Bevel Head Data – Bevels Management configuration
• Type of cut: Depending on the type of cut, three different options are specified:
▪ By elements: Using this option, the user can cut the edges of the part separately (Finish
all the cut of a segment before beginning with the next one).
39
▪ Group by same type: This option allows the user to join the edges with the same kind of
bevel (For example: upper with upper and lower with lower).
▪ Group by same angle: This option allows the user to join the consecutive edges with the
same type of angle (For example: 30º with 30º, 45º with 45º, etc.).
• Discretization length:
▪ On segments: This option defines the distance to discretize a segment when the initial
vector and the final vector are not the same.
▪ On arcs: This option defines the distance to discretize an arc when the initial vector and
the final vector are not the same.
▪ On variable arcs: This option defines the distance to discretize a variable arc when the
initial vector and the final vector are not same. If the distance defined is bigger than the
size of the segment, the machine divides this segment in two parts.
• Compensation:
▪ Default: The compensation is based on the default configuration of the machine.
▪ System (all elements): The compensation is based on the system configuration.
▪ System (bevel elements): Only bevel elements will be compensated by system (total or
variable). The system will not compensate orthogonal elements of the contour.
▪ System (variable bevel elements): Only variable bevel elements will be compensated by
system. It will not compensate neither orthogonal elements nor total bevel elements.
• Auxiliary elements:
▪ Minimum length on loops: The machine cuts more of the normal line, if there will be a
loop.
▪ Length for auxiliary lead in: Select the auxiliary lead-in length of the loop to cut the
part.
▪ Length for auxiliary lead out: Select the auxiliary lead-out length to cut the lines of a
part.
40
▪ Angle to avoid double cut: In some cases, if the user has to make double or triple bevel
the lead out of one of the cuts, coincide with the lead in of the other, to avoid this
problem the user can select this angle and it will be applied in one of them.
▪ Maximum distance to lengthen: In case of tangential machines, in which certain

movements are not allowed, it may be necessary not to restrict the lengthening of the
auxiliary elements. By means of this parameter, the user can introduce the required
value to lengthen.
• Order of loops: With this option, it is possible to define the order in which the user wants
to cut a segment with different bevels. The machine will cut the bevel in a fixed order
such as Lower, Orthogonal and Upper. The order of the loops will get changed based on
the options selected. For example, when selecting an option as orthogonal then the
second and third will get modified to upper and lower or vice versa.
• Angle for tangential cut: To join two consecutive bevels, introduce 90 degrees, which is
the maximum angle between the perpendicular line and the bisector. This is very
important for tangential machines.
• Limit angle on bevels: To join two consecutive bevels, introduce 80 degrees, which is the
maximum angle of the straight line between both (the inclination of the line that merge
both bevels to make it continuously), and it considers the maximum inclination that is to
be cut by the machine.
• Join without lead in when same line: When changing the inclination of a cutting line,
instead of introducing a lead out or lead in we can make a joined cut to change this
inclination.
• Compensation by type of bevel: Using this option, we will able to configure the
compensation for each type of bevel in material thickness dependent data.
• Special management of loops: This parameter enables a special loop for those parts with
inner bevels and prevents the head from passing over the parts.
• Prompt for data before automatic machining: This configuration parameter allows
showing and modifying the bevel management data prior to machining the part.
• Tangential mode: The main reasons to work tangentially are two. First, between the two
solutions that each vector of a 5-axis machine has, to avoid the solution in which the heat
41
produced by the cut directly affects the cutting head. Secondly, to ensure that the side of
the cutting head that runs around the part is always the same. In order to do so, the user
can select between the following options in the drop-down list:
▪ Normal: It refers to the closest AB vector to the direction.
▪ Inverse: It refers to the furthest AB vector to the direction.
▪ Tangential mode for straight cutting: By means of this checkbox the user will be able to
establish whether straight cuts will be executed in tangential mode or not.
• Remove micro-joints on last loop: By means of this parameter, the user can configure not
to take into account the micro-joint on the last loop.
• Round the corners: This parameter allows rounding the corners of bevel elements. The
radius of this rounding will be specified using a percentage of the cutter radius and it will
be applied to all contours or only to inside or outside contours.
• Distance to position the angle of the next corner: This parameter allows specifying a
particular distance in order to position the head in the angle of the next corner. If no
distance is defined, the system will use all the distance of the geometric element to
position the head in the next angle. If a distance is defined, this will be used to position
the head in the next angle.
General
Geometry
Figure 27: General – Geometry configuration
42
• Linear tolerance & Angular tolerance: Necessary values for the system to make
calculations.
• Use the minimum rectangle of parts: If this parameter is enabled, the parts will be turned
so that the rectangle formed by the corners of the selected part has the minimum area.
The user can define the Favorite position for the minimal rectangle, where it is possible to
choose between Any, Horizontal and Vertical.
• Process lead-in/lead-out, loops and micro-joints in automatic nesting: If this parameter is

activated, the space needed for leads, loops and micro-joints will be considered in
Automatic Nesting. The space left between parts could be enough but the system is not
going to guarantee avoiding the overlapping of parts with leads, loops or micro-joints
unless this option is enabled. All the lead-in/lead-outs, loops and micro-joints will be
considered regardless of how they have been introduced of if they have been modified in
the sheet.
• Automatic lead-in/lead-out position dependent on the part rotation: If the previous

parameter is enabled, and the lead-in/lead-outs are placed in the sheet automatically,
these lead-in/lead-outs will not be taken into account neither in the automatic nesting nor
when introducing parts on the sheet, since the lead-in/lead-outs are placed once the parts
have been already introduced in the sheet. In order to avoid this problem, this parameter
allows introducing lead-ins/lead-outs automatically in the part when inserting the part in
the sheet. This way, these lead-in/lead-outs will be considered in the automatic nesting
and when inserting parts on the sheet, meanwhile their position will be the one
corresponding to the side or corner configured in the Automatic lead-in/lead-outs of the
machine. Depending on the rotation of the part placed on the sheet, the lead-in/lead-outs
will be introduced in different positions to respect the configured side or corner. The user
can select any of the following values:
43
▪ No: Depending on the rotation whenever inserting the part in the sheet, the system will
not introduce lead-ins/lead-outs automatically.
▪ Only in interiors: The system will introduce lead-in/lead-outs automatically depending

on the rotation of the part exterior.
▪ Big interiors and exteriors: The system will introduce lead-in/lead-outs automatically
depending on the big interiors of the part, as well as the exteriors. Interiors shall be
considered big when it is possible to nest parts inside them. In order to determine this,
the user must make use of the separation between parts and Minimum area to insert
part holes parameter located in automatic nesting configuration.
▪ Interiors and exteriors: The system will introduce lead-in/lead-outs automatically

depending on the rotation of all the contours of the part.
In order to enable this parameter, “Process lead-in/lead-outs, loops and micro-joints in

automatic nesting” parameter must be enabled.
• Calculate the part dimensions without any auxiliary geometry: Auxiliary geometries are
those which are included with the part for the machining process: leads, loops, micro-
joints. If this option is enabled, the system will use the real part dimension without these
geometries.
• Restrict rotations in manual mode: If enabled, the system will either allow or not using a
determined rotation if defined like that in the part properties. The user will be able to
select between the following options:
▪ No: The system will not allow using a determined rotation.
▪ Use the same rotations as in the automatic nesting: The system will use the rotations
defined in the automatic nesting.
▪ Use the rotations defined in the part properties: The system will use the rotations
defined in the part properties.
• Prompt for data when ordering contours: The system will assign automatically cutting
order to the contours when saving the part or when the nesting module is executed.
44
When this option is enabled, the system will display Contour Ordering dialog box, where
the user will be able to set the required order for both interior and exterior contours.
Part Changes
Figure 28: General – Part changes configuration
• Replace punch with cut: If enabled, the system will replace all the punching of the part by
cutting.
• Mark: It will only be enabled if the previous parameter is activated, and the user will be
able to replace the punching of a part by the desired type of marking: No, Powder, Drill,
Pen or Cut.
• Prompt for this data: If enabled, the system will show a window allowing the
configuration of the previous parameters in the case of entering in the nesting module
after changing a nested part.
• Do in case of part change: Once the nesting has been executed, if a part is changed, the
system can execute one of the following actions: Nothing, Keep the nesting and Remake
the nesting. If the user selects Keep the nesting, the following option will be enabled:
• Show on sheet the machining modifications made on parts: If enabled, this option will
keep the existing machining on the part. On the contrary, if not, all the machining in the
sheet will be deleted. If the user selects Remake the nesting, the following options will be
enabled:
• Warn in case that the parts don’t fit on the nesting: If due to modifications all the
previous nested parts do not fit on the sheet, the program will show a warning message
if this parameter is enabled.
45
• Insert more parts if it is possible: Due to the changes made on the part, there may be
more space on sheet that the system can use for placing more parts. Enabling this
parameter will make the system to test this.
Auxiliay
Figure 29: General - Auxiliar configuration
• Parts template name: Name of the file that has the parameter to print the list of parts.
• Sheets template name: Name of the file that has the parameter to print the list of boxes.
• Part time: It refers to the cut time that will be calculated in the Drawing module. The user
can select between the following three options:
▪ System: The system will calculate the time internally.
▪ Time calculation: The calculation will be done using the required postprocessor.
Consider that the sheet upload and download times configured in the machine will be
added to the part time. However, the user can configure not to take them into account.
▪ Postprocessor: The calculation will be done using the postprocessor of the current
machine. This option is used in water machines where the speed changes frequently.
• Generate information for labels: If enabled, the system will create a label for each part
and this information will be stored in the database. If not, all the label reports will be
empty.
• Work only with unitary parts (fast entry to nesting module): If enabled, each geometry
part that is machined will be considered as an independent part. With this parameter
46
enabled, the user will only be able to work with unitary parts. Take into account that
unitary parts cannot be used when working in multipart mode.
• Machining verification: The user will be able to decide which aspects of the machining
are the ones required to be verified by the system whenever Verify Machining option is
executed either for parts of for sheets. By means of the navigation ( ) window the user
will be able to access Machining verification dialog box, where the user can enable or
disable each one of the options that the system is able to verify individually, both for the
parts and the sheets. In addition, by means of Prompt for this data checkbox, the system
will display this configuration window each time Verify machining option is executed.
• Show a warning if the current configuration is not defined in the material/thickness

dependent data: If enabled, the system will display an alert message so that the user
knows that the parameters associated with the current range have not been defined and
can therefore act accordingly.
• Show a warning if the current configuration is not defined in the tables of technology: If
enabled, the system will display an alert message so that the user knows that the
parameters associated with the current range have not been defined and can therefore
act accordingly.
Cut
Figure 30: General – Cut configuration
• Automatic contours - Warn if there is interior geometry not machined when cutting: If
enabled the user will be warned when there is no machined geometry inside a contour
when using Automatic contours option.
▪ No
47
▪ Yes, and cut the contour
▪ Yes, and not to cut the contour
Startup
General
Figure 31: Startup – General configuration
• Execute every rapid with head up: If enabled, the machine will be instructed to raise the
cutting head before every rapid movement. This parameter is used for safety, to prevent
head damages.
• The machine has laser-eye: The laser-eye is a device of some laser machines used to
detect and avoid possible collisions with the head. If enabled, the system will use it. When
clicking Navigation ( ) button the system will display a dialog box, where it is possible
to select between the following laser-eye methods: Don´t use it, Measure 1 sheet border,
Measure 2 holes, Measure 3 points (third point in X) and Measure 3 points (third point in
Y).
• PartNo: The CNC file will take the same name assigned to the PartNo. Which is the
internal name of the CNC files and can be assigned in different ways through the
following parameters:
▪ Default: The Part No. will be assigned by default using the value introduced in the box
PartNo.
48
▪ Automatic: The Part No. will take an automatic value that will increase for subsequent
CNCs. Six additional parameters will be displayed:
▪ Reset PartNo: This option will reset the CNC's counter.
▪ Minimum: PartNo: Minimum number of characters for the PartNo.
▪ Maximum: PartNo: Maximum number of characters for the PartNo.
▪ Step of the PartNo: The number of steps used for the PartNo.
▪ Number of characters (e.g. 8): Number of characters for the PartNo.
▪ Previous text (e.g. P): The first characters of the PartNo.
Pre-initialization
Figure 32: Startup – Pre-initialization configuration
• Explode modules: With this option, the user can execute the machining pre-initialization.
It allows exploding all the modules before the machining initialization.
• Delete the machining totally outside of the sheet: This option will delete the machining
done outside of the sheet. It will be configurable if the parameter "Prompt for the data
when initializing" from Startup menu is active, or when the user initializes the sheet.
49
• Create the cutting line of the remnant automatically: By this option, the remnant line will
be created automatically and with the shape configured by the user. The following two
parameters will become activated:
▪ Delete existing remnants: By using this option, the user can delete the existing
remnants that are created by the cutting line of the remnant automatically. If any
remnant exists and there is no configuration to delete them, it will not be possible to
delete the remnant line nor generate a new one.
▪ Delete existing remnant line: The user can use this option for the deletion of existing
remnants line. If any remnant line exists and there is no configuration to delete it, will
not be possible to create a new one.
Feed Rates
Figure 33: Startup – Feed rates configuration
• Feed rates: The machine speeds can be configured in this section, which comprises Cut
speed, Beveled speed, Powder mark speed, Drill mark speed, Pen mark speed, Cut mark
speed, Wheel-tool speed, Rapid speed and Prompt for this data when initializing.
50
CNC
Figure 34: CNC configuration
• Prompt for CNC reference: This option is used when a nesting module or nesting part is
saved. There are four options: No, Only if the sheet is new and the file already exists, Only if
the sheet is new and Always.
• CNC name = Job: If this parameter is enabled, the name of the CNC file will start with the
name of the manufacturing order. When selecting this, it will be possible to select the
number of characters, as well as to enable Allow large names and Add job reference
options.
• CNC name = PartNo: The CNC file will take the same name assigned to the PartNo which is
the internal name of the CNC files.
• Directory of CNC files: All the CNC code files will be stored in the directory set here.
• Extension of CNC files: This file will display the extension of CNC parameters. The
extension of the file can be configured in the final CNC operation.
• Group CNC files in folders: This parameter allows grouping the CNC files of a specific
machine according to certain criteria, which is very useful when working with large
amounts of files. It allows combining a series of fields that will determine the folder
structure.
51
Sheet Remnants
When the machining for a sheet only takes up a small part of the total area, sometimes there is a
piece of the sheet we are interested in keeping for future use, which is referred as remnant. The
system can automatically generate these remnants and manage them in the database. This is
very useful when the user wants to use one of these remnants for another order. The system can
be configured to recognize these remnants and store them in the sheets database when saving
the nest.
Figure 35: Sheet Remnants configuration
• Generate remnants when you save: If enabled, the system will automatically generate a
remnant for the current sheet when saving.
• Generate remnants with the completed sheets: The system will keep on the database the
whole sheet after cutting the parts. Sometimes this is useful if the sheet has been
machined with a few parts and is better not to cut it for remnants. The user can get this
sheet for nesting and machining more parts taking advantage of the remaining space of
the sheet.
• Create the cutting line of the remnant automatically: This option allows generating
remnants with different shapes depending on the area value. The different shapes
available are shown below:
52
• Offset between the parts and the line: This value will determine the distance between
the remnant´s cutting line and every part nested on the sheet.
Figure 36: Offset between the parts and the remnant line example
• Minimum width: The value of this parameter is the minimum allowed for using a little
space of the sheet that is between parts in the limit of the remnant's cutting line.
Figure 37: Minimum width of hollows example
• Round the remnant line: With this option the user can round the remnant line
automatically when it is generated. The first parameter allows activating this option,
while the second one asks the value for the round radius. This option is also available for
combined machines.
• Delete the remnant area around parts: If enabled, the system will not consider those
remnants generated between the part and the remnant line or between parts.
• Minimum area of remnants: This value indicates the minimum area of the remnants to be
considered as such.
• Consider the auxiliary geometry: If enabled, remnants will be generated considering

auxiliary geometry. This option is configurable, and the user will be able to select
between the following options:
▪ 0: the base has a value 10 times linear tolerance.
53
▪ Cutter diameter: the base has this value.
• Remnants can be rotated: The remnant will be generated as configured, but with this
parameter enabled, the system will look for the best position of the remnant for placing
the cutting head (from-point) of the machine into the sheet. The user will be able to
choose between Not allow rotations, Allow rotations, Prioritize horizontal and Prioritize
vertically.
• Allow to turn over the remnant: This option makes possible the rotation for the
remnants.
• Prompt for references when generating remnants: The system generates a reference
automatically for each remnant. But if this checkbox is enabled, at the moment of
generating a new remnant from the sheet, the system will ask for the reference.
Save Options
General
Figure 38: Save options – General configuration
• Generate labels automatically: When machining parts automatically or by parts, the

system generates automatically one Begin span and one End span for each part. Then
verifies what is between the spans and if there are equal codes, one subprogram will be
generated.
If the user executes the machining of the part by contours, spans will not be generated and,
because of this, no subprograms will be used for the CNC. Enabling this parameter will force the
system to verify the machining code inserting spans between the beginning and the end of equal
code. Then will generate subprograms for these codes although they are only for contours, not for
whole parts.
54
Subprograms
When there is one part nested many times in the sheet, the CNC code generated for this
aforementioned part can be used for the rest of equal parts that have to be nested. Using
subprograms will result in smaller CNC codes, which is very useful when the numeric control of
the machine has limited memory.
Figure 39: Save options – Subprograms configuration
• Generate subprograms: The system will try to generate subprograms.
• Linear subprograms: If possible, the system will detect and apply linear subprograms in
the CNC.
• Subprogram rotation: If there is a possibility to use subprograms with rotations, the

system will apply them generating the proper CNC code.
• Grid subprograms: The grid subprograms generation will be supported using this option.
• Linear tolerance & Angular tolerance: These values are the linear and angular tolerance
for calculations of the system.
• Only subprograms by reference: If enabled, the system will automatically repeat the
subprogram when performing equal parts. Therefore, the subprogram will only be
generated once.
• Subprograms by contours: If enabled, the system will create subprograms for each
different contour, and then will execute them in the same order.
• Generate in the same subprogram the common cut between several parts: Here the user
may select one of the following options:
55
• Only subprograms by reference: If enabled, the system will automatically repeat the
subprogram when performing equal parts. Therefore, the subprogram will only be
generated once.
o No: When performing common cut between several parts, a subroutine will be
generated for each part.
o Formed by the same part: The system will generate in the same subprogram the
machining of all the parts with a common cut, which have the same part
reference and whose machining is executed in consecutive order. If there is a
common cut with a different part, another subroutine will be generated from the
machining of that part.
o Always: The system will generate in the same subprogram the machining of all
the parts with a common cut, whose machining is executed in consecutive order.
Machining of parts with different references can be generated in the same
subroutine.
• Delete subprograms which are executed once: If enabled, the groups of instructions that
are only executed as a subprogram once will not be considered.
• Definition point: The definition point is the reference point taken by the subprogram.
This reference will be used for generating the rest of the equal parts from the first one.
Part Saving
There are some options that can be executed automatically when the user saves a part. This is a
powerful feature for saving time.
56
Figure 40: Save options – Part saving configuration
• Verify part: This option will verify the part immediately after saving the part. When
clicking the Navigation button, a dialog box is displayed.
• Contour ordering: If this option is activated before saving the part or the nesting, the
system will keep the direction of the contours as they were before nesting.
• Automatic technology: Automatic technology will be applied depending on the

configuration previously set.
• Automatic loops: The Loop values previously set in configuration will be applied.
• Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out: The automatic Lead-in/Lead-out values previously set in

configuration will be applied.
• Automatic machining: This parameter allows machining the part automatically when
saving it. The user may machine the part completely of finish machining it after having
executed manually or semi-automatically part of the machining. This parameter allows,
alternatively, assigning “No cut” technology to those geometric elements that are not
machined and have no technology assigned. Find detailed below the different values
available:
▪ No: Do not execute automatic machining.
▪ Yes: Machine everything feasible that has not been machined yet.
▪ Only if there is machining: The system will finish machining the part only if there is
already something machined in it.
57
▪ Ask: The system will always ask what is required to be machined. Whenever saving the
part, the system will display a dialog box where the user will be able to select the
required option.
▪ Ask only if there is machining: The system will ask what is required to be machined.
Whenever saving the part, the system will display a dialog box where the user will be
able to select the required option.
▪ Assign no cut technology: If No option is selected, “Assign no cut technology”

parameter will be displayed. If enabled, given the case there is something machined on
the part, the system will assign “No cut” technology to all those elements that are not
machined and have no technology assigned.
Execution Nesting Module

When the nesting module is executed, there are some options that can be applied automatically.
Figure 41: Save options – Execution nesting module configuration
• Delete existent machining: With this option the user can delete existent machining
features. When this parameter is enabled, the user can select between the following
features by selecting the navigation button: Machining, Auxiliary geometry, Technology
and No cut technology.
• Automatic mark: When entering to the Nesting module, the system will introduce the
name of the part inside their geometry and will assign marking technology. With this, the
58
identifier for each part can be automatically marked into the part. When selecting the
navigation button, the Automatic mark dialog box is displayed.
Figure 42: Automatic mark dialog box
▪ Text: The text given here will be marked into the part. Using “#” symbol followed by a
number will make the system introduce the identifier. Depending on the number #0:
Part reference, #1: Customer, #2: Order number, #3: Plan number. And "\" character will
finish the line and insert a new one.
▪ Mark although they are machined: If this parameter is enabled, the system will execute
the marking even if the parts have already been machined.
▪ Technology: Once the user has determined which text and identifiers will be marked,
the next step is to specify which marking technology the machine will use: Powder, Drill,
Pen or Cut.
▪ Height of one character: This is the height of the text that will be marked.
▪ Vertical separation: The value given here is the vertical separation between lines.
▪ Automatic separation between characters: If this parameter is enabled, the system will
separate the characters automatically.
59
▪ Horizontal separation between characters: This parameter will only be enabled if

“Automatic separation between characters” is disabled. It allows introducing manually
the horizontal separation between characters.
▪ Correct position: The values of the offset will determine the distance between the
external contour of the part and the marked text.
o Offset {X (e.g. 10,000), Y (e.g. 20,000)}: Introduce the required offset in X and in
Y.
o Search step {X (e.g. 5,000), Y (e.g. 5,000)}: In this example, Expert will test every
5 mm if the position for the text is good or not.
▪ Angle step: When the system is searching for the correct position for an automatic text,
if the correct position is not fount by means of the initial angle, it is possible to
configure the system to rotate the text based on an angle step to search for the
required position.
▪ Initial angle: The user must introduce the initial angle in which the system will try to
position the text when looking for a correct position.
▪ Step for height: Apart from rotating the text, it is also possible to configure the system
to modify the size of the text in order to search for the correct position with the new
size. In order to do this, the user will have to configure the step for height.
▪ Minimum height: As previously mentioned, it is possible to modify the size of the text in
order to search for the correct position with the new size. In order to do this, the user
will have to configure the minimum height of the text.
▪ Thickness: This is the distance between marked lines. If this value is higher than 0, then
the user can obtain different style characters. The drawn schema is the way Expert will
mark the "O" character:
60
▪ Automatic position: using the values introduced in Correct position section of this
window, Expert will try to select automatically the best position possible. If disabled,
the user will be able to choose the position to place the marked text:
▪ Continuous text: Given the case this parameter is enabled, the system will introduce
continuous text. As soon as it is enabled, a navigation button will be displayed on the
right side, which will direct the user to Continuous text dialog box as shown below:
Figure 43: Continuous text dialog box
o % Text size (D): Introduce the required text size percentage.
o Angle (W): Introduce the required angle.
▪ Reference text: With this option the user can define the reference text for the
automatic marking. If in any part there is a reference text, it will be changed by the one
defined for the automatic marking. This new text will be placed in the same place
(central point), and with the same reference angle.
▪ Delete the text if it does not fit in the part: This option deletes the text that does not
fit in the part.
• Contour ordering: If this option is activated before saving the part or the nesting, the
system will keep the direction of the contours as they were before nesting.
• Automatic technology: Automatic technology will be applied depending of the

configuration previously set.
• Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out: The system will apply automatically the settings of

Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out configuration.
61
• Automatic round angles: This parameter is used to avoid sharp or abrupt changes in
direction. The system will apply automatically the settings of Loop values previously set.
Depending on the angle of change, it might be interesting either to introduce a loop or to
round angles.
• Automatic loops: The system will apply automatically the settings of Loop values
previously set.
• Automatic micro-joints: The system will apply automatically the configuration previously
set in Automatic micro-joints values.
• Automatic micro-joints at end of contour: The system will insert automatic micro-joints at
the end of the contour. When clicking the navigation button, the Automatic micro-joints
at end of contour dialog box is displayed.
• Change micro-joints into micro-joints with lead-ins: The system will automatically change
the micro-joints into micro-joints with lead-ins.
• Redefine lead-ins/outs depending on machine configuration: As the name of the

parameter says, the system will redefine the lead-in/outs depending on machine
configuration.
• Redefine micro-joints depending on machine configuration: As the name of the

parameter says, the system will redefine the micro-joints depending on machine
configuration.
• Check if parts are completely machined: This parameter allows defining if, when entering
Nesting and Machining module, the system will test whether a part has been completely
machined or not. The aim of this test is to provide a more detailed information regarding
the status of the parts in the list of parts of Nesting and Machining module. This
information will be displayed both in the title bar of the parts “Not completely machined”
and in their tooltips.
62
Material/Thickness Dependent Data

Obviously, the machining process will not always be the same when using different materials and
thickness. Therefore, some of the machining parameters will need to change when choosing
different materials or specify a different thickness.
Before configuring any parameter, the user must create pairs of material-thickness limits, and
from there, all the changes made to the values of each section will be associated to that material.
Figure 44: Material/Thickness dependent data configuration
Cutting Parameters
• Cutter radius: For the specified material between the given thickness, the system will use
the value given here as the radius for the cutter.
• Piercing radius: This parameter allows the user to define the piercing radius depending
on quality, thickness and material.
• Corrector for holes: Some numeric controls have different corrector for interiors or
exteriors. Here, the user can configure the corrector number which the numeric control is
going to use for interior contours.
• Corrector for exteriors: In this case, the numeric control will use this number of corrector
for exterior contours. The numeric control corrector values must be programmed for
using this properly.
• Level of optimization: Optimization level can be configured as per the material/thickness.

If the option <> is selected, the configuration of the corresponding machine is considered
63
applied, as the one defined in CT, otherwise the level chosen will be applied. Different
part rotations per material/thickness can be defined and blocked if required (only 0º
rotation should exist). This will require the definition of rotation angle parameter
optimization level of parts at 360º.
• Separation of parts: Here the user will have to introduce the value of separation between
parts in millimeters.
• Allow different separation in Y: The system will allow different separation in Y depending
on the specified material.
• Cut speed: This cut speed will be applied for any job done in the specified material.
• Beveled speed: This speed will be applied for making bevels for any job done in the
specified material. This value will be used only for machines with bevel cutting
possibilities.
• Management by material/thickness: If enabled the cutting parameters will be managed

by material/thickness.
• User fast cut mode in holes (flying cut): In case of enabled, the parameters involved in
the implementation will be obtained from the general configuration.
• Common cut: This parameter configures how the common cut is going to be executed.
The user can select between By default, No, Between two parts and Between several parts.
• Nesting for common cut: This parameter modifies the nesting process, allowing the
automatic placement of the parts on the sheet to perform common cut. The user will be
able to select between By default, No, Between two parts and Between several parts.
• Compensations by quality: Using this parameter the user can apply system compensation
and/or control corrections depending on the cutting quality of the parts and the type of
cut. This option will allow defining the following parameters with different data for each
quality: Corrector for holes, Corrector for exteriors, Compensation radius for holes and
Compensation radius for exteriors.
• Compensation by angle: By clicking this option, you will get Compensation by angle
dialog box, where you can view Angle, Theoretical, CNC angle and Compensation field.
Using this parameter, the following options can be configured: Add angle, Delete, Recalc
all and View all.
64
Sheets Parameters
• Sheet status: Indicate the fold status of the sheet through one of the numbers in the list.
(0 = completely flat, 9 = very irregular). This parameter may be useful if the postprocessor
uses it to calculate the distance that the head must come down in order to cut for trying
to avoid collisions with sheet.
• Remnant margin: When a remnant is generated from the current sheet, if there is any
value here, the remnant will be created with these margins.
• Sheet margins: This allows the user to specify margins around the sheet. This ensures the
machine is not going to cut out of the sheet and leave enough material to support the
parts.
Automatic Technology
The system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 45: Automatic technology dialog box
Find detailed below the different fields provided:
• Minimum and maximum radius: The parts are classified here by area. The system
calculates the area of a part, and then generates internally the circle with the same area.
Minimum and maximum radiuses designate the areas of the circles that correspond to
the areas of the contours.
65
• Cutting quality: The color which will be used for each cutting quality can be configured
too. The user can configure the cutting quality of each contour.
• Apply in contours: Here the user can select to which contours will be the automatic
technology applied. The user can select between the following options in the drop-down
list: All contours, Inside, Outside, Circular internal contours, Rectangular internal contours
and Obround internal contours. The last three types of contours are the most restrictive.
• New: This button will create a new entry on the cutting quality assignation table.
• Delete: This button will delete the selected entry on the cutting quality assignation table.
• Dot small contours: The system will assign a dot cycle to all the contours whose radius is
below the minimum radius, but only if the configured minimum radius is bigger than 0.
The action to take on each dot cycle should be previously configured on Dot cycles by
default.
• Mark small contours: If the minimum radius is bigger than 0, the mark technology chosen
here (powder, drill, pen, cut) will be applied automatically to all the contours whose radius
is below the minimum ones.
With the aim to show more information to those users that work with different values depending
on the cutting qualities, a new mark has been included in those qualities that will be assigned by
means of this option. Given the case that automatic qualities have been assigned in the previous
window, the system will display extra information in some of the system options where it is
possible to assign different values per quality. For instance, the system will add a “*” in the tabs
of the following option:
Figure 46: Compensations by quality dialog box
66
Head Raising Test

• Management by material/thickness: It is necessary to enable this parameter in order to
visualize the rest, which allows managing the Head raising test by each material and
thickness.
• Head raising test: This indicates that the system will have special care with the machine
head, if disabled, the automatic machining process will not manage the head movement.
• Make the head raising test while saving: The system will test even if the system has been
configured for making all the rapid movements with the head up.
• Maximum hollow & Offset: When moving over a hole, the head may result damaged. The
distance may have different values depending on the chosen option:
▪ Maximum hollow: Is the maximum distance inside the hole that the system will allow
the head to pass over.
▪ Offset: Is the minimum distance between the hole and the head movement.
• Maximum length with head down: This is the maximum trajectory in mm described by
the head when is down.
• Maximum number of rapid tracts: The system will try the given number of tracts to avoid
holes.
• Modify lead-in/outs: The system will allow changing the situation of the lead-in/outs to
optimize the head management of the machining process. The user will be able to select
between: No, By parts and By contours.
• Apply head up at end of each part: When the machining process of a part has been done,
the system will send an order to the machine for lifting the head.
• Head up for common cut elements: The special case of common cut elements is what this
option configures. When a common cut element has been finalized, the head will go up.
Machining Order
• Management by material/thickness: This check must be activated in order to activate the
rest of parameters.
67
• Machining order: There are three options available: By parts, By contours and By minimum
heat.
▪ By parts: By selecting this option, it will be possible to configure Order mode of the
holes, which offers the following options: None, By proximity and By direction. If the
user selects By proximity, it will be possible to configure Path optimization and
Method. The method can be Normal or Optimized. If the user selects Optimized, it
will be also possible to introduce Number of passes. If the user selects By direction, it
will be possible to configure the Direction of the machining order. The direction can
be Horizontal and Vertical. It will also be possible to configure options like Cut in zig
zag and Cut small holes first and Orthogonality tolerance.
▪ By contours: If the user selects By contours, the machining will be ordered by

contours. Here the user can select between the following options: By zones, Start
point and direction, By size (largest to smallest) and By size (smallest to largest).
▪ Minimum heat: If the user selects Minimum heat, the system will distribute the cut
zones with the objective of not to cut the same area consecutively. This option can
be based on the following criteria: By zones, By parts and By contours.
Lead-in/Lead-out Values
• Lead-in/Lead-out values: With this option you can configure a machine’s approach
parameters. The user can assign manually leads for each part, this can be done with the
leads toolbar which appears if choosing the Technology - Lead in-Lead out option of the
menu in both drawing and nesting module.
• Special lead-in/lead-outs for circular holes: It is possible to select this check box to enable
special lead-in/lead-outs for holes. When selecting this, the Lead-in/lead-out values dialog
box allows the user to set the parameters for the special lead-in/lead-outs. Enter the
distance in ‘D’ field, radius values in ‘R1’, ‘R2’, and ‘R3’ fields. It is also possible to enter the
additional distance value in ‘H’ field.
68
• Circle angles: If the user wants to place the lead manually, sometimes happen that this
lead cannot be placed in the exact clicked point. The value of this parameter will help to
system to decide where to put it. The meaning is the angle step the system will use for
placing the lead. For example, with a 90 circles angle value, the lead will be placed in the
nearest quadrant point to clicked one: 0, 90, 180, 270. If the system cannot place on
nearest position, it will try on next 90-degree point. For a value of 30, the system is going
to try to put the lead on every 30 degrees from the clicked point: 0, 30, 60, 90, 120.
Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out Values

If the user selects to assign the leads automatically, it is necessary to configure some parameters.
1. To use snap in order to place the lead in or lead out. With this the user will be able to
dynamically drag lead in with the mouse. To define the lead in, the user should define a line (2
points option) crossing the contour where the lead in is going to be placed. There are two
different ways to define this lead in: Automatic, which take the values from the automatic lead
in option, and Manual where the user has to define the type for the lead in. There is an
orthogonal selection mode (F2), which allows moving the lead only in horizontal or vertical to
the coordinate system.
2. If the user configures it in the Save options section of the machine configuration. In these
dialogues, the user can choose if it will insert lead-in/lead-out automatically when saving the
part, or when entering on the nesting module.
3. In both drawing and nesting modules, the user can select Technology -> Lead-in/Lead-outs ->
Automatic option to execute automatic lead-in/lead-out assignation or by using the automatic
toolbar button.
• Management by qualities: If the cutting qualities are used for the job, the system allows
configuring different values for the Lead-in/Lead-out when using the automatic
assignation. With this checkbox enabled, the window will show twelve tabs which are
related to each of the twelve available cutting qualities.
From Material-thickness dependent data - Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out, the cutting qualities

checkbox is not enabled. If the user wants to configure them depending on material-thickness, first
the Management by qualities checkbox must be enabled on Configure Machine - Cutting machine -
Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out.
69
• Zone: When using automatic leads, the user can choose the place where the system will
try first placing the lead. It is possible to select different positions for exterior contours of
parts and for holes.
Figure 47: Automatic lead-in/lead-out zones
70
Find briefly detailed below the different types of contours:
All the circular holes
All the circular exteriors
All the squared and

rectangled holes
All the squared and

rectangled exteriors
All the obround holes
All the irregular exteriors
• Modify button: A different Lead-in/out type can be assigned per each contour, as shown
in the images provided below:
71
Figure 48: Lead-in/lead-out types
• Constraints button: Click this button to configure restrictions for the lead-in and lead-out.
You can configure the following parameters:
▪ Minimum length: This is the minimum length in which one lead can be placed.
▪ Minimum radius: The meaning is the same as the previous parameter, is for security on
placing leads on big enough segments. In this case, the system will look for the radius
and if is not bigger than this value will look for another segment.
▪ Maximum angle: If the lead is for a corner, if the two segments constitute an angle
bigger than this value, the system will not place the lead and will try with different type
of lead.
▪ Minimum angle: When the lead is for an interior contour, the system will test the angle
between these segments and if is smaller than the value given here, will not place it.
▪ Maximum angle: The same as previous one, if the angle of the interior contour's
segments is bigger that the value of this parameter, the system will not place the lead.
72
Micro-Joint Values
• Lead-in/Lead-out values (A, D, S & Radius): Specify A, D, S, and Radius values here for
lead-in and lead-out.
• Circle angles: When the micro-joint is assigned manually, the system will try to put it in
the exact clicked point, but this is not always possible. With this parameter, the system
will decide where to put it. The value meaning is the angle step the system will use for
placing the micro-joint in relation to clicked point.
Automatic Micro-Joint Values

• Micro-joint types: The system supports automatically different types of micro-joints. For
each one, there are some parameters that must be configured. Introduce D, A, S and
Radius parameters.
Figure 49: Micro-joint types
• Circle angles: This value is used in order to test positions for placing micro-joints. The
meaning is the angle step the system will use for placing the micro-joints near the clicked
point.
• Distance between micro-joints: This is the minimum distance between micro-joints. The
system will not allow placing a micro-joint at a distance lower than this value.
• Minimum number of micro-joint for each contour & Maximum number of micro-joint for
each contour: Using this option, if the contour has a very big perimeter and the maximum
number of micro-joints has been added, the system will distribute the microjoints halfway
(without taking care to the minimum separation). If the contour is small and the micro-
joints are too close, the system will redefine them and will locate them halfway on the
contour.
73
• Automatic micro-joints: The system will apply automatically the configuration previously
set in Automatic micro-joints values.
• Automatic micro-joints at end of contour: The system will insert automatic micro-joints at
the end of the contour.
Loop Values
This option allows the user to configure the parameters of the Loop values section in a machine.
The loops are used for improving the quality of the corners of the parts.
The system tries to use loops for corners:
1. If the user configures it in the Save options section of the machine configuration . In these
dialogues, the user can choose if the system inserts loops automatically when saving the part,
or when entering on the nesting module.
2. In Drawing Module, the user can get the Loops toolbar, and execute automatic loops
assignation using the automatic button.
• Maximum angle (W): For the angle round process, the system looks for the segments
whose angle is less than the value entered here for (0-W) section.
• Loops: Loops can also be applied automatically. The user will have to introduce the loop
values.
• Round angles: With this feature, the machine uses soft movement without hard
trajectory changes on corners. The result is better part machining. Depending on the
degrees, the angle is rounded using the R value. There are two different kinds of contours
where a round angle can be applied:
Figure 50: Round angle contours
• Limit angle (Z): It sets the limit to round angles. When the option group (W-Z) is selected,
the action is executed for all the angles fulfilling the following characteristics:
Maximum angle (W) < Angle < Limit Angle (Z).
• Radii: There are two Radii buttons. The first one is for (0-W) fields and the second one is
for (W-Z) fields. Clicking this button takes you to another dialog box, where you can
74
assign round angles to various cutting qualities. Select ‘Management by qualities’ to

manage the loop based on qualities.
• Ignore those elements smaller than the rounding radius when it comes to round
corners: If enabled, the system will ignore those small elements and arcs already existing
in the corner rounding process.
• Automatic round angles: This parameter is used to avoid sharp or abrupt changes in
direction. The system will apply automatically the settings of Loop values previously set.
Depending on the angle of change, it might be interesting either to introduce a loop or to
round angles.
• Automatic loops: The system will apply automatically the settings of Loop values
previously set.
75
Bevel Values
• Bevel values: This option allows the user to configure the parameters of the Bevel values
of the machines. To create bevels, the machine must have a rotation head that allows
cutting in different angles. There are two different kinds of bevels that can be executed
depending on the parameters:
▪ Upper bevel: It will be executed on the upper side of the sheet. For these bevels, only d
and a parameters will be used, the rest must be 0.
▪ Lower bevel: This kind of bevel will be executed in the lower side of the sheet and as in
the previous case, only d and parameters will be used.
Bridge Values
Bridges are used to join various contours cut with less piercings.
• Maximum length: This value is the maximum distance allowed for creating a bridge
between contours.
• Maximum number: This value is the limit of maximum number of bridges you can have at
a time. The default value is zero, which means there is no limit.
• Parts area (maximum & minimum): With this option the user can define the maximum
and minimum area of parts to have bridges automatically.
76
Bevels Management
• Auxiliar elements: The following are the auxiliary elements that the bevels management
consider:
▪ Minimum length on loops
▪ Length for auxiliary lead-in
▪ Length for Auxiliar lead-out
Sheet Remnants
• Management by material/thickness: By means of this checkbox the user can decide
whether to manage the sheet remnants depending of material/thickness related
parameters or not.
• Minimum area of remnants: This value indicates the minimum area of the remnants to be
considered as such.
EcoPierce
• Management by material/thickness: If enabled, the system will manage the EcoPierce by
material/thickness.
• Apply automatic EcoPierce on sheet: In a nesting with machined parts, this option will
generate automatically the possible EcoPierce between parts to avoid the highest
number of piercings. The system will automatically check between which parts it would
be best to insert an EcoPierce as well as the insertion position.
• Maximum distance: It refers to the maximum distance between two parts to be able to
place an EcoPierce between them.
• Lead-in minimum length: It refers to the minimum distance between the cut (EcoPierce)
and the part in which the lead-in is executed. If the system does not obtain a position that
respects this minimum lead-in length, the corresponding EcoPierce will not be generated.
• Apply in contours: It specifies whether it is only possible to apply it between external

contours or if it is possible to generate EcoPierce between internal and external contours.
77
Automatic Machining
Figure 51: Automatic machining dialog box
• Cut the sheet framework: When the cutting process has finalized, the system provides
solutions for the sheet leavings. The Cut the sheet framework option makes the machine
to cut the scraps in horizontal and vertical cuts. The user can select between Linear, By
default, No and Yes.
▪ Only when the remnant line is cut: This option will only be displayed if Linear type has
been selected in the previous parameter. If enabled, it will force the framework to be
cut always after the remnants have been cut.
▪ Offset in the parts: It is the minimum distance between the cut and the parts.
• Destroy sheet holes: This option allows destroying sheet holes regardless of the sheet
framework. The user can select between By default, No and Yes.
▪ Offset in the parts: It is the distance required from the interior cut of the hole to the
part extreme.
78
Cutting Parameters
General
Figure 52: Cutting parameters – General configuration
• Type of cut: The cut technology of the machine can be selected here: Oxycut, Plasma,
High definition plasma, Laser and Water. It will only display the possible types of
technology and this will be the type of cut used for those elements that do not have any
assigned. This parameter can be requested in the machining initialization so that the user
is able to specify a different type of cut by default per each nesting.
• Cutter radius: This value indicates the cutter radius of the machine in millimeters.
• Piercing radius: Here it is possible to define the piercing radius depending of quality,
thickness and material. This is the area around the piercing point where the system will
keep as not usable for security reasons. The system will use the value given here as the
radius of the circle around the piercing point of non-usable sheet.
• Compensation mode: The three drawings shown below are a visual representation of
each compensation mode. Choosing one of them will determine how the system will
apply the compensation.
Figure 53: Compensation mode
79
• Number of sheets: Introduce the number of sheets to work with.
• Deal with number of sheets in the system: If enabled, the number of sheets given in the
system will be used. When selecting this option, it is possible to define the Gap between
sheets and Total limit between sheets.
• Gap between sheets: This option will be enabled if the previous one is selected. The user
will be able to define the gap between sheets in millimeters.
• Total limit between sheets: This option will be enabled if Deal with number of sheets in
the system one is selected. The user will be able to define the total limit between sheets
in millimeters.
• Test collision in the margins of the sheet: The system does not check by default if any
part collides with the margins of the sheet. If enabled, the system will detect such
situations while verifying the machining.
• Automatic control of the focal distance: The focal distance is referred as the position of
the laser beam focus in relation to the top of the plate to be cut. If the machine supports
it, if enabled, the system will use the Automatic control of the focal distance feature.
• Ignore non-cut contours: The system allows using non-cut technology, which can be
assigned to geometries that the user does not want to machine like auxiliary geometries.
This parameter is most useful in the nesting module, where if enabled, the nesting will be
executed without using the non-cut contours getting only the rest of the geometries. But
if is disabled and some non-cut contours are included, the nesting will be done using
these contours too although they are not going to be machined.
• There are special cycles: This checkbox determines the way the drawing module will
handle the cycles. If enabled, the user will be able to perform simple, lineal and circular
cycles by a right click in the Drawing window. If disabled, the special cycles options of the
drawing module will be disabled too.
• Table height offset: The cutting head must respect this offset for working on a higher
height. Sometimes the sheet is not placed directly over the table because, for example, a
special support is placed in between. In this case, the system should know the necessary
height to avoid collisions with the sheet.
80
• Texts angular tolerance: Some machines cannot mark text in any angle. With this
parameter, the system is told in which angle the machine can mark texts. The nesting
module will orientate the text depending on the machine limitations. It will be possible to
enable the Angle step option.
always before making any machine instruction. With this option enabled, the system will
show the Cutting Parameters dialog always when the initialization instruction is
executed.
If the user changes the Technology, the existing Tables of Technology may get lost in such a
way that the values return to zero.
Auxiliary Parameters
Figure 54: Cutting Parameters – Auxiliar parameters
• Reference gas: Here the user can select the gas that is going to be used in the laser
machine. Possible gases are Nitrogen, Compressed air or Oxygen. Like in the rest of the
system, the < > symbol indicates any of the elements.
• Nominal power of machine: In order to set up properly the machine the user will have to
introduce the value of the machine power in Watts in this field.
• Use default values of tables of technology: With this parameter, the user can indicate
whether we want to use the default values of the technology tables. If we activate this
81
parameter from inside the nesting we can see that the corresponding fields change for
the values of the technology tables, if it is activated, while initializing the machining the
system will take the default values without going to the configuration window. Once this
field is activated we have direct access to the technology tables window to make the
appropriate changes. This parameter will only be shown if the corresponding A0465
parameter is activated in the CF file. It will be used as default field when there are various
lines with the same machine, material and thickness.
• Prompt for this data when initializing: If enabled, the machine initialization process must
be done always before making any machine instruction.
Contour Attributes
Figure 55: Cutting parameters – Contour Attributes configuration
• General attributes: The object of all the variables of this dialog is to associate values to
contours, and then these values will be read by the postprocessor in order to execute the
actions properly.
▪ Corner management: The value will be assigned to all the corners of the contour.
▪ Micro-joint at contour´s end: The value will be applied at contours micro-joint if exists.
▪ By quality: There is the possibility to filter what micro-joints are going to be valued
depending on quality.
• User attributes (1, 2, 3, 4, 5): These values will be applied to all the contours. Establishing
these values from here will apply them to all the contours of parts in automatic mode.
82
Compensations by Quality
Using this parameter, the user can apply system compensation and/or control corrections
depending on the cutting quality of the parts and the type of cut. This option will allow to define
the following parameters with different for each quality.
Figure 56: Cutting Parameters – Compensations by quality
• Corrector for holes
• Corrector for exteriors
• Compensation radius for holes
• Compensation radius for exteriors
The user will also be able to distinguish between:
• Main contours in no common cut
• Main contours in common cut
• Auxiliary contours in common cut
• Assign this data automatically in the sheet: If enabled, the data set will be assigned
automatically in the sheet. Whenever enabled, the system will display Main contours in no
common cut, Main contours in common cut and Auxiliary contours in common cut fields.
83
Common Cutting Parameters
Figure 57: Common Cutting Parameters configuration
• Common cut: This parameter configures how the common cut is going to be executed.
The user can select between No, Between two parts and Between several parts. Using (
) button the user can configure the Lead-in/Lead-out values of the main and auxiliary
contours in common cut.
• Factor for insignificant length: The given value for this factor is the maximum distance
the system will leave without cutting when using the common cut feature.
• Length of pre-cutting elements: This option is enabled when selecting Common cut
between Several parts. If the system is cutting parts together sometimes it happens that
already cut parts should move or incline a little, which is dangerous for the head because
of collision. To avoid this kind of situations, the system allows introducing a security value
that will be used so that there are no collisions.
• It is allowed to reverse contours: This option is enabled when selecting Common cut
between several parts. If enabled, the system will reverse the contour sense of the cut if
it suits the process.
84
• Order by lead-in/lead-out position: This option is enabled when selecting Common cut
between Several parts. When making common cuts among various parts, it is possible to
order these cuts so that the last part cut finishes in the same area where the automatic
placement of part lead-ins/lead-outs are configured. If this parameter is enabled, it
arranges the part cutting order with the common cut in order to optimize the number of
startups so that the part cut always finishes in the same side or corner of the part. This
option is mainly used to get an optimum position for evacuation when part cutting is
finished.
• Execution mode: This option allows selecting the common-cut order that the machine
will follow.
Figure 58: Common cut execution mode
• Nesting for common cut: The related options modify the nesting process, allowing the
automatic placement of the parts on the sheet. For working automatically properly, the
user should configure the same settings on nesting for common cut and on common cut,
and then, use automatic nesting and machining. The other way is to place the parts
manually on the sheet and, if the common cut is enabled, the user can make the
automatic machining allowing the system to try to apply the common cut to the manual
nesting. The user will be able to select between No, Between two parts and Between
several parts.
• Minimum length: The value given here is the minimum length that the contours must
have to apply the common cut.
• Only between same length elements: The common cut will only be applied if the
common contours have the same length.
• Only place on nesting direction: If enabled, the nesting will be done optimizing the
common cut instead of lower sheet usage. For example:
85
Figure 59: Only place on nesting direction example
In the sheet of the left, the system tries to use the sheet at most placing the two right parts.
down on the sheet. However, on the sheet of the right, the system detects that the common
cut is better and places the part properly.
• Always respect the distance between parts: If enabled, this option makes the system test
the minimum separation between parts among certain elements when performing the
common cut. This option also tests whether the other elements not involved in the
common cut respect the minimum separation between parts. In some cases, it is more
restrictive than the user might expect, since two elements not respecting this minimum
distance, prevent parts entering the common cut, when the user had no problem in
bringing these elements closer than that separation between parts.
• System compensation: The user can select to apply system compensation between No,
Main contours and All the contours.
• Islands: Due to the use of common cut, some holes may appear between the parts. The
system provides different treatments for them. The user will be able to select between;
No treatment, Cut the parts inside the islands first, Cut all the islands first and Cut islands
when cutting the parts.
86
Technology
Lead-in/Lead-out Values
With this option the user can configure the approach parameters of the machine. The user can
assign manually leads for each part, which can be done with the Lead-in/Lead-out toolbar
provided both in drawing and nesting module.
Figure 60: Lead-in/Lead-out values configuration
• Lead-in/Lead-out distances: The following options will be applied to any lead inserted
manually for all the jobs of the specified material between the thicknesses given. All the
parameters are related to the length and shape of the leads:
Figure 61: Lead-in/lead-out distances
The user will be able to specify D, A, R and S distances for the Lead-ins and Lead-outs.
• Special Lead-in/Lead-outs for circular holes: Select this checkbox in order to enable
special Lead-in/Lead-outs for holes and set their parameters. The user can enter the
distance in ‘D’ field, radius values in ‘R1’, ‘R2’, and ‘R3’ fields. It is also possible to enter the
additional distance value in ‘H’ field.
87
• Circle angles: If the user wants to place the lead manually, sometimes can happen that
this lead cannot be placed in the exact clicked point. The value of this parameter will help
to system to decide where to put it. The meaning is the angle step the system will use for
placing the lead.
• Cut the contour: If enabled the system will machine the contour just after the lead is
placed.
Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out Values

If the user selects to assign the leads automatically, some parameters must be configured.
Figure 62: Technology – Automatic Lead-in/lead-out values configuration
The system allows assigning different values for automatic lead-ins/lead-outs per each type of
cutting technology existing in the machine. In other words, it is possible to define a different set
of automatic values per each quality ant type of cut.
to configure different values for the Lead-in/Lead-out when using the automatic
assignation. With this checkbox enabled, the window will display twelve tabs which are
related to each one of the twelve available cutting qualities.
88
try placing the lead first. It is possible to select different positions for the exterior
contours of parts and holes. There are different types of contours which the system can
distinguish. The system will try to insert the chosen lead type, if this is not possible, will
try with second and last with third type. This is a way of configure different leads for
irregular exteriors and let system place the best one in each case.
Figure 63: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out zones and types
• Modify button: For each contour type, one lead-in/lead-out type can be assigned. The
first type will not assign any lead-in/lead-out to the contour. There are some values to be
specified that define the dimensions of each Lead-in/Lead-out.
Figure 64: Lead-in/Lead-out values dialog box
• Piercing radius: This option allows the user defining the piercing radius depending on
quality, thickness and material. These values can be defined depending on the default
piercing radius, as a percentage of it, or as an absolute value. Whenever one of these
values changes, the other one gets updated.
• Constraints button: Click this button in order to configure restrictions for the Lead-ins
and Lead-outs. The user will be able to configure the following Elements where Lead-
in/Lead-outs are placed:
89
▪ Minimum length: This is the minimum length is which a lead can be placed.
▪ Minimum radius: In order to make sure that the leads are placed on big enough
segments, the system will look for the radius and if is not bigger than this value, it will
look for another one.
▪ Maximum angle: In the case of a corner, if the two segments constitute an angle bigger
than this value, the system will not place the lead and will try with a different type of
lead.
▪ Minimum angle: When the lead is for an interior contour, the system will test the angle
between these segments and if it is smaller than the value given here, will not place it.
▪ Maximum angle: The same as previous one, if the angle of the interior contour's
segments is bigger that the value of this parameter, the system will not place the lead.
• Change position in part: This option allows the user to change the position of the lead-in
or lead-out in the part. There are two options: No and Along the cutting sequence.
▪ No: The system leaves the leads-in/leads-out just as they were defined in the corners of
Holes and Parts.
▪ Along the cutting sequence: The leads-in/leads-out is modified. In order to avoid it, it is
placed in the nearest hole.
• Change position in sheet: This option allows the user to change the position of the lead-in
or lead-out in the sheet. There are three options: No, Along the cutting sequence, and
Avoiding the oxycut effect.
▪ Along the cutting sequence: The leads-in/leads-out is modified by selecting this option.
They are placed in the nearest hole in order to avoid them. At the same time, it is also
possible to select only for inside or only for inside and outside option.
▪ Avoid the oxycut effect: It works as the interrogation mark option. This option places
the lead-ins/lead-outs so that the last part cut of the part has enough material to hold it
and it does not suffer any deformation.
• Overlapping test: It is possible to configure checking the overlaps in the automatic lead-
ins. This test will take into account if there will be a pre-punching or a cycle in order to
90
know if the lead-in is overlapped or not. In case of overlapping, the system will perform
the action previously selected between the following:
▪ Shorten: The lead-in/lead-out geometry will be shortened trying to avoid the

overlapping. The value is the maximum shortening allowed.
▪ Change position: The lead-in/lead-out will be placed in other position, and system will
try as different positions as the number given on Number of attempts.
▪ Change position and shorten: This solution is a combination of the previous. The system
will try on each position to short the lead-in/lead-out geometries and if this not solved
the overlapping, will change the position.
▪ Change quality: In this case, system will try changing the cutting quality of the lead-
in/lead-out. With this, the configuration for lead-in/lead-out will change getting the
values configured of the new cutting quality.
▪ Change position and quality: On each position, the system is going to try to change the
cutting quality of the lead-in/lead-out, and if not, change position as many times as
specified attempts.
▪ Change position, quality and shorten: For each position, the system will try changing the
cutting quality, and shorten the lead-in/lead-out on each position, and if the problem
persists, change position as many times as the value given.
▪ Change quality and shorten: First, the quality will be changed and if still there are
overlaps, the lead-in/lead-out geometries will be shortened.
91
Micro-joint Values
Figure 65: Technology – Micro-joints Values configuration
• Lead-in/Lead-out Values (A, D, S & Radius): Specify A, D, S and Radius values here for
Lead-in/Lead-outs, so that the system uses them whenever placing them.
• Circle Angles: When the micro-joint is assigned manually, the system will try to put it in
the exact clicked point, but this is not always possible. With this parameter, the system
will decide where to put it. The value meaning is the angle step the system will use for
placing the micro-joint in relation to clicked point.
Automatic Micro-Joint Values
Figure 66: Technology – Automatic micro-joints values configuration
configuring different values for the micro-joint when using the automatic assignation.
With this checkbox enabled, the window will show twelve tabs which are related to each
of the twelve available cutting qualities.
92
• Micro-joint types: These are all the micro-joints the system supports automatically. For
each one, there are some parameters to configure as shown on the graphs. Enter D, A, S,
and Radius parameters for lead-ins and lead-outs.
Figure 67: Micro-joint types
• Circle angles: This value is used for system to test positions for placing micro-joints. The
point.
• Distance between micro-joints: This is the minimum distance; the system will not allow
placing a micro-joint at a distance lower than this value.
• Minimum number of micro-joints for each contour: Using this option, if the contour has
a very big perimeter and the maximum number of micro-joints has been added, the
system will distribute the micro-joints halfway (without taking care to the minimum
separation).
• Maximum number of micro-joints for each contour: If the contour is small and the micro-
joints are too close, the system will redefine them and will locate them halfway on the
contour.
• Copy button: Because there are 12 possible cutting qualities, the same parameter must be
configured many times. For making the data entry easier, Expert provides this button
which permit to copy the automatic micro-joint configuration from existing cutting
quality values.
93
Loop Values
Figure 68: Technology – Loop values configuration
• Maximum angle (W): Maximum angle permitted by the system for Loops.
• Loops: here the user can select the type of automatic Loops and introduce “r” value. For
automatic machining, the loops can be applied in:
▪ Only in bevel elements: In automatic mode, the loops are applied only to the bevels of
the contours.
▪ Only in round angles: The automatic loops will just be applied to angles.
▪ In bevels or in round angles: The automatic machining applies loops in bevels and
angles.
• Round angles: With this feature, the machine uses soft movement without hard
trajectory changes on corners. The result is better part machining. Depending on the
degrees, the angle is rounded using the R value. There are four different kinds of
contours where to apply the angle round; two in (0-W) section and another two in (W-Z)
section. If none of them are chosen, the settings may not have any effect.
94
• Radii button: There are two Radii buttons. The first one is for (0-W) fields and the second
one is for (W-Z) fields. Clicking this button takes the user to another dialog box, where it
is possible to assign round angles to various cutting qualities. Select Management by
qualities to manage the loop based on qualities.
• Limit angle (Z): It sets the limit to round angles. When the option group (W-Z) is selected,
the action is executed for all the angles fulfilling the following characteristics:
Maximum angle (W) < Angle < Limit Angle (Z).
Bevel Values
Figure 69: Technology – Bevel values configuration
• Bevel values: This option allows the user to configure the parameters of the Bevel values
of the machines. In order to create bevels, the machine must have a rotation head that
allows cutting in different angles. There are two different kinds of bevels that can be
executed depending on the parameters:
▪ Upper bevel: It will be executed on the upper side of the sheet. For this bevels, only
the d and a parameters will be used, the rest must be 0.
▪ Lower bevel: This kind of bevel will be executed in the lower side of the sheet and as
in the previous case, only d and parameters will be used.
95
Bridge Values
Bridges are used to join various contours cut with less piercings.
Figure 70: Technology – Bridge values configuration
• Maximum length: This value is the maximum distance allowed for creating a bridge
between contours.
• Maximum number: This value is the limit of maximum number of bridges the user can
have at a time. The default value is zero, which means there is no limit.
• Parts area (maximum & minimum): With this option the user can define the maximum
and minimum area of parts to have bridges automatically.
• Bridge fitting: This portion deals with the position of the bridges.
▪ On Corners: The bridges are applied on part's corners. In the example, there are bridges
on corners that allow the user to make all the machining without raising the head.
▪ Fitting: It is possible to place the bridge on the Left side or the Right side as per your
requirement.
Tables of Technology
With all the information recovered on the Nesting and Machining process, the system generates
a CNC program. There are some parameters related to machining which can be configured and
assigned to the different contours of the parts. All of these kinds of parameters which affect the
96
CNC program are grouped into Cutting qualities. Depending on the cutting quality, each contour
will be cut with different settings.
By default, all the contours have a cutting quality assigned. The tables of technology are
structured in different parameter categories which depend on the configuration made on the
filter parameters.
Figure 71: Technology -Tables of technology
The filter parameters may be different depending on the postprocessor configuration, and the
parameters contained into the categories are different for each postprocessor.
The system will test if the contours have a specific cutting quality assigned, and if so, it will take
into account this table. Depending on the Material, Thickness 1-2, Lens, Gas, Power, Default and
Auxiliar fields, it will apply the values configured in the different categories.
Auxiliar field is editable. In order to edit it, the user will have to edit the CT file of the
machine and indicate in A210 parameter the name required to be displayed.
In this window it will be possible to create a New entry, as well as Delete, Copy, Import and filter
it by Criteria option located on the filter parameters.
• New: This will create a new entry on the filter parameters.
97
• Delete: This will delete the current row together with all the given values for the
parameters.
• Copy: This will duplicate the current row allowing a faster configuration.
• Import: The system will provide the possibility of importing a previous backup of the
technological tables’ configuration.
• Criteria: The system will display a window where the user can choose which rows will be
shown on the screen for making the searching process faster and easier.
• Configure: This allows the user to configure the variables for a material and thickness
range defined.
Automatic Nesting
General
Figure 72:Automatic Nesting – General configuration
• Level of optimization: In this field the user can select any of the predefined levels of
optimization from the drop-down list provided. The system provides five predefined
levels, each one with their own set of parameters. The execution time and result of these
98
predefined levels is balanced, that is, the longer the execution time, the better result.
Every one of the predefined levels corresponds to a predefined Level of optimization
configuration. The user can modify the configuration of any of the existing predefined
levels and save it as a user defined level of optimization. The configuration of the existing
predefined levels will not be modified. In order to visualize the parameters of any of the
predefined levels or to modify them and save them as user customized level of
optimization, it will be necessary to click on the arrow button provided next to the drop-
down list ( ). If this button is selected, the system will display Level of optimization
window. In this window the user can configure all parameters related to the level of
optimization. Between the fields provided in this window, the user will only find enabled
the ones that correspond to the user optimization and not system optimization.
Figure 73: Level of optimization window
▪ Use modules: If the user enables this parameter, the system will generate modules of
two parts in Nesting module whenever it is possible. However, the parts in question
must fit together very well so that the system considers them as a module. The system
will only use those ones that provide a good performance.
▪ Test starting from a different corner for each part: If the user enables this parameter,
the system will use a specific algorithm that places the parts automatically in the
different corners of the sheet. If this parameter is disabled, this is how these parts
would be placed in the sheet.
99
If this parameter is enabled, it will place each part in a different corner of the sheet, achieving an
exceptional efficiency.
▪ Rotate parts to maximize holes between them: As the name indicates, this parameter
will rotate in order to try creating bigger holes between them. This way, if there is any
part that may fit in the gap created, the user will be able to place more parts and
therefore will get a better efficiency.
If this parameter is disabled, parts are not being rotated and therefore the space that may be
formed inside is clearly not being exploited fully.
If this parameter is enabled, the system will rotate the parts, maximizing the hole between them.
This way it is possible to introduce another part inside and increase the efficiency of the nesting.
100
▪ Define the number of irregular methods to apply: The bigger number specified by the
user, the more methods the system will test in order to place the parts and look for the
best result. The system will try several algorithms looking for the best sheet advantage
and will use the ones on which the space profit is best. The number of methods applied
will depend on the number of irregular methods to apply defined by user, which will
consequently result in a longer execution time. Setting a higher value ensures a better
result. There are eighteen irregular methods. The user must try with different values
and check the efficiency percentage in order to select the most suitable one. This option
is useful for those cases in which there are different parts with irregular geometries and
small quantities.
• Use regularity method: This parameter adds regular methods to the previous irregular
ones. Both parameters can be enabled at the same time if required. As in the previous
case, the bigger the level selected, the more possibilities to get a better nesting.
However, it adds more testing time to the nesting. This method basically looks for part
modules towards a better sheet efficiency. This parameter is useful for those cases in
which there is a big quantity of the same part (at least to fill half the sheet).
▪ Level 1: The system will create column modules and apply them with basic criteria.
▪ Level 2: The system will modify the column modules created initially, looking for a
better sheet advantage.
▪ Level 3: The system will create different column sizes. This level will suppose more
testing; therefore, the automatic nesting will take more execution time.
▪ No regularity: Without any regularity method, the nesting of the following part would
be as shown below:
101
▪ Level 1: Once Regularity method level 1 is activated, the difference would be remarkable.
• Try to nest in horizontal and vertical: Sheets can be nested horizontally (nesting the sheets
by rows) or vertically (nesting the sheet by columns). If this parameter is activated, the
system will test both horizontally and vertically and will use the one on which the best
efficiency is reached.
• Force a specific precision: If this parameter is enabled, the system will force the precision
set in this field by the user. Whenever activated, the system will display a drop-down list
with the following options:
▪ Very low (fastest)
▪ Low
▪ Normal
▪ High
▪ Very high (slowest)
▪ Value: In this case, the user will be provided with a precision bar in order to set the
required value:
Figure 74: Precision bar
102
• Force a specific rotation angle: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system will
display the following fields:
▪ Rotation angle for parts: Select between the provided options in the drop-down list (15,
30, 45, 90 and 180).
▪ Search special rotation angles for the parts: If enabled, the system will execute various
tests and search for the most appropriate rotation angle for the parts, which will result
in a better efficiency.
▪ Force a specific type of modules: If this parameter is enabled, the arrow ( ) button
located on the right side will also become enabled. Whenever the user selects this
button, the system will display Modules window. Here the user can select between the
provided options, which are divided into Simple modules, Complex modules and Special
modules.
Once the user has defined the required parameters in Level of optimization window, it is possible
to save them for a later use by means of Save as… button located at the bottom of the window.
The system will display New reference window where the user will have to introduce the required
name for the level of optimization that has been defined and click OK button in order to save it.
• Maximum time to calculate the best efficiency: Here the user must introduce the
maximum time that will be taken to test the methods (that have been previously set).
Remember that the time must be introduced in seconds. During the automatic nesting
execution, once the time here specified is reached, the system will stop testing methods
and will choose the best one (most efficient) found up to that moment.
• Precision: This field allows the user setting the required exactitude or preciseness of the
automatic nesting. The user will be provided with a drop-down list with the following five
options:
▪ Very low (fastest): In the case of all those elements that are not neither horizontal nor
vertical, the less precision applied, the system will apply more distance between parts.
▪ Low
▪ Normal
▪ High
103
▪ Very high (slowest): With more precision, the distance between parts will be closer to
the minimum distance between parts.
The higher the precision level selected, the longer it will take for the system to execute the
automatic nesting.
• Allow part rotations: Depending on the shape of the part it may be very useful to rotate
it in order to get a better nesting. For example, in case of circles, it would not make any
sense since their output is the same whichever the angle the user chooses.
▪ Rotations: Here the user can select the rotation angle required. The drop-down list
provides the following options: 15, 30, 45, 90 and 180 degrees. For example, given the
case 15 degrees is selected, the system will test placing the part on every 15 degrees’
position, which will result in 24 tries.
▪ Search special rotation angles for the parts: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the
system will look for special angles that may be useful for the parts as well as result in a
better sheet efficiency. This parameter will test more rotation angles than in the
previous case, and therefore will result in a longer execution time.
• Separation of parts: Here the user must introduce the required value to use as separation
between parts. This separation value is intended to safeguard the quality of parts.
Usually, this value is defined by the restrictions of the machine that is being used.
• Allow different separation in Y: This parameter is aimed at those cases in which the user
works with big thicknesses. It allows setting a different separation in Y in order to avoid
putting a disadvantage (penalizing) both dimensions due to the auxiliary elements (such
as lead-in/lead-outs, loops and micro-joints).
If this parameter is disabled, the separation between parts either in X or in Y is exactly the same.
The separation between parts will correspond with the value introduced in the previous field.
104
Whenever the user enables this parameter and introduces a different value for the separation in
Y axis, after performing the automatic nesting the difference will be obvious (as shown in the
image below).
• Allow mirroring: If this parameter is enabled, the system can place the parts in the
nesting with symmetries. However, this parameter is usually restricted by the material
that is being used since the quality is not always the same in both sides of the sheet.
• Fit every part to sheet borders: If this parameter is enabled, as the name indicates, parts
will be fitted to sheet borders. If disabled, the system will always maintain half of the
separation set between parts (based on the value given in Separation of parts field).
However, this condition may be restricted by the machine that is being used.
If this parameter is enabled, the part will adjust either to the sheet margin (in case there is any) or
to the sheet border. If it is disabled, the system will always leave half of the separation between
parts (half of the value given in Separation of parts field).
• Create equal sheets: Here the user will be able to select the required option between the
three options provided in the drop-down list: No, Yes and Ask. Given the case either Yes
or Ask option is selected, the system will check whether it is possible to generate
repetitions of the current nesting (which is already very efficient) if the existing quantity
of parts and sheets so permits.
105
• Corner: Here the user will be able to select the required corner from which the system
will start placing the parts. The nesting process will start from the selected corner and
continue in the opposite direction.
• Configure “Do All” for the machine: If enabled, the defined configuration for the
machine will be used, if not, the system will make use of the general configuration.
Whenever it is enabled, the system will add a new node to the options tree as well as a
link to it, which will allow accessing the Do All configuration of the machine.
Advanced
Figure 75: Automatic Nesting – Advanced configuration
• Calculate modules for parts: Whenever the user activates this parameter, the system will
calculate modules of two parts always looking for the best efficiency. Once this
parameter has been enabled, the arrow button ( ) located on the right side will also
become enabled. Whenever this button is selected the system will display Modules
window. Modules window displays the existing types of modules, which are divided into
three different groups: Simple modules, Complex modules and Special modules:
106
Figure 76: Modules window
• Simple modules:
▪ Basic: It is formed by the same part.
▪ Advanced: It is formed by a basic module and other parts. Once the basic module has
been calculated, the system will fill in the holes left in the nesting with other parts.
• Complex modules:
▪ Multi-part: It is formed by several parts, which also tries fitting the parts together.
▪ Staggered: It consists in a staggered combination of the parts.
• Special modules:
▪ Multihead: This type of module is specific for machinery with multihead and will only be
displayed whenever the machine that is being configured has them.
• Import stored modules: If enabled, the system will import automatically all the stored
modules that contain parts of the subjob that will be nested. This way, all the available
stored modules will be used in the automatic nesting for the parts of the subjob, with no
need to import them manually. The system will not import automatically any module that
contains parts that are not in the current subjob. In addition, it is possible to configure
the parameter related with the import of stored modules.
• Nesting priority direction: Sheets can be nested horizontally (nesting the sheet by rows)
or vertically (nesting the sheets by columns). Depending on the measures of the sheet it
might be more efficient to nest in one direction or the other. This parameter provides a
drop-down list and allows the user selecting between Horizontal and Vertical.
107
▪ Horizontal: As shown in the nesting below, parts will be placed horizontally.
▪ Vertical: In this case, parts will be placed vertically.
• Rectangular mode is allowed: By means of this parameter, the system allows treating
those parts that are almost rectangular in order to improve the speed of nesting
calculations. Given the case this parameter is enabled; it would be the very first algorithm
to execute whenever performing an automatic nesting. Once this parameter has been
enabled, the arrow button ( ) located on the right side will also become enabled.
Whenever this button is selected, the system will display Rectangular nesting setup
window:
Figure 77: Rectangular nesting setup window
• Type: It provides a drop-down list where the user can select the type of rectangular
nesting between the following options:
▪ Normal: The system will treat parts as rectangles as will search for the best combination
of those rectangles (the ones that meet the Squareness percentage) in the sheet.
108
▪ Optimize for linear cut of parts: In order to optimize linear part cutting, the user must
get the largest number of parts of the same size (both length and width) nested in
columns. This parameter aims to look for part columns with the same width and is very
useful for machines with common cut. Once this option has been selected, the arrow
( ) button located on the right side will be enabled. If the user selects this button, the
system will display Optimize for linear cut of parts window, where it will be possible to
set the following parameters: Minimum height of the column relative to the sheet and
the Separation of parts in millimeters.
▪ Optimize for chain cut: In order to optimize chain cutting, nesting will be done in
columns by parts of the same length. The system will apply special bridges between the
parts so that the parts remain in the sheet until the last vertical cut is executed. Once
this option has been selected, the arrow ( ) button located on the right side will be
enabled. If the user selects this button, the system will display Optimize for chain cut
window, where the user will have to configure the following parameters:
▪ Minimum height of the column relative to the sheet: Here the user must introduce the
minimum height of the column by introducing a percentage. This percentage will be
applied to the sheet measures in order to calculate the value in question.
▪ Separation of parts: The separation of parts can be set either by the Default value, the
Cutter diameter (multiplied by a number) or a fixed Value. Remember that this
separation must be set in millimeters.
▪ Part type: The user will be provided with the following four options:
▪ Bridges automatically: If this parameter is enabled, the user can select between the
following two options:
109
▪ Bridge width: This parameter will also be enabled. Here the user will be able to select
between The semi-separation of part, Cutter radius (multiplied by a number) and a
fixed Value. Remember that this separation must be set in millimeters.
▪ Squareness percentage: The user can introduce the required Squareness percentage
which will be used in the system to consider parts as rectangular. If a part does not
reach the percentage set, it will not be considered as rectangular.
▪ Optimize remnant of the last sheet: Thanks to his parameter, parts can be placed using
the minimum X in order to generate the best remnant possible. Usually, when there is a
big job which includes more than one sheet, this optimization is applied to the last
sheet of the job.
▪ Calculation level: This field provides a drop-down list where the user can select between
0, 1, 2 and 3.
• Minimum area to insert parts in holes: Whenever the area of a hole is big enough, if
possible, the system places parts inside them. In this field, the user can introduce the
minimum area required in order to consider a hole as valid for placing parts inside.
• Nesting for kits: This parameter allows prioritizing those parts that compose kits during
the automatic nesting execution. Once this parameter has been enabled, the arrow ( )
button located on the right side will also become enabled. Whenever this button is
selected, the system will display Nesting for kits window:
Figure 78: Nesting for kits window
▪ Mix different kits in same sheet: If this parameter is disabled, the system will wait until
the whole kit has been nested in order to start nesting the following kit. On the other
hand, the system will incorporate parts which belong to different kits in the same
sheet.
110
▪ Use nestings of original kits as modules: Thanks to this parameter if a kit has already
nestings which are very efficient, given the case the measure of the existing sheets and
the number of parts allows it, the previous nestings will be used as modules.
• Part order in nesting: This parameter set how parts will be placed in the nesting. It
provides a drop-down list where the user will be able to select between the following
options:
▪ By area: From the biggest area to the smallest area.
▪ By rectangular area: Based on external area.
▪ By perimeter: From the biggest perimeter to the smallest perimeter.
▪ By length: From the longest to the shortest.
• Group parts with similar order value: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system
will prioritize those methods that introduce the highest number of big parts instead of
the ones that place small parts, regardless of their efficiency.
• Block part rotation according to their dimensions: By means of this option, if a part has
any rotation (degree) that may cause any problems, either because it may fall from the
table or because it does not fit in the smallest trap, the system would block that rotation
and nest the part in question in the most appropriate and secure rotation.
▪ Do not block if none of the part rotations meet the restrictions: Given the case none of
the parts meets the limits defined, there is an option that allows unblocking them, since
the part must be nested somehow.
• Multihead nesting: Nesting for machines with several cutting heads (multihead).
o Minimize the number of head changes: The nesting will optimize the placement
of parts so that they are cut with the highest number of heads by minimizing the
number of head changes. The nesting will always provide more priority to a
reduced machining time than to a reduced material usage.
o Optimize the number and distances of the heads by part: Each part will be nested
with the most optimum number of heads and distances between them so as to
obtain a lower machining time and a reduced material usage for that part in
question. This type of nesting is much more efficient when the size of parts is
111
quite different, and the quantity of each part is high, since the system will nest
with the best head arrangement per each part.
o Both of them: The system will take into account the previous two options.
• Multihead - Prioritize size of part depending on number of heads: Given the case the
parts are big, the system will give priority to these parts and nest with the maximum
number of heads. This allows a smaller use of material, although the whole nesting is
nested and machined with the same or lower number of heads.
• Keep same distances with different number of heads: The system will try keeping the
same distances even though the number of head that will be used to cut is lower than the
current number. This may allow cutting a group of parts with the same distances
between heads and not using all heads when it comes to cut the last part of the group.
Whenever this configuration parameter is enabled, it is also possible to configure the
Minimum number of heads to perform this treatment, that is to say, the number of heads
that must be used to cut the group of parts to keep the same distances.
112
Unitary
Figure 79: Automatic Nesting – Unitary configuration
• Sheet margins: Here the user can introduce the required margins for the sheets. These
margins will ensure that the machine does not work outside the sheet as well as leaving
enough material so as to support the parts. The value must be introduced in millimeters.
• Ignore open contours: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system will not take into
account an open contour (such as, for example, lead-ins) in order to estimate the sheet
required.
• Create the sheet in database: If enabled, whenever creating a new sheet for the unitary
nesting, the system will introduce the sheet in question in the database and therefore, it
will be displayed in the sheets list.
• Prompt for this data: If this parameter is enabled, the system will prompt a window
asking for this data whenever automatic nesting option is selected and prior to executing
it so that the user can select the required parameters in each case.
113
Automatic Machining
Cut
Parts
Figure 80: Automatic Machining – Cut – Parts configuration
• Apply Lead in/outs in the part automatically: When the automatic machining option is
executed on drawing module, the system will insert lead in/outs automatically if this
parameter is enabled. The lead in/out will be placed depending on the configuration
previously made.
• Re-order machining sequence at part level: On drawing module, the system can optimize
the machining process trying to improve speed and movements. This option will make
the automatic machining better when executing it in a part on drawing module.
• Order mode of the holes: With this parameter, the user can order the internal machining
of a part. Until this moment the internal machining of a part was decided by the system
by proximity, the user will be able to define the following parameters:
114
▪ By proximity
▪ By direction
Figure 81: Order mode of the holes dialog box
▪ Start: The initial machining point will be one of the corners of the part; the selected one
or the closed to the current point before start the internal machining.
▪ Direction: The cutting direction can be Horizontal or Vertical.
▪ Orthogonality tolerance: It defines the maximum distance between two holes to be

considered in the same cutting line. This distance is referred to axe – horizontal or
vertical.
• System compensation: If enabled the system will manage all the compensation settings.
There are some parameters that have to be properly configured for obtaining a good
compensation configuration. System compensation requires the Cutter radius.
• CN Compensation: If enabled the system will manage all the compensation settings. It
will prompt for the Compensation Index.
• Dwell time of cycles: When there is a cycle, the value given here is the time in second the
cycle will keep on.
• Type of cycle: The user will be able to select between the following options:
▪ Default: If this option is selected, the system will use the type of cycle previously
configured in Configure machines / Postprocessor / Specifics of cut / Dot Cycle by
default.
▪ Drill cycles: All the cycles applied on automatic machining will be drill cycles.
115
▪ Switch on/off: All the cycles on automatic machining will be switch on/off cycles.
• Configure: Execution of fixed cycles: If the machine has special cycles (should be
configured on Configure machine / Cutting parameters / There are special cycles) the
system can use them automatically.
Figure 82: Configure: Execution of fixed cycles dialog box
• Use cut cycles in automatic: When the part which is going to be machined has a big
number of holes, the system may take some calculation time for making the automatic
machining. Activating this checkbox will make the system to use cut cycles for enhancing
the process speed. But if the area of the contour is very big, is no convenient to use
macros. The “Maximum area for cutting macros in automatic mode” parameter allows
limiting the maximum size for applying macros.
• Maximum area for cutting macros in automatic mode: This parameter allows limiting the
maximum size for applying macros.
• Prompt for the from point when machining the part: With this parameter the user can
define the FROM point when machining one part. If the parameter Prompt for the from
point when machining the part in automatic machining is ON, then, when machining one
part the FROM point will be asked. This parameter is also available for combined
machines.
116
• Use fast cut mode in holes (flying cut): With this option the user can perform a new
cutting order for the internal holes of a part. There are some restrictions to define which
element of each hole can be cut in this mode, depending on the minimum radius to keep
the arc continuity and depending on the angular tolerance to join elements in the same
cut. The parameters of this option help the user to define the desired cutting sequence
and the order between them.
▪ Angular tolerance to join elements in the same cutting sequence: With this option, it is
possible to assign the angular tolerance to join the elements in the same cutting
sequence.
▪ Minimum radius to keep continuity in arcs: Using this option it is possible that small
radius will not be taken as continuous elements.
▪ Union among elements in the same cutting sequence:
o Elements of different type: It allows configuring the possibility to join different

elements (for instance = arcs and segments).
o Elements of same type: It allows configuring the possibility to define equal

elements (always keeping the minimum radius and angular tolerance
restrictions) or only join segments which are in the same line or arcs which are in
the same circumference.
▪ Order mode among cutting sequences: Once the rest of parameters are defined the
user will be able to define the order and select between By Proximity and By
parallelism and concentrity.
▪ Apply quality: This option enables selecting the desired cutting quality.
▪ Apply in contours: Here the user can select between the type of contour where the
flying cut will be applied:
▪ Changing cutting direction is allowed: This option enables the inversion of the cutting
direction of the circular contours to avoid passing above contours already cut.
117
▪ Only between circles aligned in X or Y: If disabled, this parameter allows machining

groups of circular holes that are not aligned in X or Y when using Flying Cut mode. This
allows taking advantage of this type of machining in grids with holes that are slightly
inclined, or in groups that are not forming a grid.
• Start the fast cut from a specified corner: This option allows the user selecting the starting
corner for flying cut. It must be executed manually (by specifying contours). If this option
is not activated or is in automatic mode, the starting point for flying cut will be the
nearest to the machining point in which the system is.
Figure 83: Fast cut mode in holes (flying cut) dialog box
118
Sheets
Figure 84: Automatic Machining – Cut – Sheets configuration
• Cut the remnant line: When a remnant has been generated, this option allows the system
to insert the CNC code that will separate the remnant from the sheet. For this option it is
important to have a remnant line inserted, which can be configured automatically in
Configure machine / Sheet Remnant or made manually from nesting module. Click the
Navigation button and the system will display the following dialog box asking for the data
shown:
119
Figure 85: Cut the remnant line dialog box
▪ At the beginning and at the end of the machining: Depending on each option, the
operation will be done at the beginning or at the end of the machine process.
▪ At the beginning and at the end of each zone: The operation will be done at the
beginning or at the end of each zone.
Mode:
▪ Like contour: The remnant line is cut as any other regular contour, skipping the lines
with no cut technology.
▪ Like cut movements (from beginning to end): GO TO instructions are inserted between
the sides that are cut. The sides with cut technology are cut starting from one of the
ends.
▪ Like cut movements (starting from the middle): GO TO instructions are inserted
between the sides that are cut. The sides with cut technology are cut starting from the
middle towards both ends.
Direction:
▪ Like the machining: The direction will be as the one in the machining.
▪ From bottom to top: The direction will be from bottom to top.
▪ From top to bottom: The direction will be from top to bottom.
120
• Apply automatic lead-in/lead-outs on sheet: If the parts are placed on the sheet and the
Lead in/outs have not been placed yet, the system will check it and insert them
depending on the configuration previously set in Configure machine / Automatic Lead-
in/out configuration.
• Apply automatic EcoPierce on sheet: If enabled, whenever the automatic machining of

the sheet is executed, the system will automatically generate the EcoPierce making use
of the parameters configured in the machine.
• Round corners automatically after machining: This parameter allows rounding corners of
nested parts according to how their edges will be machined. It can be executed manually
after machining or automatically in the same machining process as one of its finishing
operations. If enabled, the corners without special machining operations (such as lead-
ins/lead-outs and common cut between other options) are rounded off.
• Test for parts inside others: If enabled, the system will test whether there are parts
inside other parts or not, as shown in the example below:
Figure 86: Test for parts inside others example
• Cut the sheet framework: When the cutting process has finalized, the system provides
solutions for the sheet leavings. The Cut the sheet framework option makes the machine
to cut the scraps in horizontal and vertical cuts. The Navigation button will show a
dialogue where the user needs to enter some values for the following parameters:
121
Figure 87: Cut the sheet framework dialog box
• Only when the remnant line is cut: If enabled, it will force the script to be cut always
after the remnants have been cut.
• Cut in holes: This checkbox will determine if the holes are going to be cut or not.
• Destroy holes with micro-joints: By means of this parameter the user can avoid
destroying those holes that will be joined to the part through a micro-joint.
• Destroy small sheet frameworks as part holes: By means of this option it is possible to
define a minimum and maximum size that allows using the step configured in the
destruction of the part holes to destroy all the remnants that are within those limits. This
way, it will be possible to define a step for the larger parts that may be of interest to keep
complete and a smaller step for the non-reusable parts that the user wants to let go
through the hole. This option is only available when the automatic machining of the sheet
is executed.
122
• Maximum length in X and Y: It determines the maximum rectangle that will be generated
as scrap.
• Offset in the parts: It is the minimum distance between the cut and the parts.
• Offset in the edge of the sheet: It configures the distance between the cut and the edge
of the sheet.
• Minimum cut offset: Distance at which the minimum cut of the remnant line must pass so
that it does not cause damage to the part.
• Negative maximum margin: Maximum distance to the origin where the cur can be
moved.
• Positive maximum margin: Maximum distance to the opposite side to the origin where
the cut can be moved.
• Start in the middle: Instead of cutting the framework lines from up to down, the
segments will be cut from the middle to one side, and then it will go to the center again
and to the other side. It is possible to make a lead-in/lead-out in the middle of other types
of cutting segments which belong to a sheet framework such as In any cut, Cuts between
parts, In cuts outside parts and In all cuts.
• Order: Using this parameter the user can define the sheet skeleton (frame). The user can
select between:
▪ By proximity
▪ Horizontal + Vertical
▪ Vertical + Horizontal
• Destroy sheet holes: This option allows destroying sheet holes regardless of the sheet
framework. The system will only apply the hole destruction applied in the parts. The
system will not nest inside holes that contain hole destruction in part.
123
Figure 88: Destroy sheet holes dialog box
▪ Maximum and minimum length/width of the hole: It is the size of the holes required to
destroy considering the maximum width and length.
▪ Offset in the parts: It is the distance required from the interior cut of the hole to the
part extreme.
▪ Destroy holes with micro-joints: By means of this parameter the user can avoid
destroying those holes that will be joined to the part through a micro-joint.
▪ Start in the middle: Instead of cutting the framework lines from up to down, the
segments will be cut from the middle to one side, and then it will go to the center again
and to the other side.
▪ It is also possible to select the required instruction order: At the beginning of the
machining, At the end of the machining and Before cutting contours.
▪ This section will only be enabled if Before cutting contours is selected in the previous
section. It allows optimizing the cutting of part holes after executing the remnant
destruction. The user can select one of the following options:
o Do not optimize the hole cutting: In this case, the system will work as usual, that is
to say, it will place the lead-in automatically in the corresponding place.
124
o Optimize the lead-in position: The system will try to introduce the lead-in the
closest possible to the final point where the hole destruction has finished.
o Continuous cut from the last point: The system will continue cutting from the last
point where the system has finished cutting the hole.
• Cut the furthest element at the end of each part: This parameter ensures that the part
can be pushed and there is not going to be any piece of remnant that prevents
movement. The part element which is further away from the movement of the sheet will
be left to cut as late as possible in order to ensure that the part is free.
• Cut full parts in work zones: This parameter affects to the internal contours. If enabled
and a part is located in the middle of a work zone, the system will not even perform the
internal contours. On the contrary, in case of disabled, the system would perform all
those internal contours in the current work zone, even if the part is in the middle.
• Cut contours partially in the zone: Whenever the system finds dynamic remnant lines
inside a work zone, if this option is enabled, the system will cut the parts up to that line,
cut the remnant line and continue with the machining.
• Cut contours partially in the clamps: By means of this parameter it is possible to cut part
of the contour located away from the clamps and leave for later the rest of the elements
of the contour. It allows selecting between breaking all the contours placed below at
least one clamp or on the contrary, only breaking those contours that are placed below
two clamps.
▪ Clamp movements: In order to cut the elements of the contour placed under the
clamps, the user will be able to indicate whether it is required to move the clamps prior
to executing a reposition. To that end, clamps must be configured as movable clamps
prior to executing a reposition. Here the user can select between No move, At the end
of each zone and At the end moving back to its initial position.
• Display progress bar: When doing the automatic machining, the system must perform
very complicated internal calculations that may take some time. The user can know what
the system is doing on every moment with the progress bar.
• Delay after completion: After the automatic machining is over, the system can keep the
progress window for a while. This is what the Delay after completion parameter sets.
125
Head Raising Test
Figure 89: Automatic Machining – Cut – Head raising test configuration
• Head raising test: This indicates that the system will have special care with machine head,
if disabled, the automatic machining process will not manage the head movement.
• Make the head raising test while saving: When saving the machining, the system will
make several tests for avoid head collisions. This option can be enabled although the first
one is not. In this case, the treatment will be done only when saving, not when doing the
automatic machining.
• Make head test even with head always up: The system will make the test even if the
system has been configured for making all the rapid movements with the head up.
• Maximum hollow & offset: When moving over a hole, the head may result damaged. The
distance has different values depending on the chosen option.
• Maximum length with head down: This is the maximum trajectory in mm described by
the head when is down.
• Maximum number of rapid tracts: The system will try the given number of tracts to avoid
holes. In order to understand what is a tract, the following figures show two examples:
Figure 90: Rapid tracts example
• Modify Lead-in/outs: Selecting an option from here will allow the system to change the
situation of lead in/outs to optimize the head management of the machining process.
126
▪ By parts: Leads will be repositioned for avoiding cut parts in the rapids movement.
▪ By contours: The objective with this configuration is not to encounter any cut hole on
the rapid movements.
• Retain lead in/outs defined in part: If the part has Lead-in/outs previously assigned and
this option is enabled, the system will use them. If disabled, the system will erase them
and look for the best position in order to make easier the manual part removal.
• Apply head up at end of each part: When the machining process of a part has been done,
the system will send an order to the machine to lift the head.
• Head up for common cut elements: The special case of common cut elements is what this
option configures. When a common cut element has been finalized, the head will go up.
• Test only with the contours that are in the direction of the movement: If enabled, this
option will avoid already cut holes in the direction of the movement.
127
Machining Order
Figure 91: Automatic Machining – Cut – Machining order configuration
• Machining order: There are three options available:
▪ By parts: If the user selects this option, the machining will be ordered by parts. When
selecting this option, the system will provide the user with the following order options:
By zones, Start point and direction, By size (largest to smallest) and By size (smallest to
largest). If this option is selected, Order mode of the holes parameter will become
enabled, which offers the following options: None, By proximity, By direction and
Minimum Heat.
▪ By contours: If the user selects this option, the machining will be ordered by contours.
When selecting By contours, the user will have to choose between By zones, Start point
and direction, By size (largest to smallest) and By size (smallest to largest) as order
mode for the contours. This option will also enable Cut holes first parameter, which as
the name indicates, will first cut the holes and then continue with the rest of the
contours.
▪ Minimum heat: The user can choose between By zones, By parts and By contours.
• Order mode of the holes: This option will only be available whenever “By parts”
machining order has been previously selected. It allows configuring a new mode of holes’
distribution. It enables cutting the small holes that are near larger holes in the first place.
It will only be possible to configure it in Proximity mode only if path optimization is not
required. In order to distinguish between large and small parts, it is necessary to indicate
128
the minimum length and width of the minimum rectangle of a contour to be considered
as a large hole. It will be enough to meet one of these two dimensions in order to
consider the contour as a large hole. It is also necessary to configure the offset in order to
calculate the collision area around large holes. This value will be added from all the sides
of the minimum rectangle of the contour and every small hole located inside that area or
that collisions with it, will be cut before the large hole. The user will be able to choose
between the following options:
▪ None: Do not order the holes.
▪ By Proximity: The system will order the holes based on proximity.
▪ By Direction: The system will order the holes based on the direction.
▪ Minimum Heat: This parameter determines the sheet machining order by parts and by
minimum heat. It allows cutting the sheet part by part making sure the interiors of each
one of them are cut respecting the minimum heat. The user will be able to configure the
Offset of minimum heat in the dialog box displayed whenever selecting the navigation
button next to it.
Depending on the option that the user chooses, different options will be shown. For example,
when selecting None, the following dialog box will be displayed:
Figure 92: Machining order dialog box (None order mode of the holes)
When clicking the navigation button, Cut small holes first dialog box will be displayed:
Figure 93: Cut small holes first dialog box
129
On the other hand, given the case By proximity option is selected, the system will display the
following dialog box:
Figure 94: Machining order dialog box (By proximity order mode of the holes)
Here the user will be able to enable Path optimization parameter and select the required Method
between Normal and Optimized.
If the selected option is By direction, the dialog box displayed will be as shown below:
Figure 95: Order mode of the holes (By direction) dialog box
Finally, if the option selected is Minimum Heat, the system will display the following dialog box:
• Only cut holes: If enabled, the system will only cut the interior contours of the part.
• Put in order by qualities: By means of this option, the system provides a way to order the
machining depending on the cutting quality assigned to each contour.
▪ No: If selected, the system will not order the machining based on cutting qualities.
▪ By sheet: The machine will cut first all the contours whose cutting quality coincides with
the chosen list.
▪ By part: The selected order on the dialogue will be followed for each part. When one
part has been finished, the machine will go to order the qualities of another part.
130
Given the case any of the last 2 options is selected, the system will display the following dialog
box in order to select the desired quality to apply, which can be based either in cutting qualities
or in types of cut:
Figure 96: Put in order by qualities dialog box
• Cut contained contours by zones: This option is used by machines of two axis. One of
these axes allows arriving to all areas of the cutting machine and the other axis has a less
course though it is speeder. There are many machines whose speed movement axis can
cover a large area in the market so for this reason now it is possible to choose the exact
moment to cut those contours outside the area. This option provides a drop-down list
with the following options:
▪ No
▪ By path in X
▪ By path in Y
• Whenever either By path in X or By path in Y are selected the navigation button next to
them will be enabled and will display Zone position dialog box.
131
Figure 97: Zone position dialog box
Here the user can select Positions between Fixed, Minimum position and Maximum position
options. It is also possible to introduce the Length of the zone in millimeters. In addition, Order of
the contours that do not fit into the zone parameter provides two options; At the end and As soon
as possible.
• Orthogonality tolerance: This parameter will become enabled whenever Start point and
direction option is selected (both in machining order By parts and By contours). It defines
the maximum distance between two holes to be considered in the same cutting line.
• Cut in zig-zag: Depending on the selected starting corner, the machining will go in the
selected direction, going back if cut in zigzag option is enabled. In the following table,
there are all the combinations between directions and zigzag for one corner.
• Corner: The point selected in this field will be the first corner of the machining process.
• Direction: The system will follow the direction selected in this field. The user will be able
to select between Horizontal and Vertical.
• Last side: If enabled, the figure of the sheet will be displayed and the selected side of the
sheet will be the last one to be machined.
• Number of zones: X and Y are the number of zones on which the sheet will be divided.
The user will be able to introduce an Offset percentage as well as to enable Visualize
checkbox.
• Update initial point in each reposition: This parameter is for machining working with
work zones, and consists of updating the corner from which the first element to be cut is
to be found for each cutting zone. It is intended to make the movements between the
last element of the last cut zone and the one of the new zone as short as possible.
132
Mark and Cycles Sequence
Figure 98: Automatic Machining – Cut – Mark and cycles sequence
• Mark by parts: This option is used to select the text marking sequence. The usual marking
sequence is to mark at the beginning and after cutting all the parts. If enabled, this
option will activate all the following options.
• Mark when cutting the parts: If enabled the system will mark the parts when cutting
them.
• Milling cycles execution order: This option allows establishing the order in which milling
cycles will be executed. It will be available after activating the “Cycles when cutting the
parts” option. The user can decide the moment in which each milling cycle associated to a
part should be executed.
The user can choose between the following options:
▪ Before cutting the holes: The system will execute milling cycles before cutting the
interior contours of a part. This option is equivalent to the previous functioning mode.
▪ After cutting the holes: The system will execute milling cycles after cutting the interior
contours of a part.
133
▪ At the same time as cutting the holes: The system will execute milling cycles at the same
time as it is cutting the interior contours of a part. The system will order the interior
cutting operations and milling operations according to the value set in the “Order mode
of the holes” field.
For example, if the By proximity criterion is selected (as shown in the image below), the system
will execute milling cycles and cut interior contours at the same time and, for the operations
order, it will take into account the distance existing between them.
Figure 99: Order mode of the holes option
• Inkjet texts when cutting the parts: This option allows the user modifying the marking
sequence, proceeding with the cut after the inkjet marking of each part. Therefore, the
sequence will be: mark part 1, cut part 1, mark part 2, cut part 2, and so on.
• Cycles when cutting the parts: This option allows the user to define the marking
sequence to be done in automatic machining. If the parameter is on, the cycles will be
done before finishing the machining of each part.
134
• Order cycles by: The user will be able to choose between X-Axis, Y-Axis and Nearest.
• Generate cycles before mark: If enabled, the system will generate cycles before marking.
• Generate cut and other technologies in the same subprogram: If enabled, and only if the
system is configured to generate the cutting and marking into the same subroutine, the
system will do so.
Advanced
Figure 100: Automatic Machining – Cut – Advanced configuration
• Group cycles on Lead-ins by rows/columns of parts: Thanks to this option, it is possible to

group some cycles by rows or by columns.
• Generation of labels: This parameter indicates whether labels will be generated or not, as
well as which one will be the label type. The user will be able to select between No
generate, By parts and By group.
• Orthogonality tolerance: This parameter indicates the maximum tolerance (respecting

the X or Y axis) between two parts to be considered as they are in the same column or
row.
135
Modify Lead in/outs
1.24.1.7.1 General
Figure 101: Automatic Machining – Cut – Modify Lead-in/Lead-outs – General configuration
• Modify Lead-in/outs position: The user can select between the following options:
▪ No: If selected, the system will not perform any modification.
▪ Smooth tool path: This option allows to move the Lead-in/outs automatically to avoid
strong movements between them. Therefore, if after a Lead-out there is a rapid, the
system will try to smooth this movement by moving the rapid tangent to the Lead-out.
The user will have to introduce the Angular error tolerance, Number of passes, Number
of test for each contour and It can reverse contours checkbox.
▪ Place in one touch figures: This option allows modifying the Lead-in position and
prioritizing their placement in notches. When enabled, Number of test for each contour
and It can reverse contours options will be enabled.
▪ Place by proximity: By means of this option the user can place the Lead-in/outs in such a
way that the distance between the Lead-out and the next Lead-in is reduced to the
minimum.
• Modify Lead-in/outs data: The user will be able to select between the following options:
▪ Put the Lead-in/out in bisector ( ): This option modifies the Lead-in/out to the bisector
of the existing Lead-in/outs. When selecting the Navigation button, a dialog box will be
displayed.
136
▪ Put the Lead-out like the Lead-in ( ): This option modifies the Lead-out similar to the
Lead-in.
▪ Modify tangent arc Lead-in by 2 segments ( ): This option allows the user to convert a
tangent arc´s Lead-in to segments Lead-in.
1.24.1.7.2 Apply a GAP
Figure 102: Automatic Machining – Cut – Modify Lead-in/Lead-outs – Apply a GAP configuration
• Apply a GAP in Leads-in/Leads-out: With this option the user can apply a GAP (Micro-
joints at the end of the contour) in all the contours of the part. The system will leave a
GAP before ending each contour. There are two restrictions.
• Type of Lead-in/out: Select between the following options:
• Maximum angle to apply the GAP: Introduce the maximum angle to apply the GAP.
• Value (d1): Select between:
▪ Fixed: If the user wants the gap to be based on a fixed value then select Fixed value. It is
possible to enter the required fixed value in Value field.
▪ Percentage of sheet thickness: If the user wants the gap to be based on the sheet
thickness select this option. Introduce the sheet thickness percentage in Value field.
▪ Automatic depending on cutter radius: If the user wants the gap value to be calculated
automatically based on the radius value select this option. Set the Offset (d2) field.
• Offset (d2): The user will be able to select between the options shown below:
137
▪ No: Offset is not required.
▪ Fixed: Set a fixed offset distance.
▪ Percentage of cutter radius: Set the offset based on cutter radius percentage.
▪ Percentage of sheet thickness: Set the offset based on sheet thickness percentage.
Figure 103: Offset example
Machining by Zones
Figure 104: Automatic Machining – Machining by zones configuration
• Machining by zones: This option allows cutting the parts by zones and extracting their
remnants whenever finishing the cut. This is normally used in case of very big sheets
which are always moved in the same directions where it is necessary to cut and extract
the sheet framework at the same time. With this type of machines, it is also possible to
nest by zones and cut each zone separately. Working this way causes less sheet usage.
Select the required mode from the Machining by zones window, where you will also be
able to indicate the length per each zone.
• Length of the zones: Introduce the required length of the zones.
Inside the machine configuration of machining by zones it is necessary to configure a series of

parameters:
138
▪ Nesting by zones: When selecting this option, it is possible to nest the parts
automatically by zones. Click the navigation button attached to this option and Nesting
by zone dialog box will be displayed:
Figure 105: Nesting by zones dialog box
▪ Zone offset: Margin of the zone.
▪ Overlay zones: This option allows the user to overlap the different zones. If this option
is activated, the new zone will begin at a specific distance before the end of the
previous zone.
▪ Margin between zones: The margins between zones. The user will need to select
between The separation of parts, Twice the separation of parts and Value
▪ Minimum length for each zone: Here the user will be able to define the minimum length
for each zone.
▪ Minimum length for the last zone: Here the user will be able to define the minimum
length the last zone.
▪ Create a remnant line: By selecting this option, the user will be able to define the
remnant line. It will be possible to define the remnant line type (Linear, True Shape
(Real), and True Shape), Minimum width, Minimum length of the sheet to put the
remnant line, as well as the Distance from the parts (The separation of parts, The semi-
separation of parts and Value).
139
▪ The True shape remnant line that the system uses is the true shape line formed by
segments. The line does not make full use in all cases of the holes that exist between
the parts that delimit the line. However, the True shape (real) allows the user to choose
as remnant line the true shape line that tries to follow the shape of the contours of the
parts that it is delimiting. In this way, it is possible to gain material which may be usable
for the next zone.
• Cut by zones: This option allows cutting the parts by zones and extracting their remnants
whenever finishing the cut. It is useful for machines that use very big sheets, which are
always moved in the same directions and where it is necessary to cut and extract the
sheet framework at the same time.
With this type of machines, it is also possible to nest by zones and cut each zone separately.
Working this way causes less sheet usage. It is possible to select which one of the two modes
available is required from the Machining by zones window, where the user will also be able to
indicate the length per each zone. When selecting the Navigation button, the following dialog
box is displayed:
Figure 106: Cut by zones dialog box
Configure the following parameters:
▪ Generate remnant line: This option indicated that it is required to cut the sheet
framework or, on the contrary, it is only required to cut the parts by zones.
▪ Previous offset to move to zone line (p): This is previous offset margin that the system
will use in order to find the best coordinate to carry out the cut of the remnant line.
140
▪ Next offset to move the zone line (n): It is the succeeding offset margin that the system
will use in order to find the best coordinate to carry out the cut of the remnant line.
▪ Vertical head offset: It indicates the distance from which the machine will start cutting
from the sheet edge. Normally, the distance is the half of the cutter radius, given that it
will be used to make sure that the cut is executed on the material.
▪ Maximum distance to eliminate the last cut line (m): This indicates the distance of the
sheet border from which it will be possible to cut the remnant line, given that the area
of the sheet left is considerably small.
Component Removal
This section allows assigning evacuators to all sheet parts. The system provides two different
configurations for evacuations of parts and holes, whose options will be shown in two different
tabs. All the parameters are the same but they will be applied for parts or for hole depending on
which tab the user configures them.
Figure 107: Automatic Machining – Component Removal
• Put a stop: After every evacuation movement, the machine can be stopped if this option
is enabled. If selected, some parameters must be configured.
• Micro-joints: If selected the system will automatically apply micro-joints as evacuation

method depending on the values given on the following parameters. When selecting the
Navigation button, the following dialog box is displayed:
141
Figure 108: Micro-joints dialog box
▪ The width of micro-joints is a thickness factor: If this parameter is enables, there are
two values to configure: Factor of thickness for corner micro-joints and Factor of
thickness for middle micro-joints.
▪ Maximum length without micro-joints: This is the maximum distance allowed to part
contours without micro-joints.
• Move the Lead-in/out: The system will try to move the Lead-in/out in order to improve the
manual part removal, always trying to leave the head in the best position.
• Number of attempts: The number here introduced refers to the number of attempts the
system will use in order to move the Lead-in/out.
• Lead-in/out placement: The user can choose where to place the Lead-in/out and the
system will calculate the best position for each part.
• Retain Lead-in/outs defined in part: If the part has Lead-in/outs previously assigned and
this option is enabled, the system will use them. If disabled, the system will erase them
and look for the best position in order to make easier the manual part removal.
• Minimum radius: If the part or hole to evacuate is smaller than this minimum radius, the
system will not remove it from the sheet.
• Removal speed: This parameter allows configuring the speed of the lift system removal.
• Dwell time: This is the delay time for closing the tramp. Sometimes the tramp closes early
and the part cannot go into the box. This value adjusts the time the tramp remains open.
142
Time Calculation
Cutting Parameters
General
Figure 109: Time calculation – Cutting parameters – General configuration
• Piercing time: This is the time the machine takes to perform a piercing. The user will be
able to select between three options:
▪ Fixed: Expert will add one second each time the machine executes a piercing.
▪ By thickness: The system will multiply the value here introduced (by default, 1,000 s) by
the thickness.
▪ Tables of technology: The system will get the value from the Tables of technology.
• Piercing time percentage for pre-cut or pre-punched points: Thanks to this parameter
the user is allowed to define the piercing time, when the piercing point is pre-cut or pre-
punched, in relation with the regular piercing time.
• Cut & mark speed: These are the speeds for making time calculations.
▪ Active: Means that Expert will make the time estimation with the current active speed.
▪ Tables of technology: Means the speed will be taken from the Tables of technology.
143
• Beveled speed: The time calculation can use different bevel speeds depending on the
bevel angle, material-thickness and technology table that is being used at each time. This
parameter may have the following values:
o Active: The system will always use the beveled speed of the machine.
o Tables of technology by angles: The system will use the cutting speed defined in
the tables of technology for the bevel angle that is being cut in every case. The
user must configure that the tables of technology can be defined by bevel angles
(A036 parameter of the CF file of the machine ON) and configure the cutting
speeds for the different bevel angle ranges and tables of technology.
o Tables of technology by thickness: By means of this option, the system will use the
cutting speed defined in the tables of technology for the thickness that is being
cut in a particular element with bevel. That is to say, depending on the bevel
angle, the system will calculate the cutting thickness of such bevel and will use
the cutting speed defined for such particular thickness in the tables of
technology. This way, it will not be necessary to define the tables of technology
by bevel angle (A036 parameter of the CF file of the machines OFF).
• Angle for beveled speed: Thanks to this parameter the user may configure the bevel
angle that will be used to determine the beveled speed:
▪ Final vector: The inclination angle of the head will be used at the end of the element.
▪ Initial vector: The inclination angle of the head will be used at the beginning of the
element.
▪ Largest of the vectors: The highest inclination angle of the head will be used in the
element.
▪ Final of the bevel: The angle of the defined level will be used at the end of the element.
▪ Initial of the bevel: The angle of the defined level will be used at the Initial point of the
element.
▪ Largest of the bevel: The system will use the largest bevel angle defined in the element.
144
• Flying cut calculation mode: This parameter is used to define the value to be taken by
speeds in rapids and cuts in this type of cut. There are four modes:
▪ Default: Uses the time of the rapids in the rapids and the time of cutting in the cuts,
starting in each case with the head stopped.
▪ Cutting speed only in tangential: In this mode, the rapids and cuts are treated at the
cutting speed in the case that they are moving tangentially to the cutting elements. In
those cases when it is necessary to change the direction to make a rapid, it will be done
at rapid speed.
▪ Always at cutting speed: All the movements involved in the flying cut will be done at
cutting speed.
▪ Use cutting and rapids time: The defined time will be used for each of the two types of
movement. The difference with the first mode is that it will never start from zero, but
with the speed that the last movement finished.
• Flying cut piercing time: This parameter allows defining a specific time that will be
applied to each cutting element as a time of piercing. The user can choose from the
following options:
▪ None: No ignition time will be applied.
▪ By quality: The time defined for each cutting quality will be applied.
▪ Cutting quality: The specific time of one of the cutting qualities will be applied.
• Cancellation time: This is the time the machine takes to stop everything after the
machining process. It is possible to define whether to calculate the cut stop time
considering a fixed value or those values given in the technology tables. Given that this
parameter consists in cut stop time calculation considering the values given in the
technological tables, is only valid for water machines and regards values such as: Final
time (cutting) or Abrasive cancellation time.
• Axis accelerations with jerk limitation: This parameter indicates whether time calculation
needs to consider these limitations or not and which type of calculation will be made.
The user will be able to select between the following options in the drop-down list:
145
▪ No: The time calculation will not consider these limitations.
▪ Using kinematic models: For time calculation in progressive accelerations and

decelerations, the jerk kinematic formulas will be used.
▪ Using kinematic models with fixed time intervals: The system will use the same
formulas as the previous parameter, but in elements with small length it will be
approximated to fixed time intervals (execution time of a machine cycle) instead of
using the time of the formula.
• Jerk in X and Y-axis: Jerk axis in X and Y-axis which specify how the accelerations and
decelerations increase and decrease gradually in each axis.
• Modify compensation for time calculation: In order to obtain an optimum time

calculation, it might be interesting for the time calculation to make use of a different
compensation to the one used in the system to generate the CNC. Here the user will be
able to select any of the following four options in the drop-down list:
▪ No: The time calculation will not use a different compensation.
▪ System compensation – By default: The time calculation will use the system
compensation. The compensation mode used will also be the one defined in the system.
▪ System compensation – Compensation mode: The time calculation will use the system
compensation. The compensation mode can be defined by the user in following
Compensation mode field.
Figure 110: Time compensation
▪ CN compensation: The time calculation will use Control compensation.
146
Technology Change
Figure 111: Time calculation – Cutting Parameters – Technology change configuration
• Times of technology changes: The following ones are the times the machine takes for
changing the current technology, which are normally very short time durations:
Quality Change
Figure 112: Time calculation – Cutting parameters – Quality change configuration
• Times of quality changes: When using different cutting qualities, the changing time
between each one should be set by filling the table previously shown.
147
Reposition / Extractions
Figure 113: Time calculation – Reposition / Extractions configuration
• Reposition: In this section the user can specify the time the machines take to perform a
reposition. It is divided into the following sections:
▪ Head: Down time and Up time are the times to lower and raise the head when doing a
reposition.
▪ Pistons: Down time and Up time are the times the pistons take for making down and up
movements.
▪ Auxiliar time: This value will be added to reposition time estimation. It depends on the
way each machine performs the repositions.
• Component removal: This section refers to the time the evacuation system will take in
order to get a component from the sheet.
▪ Extract time with lift: The time of evacuation by lift will take set up depending on the
lift and the movement it makes.
▪ Extract time using work chute: Here the user will be able to define the Dwell time,
Opening and Close for traps.
148
Rapid Accelerations
In this window the user will have to configure the speeds and accelerations of the machine in the
table provided.
Figure 114: Time calculation – Rapid Accelerations configuration
• New: Click this button to create new acceleration parameters.
• Delete: Click this button to delete the required acceleration parameter.
Linear Cut Accelerations

In this window the user can configure the speeds, accelerations and decelerations of the
machine.
Figure 115: Time calculation – Linear cut Accelerations configuration
149
• Maximum speed (90º): The user will be able to select between Active and Tables of
technology.
• Speed: Here it is possible to define the maximum speed at which the machine can cut a
corner of 90º.
• New: Click this button to create new acceleration/deceleration parameters.
• Delete: Click this button to delete the required acceleration/deceleration parameters.
Circular Cut Accelerations

In this window the user will have to configure the acceleration/deceleration values of the
machine in the table provided.
Figure 116: Time calculation - Circular Cut Accelerations configuration
• New: Click this button to create new acceleration/deceleration parameters.
• Delete: Click this button to delete the required acceleration/deceleration parameter.
150
No Cut
This window allows setting up the time Expert will add to estimation when one of these
postprocessor words is going to be executed.
Figure 117: Time calculation – No cut configuration
• Optional stop time: Here the user can set the optional stop time.
• Unconditional stop time: Here the user can set the unconditional stop time.
• Refrigeration: Time the refrigeration system of the machine takes to work. The user can
set Activation time and Cancellation time.
• Head: When Head-up or Head-down words are found in the CNC code, Expert will use the
times set here in Up time and Down time fields.
• Consider head heights of the technological table: Whenever this parameter is enabled
the time calculation will calculate the up and down times according to the height of the
cut, the height of the rapids and the height of the piercings defined in the Table of
Technology.
• Sheet Clamps: Here the user will be able to set the Blocking time, Up time, Down time,
Cancellation time (OUT), Cancellation time (OFF), Opening time and Closing time of the
sheet clamps.
151
Upload/Download Sheets
Figure 118: Time calculation – Upload / Download Sheets configuration
• Upload times: Here the user will be able to set the Manual upload time, Automatic upload
time, Clamps test time and Auxiliar time.
• Download times: Here the user will be able to set the Manual download time, Automatic
download time and Auxiliar time.
Cost Calculation
Lantek Expert will perform the sheet of job cost calculation if the following values are configured
properly. They will give a different cost to each different entity that is part of the sheet or job.
Figure 119: Cost calculation configuration
• Area: The following are the different options to configure the part area to be used in cost
calculation:
152
▪ Rectangle area: Minimum boundary box of the part.
▪ External area: External area of the part with internal holes.
▪ Real area: External area of the part without internal holes.
▪ Rectangle with offset: When selecting this option, the system will increase the size
(offset) of the element only for calculation of cost for the minimum boundary box of
the part.
▪ External with offset: When selecting this option, the system will increase the size
(offset) of the element only for calculation of cost for external area of the part with
internal holes.
▪ Real with offset: When selecting this option, the system will increase the size (offset) of
the element only for calculation of cost for the external area of the part without
internal holes.
In order to work with offset the user will have to navigate to Cost of material window and
configure the required Offset and Minimum radius for holes.
The selected type of area is used to calculate the necessary material used to produce the part,
which in turn is used to calculate the cost of the part.
• New: Click this option to fill in the table with Material type and Thicknesses and create a
new record.
• Configure…: Click this button in order to access the table where the cost parameters for
all the machining operations can be set up. The system will display Costs consumables
dialog box when selecting Cost of consumables option or Cost of material dialog box
when selecting Cost of material option. Cost of consumables dialog box will display five
parameters which will determine how the calculation will be made:
▪ Operation: The operation selected here will be included into the cost calculation each
time the machining executes it. The operations will be different depending on the
machine type.
▪ Mode: The mode determines how the cost given in the value parameter will be added
into the calculation.
153
▪ Consumables: The consumables can be defined together with the price of volume unit in
the Raw materials option of the system.
▪ Value: This parameter will increase the total expense of the machining process
depending on the calculation mode.
▪ Units: Number of units.
• Delete: Click this button in order to delete the selected record from the table.
• Copy: This option is very useful when the configuration of different materials and/or
thicknesses is similar. By means of this option the user can copy all the cost configuration
parameters into a new material/thickness assignation.
• Criteria: The list of materials and thicknesses can be filtered by means of this option. The
system will only show the range set in this window. The "< >" character means any
material.
Ink-Jet
Figure 120: Ink-Jet configuration
• Automatic: If enabled, the system will introduce the Ink-jet text introduced here on every
part of the sheet automatically.
• Marking type: This field provides a drop-down list where the user can select the required
type of marking.
154
o Written text: This marking type add written text to the parts.
o QR code: This marking type adds a QR code to the parts.
o Template: This type creates an instruction in which the rectangle size of the text
is defined, in order to simulate the space it occupies in the part and treat it.
• Text data: The text given here will be marked into the part. Introduce the required values
in Length of one character, Height of one character, Horizontal separation between
characters, Vertical separation between characters and Correct position.
• Correct position: The values of the Offset (X and Y) will determine the distance between
the external contour of the part and the marked text. But if there is a hole where the
marked text should be, the user can configure the distance from the initial point at which
the system should try again. This distance will be introduced in Search Step field X and Y.
In addition, the user will be able to select the starting point at which to try to insert these
texts by clicking on any of the 9 available positions of the image on the right.
• Rotate the text with the part: The text will be marked in the part always in the same
position as the part is placed in the nesting.
• Delete the text if it does not fit in the part: If enabled, the system will delete the text
that does not fit in the part. This option will only be activated once Rotate the text with
the part checkbox is activated.
• Reference text: With this option the user can define the reference text for the Ink-jet
marking. Every time this reference text is found in a part, the system will replace it by the
text previously introduced in Text field.
155
Postprocessor
General
Figure 121: Postprocessor general configuration
156
• Machine tolerance: It refers to the precision of decimal numbers that the machine
supports. It is important to configure this parameter properly because if the system is
sending coordinates with different precision, the machine may not work correctly.
• Postprocessor configuration file: This is the name of the specific postprocessor file.
Manipulating this file will result in CNC code generation way changes. Also the user can
edit the PS parameters of the Postprocessor configuration file.
• Tables of technology file: This is the name where the technological tables’ values will be
stored. The user can edit PS parameters of this file.
• Time calculation file: This file will contain time calculation parameters, here the name of
the file can be configured. Also the user can edit the PS parameters of the time
calculation file.
• Cost calculation file: The cost calculation parameters will be stored in this file, here the
name can be set up. The user can edit PS parameters of the file.
• Seed file: The user will be able to visualize the seed file of the active machine.
• Technological configuration file: The user will be able to visualize the Technological
configuration file which provides all the general data.
• Material/thickness dependent data: The user will be able to visualize all the
material/thickness dependent data, which is the same file as Technology table file, but
can be located in a different path. If the path coincides, this one will be enabled.
• Data for the postprocessor file: The user can visualize the Data for the postprocessor file.
• Communication configuration file: The user can visualize de Communication

configuration file.
• Pallet file: The user can visualize the Pallet file.
157
Block Numbering
Figure 122: Postprocessor Block Numbering Configuration
• Block number text: Each CNC block will start with the character given here. However, the
block number hast to be configured through the following parameters:
• Number of characters allowed for block number: It refers to the digits that the block
number will have. For example, if the text of block number is N:
▪ N00001…
▪ N00002…
▪ N00003…
• Strip leading zero´s: If enabled, the system will delete the zeros of the CNC block
numeration.
• First block number: The number of the first block can be set up here.
• Step between block numbers: The line for each block of the CNC code will start with the
Text of block numbers and the First block number for the first block, and the rest of lines
will increase the number of the value given here on this parameter.
158
Free Tape
Figure 123: Postprocessor Free tape configuration
• Number of null characters at beginning: Indicates the number of null characters at the
beginning of the file for synchronization.
• Number of null characters at end: This is the number of null characters at the end of the
CNC code which will be output from the system.
• ASCII code of null characters: American Standard Code for Information Interchange of
null characters.
Specifics of Cut
Figure 124: Postprocessor Specifics of cut configuration
159
• Default technology: This technology will be applied to the geometry. The user can select
between Cut and Mark.
• Dot cycle by default: The postprocessor is going to apply this default dot cycle if there is
not any specific cycle applied in Machining / Cycles section. For all the dots drawn on the
drawing module, the system will introduce the cycle type chosen here between Drill cycle
or Cut on and off.
• Technological index by default: Depending on the default technology, the index given
here will be applied to the geometry from the moment it has been generated. Clicking
the navigation button the system will show a dialogue with all the cutting qualities.
• Circles in one movement only: The Numeric Control needs a specific instruction in order
to generate a circle. Normally the system divides the circle into two arcs which execute
two instructions. This parameter should be enabled so that Numeric Controls work
properly and circles are created only in one movement.
• Modify the center of the circles: When the tolerance of the machine is small, the system
changes the center of the circles for making those points recognizable for the machine.
• Arcs in one movement only: When there is a micro-joint inserted in a circle, the resultant
arc is below 360º and, normally, is divided into two arcs. If enabled, the system will
generate this arc in just one instruction.
• Type of leading in circles: In this field the user will be able to select between the
following options:
▪ No: The postprocessor is going to use the configuration made in automatic lead-in/out
on circles.
▪ Linear: Independent of the configuration made in automatic lead-in/out on circles, the

CNC code will be generated placing a lineal lead-in whose length will be specified on the
Length of leading in circles parameter.
▪ Circular: The postprocessor will not take into account the configuration made on the
system, and it will place a circular lead-in on circles whose length will be taken from the
Length of leading in circles parameter.
160
• Linear tolerance: This value is the linear tolerance for calculations of the system. It should
be the same as the value configured in Utilities / Configure machines / General / Linear
tolerance.
• Angular tolerance: The system will use this angular tolerance value for calculations. It
should be the same as the value given in Utilities / Configure machines / General /
Angular tolerance.
• Length of leading in circles: If there are arc geometries smaller than the machine
tolerance, the system will decompose them into one or more segments whose length will
be the configured at Length of broken segments parameter.
• Minimum length of arc: If there are smaller arc geometries than the machine tolerance,
the system will decompose them into more segments whose length will be the one
configured at Length of broken segments parameter.
• Length of broken segments: The value introduced in this field will be the maximum
length for a segment.
• Process micro-joints like micro-welds: This option can be only used for those machines
that support micro-welding technology. If enabled, the system will order the machine to
use micro-welding instead of micro-joint instructions.
• Centre the multihead: When a machine is multihead, there is always one which is the
Control Head. All the heads follow the control head movement. If this control head is not
placed on corners, the system must know which head will be the control head. If enabled
and if the number of heads is odd, the system will take the head of the center. If the
number of heads is par, it will take the most centered one nearest to the position of the
control head.
161
Reserved
Figure 125: Postprocessor Reserved Configuration
Do not modify these parameters without consulting a skilled technician, they are internal
parameters and may cause machine damage if they are changed without knowledge.
162
Jobs (CAM) Module
2 JOBS (CAM) MODULE

Jobs module, also known as CAM, is the first window that will be opened as soon as Lantek
Expert is launched. From here, the user can easily access to the rest of the Modules, create jobs
and folders, import parts, manage parts/sheets/materials, manage exporters, import and export
nestings, manage Databases and customize the ribbon between many other options. The main
view is provided with the Job Explorer, Product List and Sheet List sections as shown below:
Figure 126: Jobs (CAM) module
JOBS
Close
Close ( ) option allows the user to close the active job.
Recents
This section provides information about the Recent jobs and Recent kits opened. From here the
user can open any of them.
163
Jobs (CAM) Module
Jobs
New ( ) option allows the user creating new jobs. In order to Create a new job, perform the
following steps:
1. Click New option and the system will display Job dialog box as shown below:
Figure 127: Job dialog box
2. Introduce the required data in the fields provided. The different fields in this dialog box are
briefly described below:
• Reference: Unique reference code assigned to the job. The system assigns automatically
this code.
• Name: Name of the job.
• User data (1-5): Data of the job. The user can also navigate to the existing Data list and
select the required element or enter a new element, which will be added in the Data list
for future use.
• Description: Additional details of the job.
3. Click OK button in order to save the changes.
164
Jobs (CAM) Module
Open ( ) option allows the user opening an existing job. In order to open an existing job,
select the required job from the existing list and the system will open it.
Edit ( ) option allows the management of jobs so that the user can modify the required
data. Click this option and the system will display Jobs dialog box as shown below:
Figure 128: Jobs window
4. The different fields of this dialog box are briefly described in the following lines:
• Delete associated elements: If enabled, the associated elements of the job will be
deleted.
• Delete parametric elements only: If enabled, the parametric elements of the job will be
deleted. This field will only be available when Delete associated elements checkbox is
selected.
• Delete the manufacturing order associated to the job: If enabled, the manufacturing
order associated to the job will be deleted.
• Export: Select this option in order to export a job. Perform the following steps:
165
Jobs (CAM) Module
5. Select the job that to be exported and click Export. The system will display Directory dialog
box.
6. Select the required folder from this dialog box and click Select.
7. The selected job will be exported.
• Create: Select this option in order to create a new job. Perform the following steps:
1. Click Create button and the system will display Job dialog box.
2. Introduce the required details in the dialog box provided and click OK.
3. The created job will appear in the list of Jobs dialog box.
• Modify: Select this option to modify the information of an existing job. Perform the
following steps:
1. Select the job whose information is required to be modified. Click Modify and the system will
display Job dialog box.
2. Modify the required information and click OK button in order to save the changes.
• Delete: Select this option in order to delete a job. Perform the following steps:
1. Select the job that is required to be deleted. Click Delete button.

2. The system will display a warning message asking whether the user wants to delete the
selected job.
3. Click Yes and the selected job will be deleted.
• Close: Select this button in order to close Jobs dialog box.
Quotation Jobs
From this menu, the user will be able to create, open and manage quotations jobs.
Kits
New ( ) option allows the user creating new kits. In order to Create a new kit, perform the
following steps:
1. Click New option and the system will display Kit dialog box as shown below:
166
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 129: Kit dialog box
2. Introduce the required data in the fields provided. The different fields in this dialog box are
briefly described below:
• Reference: Unique reference code assigned to the kit. The system assigns automatically
this code.
• Name: Name of the kit.
• User data (1-5): Data of the kit. The user can also navigate to the existing Data list and
select the required element or enter a new element, which will be added in the Data list
for future use.
• Description: Additional details of the kit.
Open ( ) option allows the user opening an existing kit. In order to open an existing kit,
perform the following steps, select the required kit from the existing list and the system will
open it.
167
Jobs (CAM) Module
Edit ( ) option allows the management of kits so that the user can modify the required
data. Click this option and the system will display Kits dialog box as shown below:
Figure 130: Kits dialog box
Information
Properties ( ) allows the user viewing and editing the information related to the active job.
When selected, the system will display Job dialog box, in which the user can introduce the
reference, name and user data, as well as the description of the job selected.
Export ( ) allows the user exporting the current job with all the necessary information,
such as parts, nestings and machining backup files between many others to the required
directory.
In order to Export a job, perform the following steps:
1. Select the job to be exported and then click Export. The system will display Database dialog box
as shown below:
168
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 131: Database dialog box
2. Introduce the Directory in which the job will be exported, or click Navigation button in order to
select it.
3. Click OK button and the system will export the selected job (The user will be able to visualize
System is working loading window until the loading process is finished).
4. The selected job will be exported with all the necessary information such as parts, nesting,
machines back up files, etc.
Subjobs ( ) comprise the different parts that compose a job grouped by machine, material
and thickness. Therefore, a job will contain as many subjobs as machine-material-thickness
combinations. When selecting this option, the Subjob selection dialog box is displayed:
Figure 132: Subjob selection dialog box
• Modify: When clicking this button, the system will display a dialog box in which the user
will be able to modify the Machine, Material and Thickness of the selected job.
• Close: This button allows closing Subjob selection dialog box.
If a quotation job is active , the options provided in Information menu will change, allowing
the user to manage the Properties and the Subjobs of the active quotation job.
169
Jobs (CAM) Module
Help
In this section, the user will find useful information in Documents and Online Resources.
User Guide option enables getting instructions and suggestions to work more effectively
and proficiently. Whenever it is selected the user will be provided with two options in the drop-
down list:
Contents of the help system option will open the online help designed to give assistance in
the use of the software application.
Tutorial option introduces all the important modules, basic concepts and relevant
functionalities of the software.
New Features option allows the user discovering all the new features and enhancements
included in this new software version.
Technical information option provides information related to specification and technical

requirements of the system.
Web Page option provides access to our Main Page and Product Home Page. The Main
Page displays all information related to our company, solutions, products, support, partners,
news, events and customers. On the other hand, the Product Home Page provides all the
technical characteristics, technology, advantages, specifications and management of the
product.
Register option allows the user obtaining the rights to the guarantee and access to
technical information and support. There are two types of register:
▪ Web registration: The user can fill in the registry form in our Website.
▪ Manual registration: The user can introduce the required information, read the license
agreement in detail and accept it before sending it.
Send comments and suggestions option, as the name indicates, allows the user informing
Lantek of any comments and/or suggestions.
170
Jobs (CAM) Module
Contact technical support option will open support section of our website where the user
will be able to contact Technical Support Department and Customer Service.
In addition to the previous options, it is very important to mention that located on the right side
of the window, the user will be provided with information about the Version, Service Pack,
Hotfix, License, Serial Number of the Lantek key and active Server and Database.
Figure 133: About Lantek Expert
Print
This section allows the user printing the Most recent lists and All the installed lists. When clicking
Configure lists option, Lists dialog box is displayed, allowing the user to create new custom lists,
install them or remove them from the list.
Configuration Options
Configuration options section is used to configure different options that are used in Expert
software. By means of this option the user can get all the relevant configuration details at a
glance.
171
Jobs (CAM) Module
The system will display the following:
Figure 134: Configuration options backstage page
All Configuration options will be displayed together with a brief description, which enables the
user to access the required option in a more user-friendly way.
General
Using this option, the user can configure different parameters related to the Nesting module. The
system will display Configure: System window as shown below:
172
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 135: Configure: System window (Main module)
• Units: The system will use the unit system selected as Metric or Imperial. Find below a
couple of tables that detail the units used by the system in each case:
Figure 136: Metric system
173
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 137: Imperial system
• Concurrency management: When either one or more users access to the same job, or the
same user does it from different computers, there is a lack of knowledge from the rest of
users about the fact that this job is being used, what may result in an undesirable
behavior. The aim of this section is to manage this concurrency and avoid this lack of
knowledge.
• Display a warning when the job, kit or part is being used by another user: This parameter
allows configuring the management to detect concurrency of jobs (nestings), kits and
parts (figures).
• Allow to continue when the job, kit or part is being used by another user: This
parameter allows defining the system restrictions when there is concurrency
management. If disabled, the system will not allow accessing to those elements of the
system that are being used by other users.
This configuration must be executed by equipment. Each user can only have one job blocked.
• Work with automatic references: If enabled, the system will automatically create the
automatic references for the newly created parts/sheet. If Mandatory is activated the
user will not be able to edit the created reference.
• Visualize information about the management system: With this option, the user can view
the information related to the management system.
174
Jobs (CAM) Module
• Manage sheets only through Masterlink: This parameter is directed to Expert

integrations so that it is possible to manage sheets either through the system, through
Expert or only by means of Masterlink, executing the creation, modification and deletion
of operations through the engine provided by Masterlink. If activated, the options Create,
Modify and Delete will become disabled both in sheet management of the Main module
and in New sheet option locate in Nesting and Machining module.
• Allow to change the status of the nestings: In this section the user will be able to select
between No, Workshop, Available and Both of them. When any of the last three options is
selected, the option Save as… will be displayed in Nesting and Machining module.
• Allow to unblock available nestings or workshop nestings: If enabled, the system will
unblock all the remnants which have been generated when doing the nesting. This
ensures that the generated remnants will be used for future jobs.
Draw and Nest

This option enables the configuration of the parameters corresponding to Drawing and Nesting.
The system will display Configure: Draw and Nest window, which is composed of six different tabs
that separate the parameters per the following groups:
2.1.9.2.1 General
• Import parts that do not exist: Enable this option to import parts that do not exist.
• Overwrite quantity when importing existent parts: Select this option to overwrite the
quantity of the parts when importing the existent parts, or when a part already exists in
the database with a defined quantity and the user imports the same part again. The
system can be configured to add the quantity of the new part to the previous one or to
replace the old quantity by the new one.
• Warn when changing the material, thickness or machine properties of a part containing
machining, technology or a part that has been nested: Select this option to get a warning
message while changing the material, thickness or a machined part.
When modifying and/or importing a part, if it already had technology assigned or was machined,
the system will allow the user to create a new part coming from the original. If enabled, the
system will allow overwriting the part or creating a new one.
Now the system will warn if the part has been nested. Besides, when the warning is shown, it
says how the part is, whether it has been only machined, or it only has technology or whether it
175
Jobs (CAM) Module
has the three things. When selecting this option, the system allows selecting the Allow to create
a copy of the part option.
• Large icons: This option permits the visualization of the icons of the main window in a
large format.
• Warn if parts without geometry detected when entering Nesting and Machining
module: Select this option to get warning message if parts are detected without
geometry.
• Combine equal parts in the Nesting and Machining module: It is possible to group the
parts with the same reference from a subjob. It may happen that a subjob could have the
same part reference several times because this parts needs to be manufactured for
different manufacturing orders (different sale order, customer, etc.). In such cases, it is
possible to group, visualize and manage these different manufactures like if they were
just one in Nesting and Machining module.
The part quantity to be nested will be the sum of the quantities of the manufacturing orders of
the part. The distribution of the parts in the nesting will be automatically made following some
configurable distribution criteria. The user can configure one of the following distribution
options: Labor ticket, Priority, Quantity, Nested quantity, Pending quantity, Proportional quantity
and Product. The distribution criteria can be applied in a descending or ascending way.
It is also possible to configure if the user wants to group the parts or not when the workshop
sheet is printed.
Figure 138: Put together equal parts in the nesting and machining module dialog box
• Release unnested parts: In order to release unnested parts, select the required option
from the drop-down list provided: No, Always and Ask.
• Release unnested parts of filling hollows free: When importing parts from the database,
the user will have two options depending on a parameter: parts of filling hollows or
normal parts.
176
Jobs (CAM) Module
• Delete the CNC when deleting the nesting: Select this option to delete the CNC code
while deleting the nesting.
• Only one machine, material and thickness for a job: Select this option to make sure that
there is only one machine, material and thickness is used for a particular job.
• Only one machine, material and thickness for a kit: Select this option to make sure that
there is only one machine, material and thickness is used for a particular kit.
• Create a .ZIP file of the exported job: Select this option to create a .zip file of any file
which is being exported. The user can also create a .ZIP file from an exported
manufacturing order. The compressed file will be stored in “Lantek \ Expert \ Export \
M.O. name \”.
• Work with the machine files in network: With this option, the user can work with the
machine files which are in the network, networking with all or some machine files.
Supposing that all the users are on the same network, the way the system will work as
follows:
1. The first user configuring the system to work in this way, the system will copy the local machine
desired file or files into a defined network directory and will start working with this copied file.
2. The following users will be able to join to this network but their local machine files will not be
copied into the network directory.
When clicking the navigation button the system will display Machine files in network dialog box as
shown below:
177
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 139: Machine files in network dialog box
There are some restrictions to work with some machine files:
If the user uses networking with the Material-Thickness files and not with the CT (Technological
Configuration) files, when configuring the CT file to work through the network (in the future) the
user may have problems because the CT parameters will not be copied to the network directory.
The following applications are not working through the network = PrepMach, ExpSetUp and
MchSetUp.
• Automatically refresh the job and kit explorer: This option allows the user to refresh the
tree and to update it in case of changes on the database. Apart from refreshing the
explorers previously mentioned, this option also enables updating the current
manufacturing order, refreshing the active views at the moment of the execution.
In addition, it is possible to configure the system to execute a complete refresh automatically

every certain time. The user can activate or deactivate Automatic refresh option and indicate the
required periodicity for the update in case the option is enabled.
2.1.9.2.2 Auxiliary
• Adjust sheets to sides: If this parameter is activated, the sheets are drawn in one corner
of the graph area. If deactivated the sheets are adjusted to the center of the graph area.
Activation of this parameter is recommended since, if the sheets are drawn in a corner,
more space will be available for the part screens.
• Work with sheet references: If this parameter is disabled all the sheets with the same
thickness, material and size will be assumed to be equal, however if it is enabled it is
possible to differentiate between sheets with the same thickness, material and size, by
giving them a reference name. When creating a new sheet, if this parameter is enabled,
the system will prompt for a reference.
• Automatic sheet references: Using this option the user will be able to define a specific
format in order to automatically obtain sheet references. If this option is enabled, when
clicking on the navigation button the system will display Automatic sheet references
format dialog box as shown below to define the format of the automatic references.
178
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 140: Automatic sheet references format dialog box
When defining the Format, the user can combine the value of the fields Material, Length, Width
and Thickness.
• Automatic remnant references: By means of this parameter the user can configure how
the system will automatically name the remnants generated. It works analogously to the
previous parameter.
• Verify the machining of the sheets while saving: When saving the sheet, the system will
test that the machining process has been done properly looking if all the parts and
contours are machined, there is no overlapping between parts and auxiliary geometry. If
there is any error the system will display a warning message showing where the error is.
If not the system will display All machining on the sheet has been executed completion
message.
• Define the default snap mode: When this option is active, a new button will be displayed
at the snap mode toolbar and it will allow defining the snap mode by default. The
selected option will be displayed with a red frame all around the button. Each time the
user uses another option different than the default option, the system after applying the
option selected will come back to the default option. To disable any default option,
double click on the new button.
• “Undo” option: Undo option is very useful when making changes, given that it allows
going back to previous states of the system. Here the user should decide how many
levels to use in Drawing and Nesting modules. The user will have to select between:
▪ All levels: With this option the system will store in the memory the highest number of
levels possible. It is important to understand that this choice will make the program use
the memory of the computer, so if the amount of RAM memory is small (64 MB or less),
it is not advisable to use this option.
179
Jobs (CAM) Module
▪ Defined number (Number of levels): Instead of all levels, the system allows to configure
the number of levels the program is going to remember for the Undo option. Five
numbers of levels is the value recommended for those computers whose RAM memory
is small (64 MB or less).
• Scale factor for keyboard and wheel zoom: Using this option the user can configure the
scale factor while doing the zoom, both for the keyboard and wheel zoom. The value to
enter as scale factor should be in the range of 0.1 to 100, being 2 the default value. A
smaller value than 1 inverts the zoom behavior, the page up key makes zoom-out and the
page down key makes zoom-in. The same is applicable for the mouse wheel. If the value
is 1 the zoom is not performed.
In case of the mouse wheel, consider the following:
• Moving the mouse wheel forward, the system will perform a zoom–in and moving
backward the system will perform a zoom-out.
• If the mouse right button is pressed while moving forward the mouse wheel, the drawing
will be moved down and if the mouse right button is pressed while moving backward the
mouse wheel, the drawing will be moved up.
• If the mouse left button is pressed while moving forward the mouse wheel, the drawing
will be moved to the left and if the mouse right button is pressed while moving backward
the mouse wheel, the drawing will be moved to the right.
• Keeping the middle button pressed while dragging the mouse the user pans the screen.
• Keeping the middle button and shift key pressed while dragging the mouse the user does
a dynamic zoom. As mouse cursor moves up the screen view should zoom in. As the
mouse cursor moves down the screen view should zoom out. To configure the mouse
sensibility or change its behavior it is possible to change this parameter:
▪ Parameter >= 1.0 up = zoom in; down = zoom out.
▪ 0.0 < parameter < 1.0 up = zoom out; down = zoom in
• Quadrant angle: This is the angle in which the circles are going to be divided. The default
angle is 90 degrees, therefore there are four possible points.
180
Jobs (CAM) Module
• Use: When calculating the material optimization, the user will have to select between the
following three options:
▪ Real area: This is the external area without the interiors.
▪ External area: This is the area of the exterior perimeter of the part.
▪ Rectangular area: This is the area of the minimum rectangle of the part.
• Generate windows metafile of the workshop sheet while saving (WMF): When saving,
the system will generate a WMF file with the current workshop sheet nesting. The WMF is
a standard graphic format which can be treated from many external applications. The file
will be generated inside Database folder.
• Generate windows metafiles for printing reports while saving (WMF): When saving, the
system will generate a WMF file with the current sheet nesting. The WMF is a standard
graphic format which can be treated from many external applications. The file will be
generated inside Database folder.
• Generate PDF of part workshop sheet while saving: By means of this option, the system
will generate PDF documents with the workshop sheet of the selected part when saving
the parts and nestings. The user may customize the folder in which the pdf files will be
generated. In addition, it is also possible to select whether the pdf file will be generated
with the name by default or with the same name of the CNC associated to the sheet.
• Generate PDF of sheet workshop sheet while saving: With this option, PDF documents
will be generated with the workshop sheet of the selected sheet when saving the parts
and nestings. Every time a part or a nesting is saved, the corresponding workshop sheet
PDF will be generated. The user may customize the folder in which the pdf files will be
generated. In addition, it is also possible to select whether the pdf file will be generated
with the name by default or with the same name of the CNC associated to the sheet.
• Generate sheet DXF while saving: As the Generate sheet windows metafile while saving
(WMF) option, if enabled, the system will generate a DXF file. DXF files are standard
drawing exchange formats. When saving, the system will generate a DXF file with the
current sheet nesting.
• Generate part DXF while saving: Same as the previous option, if enabled the system will
generate a DXF file with the current part nesting when saving.
181
Jobs (CAM) Module
• Save autorecover information: This option saves the automatically recovered

information of the current work in the drawing and nesting modules. The desired time
can be set to save the auto recovered information.
• Order subjobs: Whenever entering the Nesting module the subjobs will be ordered
depending on the configuration made here.
• Contour attributes: The postprocessor will generate the proper CNC code for the
attributes of the contours here defined. The system will display Contour Attributes dialog
box as shown below, where the user will have to introduce the required data:
Figure 141: Contour Attributes dialog box
• Auxiliary geometry: It is possible to create non cut lines configuring their line properties
as well as their visualization. First of all, it is necessary to create the new non cut types
that will be used and to specify the name and properties of the line (color, style and
thickness), as well as the possibility of visualizing this line on the sheet. From this moment
on it will be possible to modify these properties from Colors tab located next to the rest
of customizable elements.
Figure 142: Auxiliary geometry window
182
Jobs (CAM) Module
Non cut line concept allows distinguishing between different types of lines that contain different
applications, such as up folding, down folding, welding, boxes, etc. This way, it will be possible to
create non cut lines configuring their line properties as well as their visualization in Draw and Nest
view. First of all, it will be necessary to create the new non cut types that will be used from the
Draw and Nest Configuration.
2.1.9.2.3 Do All
• Order of sheets: In order to select the sheets for the nesting, the system will use the type
of order set in this field. The user will be provided with the following options:
▪ Largest to smallest
▪ Smallest to largest
▪ By priority
• Remnants before sheets: In order to select the sheets for the nesting, the system will
look first at the status of Remnants before sheets parameter and given the case it is
enabled, the system will prioritize the use of existing remnants over sheets.
• Select sheets for quotation: This option enables the user selecting sheets for quotation.
The drop-down list provided on the right side of the field provides the following options:
▪ No
▪ Yes
▪ Only these
▪ If the job is for quotation
• Only use sheets according to the criteria for sheet selection: By means of this parameter,
the user can configure the required criteria for sheets selection. Once it has been
enabled, the arrow ( ) button located on the right side will also become enabled.
The system will display Sheet selection window, where the user will be able to set the minimum
and maximum length as well as the minimum and maximum width of the sheets. In addition, the
user will be able to see the values previously introduced in the following fields:
• User data (1-3)
183
Jobs (CAM) Module
▪ Show the sheets with quantities equal to zero
▪ Select blocked sheets
▪ Select the remnants generated by nesting
▪ Select the remnants generated by user
• These parameters previously listed will be disabled. In order to modify them, the user will
have to go to Nesting module / Sheets / New / Criteria window. Whenever Do all option is
executed, the system will use those sheets that match with the defined criteria.
• Make unitary nestings with long parts: Thanks to this parameter, it is possible to create
unitary nestings with long parts when executing Do all option. The user must introduce
the required value in Minimum length field, which must be in millimeters. This option will
check all the parts that compose the job considering their dimensions and if any of them
is bigger than the value here configured, the system will create a unitary nesting with the
rotation of the dimension that exceeds the configured value. Given the case both
dimensions are bigger than the value specified, the part will be nested in the original
rotation. For instance, if the user wants to make a unitary nesting for all the parts of a job,
it would only be necessary to configure the Minimum length with a small enough value,
as for example one millimeter.
• Look for sheets in stored nestings: If this parameter is enabled, the system will search
first for the nestings saved as Stored nesting. When activating this parameter, the
following parameters will become enabled:
▪ Criteria: This field allows filtering the stored nestings that the user wants to use. Once it
has been enabled, the arrow ( ) button located on the right side will also become
enabled. Whenever this button is selected, the system will display Import stored
nesting (Criteria) window. This window allows filtering nestings by Machine, Material,
Thickness, Reference, Date, Length and Width.
▪ Delete existing machining: By activating this parameter, if any of the nestings to be

used has machining, it will be previously deleted before including it in the job and it will
be machined again during the process.
▪ Regenerate: By activating this parameter, if any of the nestings to use has machining, it
will be completely regenerated before including it in the job and it will be machined
184
Jobs (CAM) Module
again during the process. Remember that regenerating also supposes deleting the
existing machining.
• Look for the best format of sheets: Given the case this parameter is enabled; the system
will try to nest all the parts making use of each one of the existing formats. For example,
there are three different types of formats. The system will execute three tries, by nesting
all the parts of the job in format number one, then in format number two and finally, in
format number three. The system will compare the efficiency reached by every one of the
formats and will make use of the most efficient one.
• Look for the best combination of sheets: This parameter depends on the field Minimum
efficiency. If this parameter is enabled, the system will take into account the minimum
efficiency set and will look for the best sheet per each nesting (the most efficient one). As
in the previous case, imagine there are three different type of formats. The system will
test all the existing formats per nesting and will choose the most efficient one per
nesting. For example, the system will test nesting number one, in sheet number 1 (with
an efficiency of 65%), in sheet number two (efficiency of 72%) and sheet number three
(efficiency of 85%). Since sheet number three is the most efficient, the system will save it
and start testing again with the following nesting in every sheet format following the
same process until all the parts have been nested. If none of the existing sheets meets
the efficiency requirement set in Minimum efficiency field, the system will keep the one
that has achieved the highest efficiency.
• Minimum efficiency to eliminate each sheet: Once Do All option has been performed and
the machining has been executed, the system will test whether the sheets used meet the
minimum efficiency requirement set in this field. Those sheets whose efficiency is not
bigger than the value configured, will be deleted. In this case the system will make use of
other sheets until the minimum efficiency is exceeded.
• Rectangular nesting – Maximum efficiency: The option will be able to select which the
maximum percentage of used area for rectangular nesting will be.
• Minimum efficiency calculation mode: This option allows deciding the way that the
efficiency (defined in the previous point) to eliminate sheets will be calculated. The
available options are:
▪ Real area: Sum of the real area of all parts.
185
Jobs (CAM) Module
▪ External area: Sum of the external area of all parts.
▪ Rectangular area: Sum of the rectangular area of all parts.
▪ All parts bounding box: Area of the bounding box of all parts.
• Maximum time to look for the best sheets: Here the user must introduce the maximum
time that will be taken to search for the best sheets. Remember that the time must be
introduced in seconds. During the Do All execution, once the time here specified is
reached, the system will stop testing methods and will choose the best one (most
efficient) found up to that moment.
• Prenesting: This option allows creating temporary sheets with limited quantity so that it
is possible to select automatically which ones are the most adequate to execute the parts
nesting of a determined job. In order to activate this option, it is necessary to activate
Look for the best format of sheets or Look for the best combination of sheets. These
options are necessary in order to test all the temporary formats that the system can
create.
Apart from temporary sheets, it is also possible to indicate if it is required to use or not the sheets
that have already been created in the system. If this option is activated, the system would use the
same sheets that would be used in the nesting of a complete job. If sheet dimensions are
required as much adjusted as possible, the user can configure Adjust final sheet dimensions to
nested dimensions’ option. This parameter can be defined both in X and Y or in both dimensions.
This option allows creating sheet formats that take full advantage of a coil, given that it is
possible to set it to always adjust in X.
Once the system obtains the final sheet format result, the user will be able to create the sheets in
the database or not. In this way, the user will also be able to create quotation sheets if required.
Finally, it will also be possible to launch the sheet list so that the user can be provided with the list
of used formats in the current job. If required, it will be possible to print directly or to get a
previous display to save the list in a determined format as, for example, PDF.
186
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 143: Prenesting dialog box
• Generate remnants after nesting: Given the case this parameter is enabled, once the
nesting has been executed, the system will generate automatically the remnants of every
sheet (if any).
• Cut after nesting: If enabled, the system will perform the machining operation after the
nesting has been done.
• Deal with equal sheets: Using this option, the system will calculate if the same sheet can
be done twice instead of making the nesting and machining process of the same parts in
the same sheets more than once, what will help the user save time.
If this parameter is disabled, the system will get one sheet and make the nesting and machining.
Get the following sheet and make the nesting and machining. The system will execute the same
steps once and again until the whole job has been finished even if the sheets are equal, which
results in a longer execution time.
If this parameter is enabled, after performing the first sheet and machining, the system will
detect whether the following sheet is equal to the first one (this means we have the same
number of parts, which can be placed in the same positions). Given the case it detects an equal
sheet, the system will store just one sheet, meanwhile the Worksheet will define that the sheet
must be machined twice.
187
Jobs (CAM) Module
2.1.9.2.4 Print
• Print sheets while saving: If enabled, the system will print the sheets while saving.
• Print machining: If enabled, the machining will also appear in the workshop sheet.
By means of the code TSP_mecX, the user can force printing the machining, regardless of
the value established in the system configuration.
The user can also show the clamp movements in the current sheet by means of codes
TDB_c92 and TDB_c93. In particular, it is possible to visualize the number of repositions and the
relocations related to each one of them.
In addition to the previous, the user can print the quantity nested of each part until the
nesting that is being print has been created for the workshop sheet through TDB_p58 code.
• Print the full remnants: If enabled, the remnants will be filled with linear texture making
easier the differentiation between sheet and remnant when printing.
• Only the initialization: If enabled, in the workshop sheet will only appear the
initialization.
• Prompt for sheets before printing: Do All option may generate more than one sheet. If
this option is enabled, the system will ask for the sheets required to print instead of
printing all of them.
• Print: The system will generate the worksheet of the sheets selected here. The user can
select between: The current sheet, Every sheet of the subjob, Every sheet of the job and
Select sheets.
• Prints identifiers of parts: If enabled, the identifiers of the parts will be included in the
printing workshop sheet.
• Identifiers: The user can select between the following options:
▪ Print the name: The system will include the name of the part inside the geometry.
188
Jobs (CAM) Module
▪ Print the index: The system will insert the same number to every equal part of the
sheet. This index is very useful because it will be printed in the Factory sheets list.
▪ Print the order: The system will include in the parts the number that corresponds to
their order.
• Line width: When printing, the width of the different elements involved can be modified
in order to make easier their identification. The user will be able to set the Line width of
the Geometry part, Geometry sheet, Machining part and Machining sheet.
• Prompt for template name before printing: If enabled, the system will prompt for the
template name to use before printing. This option is useful when the user has more than
one template defined. These templates, also called boxes, can be parameterized. In other
words, the user can define the line thickness, position and dimension of the drawings,
text format and database fields required in the boxes. In order to define a new box,
contact the product support team.
• Color display for parts in nesting: By means of this parameter the user can choose the
field through which the parts will be colored. If the checkbox is enabled, the navigation
button will become enabled and will direct the user to Color assignment mode dialog box.
In this window, the user can choose a field from all the available ones, and the parts of
the list will be colored according to the value contained in such field.
2.1.9.2.5 Colors
This window allows configuring the colors of the whole system. The user will get the list of
elements/aspects that can be configured by clicking the drop-down arrow located at the top of
the window. The configurable aspects are the following: Background, Cursor cross, Axis,
Background of sheets, Edge of sheet, Background of remnants, Edge of remnants, Clamps and work
zone, Straight, Point, Selection, Dragging, Machining, Machining with multihead, From Point, Rapids,
Cycles, Machining texts, Punched, Punch attribute, Common punch attribute, Shear attribute, Mark
attribute, Cut attribute, Micro-joints attribute, Shear, Pattern, Dimensions / Text, Simulation
Window-Capture, Virtual movement, Bridges, Loops, Lead-in / Lead-outs, Micro-joints, Geometry,
Upper and lower bevels, Upper bevel, Lower bevel, Remnant line, Cutting quality 1-12, Powder mark,
Drill mark, Pen mark, Cut mark, Rapid with head down, Suction cup, Activated suction cup,
Reference point, Grid, Auxiliary clamps and auxiliary work zone, Distinguished color 1-30, Active part
in part list.
189
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 144: Colors examples
The user will be able to configure the Type, Make on and Color of the previously mentioned
aspects.
2.1.9.2.6 Display
• Go to an instruction before executing manual punches on the nesting: This is an option
for punching and combined machines. This option makes easier inserting nibbling or
simple punches in the correct position of the machining from the Nesting and Machining
module.
• Show remnant references on screen: If enabled, whenever a remnant is generated the

system will show the assigned reference inside it.
Figure 145: Show remnant references on screen example
• Show part texts on the sheet: In the Drawing window it is possible to assign a description
text which will have no machining effect. If this parameter is enabled, this text will be
displayed.
190
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 146: Show part texts on the sheet example
• Show the dragging of the part with collision control: If enabled, the user will be able to
visualize the dragging part with the collision control.
• Show non-cut contours on the sheet: The system provides an option to assign non-cut
technology to the contours. This means that these contours will not be machined unless
this assigned technology changes.
Figure 147: Show non cut contours on the sheet example
If enabled, the non-cut geometries will be shown in the configured color by.
• Selection by window/capture/trap: If enabled, whenever the user selects parts (to erase,
copy or move them between many other options) they will get different colors so that
the visualization is easier and clearer.
Figure 148: Selection by window/capture/trap example
• Simulate selection when mouse is moved: If enabled, whenever the mouse passes over a
segment, this segment will change color showing which contour would be selected if the
mouse was clicked.
191
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 149: Simulate selection when mouse is moved example
• Show micro-joints: If enabled, the micro-joints will be shown and an exterior line will
appear in the contours. This parallel line to the external contours is the center of the
exterior punch. The distance between the exterior contours and this line is the middle of
the width of the configured tool for the exteriors.
Figure 150: Show micro-joints example
• Display all clamp and work zones: If enabled, the nesting module will show in the screen
all the work zones as well as the clamps in the configured positions.
Figure 151: Display all clamp and work zones example
The clamp zone changes depending on the station the turret is working with. If this parameter is
disabled, only the clamp work zone of the current station will be shown with continuous line and
the rest with discontinuous lines.
192
Jobs (CAM) Module
• Simulate the full remnants: If enabled, the remnants will be filled with a green color for making the
identification easier.
Figure 152: Simulate the full remnants example
• Display dimensions on the sheet: Although the dimensions made in the drawing module
will be always shown, the user can decide to keep them in the nesting module or not by
activating this parameter.
Figure 153: Display dimensions on the sheet example
• View nesting limit: When enabled, the system will display the line that shows the end of
nesting.
• Highlight selected part: When the user selects a part in the Nesting Part list window, the
geometry of the select part will be highlighted in the sheet only when this option is
enabled. In the same way, it the user select any parts on the sheet, the system will
highlight them on the Parts List window as well as all the equal parts nested on the sheet.
This color can be configured in Color window.
• Show points at the center of punching instructions: This parameter allows a display of
the central point of each punch. This way, a better and faster punching interpretation can
be obtained. The user will be able to select between: No, Drawing, Nesting and Both of
them.
• Text size for the quantities in the parts window: This parameter allows the user
modifying the size of the text that will appear on the sheets window of the Nesting
module. The user will be able to select between: Small, Normal, Large and Largest.
193
Jobs (CAM) Module
• Postprocessor words: From this window the user can define which text will be shown on
the sheet when a function is selected, as well as the font and size of the postprocessor
words displayed on the sheet. If none is specified, the system will use the windows
standard font size configured by default on the computer.
These parameters allow visualizing or hiding the Postprocessor words as well as changing their
text.
Figure 154: Postprocessor words dialog box
• Move the “offset” of the part on the sheet: If enabled, when getting a part from the list,
the system will show additional lines from the margin of the part showing the minimum
distance between parts.
Figure 155: Move the “offset” of the part on the sheet example
• Selection with multihead: When the machine has been configured as multi-head, the
system will make the nesting trying to use the maximum number of heads. If this option
is enabled, when a part is select, the system will select the entire multi-head group (given
that the parts will be machined at the same time as selected).
194
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 156: Selection with multihead example
• Selection by window/capture/trap without multihead: When selection with multihead is

enabled this parameter will become enabled.
Figure 157: Selection by window/capture/trap without multihead example
• Show selected machining: This option allows visualizing the selected machining.
• Show micro-joints with points: If enabled, the system will display the micro-joints with
two points in order to show their location.
• Display fixed position points of the clamp: If enabled, the system will show the fixed
position points of the clamps.
• Show part references on the screen: If this option is enabled, the part references will be
included inside the contour of the parts. It will not change the machining of the parts; it is
only a visualization option.
Figure 158: Show part references on the screen example
• Rapids:
195
Jobs (CAM) Module
▪ Show the direction of movements: If enabled, the system will show with an arrow the
direction of every rapid movement.
Figure 159: Show the direction of movements example
▪ Show rapids in drawing module: If the visualization is enabled in the Drawing module,
the user will be provided with these three options:
o One part: It shows rapids when one part is opened.
o Multiparts: It shows rapids when multiple parts are opened.
o Always: It shows rapids constantly.
▪ Show rapids in nesting and machining module: Select this checkbox to visualize the
rapids in Nesting and Machining module.
• Show bevel information: Both in Nesting and Drawing module the user can visualize bevel
information. The system will display Bevel information setup dialog box as shown below:
Figure 160: Bevel information setup dialog box
196
Jobs (CAM) Module
Text position, font and size can be selected as well as where the text will be shown: Drawing,
Nesting or Both of them.
• Simulation: When clicking this button, the system will display Simulation dialog box as
shown below:
Figure 161: Simulation dialog box
Here the user will be able to define the shear movement while the machining simulation. The
user can select between two different movements:
▪ On XY: The shear will move using both axes at the same time.
▪ First on one axis and later on the other: The shear will move first in horizontal or
vertical and then in the other way.
The user will be able to define the following options:
▪ Head radius (mm): Here the user can introduce the Head radius in millimeters.
▪ Number of milling broken segments: This option allows the user to define the number
of milling broken segments.
Costs
• % Remnant price: The user can enter the cost related to the remnants.
• % Scrap price: The user can enter the cost related to the scrap.
• Cost by N2 and O2 unit: The user can enter the cost of N2/O2 used per unit.
• Machine: The user can enter the cost based on the machine used.
• Machine hourly rate: The user can enter the rate per hour of the active machine.
• Employee hourly rate: The user can enter the rate per hour of an employee.
197
Jobs (CAM) Module
• Save time and cost of parts: If enabled, the system will save the time and cost of the
parts with no need of entering in the Nesting module. The calculation will be made in the
Drawing module. Each importer will have its own configuration parameter in order to
specify whether the time and cost calculation will be made when importing a new part in
the system.
• Save costs of the sheets: If enabled, the system will save the cost of the sheets.
Figure 162: Configure: Costs dialog box
• No update: The part time and cost will not be updated based on the nesting.
• Last part time with qualities of the nesting: When saving a part in Nesting without
qualities the system saves a time for that part. If the user later assigns qualities to that
part, the time will be updated in the database and it will get a different value, which is
supposed to be more accurate.
• Part time in the last nesting: If enabled, the system will save the part time in the last
nesting process.
• Average with the last saved time: If enabled, the system will save the average of the part
from the current and previous nesting.
• Average of all the nesting times: If enabled, the system will save the average of the part
from all nestings.
198
Jobs (CAM) Module
• Update times in the manufacturing line: If enabled, the system will update the times in
the manufacturing line.
Identifiers
Several identifiers can be configured in this section. The user can assign them the required name.
The user can select between Identifiers of... Jobs, Parts and Sheets.
Figure 163: Configurable identifiers
• Jobs: The right side of the window displays the identifiers of the manufacturing order.
Click on the identifier to be modified and type in the new one.
• Parts: The right side of the window displays the identifiers of the part. Click on the
identifier to be modified and type in the new one. By means of More button the user can
create or delete the identifiers.
• Sheets: The right side of the window displays the identifiers of a sheet. Click on the
identifier to be modified and type in the new one.
Language
This option changes the language of the program. Once the language has been selected, the
program will restart with the selected language.
Figure 164: Languages dialog box
199
Jobs (CAM) Module
Interface
The Interface button enables the user to create a new toolbar and change the existing toolbar
applications among many other options.
1. Click Interface button and the system will display Customize dialog box:
Figure 165: Customize Quick Access
2. The window is divided into the following tabs:
• Quick access
• Shortcut keys
• Details
• Ribbon
3. In the Commands section the user will visualize all the menus with their applications listed.
• In Quick Access tab, the user can quickly access the different functionality areas of the
software that are coming in the drawing and nesting modules in a clear way.
▪ Delete: Click this button to remove an application from the toolbar.
200
Jobs (CAM) Module
▪ Separator: Click this button to include a separator between the applications of the
toolbar.
▪ Label: By means of this option the user can add or modify Labels manually for each
option. Groups of related parameters can be identified with a common name. Introduce
the name in the Text field located at the right bottom of the window and click on
Separator button in order to place it in the Quick Access section. In order to drag the
options from Commands section to the Quick Access section make use of Single arrow (
) button.
• In Shortcut keys tab, the user can create new shortcut keys, view and delete the existing
ones for the applications.
Figure 166: Customize Shortcut keys
4. Select an application and then introduce the key from the keyboard to assign as New Shortcut
key for the previously selected application. Click Assign button and the selected key will be
assigned as shortcut key as well as visualized in Existing keys field. The user can also select an
existing shortcut key from the Existing keys field and click Delete button in order to remove it.
• In Details tab, the user can configure the view of columns in the products and sheets
panel. It is only possible to configure one view at a time. In order to visualize the Products
list and Sheet list in the main module, it is necessary to activate the corresponding
201
Jobs (CAM) Module
options in the View menu. If activated, the system will display the configured columns
with the information of each part. By means of this option, the user can modify the order
of visualization and remove any column that is not needed, just by making use of the
different Arrow buttons provided in Customize window, as shown below:
Figure 167: Customize Details
5. Choose the required parameters from the available list and click Single arrow button to add the
parameters selectively one by one, or click Double arrow button in order to include all the
parameters in the list and click OK.
• In Ribbon tab the user can edit the view and the items provided in the Ribbon. Among
the customization options given in the Ribbon, now it is possible to configure the style of
the controls inserted in customized groups and tabs. This way it will be possible to select
the icon size (small or large) and the possibility to show or not the control text.
This contextual menu provides all the options that can be executed with each element of the
menu: create new tabs and groups, change their name, delete customized elements, change the
style of new controls and finally, reorganize the new elements changing their position.
6. Click right button on the ribbon and select Customize ribbon option.
202
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 168: Customize Ribbon
▪ New tab: Click this button to create a Main tab like Home, Manage, Utilities, etc. and
customize the group.
▪ New group: Click this button in order to create a Group in the particular tab.
Customized groups can be added to original or customized tabs. Select the desired tab
and click New group. Both customized tabs and groups appear in bold so that they are
more easily distinguished. New commands can be added to the customized groups (not
in the tabs). In order to do it, the user can add the selected options by double clicking
on them or using the Single arrow button in the Commands section.
▪ Delete: Click this button to delete customized tabs, groups and/or commands.
▪ Change name: This button allows the user changing the name of customized tabs and
groups.
▪ Separator: Click this button in order to include a separator between the applications in
the toolbar. The commands can be organized using separators within a customized
group.
It is not possible to add two separators together, neither at the beginning nor at the end.
203
Jobs (CAM) Module
▪ Export: By means of this option, the user can export the UI settings made in his
machine. This will be saved as *.ExportUI file in the selected location.
▪ Import: By means of this option, the user can import the UI settings from an *.ExportUI
file.
▪ Restore: this button restores the default configuration. If selected, the system will
display a warning window asking “Do you want to delete all ribbon customizations for
this program?”. Select Yes to delete the current ribbon configuration and select No in
order to cancel the operation.
Each machine type offers different options, visible only when working with them in
particular. Therefore, configuration options must be customized per machine type.
Print
Print option enables the user to create and delete reports, configure the printing settings and
visualize as well as print reports. When selected the system displays Lists window as shown
below:
Figure 169: Lists window
• To create reports, do the following:
1. Click Print and the system displays Lists dialog box listing various reports.
2. Click Create button. The system displays New list dialog box listing the various topics for which
the report can be generated.
204
Jobs (CAM) Module
3. Select a topic and enter the name for the report in Text field.
4. Click OK. The new report is created and included in the list in Print Reports dialog box.
• To delete reports, do the following:
2. Select the report which has to be deleted and then click Delete. The selected report will be
deleted.
• To configure the print settings for the report, do the following:
2. Select the report which has to be printed and then click Configure. The system displays Print
Setup dialog box.
3. Set the required parameters and then click OK. The print settings for the selected report will be
configured.
• To view and print reports, do the following:
2. Select the report to view/print and move it from the list to the next column.
3. Select a report in the column and click Preview to preview the selected report, click Print to
print the selected report, and click Print all to print all the reports of the column.
The different available reports are detailed below:
2.1.9.7.1 Factory Sheets List

This report contains information of all the sheets used in the active manufacturing order, as well
as the place occupied by each part on the sheet.
For each sheet the following information is displayed, in this order: CNC name for the sheet,
reference for the sheet followed by its identifying number, machine used, number of sheet,
length, width, thickness, material, weight, scrap utilization, sheet utilization and maximum sheet
value machined.
For each part placed on the sheet the following is displayed: space occupied by the part on the
sheet (Ref.), reference, reference of the figure the part belongs to followed by the defined
position, observations, length, width and weight.
205
Jobs (CAM) Module
2.1.9.7.2 Frames Elements List

This report contains information on the elements required to manufacture the frames. The
following information is displayed for each frame in this order: the name of the frame, the length
and the amount of bar necessary to manufacture the frame. Finally, the bar length and the total
number of corners are displayed.
2.1.9.7.3 Canal Part List

This report lists the details of the parts that are not cut and displays information such as the
reference of the part, DIN name, DIN code, material, thickness, length, width, and quantity.
2.1.9.7.4 Labels List (149x48.8)

This report generates labels of size 149 x 48.8 for the nested parts of the current job. The
information displayed includes the serial number of the part on the sheet (this number is
automatically generated when the parts are nested), part reference, job reference, user data,
date on which the part is nested, comments, CNC reference, material, sheet dimensions, part
dimensions, and DIN details.
2.1.9.7.5 Labels List (127x74)

This report generates labels of size 127 x 74 for the nested parts of the current job. The
information displayed includes the serial number of the part on the sheet (this number is
automatically generated when the part is nested), part reference, job reference, CNC reference,
labor ticket number, manufacturing order reference, date on which the part is nested, material,
part dimensions, and sheet dimensions.
2.1.9.7.6 Labels List for Remnants (149x48.8)

This report contains information of the labels for remnants of size 149x48.8 for every remnant
generated in the manufacturing order in progress. For every remnant, a span is showed
containing the following information, in this order: remnant number, reference assigned to the
remnant, amount, supplier, carrier, manufacturing date, associated comment, material,
dimensions (Length x Width X Thickness), weight, order to which it belongs, sheet used to obtain
it and associated CNC.
2.1.9.7.7 Labels List for Sheets (149x48.8)

This report generates labels of size 149 x 48.8 for the sheets used in the current job. The
information displayed includes nesting number (this number is automatically generated when the
sheets are used), sheet reference, quantity of sheets used, user data, material, sheet dimensions,
weight, job reference, CNC reference, and remnant percentage.
206
Jobs (CAM) Module
2.1.9.7.8 Sheets List

This report lists the details of all the sheets used in the current job and displays information such
as the current job details, sheet reference, material, dimensions, dimensions along x and y axis,
weight details of the sheet, quantity of sheet used, real total weight details of the sheets, and
real total quantity of sheets used.
2.1.9.7.9 Turrets List

This report shows information of all the sheets used in the manufacturing order in progress. The
user is informed of the main data of the sheet: the CNC name for that sheet, the sheet reference
followed by its identification number, the machine used for machining, the amount of sheets, its
length, width, thickness, the material, its weight, the usage of the remnant, the usage of the
sheet and the maximum dimension of the sheet that is machined. Next, the turret data are
mentioned with the following information: station position, whether it is Multitool or not, the
punch position and the matrix, as well as the angle where it is located.
2.1.9.7.10 CNC List

This report lists the details of all the sheets used for machining the part and displays information
such as the nesting number (this number is automatically generated when the sheets are used),
sheet reference, material, thickness, length, width, CNC reference, maximum sheet used for
machining along X axis, maximum sheet used for machining along Y axis, and the quantity of
sheets used for machining.
2.1.9.7.11 Remnants List

This report contains information of all the remnants generated in the manufacturing order in
progress. For every generated remnant the following information is displayed, in this order:
reference assigned to the remnant, material, dimensions: thickness, length and width, weight,
reference of the original sheet and the amount.
2.1.9.7.12 Cost and Time Sheet List

This report lists the details of cost and machine time of all the sheets in the current job and
displays information such as part reference, material, rectangle area, cost of material, cost of
machine time, cost of consumables, cost of planning, total cost, and manufactured quantity.
2.1.9.7.13 Protocol List

This report lists the details of all the parts in the current job and displays information such as
current job details, part reference, material, thickness, quantity, manufactured quantity,
207
Jobs (CAM) Module
dimensions, machined dimensions, weight, cost, total machined dimensions, total weight, and
total cost.
2.1.9.7.14 Frame List

This report lists the details of all the frames used for the parts in the current job and displays
information such as the frame reference, length, width, quantity, cost of time, cost of corners,
cost of assembly, and total cost.
2.1.9.7.15 Isolate List

This report lists the details of all the isolates used in the current job and displays information such
as the reference of the isolate, cost per m2, thickness, position, DIN name, DIN code, area, and
total cost.
2.1.9.7.16 Delivery Note List

This report lists the details of all the parts in a current job and displays information such as the
current job details, reference of the parts, DIN name, DIN code, quantity, significant values, and
weight of the part. It also includes a table which is classified by length, displaying the area
machined on a channel machine, area machined on a cutting machine, and total area.
2.1.9.7.17 Job List

This report lists the details of the current job and displays information such as name, reference,
various user data, comments, parts, area, quantity and price among others.
2.1.9.7.18 Scale 1:1 List

This report shows the drawing of a part with numbers on the most important points and is
printed in scale 1:1. The user can configure the following values: Print the significant curves only,
Mark lines, Cutter radius, Eliminate white paper sheets.
2.1.9.7.19 Geometric List

This report lists the geometries of all the parts of the current job. It displays the current job
reference, part reference, material, dimensions of the part, DIN name, DIN code, creation date,
length, weight, drawing of the part, and position of the significant points of the geometry along
X and Y.
When selecting this, the system displays Geometric list dialog box listing all the parts of the
current job. It is possible to select the required part to access its geometric report. It is also
possible to click Configure and select Print significant points only check box to print significant
points of the geometry.
208
Jobs (CAM) Module
2.1.9.7.20 Drawing of Every Part

This report shows one sheet for each part where the drawing of the part is shown. The result is
the same, if all the parts would be printed individually in the Drawing module.
2.1.9.7.21 Drawing of Every Sheet

This option shows the drawing of all the sheets that are generated. The result is the same if all
the sheets would be printed individually in the Nesting and Cutting module.
2.1.9.7.22 Cost and Time Part Sheet

This report lists the details of cost and machine time of all the parts in the current job and
displays information such as part reference, material, rectangle area, cost of material, cost of
machine time, cost of consumables, cost of planning, total cost, and manufactured quantity.
2.1.9.7.23 Drawing of Every Sheet

This report shows the drawing of every sheet in the current job together with all the details
related to it.
2.1.9.7.24 Labels List (127x74)

This report generates labels of size 127 x 74 for the nested parts of the current job. The
information displayed includes serial number of the part on the sheet (this number is
2.1.9.7.25 Protocol List (Duct figures)

This report lists the details of all the parts in the current job and displays information such as
name of the job, reference, various user data, comments, material, thickness, quantity,
manufactured quantity, dimensions of the parts, cut extension, mark extension, weight in kgs
and price.
2.1.9.7.26 Brace List

This report provides information about the braces used in the current job together with their
used face, length, quantity, total length and price.
2.1.9.7.27 Tie Rod List

This report provides information of the tie rods in the current job. Tie rods used in braces come
along with the face used, number per brace, total, nuts, washers, seals and price. Tie rods used in
connections provide quantity, nuts, washers, seals and price. On the other hand, tie rods used in
209
Jobs (CAM) Module
the middle come together with length, orientation, rows, quantity per row, total, nuts, washers,
seals and price.
2.1.9.7.28 Slip & Drive Element List

This report provides information about the slip and drive used in the current job together with
the reference, length and quantity.
2.1.9.7.29 Connector List

This report provides information about the connectors used in the current job, which come along
with their position, end, length and width.
2.1.9.7.30 Seam List

This report provides information about the seams used in the current job together with their
reference name and position.
2.1.9.7.31 Labels List (4x6)

This report generates labels of size 4 x 6 for the nested parts of the current job. The information
displayed includes serial number of the part on the sheet (this number is automatically generated
when the part is nested), part reference, job reference, CNC reference, labor ticket number,
manufacturing order reference, date on which the part is nested, material, part dimensions, and
sheet dimensions.
2.1.9.7.32 Labels List (127x68)

This report generates spans of size 127 x 68 for the nested parts of the current job. The
information displayed includes serial number of the part on the sheet (this number is
2.1.9.7.33 Job Element List

This report provides all the information related to the current job, covering data of the sheets,
parts and nestings. The job comes together with details like reference, name, cutting time,
waste, weight in kgs and parts. Sheets provide their reference, material, thickness (mm),
dimensions (mm) and quantity used. Nestings provide details like reference, material, thickness
(mm), CNC, dimensions (mm), quantity, cutting time, waste percentage and number of nested
parts. And finally, parts come together with their reference, weight, area, quantity, dimensions,
210
Jobs (CAM) Module
thickness, external weight, external area, unitary cutting time, material, rectangular weight,
rectangular area and total cutting time.
Backup
This option consists on the Backup of LANTEKPR.CFG, LANTEKIN.CNI and LFOCUS.CFG files. The user
can save a personalized and/or standard (provided during installation) configuration and recover
any of them at any time.
1. Click Backup button located in the Configuration options and the system will display the
Figure 170: Backup dialog box
2. Select one of the three options provided and click OK button.
Employees, Currencies and Databases

This option is used to provide configuration information about the system related to the
Database, Users and Currency.
2.1.9.9.1 Database
Database option shows a list of all the existing databases that the user can connect to work. It is
also possible to create a new blank database using this option.
2.1.9.9.2 Users
By means of Users option, it is possible to add new users to the User List by entering User data,
such as:
Reference, Employee, User name and Password. The existing users can also be modified and
deleted from the available Work Centers and User’s List.
2.1.9.9.3 Currency
Click on Currency in order to add a new currency. The chosen currency type can be modified and
deleted from the existing list.
Exit
Exit ( ) option allows abandoning Lantek Expert.
211
Jobs (CAM) Module
HOME
Modules
From this section, the user will be able to access to Duct Parts, Drawing and Nesting and
Machining modules.
Import
Parts from Database
Parts from database ( ) option enables the user to import required parts from the existing
list or Part List to your current manufacturing order section. The system will display Part selection
dialog box as shown below:
Figure 171: Part selection dialog box
• Criteria: Using this option, any parts can be imported, created and modified priority wise
with a given reference number, quantity, machine, material and thickness. Click on any
cell of the row to change the required parameters.
• Select the Navigation ( ) button next to Criteria to redefine or create of a new part in
the Part selection dialog box by assigning a unique reference code.
212
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 172: Part selection dialog box 2
• In addition, in User data the existing data list can be navigated and selected as per the
required element or by entering a new element. The new element will be added in the
data list for future use. It is possible to search information about a part by entering the
From and To date along with the specification of Thickness, Priority and Length and
Width of the part.
• Database: In this, a database can be imported from the existing databases, where the
corresponding database parts can be viewed and imported to the current manufacturing
order list. If the Navigation ( ) button attached to this field is selected, the system will
display Database selection dialog box providing a list of the available databases.
• Group: Using this option, the selected parts can be linked to a specified group. By clicking
on the selected section, it is even possible to modify Use the part material and thickness
and Use the part machine as required.
• Parameters: When selected the system will display Parameters dialog box.
The parameters here set related to Machine and Material, thickness, quantity and priority of the
parts can be modified.
213
Jobs (CAM) Module
• Use the part material and thickness: Select this checkbox to use the selected part
material and thickness.
• Use the part machine: Select this checkbox to use the selected part machine. This
parameter will only be enabled once Use the part material and thickness is activated.
• Use the part filler property: Select this checkbox so the system uses filler parts when it is
not possible to include more normal parts.
Duct Figures from Database
Duct figures from database ( ) option allows importing the required duct figures from the
available list to your current manufacturing order section. The system will display Figure selection
Figure 173: Figure selection dialog box
• Criteria: Any duct figures can be imported, created and modified priority wise with a
given reference number, quantity, machine, material and thickness. Select the box of any
row to change the required parameters.
Select the arrow icon next to Criteria to redefine or creating of a new duct part in the Figure
selection dialog box by assigning a unique reference code. In addition, to search information
214
Jobs (CAM) Module
about a duct figure you can enter the From and To date along with the specification of Thickness,
DIN and Code of the part.
• Database: Once selected the system will display Database selection dialog box displaying
all the available databases. In this, a database can be imported from the existing
databases, where the corresponding database duct parts/figures can be viewed and
imported to the current manufacturing order list.
• Group: Using this option, the selected duct figures can be linked to a specified group.
• Parameters: In this, the parameters of chosen Machine and Material thickness, quantity
and priority of the duct parts can be modified, as in the previous option.
• Use the part material and thickness: Select this checkbox to use the selected duct part
material and thickness.
• Use the part machine: Select this checkbox to use the selected duct part machine. This
parameter will only be enabled once Use the part material and thickness is activated.
Kits from Database
Kits from database ( ) option allows importing the required kits from the available list to your
current manufacturing order section. The system will display Kit selection dialog box as shown
below:
215
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 174: Kit selection dialog box
Here the user will be able to introduce the required quantity of the selected kit, as well as
activating Import the nestings associated to the kit, Use the part material and thickness and Use the
part machine parameters.
Rectangles
Rectangles ( ) option allows creating rectangular parts for the current job. In order to create
a rectangular part, perform the following steps:
1. Select Rectangles option and the system will display Rectangular parts dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 175: Rectangular parts dialog box
2. Introduce the length, width and quantity.

3. The system will automatically assign the Reference based on the length and width values.
4. The user can configure Reference field by clicking Configure button. The system will display the
216
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 176: Configure dialog box
• Insert in the job: It indicates whether the rectangular part is created in the current job or
not. If not enabled, the rectangular part will be created in the database.
• Automatic: It indicates whether the reference of the rectangular part is generated

automatically or not.
• Request: It indicates whether the reference of the rectangular parts has to be edited or
not.
• Reference: Unique reference code to be included to the reference of the rectangular

part.
5. If Parameters button is selected the system will display Part saving dialog box, where the user
will have to introduce the required details and click OK in order to save them.
6. The system will direct you back to Rectangular parts window. Click Add button so that the
rectangular part is included in the window.
7. Click OK button and the rectangular part will be created.
Import DXF Files
Import DXF files ( ) option allows importing the geometry of a DXF file. In order to import
it, perform the following steps:
1. Select Import DXF files option and the system will display Open dialog box as shown below:
217
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 177: Open dialog box (Import DXF Files)
Find the different fields provided in the previous dialog box briefly described below:
• Name: Name of the DXF file.
• Type: Type of file.
• Drawing simulation: It indicates whether to preview the drawing of the geometry or not.
• Configure: Select this button so that the system displays Import configuration dialog box
as shown below:
218
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 178: Importer configuration dialog box
2. Select the required values and click Apply button in order to save them and OK to come back to
Open dialog box.
3. Select the required DXF file and click Open button so that the selected geometry is imported to
the current job.
Import DWG Files
Import DWG files ( ) option allows importing the geometry of a DWG file. In order to
import it, perform the following steps:
1. Select Import DWG files option and the system will display Open dialog box as shown in the
previous section listing all the available DWG files.
219
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 179: Open dialog box (Import DWG Files)
• Name: Name of the DWG file.
• Drawing simulation: It indicates whether to preview the drawing of the geometry or not.
as detailed in the previous section. Select the required values and click Apply button in
order to save them and OK to come back to Open dialog box.
2. Select the required DWG file and click Open button so that the selected geometry is imported
to the current job.
Import Parametric Parts
Import Parametric parts ( ) option allows importing parametric geometries. In order to do

it perform the following steps:
1. Select Import parametric parts option and the system will display Parametric parts dialog box
as shown below:
220
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 180: Parametric parts dialog box
• Directory: Path of the directory where the parametric parts are located. Click on the
Navigation ( ) button attached to this field in order to select the required directory.
• Parameters: When selected the system will display Part Saving dialog box, where the user
will be able to introduce the required Machine, Material, Thickness, Date, Quantity,
Priority, Name, User data, Labor ticket, Order and Product.
• Configure: When selected the system will display Configure dialog box as shown below:
221
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 181: Configure dialog box
Configure the linear and angular tolerance as well as the required parameters and click OK button
in order to save the changes in the configuration.
• Close: Select this button in order to exit from Parametric parts dialog box.
Import MEC Files
Import MEC files ( ) option allows importing the geometry of a MEC file. In order to import
it, perform the following steps:
1. Select Import MEC files option and the system will display Open dialog box as shown in the
previous section listing all the available MEC files.
• Name: Name of the MEC file.
222
Jobs (CAM) Module
• Drawing simulation: Indicates whether to preview the drawing of the geometry or not.
2. Select the required MEC file and click Open button so that the selected geometry is imported to
the current job.
Import PDF Files

Import PDF files () option allows importing the geometry of a PDF file. In order to import it,
perform the following steps:
1. Select Import PDF files option and the system will display Open dialog box as shown in the
previous section listing all the available PDF files.
• Name: Name of the PDF file.
• Drawing simulation: Indicates whether to preview the drawing of the geometry or not.
2. Select the required PDF file and click Open button so that the selected geometry is imported to
the current job.
223
Jobs (CAM) Module
Importers Configuration
It is possible to work with several configurations for importers. This option is valid for:
• Standard importers of Expert (DFX, DWGs, MEC, DSTVs, ASCII, ISO CUT, etc.)
• Application importers (Mazak, Tribon, TOPS GEO files, etc.)
The following importers are excluded:
• Parametric parts importer
• Parametric geometry parts importer
• Images vectorization importer
• Database importers (parts, figures, kits)
• Rectangular parts importers
For example, for the case of the DXF importer the following window will appear:
Figure 182: Open window (Import DXF Files)
Once the user has selected the part to import, Configure… option has to be selected and the
following window will appear.
224
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 183: Importer configuration window
Now, the button Configurations must be clicked to show the following window:
Figure 184: Configurations dialog box
225
Jobs (CAM) Module
In this window it is possible to choose one of the following options:
• New: It allows creating a new configuration based on the original configuration of the
importer. For example, if we work with the DXF importer, the original configuration file is
DXFASYSW.CFG. When creating a new configuration and applying the changes (with OK
button) a new copy of this configuration file will be created with the name of the file
defined. Apart from defining this name, it is also possible to give a name to this
configuration to make easier its description.
Figure 185: New configuration dialog box
The extension of this file will always be CFG or CF? (being “?” any character) If not, OK
button will not be enabled as shown below:
• Modify: It allows modifying the name of the customized configuration, but not the file.
The reason is that the file can be in use by another user in the system, so once that it has
been created with a name it will remain in the system unless a user decides to delete it.
• Delete: It allows deleting an existing or newly created configuration.
• Cancel: The user can cancel the actions executed and exit the window without saving the
new configurations or changes made.
• OK: The user validates the changes made and the new configurations are saved in the
system.
For each created file a line will be generated, where the following fields will be saved:
▪ Type: importer type
▪ Name: configuration name
▪ File: configuration file name
▪ AppName: importer name (just for application importers)
226
Jobs (CAM) Module
▪ Given the case the configurations per user do not exist, this file will not exist. It will be
created whenever a configuration is defined for the first time.
All the information generated when creating the configurations will be saved in the
network, in the directory where the database is
located:\\LANTEK\Database$\DatabaseName\FilesCfg\Importers. This includes Importers.cfgx file
and the files .cfg y .cf?. This way, any user will have access to these defined configurations.
Once that the different configurations have been created and saved, it will be possible to select
the configuration when importing the parts using the drop-drown list that appears in the lower
part of Configuration… window.
Once selected, this file can be defined and modified applying the changes on the selected file of
the drop-drown list.
If the selection is modified and another file is selected from the drop-drown list, the changes
will be applied in the previously selected file. That means that changing the selection works equally
as apply button or OK button.
This drop-down list is also shown in the window where the parts to import are displayed:
Figure 186: Drop-down list (DXF files) 2
In this case, the file is selected, and it is possible to add parts to import with this configuration.
227
Jobs (CAM) Module
Finally, when the user exits the importer, the information will be saved in the original file of the
importer. In case of DXF files, it will be saved in DXFASYSW.CFG file, with the following
information that the user has previously selected:
• Path of files to be imported.
• Configuration file that will be loaded when importing.
Edit
Search
Search ( ) option allows the user searching elements. Once this option is selected the
system will display Element search window attached at the bottom as shown below:
Figure 187: Element search window
Here the user will be able to filter the jobs from the database based on their priority. The job
search can be carried out specifying the job Name, Path and State. It is possible to search the
required information by selecting the Machine, Material, Thickness and CNC, which will be
displayed if the user selects Containing option.
In addition, the user can filter by Date, Order options, Advanced options, Quotation jobs and
Multiprogram jobs.
Delete
Delete ( ) option allows erasing the selected parts and sheet of the current job. Once this
option is selected, the system will display a warning message to make sure if the user wants to
delete the selected part or sheet.
Select All
Select all ( ) option selects all the elements of the window, which can be parts, figures or
sheets, depending on the selected mode.
228
Jobs (CAM) Module
Invert Selection
Invert selection ( ) option inverts the selection of elements of the window. These elements
can be parts, figures or sheets, depending on the selected mode. During the selection, this option
allows unselecting all the previously selected geometry.
Quotation
Save Quotation
By means of this option it is possible to create a quotation only for the parts inside a job, without
the need to have nestings in that job. The system will allow modifying such quote saving it again
after modifying it.
Contextual Menu
Open
Open ( ) option allows opening the selected job.
Export
Export ( ) option exporting the selected job. When selected, Directory dialog box will be
displayed.
Cut
Cut ( ) option allows cutting the selected job.
Copy
Copy ( ) option allows copying the selected job.
Delete
Delete ( ) option allows deleting the selected job. When selected, a warning message will be
displayed asking if the user wants to delete associated elements, parametric elements only or the
manufacturing order associated to the job.
Change name
Change name ( ) option allows chaning the name of the selected job.
229
Jobs (CAM) Module
Refresh
Refresh ( ) option allows refreshing the selected job.
Properties
When clicking Properties ( ) option, the system will display Job dialog box.
MANAGE
Components
Machines
Refer to section Configure Cutting Machines & Tools.
Parts
Parts ( ) option enables accessing various parts. The parameters of any selected parts can be
modified and customized as required. The modification of a machined part is done by selecting
the machine type, material and its thickness. The system will display Parts dialog box, as shown
below, which provides a list of the parts available in the database:
Figure 188: Parts dialog box
In order to customize the parts, it is necessary to configure the table parameters from available
and ordered columns. In addition to this, select Criteria or Modify options which give the user
preference to check and modify different parameters of a machined part. If Customize button is
selected, the system will display Configure: Tables dialog box, where the user will be able to set an
order between the available columns required.
230
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 189: Configure: Tables dialog box
Figures
Figures ( ) option enables the user to search, modify and delete figures from the main
module of Expert. The system will display Figures dialog box, as shown below, which provides the
following options:
Figure 190: Figures window
• Criteria: It is possible to filter the figures in the list through criteria window, where a set
of criterions can be established to filter the list of figures.
• Group: It is possible to filter the figures in the list selecting a group in particular.
231
Jobs (CAM) Module
• Modify: This option allows updating the reference, position, name and comments of a
determined figure.
• Customize: This button allows the user to select the columns to be displayed as well as
their order in the list.
• Delete: When selecting this button, the system shows the following warning window
before deleting the figure from the database:
Figure 191: Warning message
If the user confirms the action and the figure is used in any job or kit, the system will show a
window that displays a list with these jobs and kits:
Figure 192: Figure deletion confirmation window
Finally, if the user confirms the action, the system will delete the figure from the database.
• Close: This option allows closing the window.
Sheets
Sheets ( ) option gives the user information about various kinds of sheets that are used in
the manufacturing order. The sheets can be created, modified and customized as required during
the machined process by means of Create, Modify and Customize options respectively. Besides
the previous options, a given sheets reference, material, thickness, dimensions and quantity can
232
Jobs (CAM) Module
be imported, blocked or deleted through Import, Blocking and Delete options. Moreover, the
sheets list allows the user to print a report containing all the sheets that are available in the
system.
It is also possible to filter sheets by dimensions. By selecting Criteria option, filtering will be done
taking into account both the newly defined dimensions, and those of the machine configuration
window. The most restrictive values, as the highest minimum and lowest maximum values are
taken into account.
Figure 193: Sheets dialog box
In addition, the user can also update sheet costs whenever the price of a sheet has been modified
through Modify and Costs buttons.
Materials
Materials ( ) option, enables the user to Add, Edit, Delete and view Details as the name,
density, thickness and price of a material in the available Database materials list. Any Standard
material can be selected and transferred to the Database materials list. In the Database material, a
new material can be created with a given name, density, thickness and price. The database
materials can be edited and deleted from the existing list.
233
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 194: Materials dialog box
2.3.1.5.1 Edit Materials

If the user selects Edit button, the system will display Edit Material window:
Figure 195: Edit material window
In this window, the user can modify the Name, Density, Strength and Price as well as introduce
Prices by thickness ranges. The different ranges of thicknesses cannot overlap or be included into
different ranges.
234
Jobs (CAM) Module
Consumables
Consumables ( ) option provides the list of consumables consisting abrasives and raw
materials defined by the system. When selected, the system will display Consumables dialog box
as shown below:
Figure 196: Consumables dialog box
Here the user will be able to Create, Modify and Delete the parameters of consumables for the
corresponding machines.
• Create: If selected, the system will display Consumable definition dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 197: Consumable definition dialog box
Here the user will have to select between Abrasive and Raw material and introduce the Name,
Factor and Price required. Clicking on Calculate button calculates the abrasive factor based on the
• Pressure
• Orifice diameter
• Mixing nozzle diameter
• Abrasive flow
235
Jobs (CAM) Module
• Material
• Machinability
• Thickness
• Speed
• Abrasive factor
• Modify: If selected, the system will display Modification of the consumable dialog box as
shown below:
Figure 198: Modification of the consumable dialog box
The user will be able to modify the Name, Unit and Price of the consumable.
• Delete: This option will delete the selected consumable of the list. The system will display
a warning message in order to make sure if the user wants to erase the selected
consumable. Click Yes to continue or No to cancel the operation.
Drills
Drills
Drills ( ) option enables executing cycles, if the cutting machine has any kind of tools which
execute cycles. When selected, the system will display Tools dialog box as shown below:
236
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 199: Tools dialog box
• Criteria: When selected, the system will display Tools selection dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 200: Tools selection dialog box
Through this window, the user will be able to modify the list of Tools displayed in Tools dialog box
shown previously.
• Create: This button will create a new tool of any of the four available types. The system
will display Tools definition dialog box as shown below:
237
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 201: Tools definition dialog box
Each type of cycle contains specific parameters as displayed in the following dialog boxes:
• DRILL CYCLE:
Figure 202: Drill cycle dialog box
• TAP CYCLE:
238
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 203: Tap cycle dialog box
• REAM CYCLE:
Figure 204: Ream cycle dialog box
• C. SINK CYCLE:
239
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 205: C. Sink cycle dialog box
• MILLING CYCLE:
Figure 206: Milling cycle dialog box
• Modify: If selected, the system will display the dialog box that corresponds to the cycle
type required to modify, where the user will be able to change the parameters and click
OK in order to save them.
• Delete: Select the required cycle from the list provided in Tools dialog box and click
Delete button to erase it. The system will display a warning message in order to make
240
Jobs (CAM) Module
sure if the user wants to delete the cycle. Select Yes to proceed with the deletion and No
to cancel the operation.
• Close: Select this option in order to exit from Tools dialog box and come back to Home
display.
Assign Drills
Once all tools have been defined on the system, the user can assign which tools will use each
machine by means of this option.
1. Select Assign drills ( ) option and the system will display Machine select dialog box which
lists all the machines available.
Figure 207: Machine select dialog box
2. Select the required machine and click OK button so that the system displays Assign tools dialog
box of the selected machine as shown below:
Figure 208: Assign tools dialog box
241
Jobs (CAM) Module
3. This dialog box is composed of two lists. The one in the left will show all the Defined tools that
have not been assigned to any machine, while the one in the right will show all the Tools
assigned to the current machine.
4. In order to add or remove any tool to the selected machine, make use of the arrow buttons and
click OK button in order to save the tool assignations.
Turrets
Turrets ( ) option manages drill turrets. If selected, the system will display Turrets dialog
box as shown below:
Figure 209: Turrets dialog box
Through this dialog box the user can manipulate turrets, assign them to a specific machine and
define the default active turret.
• <Change/Modify>: When selected, the system will display dialog box as shown below:
Figure 210: Turrets dialog box 2
From this window the user can create different types of turrets with different number of
stations. Each new turret must have a reference for the system, and a drawing can be assigned in
order to make easier the turret identification.
242
Jobs (CAM) Module
• Create: With this button, a new turret will be created with the selected type and with the
specified number of stations:
Figure 211: Selection of turret type dialog box
Select the required turret Type, introduce the Number of stations and click OK button so that the
system displays Turrets dialog box as shown below.
Figure 212: Turrets dialog box 3
Every turret needs a Reference, and the user can assign a Drawing by means of a BMP file which
will be shown in order to make the identification of the turret easier.
Here each station can be configured, just selecting it from the list and clicking on one of the
options provided. The user will be able to create a new station in the specified position, as well as
modifying or deleting an existing one.
243
Jobs (CAM) Module
• Modify: Every station has to be configured properly, with this button the properties of
the selected station will appear and the user will be able to modify them. When this
option is selected the system will display Stations dialog box as shown below:
Figure 213: Stations dialog box
▪ Station: Number of stations in the turret.
▪ Type: Type of the station.
▪ Minimum & Maximum diameter: If the station is not a Multitool one, the system must
know the minimum and maximum diameter of the tools that fix into the station.
• Parameters: By means of this option the user will be able to visualize all the parameters
related to the turret.
• Delete: Select the required turret to delete and click this button in order to erase it.
• Copy: This option copies all the parameters of the selected turret.
• Close: Select this option in order to exit from this dialog box.
• <Assign turret-machine>: Make use of this option in order to assign a turret to the
current machine. The system will display a list of the machines available so that the user
selects the required one. If a turret has been previously assigned to the selected
machine, the system will display Confirm assignation warning message.
• <Active turret>: Through this option the user can visualize the configuration of the
current machine with the punches and dies that have already been assigned. The test will
verify it they have been correctly loaded into the turret.
244
Jobs (CAM) Module
UTILITIES
Export
Export menu allows the user to export different types of installation files of a machine type that
are available in the default list.
In order to export the parts from the database to the required file format, perform the following
steps:
1. Click DXF/DWG/MEC files button from the export section and the system displays the
corresponding file dialog box listing the different file formats.
2. Select the required part from the Part List and move it to the right section.
3. Select the Group in the right section to include the selected file format to a group.
• Select the Directory where the user wants to export and include the part in a group.
• The Criteria checkbox indicates whether or not the listed parts are based on specified
criteria (refer criteria). Select this check box to specify the criteria and view only those
parts in the list that fulfill the specified criteria.
4. Click OK and the files will be exported from the database.
Parts exported to a DXF file can be exported together with their dimensions.
245
Jobs (CAM) Module
Nestings
Import
This option allows importing nestings to a file. In order to do it perform the following steps:
1. Select Import ( ) option and the system will display Open dialog box so that the user
searches the required nesting.
2. Once selected the system will display Import dialog box as shown below.
Figure 214: Import dialog box
3. Find the fields provided in the previous dialog box briefly described below:
• Job reference: Unique reference code assigned to the job. The system will assign it
automatically.
• Job name: The user will have to introduce the required name for the job in this field.
• Configuration files and machine tools: This option allows importing the files and machine
tools from the database to a specified .bck (backup) file of your local directory. This
operation will be carried out automatically once it is selected.
• Relationship among the materials to import and material to use: This table contains the
following parameters: Materials to import, Materials to use and New reference.
246
Jobs (CAM) Module
• Create new reference for all the imported products in the case that they exist in the
database: Select this option in order to create a new reference code for all the imported
products existing in the database.
• Prompt for the reference on each part: The system will automatically generate a
reference for each part. If it is enabled, the system will ask for the reference at the
moment of generating a new part.
• Overwrite all: Select this option in order to overwrite the quantity of parts when
importing existing ones or when a part already exists in the database with a defined
quantity and the user imports the same part again. The system can be configured to add
the quantity of the new part to the previous one or to replace the old quantity by the
new one.
4. Once all the parameters have been set as per the user’s requirements, click OK button in order
to save them.
5. The system will direct the user to Nesting and Machining module and will open the imported
nesting.
Export
This option allows exporting nestings to a file and the selected files can be exported from a
database to the local directory. It gives information about machines, materials, sheets, products
and nestings in order to carry out the import. In order to export a nesting, perform the following
steps:
1. Select Export ( ) option and the system will display Export nestings dialog box as shown
below:
247
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 215: Export nestings dialog box
2. Find the fields provided in the previous dialog box briefly described below:
• Configuration files and machine tools: This option allows the user to export the files and
machine tools from the database to a specified .bck (backup) file to your local directory.
It is carried out automatically when this option is selected.
• Every sheet of the job: Select this option to export all the sheets of the job to the file.
• Every sheet of the database: Select this option to view all the sheets of the database. If
there is no active order when exporting, Every sheet of the database option will only
appear, while Every sheet of the job option will be disabled.
• Display drawing: If selected, the user will be able to visualize either the sheet of the job
or every sheet of the database. Therefore, when selecting a nesting to be exported, the
user can select nestings from another job other than the active job.
• Criteria: By means of this option the user will be able to visualize the parts that compose
the nestings together with their Machine, Material, Thickness, Reference, Date, Length,
Width, Jobs and Parts.
3. Once all the parameters have been set as per the user’s requirements choose the required
nesting from the list located on the left side
248
Jobs (CAM) Module
4. Make use of the Arrow buttons to select it by moving it to the list on the right and click OK in
order to export it.
5. The system will display Directory dialog box so that the user selects the folder where the
nesting will be kept.
6. Click Select button and the nesting will be exported.
Databases
New
New ( ) option allows creating a new database by selecting the required directory. In
addition, it is also possible to create a database from a backup of other database. In order to
create one, perform the following steps:
1. When selected, the system will display Database dialog box as shown below:
2. Introduce the required Name and select the required Directory.

3. If Import checkbox is selected, Select file navigation field and Select machines to import dialog
box will become activated.
4. Once all parameters are as required click OK button and the new database will be created.
249
Jobs (CAM) Module
Connect
By means of Connect ( ) option, the user can connect to an existing database and server.
When selected, the system will display Connection dialog box as shown below:
Figure 217: Connection dialog box
The user will have to introduce the User name, Password, Server and Database. Introduce the
Database name directly or select any of the existing ones available in your local directory by
means of the Navigation ( ) button.
Delete
Delete ( ) option allows deleting any Expert database not in use. Several databases may be
selected simultaneously. In the deletion process, confirmation will be requested for each
database since associated files may also be deleted.
When this option is selected, the system will display Database selection window which lists all the
databases available. Enable Delete associated files parameter in order to delete the selected
databases with their associated files.
Once modified, click Refresh ( ) button so that the new server databases can be visualized.
Information
By means of Information ( ) option, the user can select a specific group to get the required
data from an existing database. By default, the database will remain deactivated. The system will
display Database dialog box as shown below:
250
Jobs (CAM) Module
This dialog box provides the Name of the database together with the Directory and Group. The
directory containing database documents can be modified via this window. The system will
display a warning message informing of the effects this action would have in case database
documents of the directory are modified.
VIEW
Job Explorer
Job explorer ( ) option provides information about the list of jobs that have been created.
Any new jobs created will be organized in folders in a tree structure on the left side of the
drawing window.
In Job explorer panel, jobs have two identifiers: name and references. Whenever a job is created,
an automatic reference is generated, which will be unique in the database. In addition, the user
will have to give a name for it. The same job name cannot be repeated in another folder.
If the user right clicks on a job, a contextual menu will be displayed providing the following
options: Open, Export, Cut, Copy, Delete, Change name, Refresh and Properties.
Quotation Jobs
Quotation jobs ( ) option displays a tree, which only shows quotation jobs and provides full
functionality for their creation, ordering, handling as well as their elimination. From now on,
quotation jobs will no longer be displayed in the production jobs tree.
251
Jobs (CAM) Module
Kit Explorer
Kit explorer ( ) option provides information about the list of kits that have been created. Any
new kits created will be organized in folders in a tree structure on the left side of the drawing
window.
If the user right clicks on a kit a contextual menu will be displayed providing the following
options: Open, Export, Cut, Copy, Delete, Change name, Refresh and Properties.
Product List
Product list ( ) option allows the visualization of all the parts along with details like
Reference, Machine, Material, Thickness, Quantity, Labor ticket, Priority, Pending quantity, Lost
quantity, Name, User data (1-2-3) and Dimensions.
If the user right clicks on a product, a contextual menu will be displayed providing the following
options: New, Open, Open parts, Delete, Masterlink, Print, Properties, Cancel and Customize.
Product View
Product view ( ) option allows the visualization of all the drawing parts of the opened
manufacturing order.
Sheet List
Sheet list ( ) option allows the visualization of all the sheet parts in a list format and displays
information such as: Reference, Machine, Material, Thickness, CNC, Quantity, Sheet, Status,
Dimensions, Weight (kg), Use (%), X &Y dimensions and User data (1-2-3).
Sheet View
Sheet view ( ) option allows the visualization of all sheets of the opened manufacturing
order at once.
252
Jobs (CAM) Module
ADD-INS
Processes
Processes ( ) option allows the user to carry out a complete manufacturing process.
Processes are used to carry out a series of actions that are repeated in our daily work. Through
Processes window it is possible to create sets of process instructions related to our Databases,
System, Jobs, Kits, Sheets, Import, Draw, Nesting and machining, Palletization, View, Print, Errors
and Control. It helps the user save time by means of the automatization of all these instructions
that the user keeps creating repeatedly.
Previously, the user must define this process, writing a file with a certain format with the
manufacturing order to be opened and the number of parts to be imported among others.
The window is divided into two sections. On the left side the user will visualize the whole Set of
instructions, listing all the possible operations:
Figure 219: Set of instructions (Processes)
On the right side, the user will be provided with the List of process instructions. The user will
have to double click on the desired operations in order to place them in the list of process
instructions in the desired order. Once the desired process has been created he will have to go to
Processes tab, select Save as option and save it after introducing the required name.
In order to obtain more information about Processes go to Technical information / Working with
processes section.
253
Jobs (CAM) Module
Figure 220: List of process instructions example
Parametric Editor
Parametric editor ( ) option allows the user to visualize the instructions tree along with all
the available instructions that can be included in the file.
It is possible to create an instruction either by double clicking on the desired instruction or by

selecting it and clicking Add option located in the contextual menu, which would display the Data
request window for the instruction creation.
Once the instruction has been selected and all the required data introduced, click OK button and
the instruction will be included in the list located in the center. The panel situated in the center
consists in a table and it shows the information per each of the instructions included,
corresponding number by insertion order, associated image, name of the element it represents,
name of the instruction and the parameters associated to it.
The right hand side of the window provides the Data request window and the Graphic display
window. When the application is started both windows will be almost empty, however, they will
keep being updated as the user adds the instructions.
By means of the ribbon, it is possible to execute diverse actions with the instructions. From Home
tab it is possible to access the Properties of an instruction in order to modify, delete, cut and
paste it in another point of the file or copy it. On the other hand, from the View tab the user can
show or hide the Data request and Graphic display windows. The window can be shown or hidden
as per the requirements just by selecting the corresponding icon located in the menu.
254
Drawing Module
3 DRAWING MODULE
The Drawing module provides different tools in order to design the parts in two dimensions. It
offers a wide range of drawing possibilities to the user. In order to access the drawing module,
Click Drawing ( ) button located in Home menu of Lantek Expert – Jobs (CAM) and the system
will open the drawing module as shown below:
Figure 221: Drawing module
Drawing Window
Lantek Expert – Drawing window consists of the Geometry toolbar, Machining toolbar, Status
bar, Drawing window and 3D View. The Drawing window occupies the center of the 2D screen
and represents the useful drawing zone where the user can design a part. The 3D view will only
be visualized if previously enabled in View tab of the Drawing module and aims to be a visual aid
when designing parts.
255
Drawing Module
Status Bar
The status bar provides up to date information about the steps to perform and the active
coordinates of the cursor.
• Sheets dimension: Those are the X and Y dimensions of the current sheet.
• Percent of sheet occupied by the parts: This is the size of the whole sheet occupied by
the nested parts.
• Percent of remnant occupied: In this case, referred to the size that the nested parts
occupy in the remnant.
• Maximum cutting coordinates: Maximum X and Y distances where the machine head will
arrive.
• Sheet reference: This is the reference given when the sheet has been created.
• CNC filename: This is the name of the CNC file which will not be generated until the job is
saved.
Apart from all the data shown previously located at the bottom of the window, there is also an
icon representing the active option. This icon, together with the name and group it belongs to,
plus a text displaying the user´s requirements at any time (a point, a selection, etc.) makes the
program user friendly and guides the user through the execution of the different options.
Customize Quick Access Toolbar

Customize quick access toolbar option permits the user to access the different functionality
areas of the software quickly and in a visual way, as they are coming in the drawing and nesting
modules. This frequently used toolbar is accessible on the top left corner of the window. This
provides the user with one click shortcut commands for the commonly used functions, such as
creating a new job/part, opening the selected part of the job/existing job and saving it between
many other options.
By means of this option the user will also be able to include additional icons such as Print,
Properties and Projects for example. Undo ( ) and Redo ( ) options enable the user to
select the number of actions that is going to use. It is necessary to unfold the list of last
performed actions and to select the action or actions ready to undo or redo from the list.
256
Drawing Module
The user can add any frequently used commands to the quick access tool bar by right
clicking on the command icon and selecting Add to Quick Access Tool Bar.
More commands... option located in the drop-down menu provided on the right corner of the
Quick Access Toolbar, displays Customize dialog box, which includes the following tabs:
• Quick Access
• Hide options
• Shortcut keys
Each command displays a certain activity area. The Command button in each group carries out a
command or displays a menu of commands. Using this hierarchy, similar commands are grouped
together making the Customize access toolbar very task oriented. Because in all the modules,
some commands are available directly on each tab and it is not necessary to search for those
options in submenus.
Contextual Menu
It is possible to access to Access to points menu through a right mouse-click. The contextual
menu will only be displayed in the following cases whenever an option is being executed (such as
drawing an element, breaking elements, inserting a rapid movement, etc.):
• When selecting a point
• When selecting a geometry element
• When executing a geometry drag/dragging
Given the case that the access to point by default is modified during the execution of an option
and by means of the contextual menu, this modification will become effective, that is, the default
snap mode will be modified for the rest of the options.
257
Drawing Module
Figure 222: Access to points menu
• Picked Point: Select the picked point directly.
• Centre Point: Select the center of an arc or circle.
• Centre of Contour: Select the center of a contour.
• Near Point: Select the near point on the element.
• End Point: Select the beginning or end point of one element.
• Intersection Point: Select the intersection point between two elements.
• Double Intersection: Select the intersection point of two elements prolongation.
• Mid-Point: Select the Mid-point of an element.
• Tangent Point: Select the tangent point to one arc or circle.
• Projected Point: Select the projected point on an element.
• Quadrant Point: Select a quadrant point on an arc or circle.
• Mixed Point: Select the near point to beginning, end, intersection, center, etc.
• Delete Geometry: It deletes the geometric elements.
258
Drawing Module
• Default snap mode: Click this option in order to go back to the previous snap mode.
Parts
New
New ( ) option enables the user creating a new part.
Open
Open ( ) option allows the user opening an existing part. The system will display Part
selection dialog box as shown below:
Figure 223: Part selection dialog box
Select the required part and click OK button so that the system opens the selected part in
Drawing window.
Open Parts
Open parts ( ) option allows the user to open all parts of the job, open parts with the same
machine, open parts of a subjob and open selected parts. The system will display Open parts
259
Drawing Module
Figure 224: Open parts dialog box
Part Properties
Part properties ( ) option allows modifying the properties of a part. This option will display the
Here the user will be able to modify the required part properties and click OK button in order to
save them. This option works the same way as the one provided in the floating menu of the
Product list and view of the Main module.
Whenever executed without a job opened, the product information will be modified. But given
the case there is a job open and the part to be modified is in that job, the part information will
only be modified in the manufacturing line, without modifying the original product.
260
Drawing Module
Nesting and Machining
Nesting and machining ( ) button allows the user to access to the Nesting and Machining
module. When clicking this button, the Drawing module is closed.
Select Machine
Select Machine ( ) button enables the user to select the machine to cut the part. In order to
do it, perform the following steps:
1. Click Select Machine option and the system will display Machine select dialog box listing all the
machines available.
2. Select the required machine or include a new one by means of New button.
3. Click OK button and the part will be cut with the selected machine.
Save
Find listed below the different options available:
Save
Save ( ) option saves the current geometry in the system.
Save As
Save As ( ) button allows the user to save a part or to save the changes made to an existing
part. This is similar to the save application except for the fact that this can be used to create a
new part similar to the existing one.
When using this application to save an existing part, the system displays the Part saving dialog
box. It is possible to make the required changes and assign a new name in this dialog box.
It is possible to generate multiple image files per part and sheet. For that purpose, it is necessary
to save the image in the corresponding database table and to indicate the file type (BMP, IMGB,
IMGP, etc.). This functionality is configured in a special file called IMAGE.FMT where as many
image formats as required can be added. Allowed formats are: BMP, PNG, WMF, JPEG and GIF
between many others. When parts are created from importers their images can only be 70x60 or
700x600.
261
Drawing Module
Thanks to this, it will be possible to generate better quality images as both their size and format
can be configured. Likewise, visualization type can be configured in black and white or color, to
display their filling or to show the machining.
All the information is stored on NEST_NEXT_00000xxx table and MMPP_MMPP_00000100 table,

while the other MMPP_MMPP_00000xxx tables are no longer used.
When saving a nesting as a multiprogram it will be marked as so, therefore the label will be
shown in both the main and nesting modules. Task nestings cannot be saved as a multiprogram if
they contain order parts.
Save by Parts
Save by parts ( ) option enables the user to save more than one part. If there is more than
one design, then this application allows the user to save each design as an independent part.
There are three different options:
• Save by parts (Manual) : The main feature of this option, is that the user must select
the geometry to save manually by means of the Selection options that will be displayed
on the data request panel. Find below the main data request panel corresponding to this
option:
Figure 225: Save by parts (Manual)
• Save by parts (Automatic) : By means of this option, the system will automatically
detect the parts to save. Find below the main data request panel corresponding to this
option:
262
Drawing Module
Figure 226: Save by parts (Automatic)
• Save by parts (Semi-automatic) : The semi-automatic option means that the user
must select one contour of the part required to be saved so that the system can detect
the rest of the part required to be saved. Find below the main data request panel
corresponding to this option:
263
Drawing Module
Figure 227: Save by parts (Semi-automatic)
Find the fields provided in the previous data request panels described below. Save options
section provides the following fields:
• Remember part saving data: This parameter will indicate whether the data provided in
Part saving window will be remembered for the next part saved during the execution of
the option. In other words, it allows setting the values by default for part saving options.
• Import text properties: When selecting Import text properties option, the user will
visualize a navigation button that gives access to the text definition window in order to
access part data. The auxiliary geometry element texts to be treated when saving by
parts are configured in this window. Treated texts can be kept in this window using
Delete texts option. The automatic part detection option must be disabled, and the text
property import option should be used. The Selection window can be used to choose the
part geometry and text properties associated to it.
• Delete the part: It indicates whether the parts are deleted after saving or not. Whenever
the user enables Import text properties parameter, the arrow button located on the right
side becomes enabled. If selected, the system will display the following dialog box:
264
Drawing Module
• Prompt for data on each part: It indicates whether different data for each part will be
recorded or not. This checkbox is displayed only when Detect parts automatically
checkbox is selected. If this checkbox is selected, then Part Saving dialog box will be
displayed as many times as number of parts to save, where the user will be able to modify
the data of the part in question. In addition, this window will contain “Set as default data”
parameter, which will allow setting these data as default from that moment on during
the execution of the option.
This parameter will just be displayed in the data request panel that corresponds to Save by
parts (Automatic) option.
• Skip part verification: If enabled the system will skip the part verification process going
directly to the next one. On the contrary, the system will not skip the part verification
process. This parameter intends to make the part saving process more fluent. If enabled,
the system will not display the second data request panel with Verify Part, Break the arcs,
Open contours, Smooth, Small elements, Management of internal contours and Scale
sections.
Find described below the fields provided in Management of auxiliary geometry elements section:
• 2D Points: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and Only in
parts that contain them.
• Lines: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and Only in parts
with intersections.
• Text: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and Only in parts that
contain them.
• Dimensions / Text: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and
Only in dimensioned parts.
• Auxiliary Geometry: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and
Only in parts that contain them.
This section will not be displayed in Save by parts (Manual) option.
265
Drawing Module
Once all the required data has been introduced, the user must select button so that the
system displays the following data request panel:
Figure 228: Verify part – Data request panel
• Verify part section will display the Reference, Dimensions, Number of parts, Number of
close contours, Number of open contours, Number of small elements and Number of
small elements deleted fields, which are not editable.
• Verify: Enable this checkbox in order to display Break the arcs, Open contours, Smooth and
Small elements sections below.
• Management of internal contours: Enable this checkbox in order to display Management

of internal contours section below.
• Scale: Enable this checkbox in order to display Scale section detailed below.
Figure 229: Break the arcs – Open contours – Smooth – Small elements
• R: Introduce the radius in millimeters.
• d: Introduce the distance to break the arcs.
266
Drawing Module
Figure 230: Open contours
• Close open contours: Enable this checkbox in order to close open contours.
• Tolerance: Introduce the required tolerance in millimeters.
• Modifying the geometric elements is allowed: Enable this checkbox so that the system
allows modifying geometric elements.
• Assign technology: Select the geometry required to assign from the options provided in
the drop-down list: < >, Mark, Cut, No Cut, Auxiliary Geometry. < > option means “Do not
assign technology”. Given the case < > option is selected; the system will display the
▪ Delete: Enable this parameter so that the system erases open contours without
exception.
▪ Except elements with technology: This parameter is directly linked to the previous one
and will only be shown if Delete is enabled. Enable this parameter in order to keep those
open contours where the corresponding technology has been previously assigned.
• Put points in open contours: Select where to put points between No, All, Cut contours,
Mark contours and Non cut contours.
Figure 231: Smooth
• Smooth: If enabled, the segments of the selected geometry will be smoothened. If

selected, the system will allow introducing the Maximum number of elements, Maximum
radius and Tolerance.
267
Drawing Module
Figure 232: Small elements
• Maximum length for smaller elements: Proceed to enable Cutter radius checkbox to use
it as maximum length. If not enabled, the user will be able to introduce the Length and
Radius.
• Delete small elements and join: If enabled, the system will try to join all the small
elements so that they are visualized more easily.
• Put points in small elements: Proceed to enable this checkbox in order to place points in
small elements.
Figure 233: Management of internal contours
268
Drawing Module
• Assign technology: By means of this parameter the user can assign technology to the
required internal contours, by selecting one of the options provided in the drop-down list:
Assign technology in internal contours, Assign technology in holes and Assign technology in
both of them.
• Technology: Select the technology to assign to the internal contours previously selected.
The following field will vary depending on the technology selected.
Figure 234: Scale
• Mode: Select the scale mode between Dimensions and Scale Factor.
• Apply different factor to X and Y: Enable this checkbox in order to apply a different
factor to X and Y. If enabled Required length and Required width fields will become
editable and the user will be able to introduce the required values. On the other hand, if
the parameter is disabled, the user will only be able to introduce Required length field
below.
• Required length: Introduce the required length.
• New dimensions: This field is not editable. It will display the dimensions of the scale by
default or the ones introduced by the user.
Once all the required data has been introduced the user will have to select button to
validate the data introduced in the previous panels ans proceed to save the parts. Finally, the
system will display Part saving window as shown below:
269
Drawing Module
Figure 235: Part saving dialog box
Here the user will have to introduce the required Reference, Machine, Material, Thickness, Date,
Quantity, Priority, Name, User Data 1-8 fields and Rotations. Find briefly detailed below the
parameters provided in this window:
• It is a filler part: Enable this parameter if the part in question is a filler part.
• Valid for nest in common cut: Enable this parameter if the current part is valid for
common cut.
• Automatic round angles: Proceed to select the required options from the drop-down list:
By default, No, Yes.
• Set as default values: By means of this parameter the user will be able to set the data set
in this window as default from that moment on during the execution of the option.
Click OK button in order to save the changes. This process will be repeated as many parts as
required to be saved.
Save All
Save all ( ) option saves all the parts.
270
Drawing Module
Save Machining
Save machining ( ) option allows the user saving the machining of the parts in different
machines. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
1. Select Save machining option and the system will display Machine select dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 236: Machine select dialog box
2. Select the required machine from the ones available in the list. Here the user can also add a new
machine to the list by clicking New. When doing so, the system will display Machine definition
dialog box where the user will be able to add a new one.
Import
Import option allows the user importing the Geometry of a part, Machining of a part and
Parametric parts between many others. Once selected, the system will display Import drop-down
list listing the various elements that can be imported:
DXF Files
In order to import a DXF file, perform the following steps:
1. Select DXF files ( ) option and the system will display Open dialog box. The different fields
provided in this dialog box are briefly described below:
▪ Directory: The path of the directory that consists of DXF files. Click the button in this
field to select the directory.
▪ Drawing simulation: It indicates whether to preview the drawing of the geometry or

not.
271
Drawing Module
▪ Parameters: Parameters of the DXF file. This tab is not available as only the geometry of
the DXF file is imported.
▪ Configure: Click this to configure the linear and angular tolerance as well as the
extension.
▪ Open: Click this to open the selected .dxf.
▪ Cancel: Click this option in order to close the window.
2. Select the required .dxf file and click Open button so that the system imports it.
3. Mark an insertion point in the geometry. The system will display Move toolbar to move the
imported geometry.
Parametric Parts
In order to import parametric parts, perform the following steps:
1. Select Parametric parts ( ) option and the system will display Parametric parts dialog
box as shown below:
Figure 237: Parametric parts dialog box
• Directory: The path of the directory consisting parametric parts. Click the button in this
field to select the required directory.
272
Drawing Module
• Arrow buttons: Click the arrow buttons to access the required pages of parametric parts.
• Configure…: Click this to configure the linear and angular tolerance as well as the
extension.
2. Double-click the required parametric part to import and the system will show Parametric: Path
dialog box displaying the existing dimensions of the part.
3. It is possible to edit the dimensions as per your requirements and then click OK so that the
parametric part is imported.
imported geometry.
DWG Files
In order to import a DWG file, perform the following steps:
1. Select DWG files ( ) option and the system will display Open dialog box. The fields
provided in this dialog box are previously described in DXF files.
2. Select the required .dwg file and click Open button so that the system imports it.
imported geometry.
MEC Files
In order to import a MEC file, perform the following steps:
1. Select MEC file ( ) option and the system will display Open dialog box. The fields
2. Select the required .mec file and click Open button so that the system imports it.
imported geometry.
273
Drawing Module
In order to import HPGL files, perform the following steps:
4. Select HPGL files ( ) option and the system will display Open dialog box. The fields
5. Select the required HPGL file and click Open button so that the system imports it.
imported geometry.
Machining Macros
Machining Macros ( ) option allows the user to open, save and delete machining macros.
When pointing this option, the system will display the following options:
Open ( ): Select this option in order to open an existing machining macro as follows:
1. Click Open button and the system will display Select machining macro dialog box.
2. Select the required machining macro and click OK button so that the system opens it.
Save ( ): Select this option in order to save new machining instructions as macro or save the
changes made to an existing one as follows:
1. Click Save button and the system will prompt the user to select a reference point in the
Drawing window which consists of the machined part.
2. Mark the reference point and the system will display Machining macros saving dialog box.
3. Introduce the reference of the machining macro and click OK button so that those machining
instructions are saved.
Save as ( ): Select this option in order to save the new machining instructions as macros or
save an already saved machining macro with a new reference.
274
Drawing Module
Delete ( ): Select this option in order to erase a machining macro as follows:
1. Click Delete button and the system will display Delete machining macros dialog box listing all
the saved machining macros.
2. Select the one required to delete and click Delete button, so that it is erased.
3. Click Close in order to close Delete machining macros dialog box.
Lead-in/Lead-outs
Open ( ): It opens an existing machining lead-in/lead-outs from the list.
Save ( ): It allows the user saving the current lead-in/lead-out in the system.
Save as ( ): It allows the user saving the current lead-in/lead-out with a different name.
Delete ( ): It allows the user deleting the required lead-in/lead-outs by selection.
Remnants
Remnants option allows the user to open, save and delete remnants. If selected, the system will
display the following options:
Open ( ): Select this option in order to open a remnant as follows:
1. Select Open option and the system will display Select a remnant dialog box listing all the
available remnants.
2. Select the required remnant from the list provided and click OK button so that the system
opens it.
3. The user can also filter and look for the remnant that satisfies his conditions by selecting
Criteria checkbox. If selected, the Navigation button will be activated, which will direct the user
to Select a remnant window as shown below:
275
Drawing Module
Figure 238: Select a remnant dialog box
4. Introduce the Reference, Material, Thickness, maximum and minimum Length, maximum and
minimum width and User data between other options as can be seen in the previous window.
5. The system will display the remnants that meet the conditions previously introduced and the
user will have to select the required one and click OK button.
Save ( ): Select Save option in order to save new remnants or to save the changes made to an
existing one as follows:
1. Click Save button and the system will display Remnant saving dialog box.
2. Introduce the Reference of the remnant, select the required Material from the drop-down list
or include a new one, introduce the Thickness, Quantity, Priority and User data if required
between other options.
Save As ( ): Select Save as option in order to save a new remnant or to save an already
existing remnant with different values.
Delete ( ): Select Delete option in order to erase the required remnants as follows:
1. Click Delete button and the system will display Delete remnants dialog box listing all the saved
remnants.
2. Select the remnant required to delete.
276
Drawing Module
3. The user can also filter and look for the remnants to delete by selecting Criteria checkbox. If
selected, the Navigation button will be enabled, which will direct the user to Delete remnants
window.
4. Introduce the Reference of the remnant, select the required Material from the drop-down list
or include a new one, introduce the Thickness, Quantity, Priority and User data if required
between other options.
5. The system will display the remnants that meet the conditions previously introduced and the
user will have to select the remnant required to delete and click OK button so that it is erased.
Duct Holes
Duct Holes option enables the user to open, save and delete duct holes. When selected, the
system will display the following options:
Open ( ): Select this option in order to open an existing duct hole as follows:
1. Click Open button and the system will display Duct hole selection dialog box listing all the saved
duct holes.
2. Select the required Duct hole and click OK button so that the system opens it.
Save ( ): Select this option in order to save a specific geometry as duct hole or to save the
changes made to an existing duct hole as follows:
1. Click Save button and the system will prompt the user to select a Reference point.
2. Once the reference point has been marked the system will display Duct holes saving dialog box
as shown below:
Figure 239: Duct holes saving dialog box
3. Introduce the required Reference for the duct hole and click OK button so that the system saves
it.
Save As ( ): Select this option in order to save a specific geometry as duct hole or save an
already saved one with a new reference.
277
Drawing Module
Delete ( ): Select this option to delete a duct hole as follows:
1. Click Delete button and the system will display Delete duct holes dialog box listing all the saved
duct holes.
2. Select the one required to erase and click Delete button in order to delete it.
3. Click Close button in order to exit from Delete duct holes dialog box.
Mosaics
Mosaics option enables the user to create, save and configure mosaics. When selected, the
system displays the following options:
Create ( ): This option allows creating mosaics for a part as follows:
1. Click Create and mark the initial and end points of the area where the user wants to create the
mosaic. The system will display Create mosaic dialog box as shown below:
Figure 240: Create mosaic dialog box
2. Introduce the length of the mosaic with respect to X and Y axis in Length (X) and Length (Y)
fields as well as the Distance between the rectangles.
3. Click OK button and the mosaic will be created within the two selected points.
Save ( ): This option allows saving the mosaics as follows:
1. Click Save option and the system will display Part saving dialog box as shown below:
278
Drawing Module
2. Introduce the Reference, Machine, Material, Thickness, Date, Group and various User data as
per your requirements.
3. Click OK button in order to save the mosaic.
Configure mosaics ( ): This option configures the parameters related to mosaics as follows:
1. Click Configure mosaics button and the system will display Modify mosaics properties dialog
box as shown below:
279
Drawing Module
Figure 242: Modify mosaics properties dialog box
2. The fields provided in the previous dialog box are briefly described below:
• Insert reference text in each part: If enabled, the system will insert the reference text in
each part.
• Delete the empty files: Select this checkbox in order to remove the empty mosaics.
Thanks to this option it is possible to avoid saving empty files in the system.
• Format of reference parts: The user will be able to activate Use letters to identify the
rows, Use letters to identify the columns and Enumerate the rows of the mosaic from top
to bottom checkboxes.
• Mode of create parts: The user will be able to select between Create a part by each tile
and Create several parts by each tile.
• Delete parts with perimeter less than (mm): Select this checkbox in order to delete the
parts with a smaller perimeter than the value specified in this field.
• Join the parts inside each tile whose reference text is: Select this checkbox in order to
join the parts with same reference text in each tile.
280
Drawing Module
• Assign material to parts by reference text: In this section the user can create a new
material and modify or delete an existing one respectively by means of New, Modify and
Delete buttons attached at the bottom.
Help
In this section, the user will find useful information in Documents and Online Resources.
Print
Print option allows the user printing the details of the part.
The Configuration Options menu includes the following sections:
Figure 243: Configuration options (Drawing module)
Draw and Nest

This option enables the configuration of the parameters that correspond to the Drawing module.
These parameters are divided into different groups and are shown through the following tabs:
Auxiliar, Do All, Print, Colors and Display.
3.5.16.1.1 Auxiliar
• Adjust sheets to sides: If this parameter is activated, the sheets are drawn in one corner
of the graphic area. If deactivated the sheets are adjusted to the center of the graphic
area. Activation of this parameter is recommended since, if the sheets are drawn in one
corner, more space is available for the part screens.
• Work with sheet references: If this parameter is disabled all the sheets with the same
thickness, material and size will be assumed to be equal, however if it is enabled it is
possible to differentiate between sheets with the same thickness, material and size, by
giving them a reference name.
281
Drawing Module
When creating a new sheet, with this parameter enabled, the system will prompt for a reference.
This is used when there are sheets with a quality control. For example, with 100 sheets of
2000x1000, the reference of the sheet to use in each job will appear in the worksheet.
If this option has been enabled, the user should create the sheets one by one so that each one
has its own reference, and this parameter works properly.
• Automatic sheet references: By means of this option the user will be able to define a
specific format for the automatic references. If enabled, the Format Navigation button
will direct the user to Automatic sheet references format dialog box, where the user can
configure the required format of the automatic references.
• Verify the machining of the sheets while saving: If enabled, the system will test if the
machining process has been done properly when saving the sheet. The system will make
sure that:
▪ All the parts and contours are machined.
▪ There is no overlapping between parts.
▪ There are no leads, micro-joints, loops, etc. that overlap with other elements.
The system will show a message with the result of the test. If there has been any error the
warning message will display where the error has occurred. If not the user will get the following
completion message: “All machining on the sheet has been executed”.
• Define the default snap mode: When this option is active, a new button will be displayed
at the snap mode toolbar and it will allow defining the snap mode by default. The
selected option will be displayed with a red frame all around the button. Each time the
user uses another option different than the default option, after applying the option
selected the system will come back to the default option. To disable any default option,
the user has to make double click on the New button.
• “Undo” option: This option is very useful when making changes in order to allow going
back to the previous states of the system. Here the user has to select between all levels
(the system will store in the memory the highest number of levels possible) and defined
number of levels.
• Scale factor for keyboard zoom & Scale factor for mouse zoom: By means of these
options the user can configure the scale factors while doing zoom, both for the keyboard
282
Drawing Module
and the mouse wheel. The value to introduce as scale factor should be in range of 0.1 to
100, being 2 the default value. A smaller value than 1 inverts the zoom behavior. Where
the page up key makes zoom out and the page down key makes zoom in. The same is
applicable to the mouse wheel, where if value 1 is applied the zoom will not be
performed.
▪ Moving the mouse wheel forward, the system will perform a zoom-in and moving
backward the system will perform a zoom-out.
▪ If the mouse right button is pressed while moving forward the mouse wheel, the
drawing will be moved down and if the mouse right button is pressed while moving
backward the mouse wheel, the drawing will be moved up.
▪ If the mouse left button is pressed while moving forward the mouse wheel, the drawing
will be moved to the left and if the mouse right button is pressed while moving
backward the mouse wheel, the drawing will be moved to the right.
▪ Keeping the middle button pressed while dragging the mouse the user pans the screen.
▪ Keeping the middle button and shift key pressed while dragging the mouse the user
does a dynamic zoom. As the mouse cursor moves up the screen, the view should zoom
in. As the mouse cursor moves down the screen view should zoom out. To configure
mouse sensibility or change its behavior it is possible to change this parameter.
• Quadrant angle: This is the angle in which the circles are going to be divided. It is only for
references; the circle is one arc. But when making a line which starts in one point of the
circle, and the Snap mode is Quadrants, then the system will catch the points which are at
the angle step given here. The value given by default is 90 degrees, therefore there are
four possible points.
• Use: When calculating material optimization, the system will use the:
▪ Real area: External area without the interiors.
▪ External area: Area of the exterior perimeter of the part.
▪ Rectangular area: Area of the minimum rectangle of the part.
• Generate sheet box windows metafile while saving (WMF): If enabled, the system will
generate a WMF file with the current sheet box nesting when saving. WMF is a standard
283
Drawing Module
graphic format that can be treated from many external applications. The file will be
• Generate sheet windows metafile while saving (WMF): If enabled, the system will
generate a WMF file with the current sheet when saving. WMF is a standard graphic
format that can be treated from many external applications. This file will also be
• Generate PDF of print sheet box while saving: With this option, PDF documents will be
generated with the Print Box of the selected document when saving the parts and
nestings. Every time a part or a nesting is saved, the corresponding print box PDF will be
generated. It will be stored in the same directory as the product it represents and will
take the same name.
• Generate sheet DXF while saving: As in the previous options, if enabled, the system will
generate a DXF file with the current sheet nesting. DXF files are standard drawing
exchange formats
• Generate part DXF while saving: If enabled, the system will generate a DXF file of the
active part.
• Save autorecover information: This option saves the automatically recovered

information of the current work in the drawing and nesting modules. The desired time to
save the auto recovered information can be set.
• Order subjobs: Whenever entering the Nesting module the subjobs will be ordered
depending on the configuration set here.
• Contour attributes: The postprocessor will generate the proper CNC code for the
attributes of the contours here defined. The system will display Contour Attributes dialog
box as shown below, where the user will have to introduce the required data:
284
Drawing Module
Figure 244: Contour Attributes dialog box
• Auxiliary geometry: It is possible to create non cut lines configuring their line properties
as well as their visualization. First of all, it is necessary to create the new non cut types
that will be used and to specify the name and properties of the line (color, style and
thickness), as well as the possibility of visualizing this line on the sheet. From this moment
on it will be possible to modify these properties from Colors tab located next to the rest
of customizable elements.
285
Drawing Module
Figure 245: Configure: Draw and Nest (Auxiliar) window
3.5.16.1.2 Do All
• Order of sheets: In order to select the sheets for the nesting, the system will use the type
of order set in this field. The user will be provided with the following options:
▪ Largest to smallest
▪ Smallest to largest
▪ By priority
• Remnants before sheets: In order to select the sheets for the nesting, the system will
look first at the status of Remnants before sheets parameter and given the case it is
enabled, the system will prioritize the use of existing remnants over sheets.
286
Drawing Module
• Select sheets for quotation: This option enables the user selecting sheets for quotation.
The drop-down list provided on the right side of the field provides the following options:
▪ No
▪ Yes
▪ Only these
▪ If the job is for quotation
• Only use sheets according to the criteria for sheet selection: By means of this parameter,
the user can configure the required criteria for sheets selection. Once it has been
enabled, the arrow ( ) button located on the right side will also become enabled.
The system will display Sheet selection window, where the user will be able to set the minimum
and maximum length as well as the minimum and maximum width of the sheets. In addition, the
user will be able to see the values previously introduced in the following fields:
• User data (1-3)
• Show the sheets with quantities equal to zero
• Select blocked sheets
• Select the remnants generated by nesting
• Select the remnants generated by user
The last two parameters previously listed will be disabled. In order to modify them, the user will
have to go to Nesting module / Sheets / New / Criteria window. Whenever Do all option is
executed, the system will use those sheets that match with the defined criteria.
• Make unitary nestings with long parts: Thanks to this parameter, it is possible to create
unitary nestings with long parts when executing Do all option. The user must introduce
the required value in Minimum length field, which must be in millimeters. This option will
check all the parts that compose the job considering their dimensions and if any of them
is bigger than the value here configured, the system will create a unitary nesting with the
rotation of the dimension that exceeds the configured value. Given the case both
dimensions are bigger than the value specified, the part will be nested in the original
rotation. For instance, if the user wants to make a unitary nesting for all the parts of a job,
287
Drawing Module
it would only be necessary to configure the Minimum length with a small enough value,
as for example one millimeter.
• Look for sheets in stored nestings: If this parameter is enabled, the system will search
first for the nestings saved as Stored nesting. When activating this parameter, the
following parameters will become enabled:
▪ Criteria: This field allows filtering the stored nestings that the user wants to use. Once it
has been enabled, the arrow ( ) button located on the right side will also become
enabled. Whenever this button is selected, the system will display Import stored
nesting (Criteria) window. This window allows filtering nestings by Machine, Material,
Thickness, Reference, Date, Length and Width.
▪ Delete existing machining: By activating this parameter, if any of the nestings to be

used has machining, it will be previously deleted before including it in the job and it will
be machined again during the process.
▪ Regenerate: By activating this parameter, if any of the nestings to use has machining, it
will be completely regenerated before including it in the job and it will be machined
again during the process. Remember that regenerating also supposes deleting the
existing machining.
• Look for the best format of sheets: Given the case this parameter is enabled, the system
will try to nest all the parts making use of each one of the existing formats. For example,
there are three different types of formats. The system will execute three tries, by nesting
all the parts of the job in format number one, then in format number two and finally, in
format number three. The system will compare the efficiency reached by every one of the
formats and will make use of the most efficient one.
• Look for the best combination of sheets: This parameter depends on the field Minimum
efficiency. If this parameter is enabled, the system will take into account the minimum
efficiency set and will look for the best sheet per each nesting (the most efficient one). As
in the previous case, imagine there are three different type of formats. The system will
test all the existing formats per nesting, and will choose the most efficient one per
nesting. For example, the system will test nesting number one, in sheet number 1 (with
an efficiency of 65%), in sheet number two (efficiency of 72%) and sheet number three
(efficiency of 85%). Since sheet number three is the most efficient, the system will save it
288
Drawing Module
and start testing again with the following nesting in every sheet format following the
same process until all the parts have been nested. If none of the existing sheets meets
the efficiency requirement set in Minimum efficiency field, the system will keep the one
that has achieved the highest efficiency.
• Minimum efficiency to eliminate each sheet: Once Do All option has been performed and
the machining has been executed, the system will test whether the sheets used meet the
minimum efficiency requirement set in this field. Those sheets whose efficiency is not
bigger than the value configured, will be deleted. In this case the system will make use of
other sheets until the minimum efficiency is exceeded.
• Minimum efficiency calculation mode: This option allows deciding the way that the
efficiency (defined in the previous point) to eliminate sheets will be calculated. The
available options are:
▪ Real area: Sum of the real area of all parts.
▪ External area: Sum of the external area of all parts.
▪ Rectangular area: Sum of the rectangular area of all parts.
▪ All parts bounding box: Area of the bounding box of all parts.
• Maximum time to look for the best sheets: Here the user must introduce the maximum
time that will be taken to search for the best sheets. Remember that the time must be
introduced in seconds. During the Do All execution, once the time here specified is
reached, the system will stop testing methods and will choose the best one (most
efficient) found up to that moment.
• Prenesting: This option allows creating temporary sheets with limited quantity so that it
is possible to select automatically which ones are the most adequate to execute the parts
nesting of a determined job. In order to activate this option, it is necessary to activate
Look for the best format of sheets or Look for the best combination of sheets. These
options are necessary in order to test all the temporary formats that the system can
create.
Apart from temporary sheets, it is also possible to indicate if it is required to use or not the sheets
that have already been created in the system. If this option is activated, the system would use the
same sheets that would be used in the nesting of a complete job. If sheet dimensions are
289
Drawing Module
required as much adjusted as possible, the user can configure Adjust final sheet dimensions to
nested dimensions option. This parameter can be defined both in X and Y or in both dimensions.
This option allows creating sheet formats that take full advantage of a coil, given that it is
possible to set it to always adjust in X.
Once the system obtains the final sheet format result, the user will be able to create the sheets in
the database or not. In this way, the user will also be able to create quotation sheets if required.
Finally, it will also be possible to launch the sheet list so that the user can be provided with the list
of used formats in the current job. If required, it will be possible to print directly or to get a
previous display to save the list in a determined format as, for example, PDF.
Figure 246: Prenesting dialog box
▪ Use fixed dimensions for width of the sheets: Indicate the length, a minimum and
maximum width and a step value for each of the two dimensions and the system will
create temporary sheet formats based on those values.
▪ Use a range of dimensions for widths of the sheets: Indicate a predetermined width
together with the step range for the sheet length.
▪ Minimum & Maximum length: Indicate the minimum and maximum length of the
sheets.
▪ Minimum & Maximum width: Indicate the minimum and maximum length of the sheets.
290
Drawing Module
▪ Step for length & width: Here the user will be able to define the step for length and
width in millimeters.
▪ Create the used sheets in database: Once the system obtains the final sheet format
result, the user will be able to create the used sheets in database or not. In this way, the
user will be able to create quotation sheets and Save sheets as quotation sheets if
required.
▪ Adjust final sheets to nested dimensions: If sheet dimensions are required as much
adjusted as possible, the user can configure this parameter. It can be defined both in X
and Y or in both dimensions.
▪ Respect minimum dimensions: Whenever adjusting the sheet dimensions, it is possible

to configure respecting the minimum dimensions defined for the Prenesting. In other
words, there must be no final sheet with smaller dimensions than the ones defined.
▪ Use system sheets: This allows the user to use the system sheets.
▪ Print sheets at the end of the prenesting: This option allows the user to preview before
printing so as to get a previous display in a determined format.
▪ Prompt for data before prenesting: When selected, the Prenesting window is displayed
when the user performs Do All option.
• Generate remnants after nesting: Given the case this parameter is enabled, once the
nesting has been executed, the system will generate automatically the remnants of every
sheet (if any).
• Cut after nesting: If enabled, the system will perform the machining operation after the
nesting has been done.
• Deal with equal sheets: Using this option, the system will calculate if the same sheet can
be done twice instead of making the nesting and machining process of the same parts in
the same sheets more than once, what will help the user save time.
If this parameter is disabled, the system will get one sheet and make the nesting and machining.
Get the following sheet and make the nesting and machining. The system will execute the same
steps once and again until the whole job has been finished even if the sheets are equal, which
results in a longer execution time.
291
Drawing Module
If this parameter is enabled, after performing the first sheet and machining, the system will
detect whether the following sheet is equal to the first one (this means we have the same
number of parts, which can be placed in the same positions). Given the case it detects an equal
sheet, the system will store just one sheet, meanwhile the Worksheet will define that the sheet
must be machined twice.
Figure 247: Configure: Draw and Nest (Do All) window
3.5.16.1.3 Print
• Print sheets while saving: If enabled, the system will print the sheets while saving.
• Print machining: If enabled, the machining will also appear in the worksheet.
• Print the full remnants: If enabled, the remnants will be filled with linear texture making
easier the differentiation between sheet and remnant when printing.
• Only the initialization: Enabled, in the worksheet will only appear the initialization. This
option is activated when Print machining is enabled.
292
Drawing Module
• Prompt for sheets before printing: Do All option may generate more than one sheet. If
this option is enabled, the system will ask for the sheets required to print instead of
printing all of them.
• Print: The system will generate the worksheet of the sheets selected here. The user can
select between; The current sheet, Every sheet of the subjob, Every sheet of the job and
Select sheets.
• Prints identifiers of parts: If enabled, the identifiers of the parts will be included in the
printing worksheet.
• Identifiers: The user can select between the following options:
▪ Print the name: The system will include the name of the part inside the geometry.
▪ Print the index: The system will insert the same number to every equal part of the
sheet. This index is very useful because it will be printed in the Factory sheets list.
▪ Print the order: The system will include in the parts the number that corresponds to
their order.
• Line width: When printing, the width of the different elements involved can be modified
in order to make easier their identification. The user will be able to set the Line width of
the Geometry part, Geometry sheet, Machining part and Machining sheet.
• Prompt for template name before printing: If enabled the system will prompt for the
template name to use before printing. This option is useful when the user has more than
one template defined. These templates, also called boxes, can be parameterized. In other
words, the user can define the line thickness, position and dimension of the drawings,
text format and database fields required in the boxes. In order to define a new box,
contact the product support team.
293
Drawing Module
Figure 248: Configure: Draw and Nest (Print) window
3.5.16.1.4 Colors
This window allows configuring the colors of the whole system. The user will get the list of
elements/aspects that can be configured by clicking the drop-down arrow located at the top of
the window. The configurable aspects are the following: Background, Cursor cross, Axis,
Background of sheets, Edge of sheet, Background of remnants, Edge of remnants, Clamps and work
zone, Straight, Point, Selection, Dragging, Machining, Machining with multihead, From Point, Rapids,
Cycles, Machining texts, Punched, Punch attribute, Common punch attribute, Shear attribute, Mark
attribute, Cut attribute, Micro-joints attribute, Shear, Pattern, Dimensions / Text, Simulation
Window-Capture, Virtual movement, Bridges, Loops, Lead-in / Lead-outs, Micro-joints, Geometry,
Upper and lower beveling, Upper bevel, Lower bevel, Remnant line, Cutting quality 1-12, Powder
mark, Drill mark, Pen mark, Cut mark, Rapid with head down, Suction cup, Activated suction cup,
Reference point, Grid, Auxiliary clams and auxiliary work zone, Distinguished color 1-30, Active part
in part list.
294
Drawing Module
Figure 249: Colors examples
The user will be able to configure the Type, Make on and Color of the previously mentioned
aspects.
Figure 250: Configure: Draw and Nest (Colors) window
295
Drawing Module
3.5.16.1.5 Display
• Show remnant references on screen: If enabled, whenever a remnant is generated the
system will show the assigned reference inside it.
• Show part texts on the sheet: In the Drawing window it is possible to assign a description
text which will have no machining effect. If this parameter is enabled, this text will be
displayed.
• Show the dragging of the part with collision control: If enabled, the user will be able to
visualize the dragging part with the collision control.
• Show non-cut contours on the sheet: The system provides an option to assign non-cut
technology to the contours. This means that these contours will not be machined unless
this assigned technology changes. If enabled, the non-cut geometries will be shown in
the configured color.
• Selection by window/capture/trap: If enabled, whenever the user selects parts (to erase,
copy or move them between many other options) they will get different colors so that
the visualization is easier and clearer.
• Simulate selection when mouse is moved: If enabled, whenever the mouse passes over a
segment, this segment will change color showing which contour would be selected if the
mouse was clicked.
• Show micro-joints: If enabled, the micro-joints will be shown, and an exterior line will
appear in the contours. This parallel line to the external contours is the center of the
exterior punch. The distance between the exterior contours and this line is the middle of
the width of the configured tool for the exteriors.
• Display all clamp and work zones: If enabled, the nesting module will show in the screen
all the work zones as well as the clamps in the configured positions.
The clamp zone changes depending on the station the turret is working with. If this parameter is
disabled, only the clamp work zone of the current station will be shown with continuous line and
the rest with discontinuous lines.
• Simulate the full remnants: If enabled, the remnants will be filled with a green color for
making the identification easier.
296
Drawing Module
• Display dimensions on the sheet: Although the dimensions made in the drawing module
will be always shown, the user can decide to keep them in the nesting module or not by
activating this parameter.
• View nesting limit: When enabled, the system will display the line that shows the end of
nesting.
• Highlight selected part: When the user selects a part in the Nesting Part list window, the
geometry of the select part will be highlighted in the sheet only when this option is
enabled. In the same way, it the user select any parts on the sheet, the system will
highlight them on the Parts List window as well as all the equal parts nested on the sheet.
This color can be configured in Color window.
• Show points at the center of punching instructions: This parameter allows a display of
the central point of each punch. This way, a better and faster punching interpretation can
be obtained. The user will be able to select between: No, Drawing, Nesting and Both of
them.
• Text size for the quantities in the parts window: This parameter allows the user
modifying the size of the text that will appear on the sheets window of the Nesting
module. The user will be able to select between; Small, Normal, Large and Largest.
• Postprocessor words: From this window the user can define which text will be shown on
the sheet when a function is selected, as well as the font and size of the postprocessor
words displayed on the sheet. If none is specified, the system will use the windows
standard font size configured by default on the computer.
These parameters allow visualizing or hiding the Postprocessor words as well as changing their
text.
297
Drawing Module
• Move the “offset” of the part on the sheet: If enabled, when getting a part from the list,
the system will show additional lines from the margin of the part showing the minimum
distance between parts.
• Selection with multihead: When the machine has been configured as multi-head, the
system will make the nesting trying to use the maximum number of heads. If this option
is enabled, when a part is select, the system will select the entire multi-head group (given
that the parts will be machined at the same time as selected).
• Selection by window/capture/trap without multihead: When Selection with multihead is

enabled this parameter will be highlighted.
• Show selected machining: This option allows visualizing the selected machining.
• Show micro-joints with points: If enabled, the system will display the micro-joints with
two points in order to show their location.
• Display fixed position points of the clamp: If enabled, the system will show the fixed
position points of the clamps.
• Show part references on the screen: If this option is enabled, the part references will be
included inside the contour of the parts. It will not change the machining of the parts, it is
only a visualization option.
▪ Show the direction of movements: If enabled, the system will show with an arrow the
direction of every rapid movement.
▪ Show rapids in drawing module: If the visualization is enabled in the Drawing module,
the user will be provided with three options:
298
Drawing Module
o One part: It shows rapids when one part is opened.
o Multiple parts: It shows rapids when multiple parts are opened.
o Always: It shows rapids constantly.
▪ Show rapids in Nesting and Machining module: Select this checkbox to visualize the
rapids in Nesting and Machining module.
• Show bevel information: Both in Nesting and Drawing module the user can visualize
bevel information. The system will display Chamber information setup dialog box as
shown below:
Figure 252: Bevel information setup dialog box
• Text position, font and size can be selected as well as where the text will be shown:
Drawing, Nesting or Both of them.
• Simulation: When clicking this button, the system will display Simulation dialog box as
shown below:
299
Drawing Module
Figure 253: Simulation dialog box
Here the user will be able to define the shear movement while the machining simulation. The
user can select between three different movements:
▪ On XY: The shear will move using both axes at the same time.
▪ First on one axis and later on the other: The shear will move first in horizontal or
vertical and then in the other way.
▪ Head radius (mm): Here the user can introduce the Head radius in millimeters.
▪ Number of milling broken segments: This option allows the user to define the number
of milling broken segments.
Figure 254: Configure: Draw and Nest (Display) window
300
Drawing Module
Interface
The Interface option enables the user to create a new toolbar and change the existing toolbar
1. Click Interface option and the system will display Customize dialog box:
Figure 255: Customize Quick Access
• Quick access
• Hide options
• Shortcut keys
• Ribbon
301
Drawing Module
toolbar.
) button.
• In Hide options tab the user can set the configuration of the commands and select
between Basic, Advanced and Customized.
If Customized option is selected, the user will be able to select between Basic and All and Hide
options section will be enabled. In this section the user can select between Current machine,
Machines of same type, All machines and enable Hide options in both modules parameter.
Figure 256: Customize Hide options
302
Drawing Module
Select an application and then introduce the key from the keyboard to assign as New Shortcut
key for the previously selected application. Click Assign button and the selected key will be
assigned as shortcut key as well as visualized in Existing keys field. The user can also select an
existing shortcut key from the Existing keys field and click Delete button in order to remove it.
• In Ribbon tab the user can edit the view and the items provided in the Ribbon.
303
Drawing Module
groups.
group.
It is not possible to add two separators together, neither at the beginning nor at the end of
the group.
file.
display a Warning window asking “Do you want to delete all ribbon customizations for
304
Drawing Module
Exit
Exit ( ) button allows the user to close Expert-Drawing window.
Home
Draw
Access to Points
Access to points ( ) option displays the following menu:
Figure 259: Access to points options
305
Drawing Module
• Default snap mode: Click this option in order to go back to the previous snap mode.
Delete Geometry
The Delete Geometry ( ) button allows the user to delete the desired geometries from the
design of the part.
In order to delete the geometry, perform the following steps:
1. Click Delete Geometry and the system will display Selection toolbar as shown below:
Figure 260: Selection toolbar
2. Select the elements that have to be deleted using Selection toolbar and then right-click or click
Accept button on the Selection toolbar. The geometry will be deleted.
Available Geometries
• 2D Points ( ): It creates geometric points. Select a point by means of the mouse or
keyboard.
• Line Segments ( ): It creates line segments. Select the beginning and end points.
• Continuous Line ( ): It creates polylines. Select a point by means of the mouse or

keyboard.
• Arc Segments ( ): It creates arc segments. Define the arc by three points.
• Full Circles ( ): It creates full circles. Define the circle and diameter of the circle.
306
Drawing Module
• Lines ( ): It creates construction lines. Define one point and the desired angle of the
line.
• Squares ( ): It creates squares. Define the square by its lower-left corner.
• Rectangles ( ): It creates rectangles. Define the rectangle by its center.
• Modified Rectangles ( ): It creates rectangles with modified corners. Define the lower-
left corner of the rectangle.
• Polygons ( ): It creates polygons. Define the length of the polygon side.
• Obround Slots ( ): It creates Obround Slots. Define the linear groove by one point and
one angle.
• Radial Slots ( ): It creates radial slots. Define the circular groove by the beginning
point, end point and center.
• Ovals ( ): It creates ovals.
• Ellipses ( ): It creates ellipses.
• Pulleys ( ): It creates pulleys.
Modify
Break Elements
Break elements ( ) button displays the options shown below:
Figure 261: Break elements options
307
Drawing Module
• Break Elements: It breaks and cuts geometric elements. This button allows the user to
split elements of geometry without eliminating the parts that limit a base element and
contiguous elements.
• Break: It breaks one element in two pieces. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
1. Select Break button and select the element that the user wants to break.
2. Click to mark the breaking point and the element will be split with a point.
• Cut 1: It deletes the end of one element by doing the following:
1. Select Cut 1 button and then select a base element.

2. Select the portion of a second element intersecting the base element and the selected portion
of the second element will be deleted.
• Cut several: It deletes the end of several elements. It deletes the selected portions of
elements intersecting the base element as follows:
1. Select Cut several button and select the required base element.
2. Select the portions of other elements intersecting the base element and those will be deleted.
Similar to Cut 1 option except for that this application deletes portions of several elements
at the same time.
• Join: It joins two crossed elements by deleting the selected portions of elements.
Perform the following steps:
1. Click Join button and then select the portion of the first element that has to be deleted.
2. Select the portion of the second element intersecting the first one. The system will join the two
intersecting elements by deleting the selected portions.
• Bridges: It connects two elements by means of a bridge as follows:
1. Click Bridges button and then select the first element that has to be connected.
2. Select the second element and the system will prompt the user to introduce the Width value of
the bridge.
3. Click OK button and the system will connect the two elements by a bridge.
308
Drawing Module
Fillets
Fillets ( ) option allows the user to create a fillet at the vertex of a geometry. In order to
create a fillet perform the following steps.
1. Select Fillets option and then select the first and second portions of the geometry which
constitute the corner or intersection of the geometry.
2. The system will display a dialog box asking the user the Radius value.
3. Click OK button and the system will create a fillet at the vertex.
Once a fillet has been created at the vertex of a geometry at a specified radius, it is possible
to click the other required vertices to create fillets of the same radius.
Bevel
Bevel ( ) option allows the user to create bevels at the vertex of the geometry. In order to
create bevels, do the following:
1. Click Bevels button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 262: Bevel values dialog box
2. The different fields in this dialog box are briefly described below:
▪ d1: The distance value from the vertex with respect to the first element.
▪ d2: The distance value from the vertex with respect to the second element.
▪ Constrain proportions: It indicates whether or not the values in ‘d1’ and ‘d2’ changes
proportionately.
3. Introduce the required values and then click OK.
309
Drawing Module
4. Select the first and second element of the geometry. The bevel is created at the vertex of the
geometry.
Offset
Select Offset ( ) option to draw a contour for a selected contour at a specified offset. In order
to draw a contour at a specified offset, do the following:
1. Click Offset button and then select the base contour.

2. Select the position of the contour and the required corner shape and the system will display the
Figure 263: Compensation mode
3. Select the required Compensation mode and click OK button. The system will display another
Figure 264: Compensation value
4. Introduce the Offset value in Value field and then click OK. The contour for the selected contour
will be drawn at the specified offset.
Lengthen Elements
Lengthen Elements ( ) option allows the user to lengthen two elements by joining them. In
order to lengthen elements, perform the following steps:
1. Click Lengthen Elements button and then select the first element that has to be joined and
lengthened.
2. Select the second element that has to be joined with the first element. The elements will be
connected and lengthened.
310
Drawing Module
Join Elements
Join Elements ( ) option allows the user to join two elements as follows:
1. Click Join Elements button and then select the first element that has to be joined.
2. Select the second element that has to be joined with the first element and the elements will be
joined.
Fitting
Fitting ( ) option creates a fitting type curve for the geometry. In order to do it, perform the
following steps:
1. Select Fitting button and the system will allow the user to select the required geometry by
means of Selection toolbar.
2. Once selected click Accept button located in the Selection toolbar and the system will display
Fitting dialog box as shown below:
Figure 265: Fitting dialog box
Find the different fields provided briefly described below:
▪ By points: It indicates whether the segments of the selected geometry are converted to
an arc or not.
▪ Smooth: It indicates whether the segments of the selected geometry are smoothened
or not. If selected, the user will have to introduce the required values in Minimum
number of elements, Maximum radius and Tolerance fields.
311
Drawing Module
▪ Make tangent: It indicates whether the arc is created based on the intersection of two
tangents or not. If selected, the user will have to introduce the required values in
Minimum angular error admitted, Maximum angular error admitted, Radius error
tolerance and Position error tolerance fields.
▪ Smooth and make tangent: It indicates whether the segments are smoothened and if
the arc is created based on the intersection of two tangents or not. If selected the user
will have to introduce the required values in Minimum number of elements, Maximum
radius, Tolerance, Minimum angular error admitted, Maximum angular error admitted,
Radius error tolerance and Position error tolerance fields.
▪ Reduce overlappings: Select this option to introduce maximum angular and linear
tolerances so that the system searches for this type of overlappings and tries to join the
geometrical elements that meet these conditions. In addition, the user can configure
the elimination of similar concentric circles. These circles (or arcs with an angle step of
36 degrees), which will be searched after reducing the overlappings, will be considered
as similar when their radius and the geometric center have a difference that is
considered inside the configured linear tolerance.
3. Select the required option and click OK button. The fitting curve will be created for the selected
geometry.
Shorten-Lengthen
Shorten-Lengthen ( ) option shortens or lengthens the selected element. In order to break

elements, do the following:
1. Click Shorten-lengthen button and then select the element that has to be shortened or
lengthened. The system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 266: Shorten-lengthen dialog box
The different fields in this dialog box are briefly described below:
312
Drawing Module
▪ Shorten: It indicates whether the length of the element is reduced or not.
▪ Lengthen: It indicates whether the length of the element is increased or not.
▪ Middle: It indicates whether the element is shortened or lengthened in the mid-point or

not.
▪ End: It indicates whether the element is shortened or lengthened in the end point or
not.
▪ Picked point: It indicates whether the element is shortened or lengthened in the

selected point or not.
▪ Value: It indicates the length value of the element.
2. Introduce the required values and then click OK button. The length of the selected element will
be shortened or lengthened depending on the values previously set.
Join and Fillet
Join and fillet ( ) option joins two intersected elements with a fillet of a specified radius. In
order to break elements with Join and fillet button, do the following:
1. Click Join and fillet button and then select the first element.
2. Select the second element which is intersected to the first element. The system will display a
dialog box asking the user the required radius value.
3. Enter the Radius value in the Value field and then click OK. The two intersected elements will be
joined with a fillet.
One Touch Figures

This menu allows the user creating twelve different notches for geometries, as shown in the
different images provided:
Figure 267: One-touch figures
• One-touch figure 1: Select this to create a notch at the vertex of the geometry. In order to
create this notch, do the following:
313
Drawing Module
1. Click One-touch figure 1 button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 268: One-touch figure 1
▪ d1: The distance value from the vertex with respect to the first element.
▪ d2: The distance value from the vertex with respect to the second element.
▪ Constrain proportions: It indicates whether the values in ‘d1’ and ‘d2’ changes
proportionately.

3. Select the first and second elements of the geometry and the notch will be created at the
vertex.
• One-touch figure 2: Select to create a notch at the vertex of the geometry. To create this
notch, do the following:
2. Introduce the radius value in the ‘r’ field and then click OK.
vertex.
• One-touch figure 3: Select this to create a notch at the vertex of the geometry. In order
to create this notch, do the following:
314
Drawing Module
2. Introduce the radius in ‘r’ field and then click OK.

vertex.
• One-touch figure 4: Select this to create a notch of specified length at a specified point of
the geometry. In order to create this notch, do the following:
▪ l: It is the length value of the notch.
▪ p: It is the depth value of the notch.

3. Select the base element and the insertion point of the notch.
4. Select the position of the notch and the notch will be created at the specified point.
• One-touch figure 5: Select this to create a notch of specified radius and depth. In order to
315
Drawing Module
▪ r: It is the radius value of the notch.
The radius value should be less than the depth value.
3. Select the base element and the insertion point.

4. Select the position of the notch and the notch of specified radius and depth will be created.
• One-touch figure 6: Select this to create a notch of specified radius and depth. In order to
1. Click One-touch figure 6 button and the system will display the following dialog box to enter
the radius and depth value (refer to One-touch figure 5):
2. Enter the Radius value in ‘r’ field and Depth value in the ‘p’ field and then click OK.
The radius value should be greater than the depth value.
316
Drawing Module

4. Select the position of the notch and the notch of specified radius and depth will be created.
• One-touch figure 7: Select this to create a notch of a specified width and depth. In order
to create this notch, do the following:
▪ l: It is the width value of the notch.
6. Enter the required values and then click OK.

7. Select the base element and insertion point.
8. Select the position of the notch and the notch of specified width and depth will be created.
• One-touch figure 8: Select this to create a notch of a specified radius, depth, and width.
In order to create this notch, do the following:
1. Click One-touch figure 8 button and then the system will display the following dialog box:
▪ r: It is the radius value of the notch.
317
Drawing Module
▪ a: It is the width value of the notch.
2. Enter the required values and then click OK.

4. Select the position of the notch and the notch will be created.
• One-touch figure 9: Select this to create a notch of specified width, depth, radius, and
width of the base. In order to create this notch, do the following:
2. Introduce the radius value in ‘r’ field, width value in ‘a’ field, width of the base value in ‘l’ field,
and depth value in ‘p’ field. Click OK.
4. Select the position of the notch and the notch of specified radius, width, width of the base, and
depth will be created.
• One-touch figure 10: Select this to create a notch of specified width, depth, and depth up
to the base point of the notch. In order to create this notch, do the following:
1. Click One-touch figure 10 button and the system will display the following dialog box to enter
the width and depth value (refer One-touch figure 7):
318
Drawing Module
2. Enter the width value in ‘l’ field, depth value in ‘p’ field, depth up to the base point of the notch
in ‘pm’ field. Click OK.
4. Select the position of the notch and the specified notch will be created.
• One-touch figure 11: Select this to create rectangular or circular notches at the vertex of
geometries. In order to create this notch, do the following:
The different fields in this dialog box are described as below:
• d1: It indicates the depth value of the notch.
• d2: It indicates the width value of the notch.
2. Introduce the required values and then select between Rectangular or Circular shape of notch.
Click OK.
3. Select the first and second element of the geometry.
4. Select the position of the notch and the notch will be created at the vertex of the geometry.
• One-touch figure 12: Select this to create a notch at the vertex of a geometry. In order to
319
Drawing Module
The different fields provided in this dialog box are briefly described below:
▪ d1 to d6: It is the distance values of the notch.
▪ 2 Distances: It indicates whether only the values of the ‘d1’ and ‘d2’ fields are used.
▪ 6 Distances: It indicates whether all the distance values from ‘d1’ to ‘d6’ fields are used.
2. Introduce the distances of the notch and select the number of distances to be entered. Click OK.
3. Select the first and second element of the geometry. The notch will be created at the vertex of
the geometry.
Transform
Transform menu allows the user to edit the design of the part such as copying or stretching the
elements and rotating or moving the geometry, between many other options which are listed
below:
Copy
Copy ( ) button allows the user making copies of the selected geometries. In order to make
copies, perform the following steps:
1. Select Copy button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select a geometry using Selection toolbar and click Accept button. The system will display the
following dialog box so that the user selects the type of copying:
Figure 280: Copy types
The different types of copying geometries are explained below:
• : Select this option to make one copy of the selected geometry and move it by
means of Dragging options.
320
Drawing Module
• : Select this option to make the required number of copies of the selected
geometry and move them by means of Dragging options.
• : Select this option to make the required number of copies of a geometry at a

specified angle and distance. When selected, the system will display the following dialog
box:
Figure 281: Copy values 1
Find the fields provided in this dialog box briefly described below:
▪ n: Number of copies to be made.
▪ a: Angle at which the copy is created.
▪ d: Distance between the consecutive copies of the geometry.
Introduce the required values and then click OK button in order to apply them.
• : Select this option in order to make the required copies of the selected geometry
maintaining the specified angle between the geometries. It is also possible to rotate the
geometries. When selected, the system will display the following dialog box:
321
Drawing Module
▪ n: Number of copies to be made.
▪ a: Angle between the geometries.
▪ Yes: Select this to rotate the copies of the geometry.
▪ No: Select this if the rotation of the copies is not required.
Introduce and select the required values and click OK button to apply them.
• : Select this option to make the required number of copies of the selected
geometry simultaneously in two directions. The copies will be created in the form of a
grid. When selected the system will display the dialog box shown below:
▪ n1: Number of copies in the first direction.
▪ n2: Number of copies in the second direction.
▪ a: Angle value at which the copies are created.
▪ d1: Distance between the consecutive copies in the first direction.
▪ d2: Distance between the consecutive copies in the second direction.
Introduce the required values and click OK button in order to save them.
• : Select this option in order to make copies of the selected geometry in a

rectangular area. This rectangular area is defined by two points. When selected, the
system will display Copies dialog box as shown below:
322
Drawing Module
Figure 284: Copies dialog box
▪ Horizontal separation: Horizontal separation distance between the copies.
▪ Vertical separation: Vertical separation distance between the copies.
Introduce the required values and click OK button in order to save them.
• : Select this option this option to make copies of the selected geometry in a
rectangular area. This is similar to the previous option except for the fact that the first
point of the rectangular area is considered from the first selected geometry and the end
point has to be defined. When selected, the system will also display Copies dialog box
(previously displayed).
• : Select this option in order to make copies of the selected geometry in an existing
rectangular area. The selected geometry should be inside a rectangle. When selected the
system will display Copies dialog box as shown below:
Figure 285: Copies dialog box 2
▪ Offset in X: Separation distance between the copies in X axis.
▪ Offset in Y: Separation distance between the copies in Y axis.
323
Drawing Module
• : The user will have to click on the required arrows in order to select the
directions. If the center is clicked, all the directions will be selected. Introduce the
required values and click OK to apply the changes. Select the required type of copying,
introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save the changes. The copies
of the selected geometry will be created.
Move
Move ( ) button allows the user moving elements or the entire geometry of the part. In
order to move an element or geometry, do the following:
1. Click Move button and the Selection toolbar will be displayed.

2. Select the required element using the Selection toolbar and then right click or click Accept
button.
3. Mark a reference point to move the selected element. The system will display the Dragging
options to help the user rotate the selected element in different degrees, angles, and so on.
4. Mark an insertion point and the selected element will be moved to that point.
Stretch
Stretch ( ) button allows the user to stretch and modify the geometry. In order to stretch
and modify the geometry, do the following:
1. Click Stretch button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select two or more joined elements of the geometry required to stretch and click Accept
button.
3. Mark a reference point to start stretching the selected elements.
4. Move the cursor till the desired point and then click again to mark an insertion point. The
geometry will be modified and stretched.
Rotate
Rotate ( ) button allows the user to rotate the geometry at specified angles, position, and so
on. In order to rotate the geometry, do the following:
1. Click Rotate button and then the system displays the Selection toolbar.
2. Select the geometry required to rotate using the Selection toolbar and click Accept button.
324
Drawing Module
3. Mark a center point of rotation and the system will display the following dialog box to select
the required type of rotation.
Figure 286: Rotation options
4. Select the required type of rotation. The different types of rotation are as follows:
• : Click this to rotate the selected geometry at a specified angle. The system will
display the following dialog box, where the user will have to select between Degrees,
Radians, Degrees, minutes, seconds and Centesimal degrees and introduce the required
Angle.
Figure 287: Rotation values
Click OK button in order to save the changes and rotate the geometry as specified.
• : Click this to rotate the selected geometry to form a minimum rectangle. The
system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 288: Minimum rectangle
325
Drawing Module
Select the Favorite position for minimal rectangle between the options provided in the drop-down
list and introduce the Angle step value. Finally, click OK button in order to rotate the geometry as
specified.
• : Click this to rotate the selected geometry at a specified angle with respect to a
selected auxiliary segment.
The user will have to select between Degrees, Radians, Degrees, minutes, seconds and Centesimal
degrees and introduce the required Angle in the dialog box displayed. Finally, click OK button in
order to rotate the geometry as specifies.
Scale
Scale ( ) button allows the user to enlarge or reduce the size of a selected element. In order
to enlarge or reduce the size of a selected element, do the following:
1. Click Scale button and the system displays the Selection toolbar.
2. Select the geometry using the Selection toolbar and click Accept button.
3. Mark the Base point of the scale and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 289: Scale values
4. Select Apply different factor to X and Y checkbox in order to have different size values on X and
Y axis. When selecting this, the system will allow the user to enter different values for X and Y
axis.
5. Enter the new values in the first box and the existing values will be displayed in the second box.
6. Click OK button and the geometry will be enlarged or reduced.
Place Near
Place near ( ) option allows the user to increase or decrease the distance between
geometries. When selected, the system will display the following dialog box providing the
different ways available to increase or decrease the distance as follows:
326
Drawing Module
Figure 290: Place near options
: Select this option to increase or decrease the distance between two parallel geometries.
In order to increase or decrease the distance between two parallel geometries, do the following:
1. Click this button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select an element using Selection toolbar and click Accept button.
3. Select the initial and final elements that are parallel to each other. The system will display a
dialog box.
4. Introduce the separation distance value between the initial and final elements in Value field.
5. Click OK. The distance between the selected parallel elements will increase or decrease
accordingly to the values previously introduced.
: Select this option to increase or decrease the distance between two perpendicular
geometries. In order to increase or decrease the distance between two perpendicular
geometries, do the following:
3. Select the initial and final elements that are perpendicular to each other. The system will display
a dialog box.
5. Click OK. The distance between the selected perpendicular elements will increase or decrease
accordingly to the values previously introduced.
: Select this option to increase or decrease the distance between two geometries
irrespective of their positions. In order to increase or decrease the distance between them, do
the following:
327
Drawing Module
3. Select the initial and final elements. The system will display a dialog box.
5. Click OK. The distance between the selected elements will increase or decrease accordingly to
the values previously introduced.
: Select this option to increase or decrease the distance between two geometries based on
the clicked points while selecting the elements. In order to increase or decrease the distance
between them, do the following:
3. Select the initial and final elements. The system will display a dialog box.
5. Click OK. The distance between the clicked points will increase or decrease accordingly to the
values previously introduced.
: Select this option to increase or decrease the distance between a circular element and
two perpendicular elements. In order to increase or decrease the distance between elements, do
the following:
3. Select the initial and final elements.
4. Select a tangent perpendicular to the final element and the system will display a dialog box.
5. Introduce the separation distance in Value field and click OK button. The distance between the
clicked points will increase or decrease accordingly to the values previously introduced.
: Select this option to increase or decrease the distance between the minimum rectangle
of a geometry and a defined point. In order to increase or decrease the distance between
minimum rectangle and a point, do the following:
1. Click this button and the system displays the Selection toolbar
2. Select an element using the Selection toolbar and then click Accept button.
3. Select the destination point. The distance between the minimum rectangle of the selected
element and the destination point will increase or decrease accordingly.
328
Drawing Module
Mirror
Mirror ( ) button allows the user to copy the selected geometry symmetric to an axis or line.
In order to copy the selected geometry symmetric to an axis, do the following:
1. Click Mirror button and then the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the geometry to copy using the Selection toolbar and then click Accept button.
3. Select the first and final point of an axis or select a segment or line. The copy of the selected
geometry is created symmetric to the axis or line.
Break Parts
Break parts ( ) button allows the user breaking the selected geometry. When selected, the
system will display Break Parts dialog box as shown below:
Figure 291: Break parts dialog box
Between the different options provided in the previous window to break the parts the user will
have to select between Equal parts, Middle points, Defined geometry, Tracts by length and Number
of tracts.
Find briefly described below the different fields provided in Break parts dialog box if equal parts
option is selected:
• Break by:
▪ Equal parts
▪ Middle points
▪ Defined geometry
329
Drawing Module
▪ Tracts by length
▪ Number of tracts
• Number of parts: Number of parts of the geometry to be broken.
• Seams: Type of seam for the corners of the broken part.
• Respect minimum width of notches: It indicates whether the minimum width of notches
will be considered while breaking the part or not.
Union
Union ( ) option enables the union between different elements of geometry. In order to
do it perform the following steps:
1. Click Union button.

2. Select the base contour and the second contour that are required to be united.
3. The system will merge the selected contours.
Subtraction
Subtraction ( ) option subtracts the intersected portion of the first and second
element and the portion of the second element that is outside the first element. In order to do it,
1. Click Subtraction button.

2. Select the base contour.
3. Select the second contour and the system will delete the intersected portion of the first and
second elements, as well as the portion of the second element that is outside the first element.
Intersection
Intersection ( ) option retains the intersection contours and deletes the other
elements. In order to break elements with Intersection, perform the following steps:
1. Click Intersection button.

2. Select the base contour.
3. Select the second contour intersected with the base contour and the system will delete the two
contours except the intersected one.
330
Drawing Module
Change Cutting Direction
Change cutting direction ( ) option allows the user changing the cutting
direction of the contours. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
1. Select Change cutting direction button and the system will display the current cutting direction
of the part by means of pink arrows.
2. Select the contours for which to change the cutting direction and it will automatically change.
Contour Ordering
Contour Ordering ( ) option allows the user setting the cutting order for the
contours. In order to do it, perform the following steps.
1. Select Contour ordering button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 292: Contour ordering dialog box
2. Select between Clock wise and Counter clock wise options for Outside and Inside contours.
3. Click OK button and the system will set the cutting order accordingly.
Transform One-touch Figures
Transform One-touch figures ( ) option converts One touch figures

to open contours or holes. In order to do it perform the following steps:
1. Click Transform One-touch figures button and the system will display Transform One-touch
figures dialog box as shown below:
331
Drawing Module
Figure 293: Transform One-touch figures dialog box
2. In Mode section the user will be able to select between By part and By selection options.
3. The user selects whether to convert the one touch figures to Holes or Open contours from the
drop-down list provided in Transform in field. Find briefly explained below the fields provided if
Open contours option is selected:
▪ R: The distance value of the open contour from the one-touch figure.
▪ O: The extension value of the open contour from the one-touch figure.
▪ L: The length of the lead-in of the open contour.
▪ Compensation mode: It is possible to select the corner shape of the open contour.
▪ Apply quality: It indicates whether or not the cutting quality is applied to the holes or
open contours. This option allows the user to navigate to the Cutting quality dialog box
and select the required quality.
4. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The One-touch figures will be converted to
open contours or holes as previously set.
Review
Verify Part
Verify Part ( ) button allows verifying a part as follows:
1. Click Verify Part button and then the system will display Selection toolbar.
332
Drawing Module
2. Select the part required to verify using Selection toolbar and click Accept button. The system
will display the following dialog box:
Figure 294: Verify part values
3. Find briefly described below the different fields provided in this dialog box:
• R: Radius of the part. By default, the system displays the current radius of the selected
part.
• D: Distance value of the part. By default, the system displays the current distance of the
selected part.
• Cut Contours: It indicates whether the points are in open cut contours or not.
• Mark Contours: It indicates whether the points are in open mark contours or not.
• Non-cut contours: It indicates whether the points are in open non cut contours or not.
• Cutter Radius: It indicates whether the length for the small elements is based on cutter
radius or not. If not enabled, Length field is available.
• Length: Length value for the small elements.
• Radius: Value of the radius.
4. The user can visualize and change the values and click OK. The part will be verified and the
system will display Verify Part dialog box.
333
Drawing Module
Figure 295: Verify part dialog box
• Number of parts: Number of parts in the Drawing window.
• Number of close contours: Number of contours of the part that are closed.
• Number of open contours: Number of contours of the part that are opened.
• Put points in open contours: It indicates whether any points are marked in open
contours.
• Close open contours: It indicates whether or not the open contours are to be closed. This
checkbox is displayed only if Put points in open contours parameter is enabled.
• Tolerance: Tolerance value for closed contours. This field is displayed only if Close open
contours checkbox is selected.
• Modifying the geometric elements is allowed: This option enables modifying geometric
elements in order to match both initial and final points of an open contour. This
parameter will take into account the specified tolerance. Therefore, it will be only useful
in open contours by a very little distance. It is activated when the option Close open
contours is selected.
• Number of small elements: Number of small elements in the part.
• Put points in small elements: It indicates whether or not points are marked on the small
elements.
• Delete small elements and join: Here the user can select between No, Inside, Outside and
All contours.
334
Drawing Module
• Close: This button closes Verify part dialog box.
Detect Part
There are two different options available; Detect part (Manual) and Detect part (Semi-
automatic). The option displayed will be the last one that has been used. By means of the arrow
button located on the right side of Detect part icon, the user will be able to select between the
two available options:
3.6.5.2.1 Detect Part (Manual)

This option allows obtaining a part from another part with the aim of cleaning up the remaining
geometry from the first. This option allows the user defining which elements will compose the
newly detected part since it requires selecting the whole geometry that will form the new part.
The main advantage of this option over the Semi-automatic version is that, given the case the
semi-automatic version does not turn out as expected by the user, it is possible to execute a
manual selection so that only the required elements are considered. In addition, the manual
option allows selecting contours outside the external contour and even more than one external
contour.
Whenever selected, the system will display the following data request panel:
Figure 296: Review – Detect part (Manual)
Find briefly detailed below the parameters provided in the previous panel:
• Related options: Displays the options related to the active one such as Save by parts
(Manual), Save by parts (Automatic), Save by parts (Semi-automatic), Detect part
(Manual) and Detect part (Semi-automatic).
335
Drawing Module
• Select options: Provides the selection options to help the user select the required part.
• Save options: This section contains the following parameters:
▪ Remember part saving data: This parameter will indicate whether the data provided in
the option. In other words, it allows setting the values by default for part saving
options.
▪ Import text properties: When selecting Import text properties option, the user will
visualize a navigation button that gives access to the Text definition to access part data
window. The auxiliary geometry element texts to be treated when saving by parts are
configured in this window. Treated texts can be kept in this window using Delete texts
option. The automatic part detection option must be disabled and the text property
import option should be used. The Selection window can be used to choose the part
geometry and text properties associated to it.
▪ Skip part verification: If enabled the system will skip the part verification process going
process. This parameter intends to make the part saving process more fluent.
Once all the required parameters have been introduced proceed to select the geometry to save
and click on (validation) button to apply the changes and visualize the part that has been
detected.
3.6.5.2.2 Detect Part (Semi-automatic)

As the previous option, this one allows obtaining a part from another part with the aim of
cleaning up the remaining geometry from the first. The difference with the previous option
consists in the selection mode.
This option selects a unique element of the external contour of the part so that the system
detects the new part. It only detects the geometry contained inside the external contour, except
elements such as points, lines, texts, dimensions and auxiliary geometry (which can be detected
by enabling the corresponding parameters). Whenever selected, the system will display the
following data request panel:
336
Drawing Module
Figure 297: Review – Detect part (Semi-automatic)
Find briefly detailed below the parameters provided in the previous panel:
• Related options: Displays the options related to the active one such as Save by parts
(Manual), Save by parts (Automatic), Save by parts (Semi-automatic), Detect part
(Manual) and Detect part (Semi-automatic).
Save options section provides the following fields:
• Remember part saving data: This parameter will indicate whether the data provided in
the option. In other words, it allows setting the values by default for part saving options.
• Import text properties: When selecting Import text properties option, the user will
visualize a navigation button that gives access to the Text definition to access part data
window. The auxiliary geometry element texts to be treated when saving by parts are
configured in this window. Treated texts can be kept in this window using Delete texts
option. The automatic part detection option must be disabled and the text property
import option should be used. The Selection window can be used to choose the part
geometry and text properties associated to it.
337
Drawing Module
• Skip part verification: If enabled the system will skip the part verification process going
process. This parameter intends to make the part saving process more fluent.
Find described below the fields provided in Management of auxiliary geometry elements section:
• 2D Points: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and Only in
parts that contain them.
• Lines: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and Only in parts
with intersections.
• Text: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and Only in parts that
contain them.
• Dimensions / Text: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and
Only in dimensioned parts.
• Auxiliary Geometry: The user can select between Don´t include, Include in all parts and
Only in parts that contain them.
Once all the required parameters have been introduced, proceed to select the part to clean and
the system will display another data request panel that corresponds to the validation (only if Skip
part verification parameter is disabled).
The system will display the following data request panel:
• Verify part section will display the Reference, Dimensions, Number of parts, Number of
close contours, Number of open contours, Number of small elements and Number of
small elements deleted fields, which are not editable.
338
Drawing Module
• Verify: Enable this checkbox in order to display Break the arcs, Open contours, Smooth and
Small elements sections below.
• Management of internal contours: Enable this checkbox in order to display Management

of internal contours section below.
• Scale: Enable this checkbox in order to display Scale section below.
• R: Introduce the radius in millimeters.
• d: Introduce the distance to break the arcs.
• Close open contours: Enable this checkbox in order to close open contours.
• Tolerance: Introduce the required tolerance in millimeters.
• Modifying the geometric elements is allowed: Enable this checkbox so that the system
allows modifying geometric elements.
• Assign technology: Select the geometry required to assign from the options provided in
the drop-down list: < >, Mark, Cut, No Cut, Auxiliary Geometry.
< > option means “Do not assign technology”. Given the case < > option is selected; the system
will display the following parameters:
▪ Delete: Enable this parameter so that the system erases open contours without
exception.
339
Drawing Module
▪ Except elements with technology: This parameter is directly linked to the previous one
and will only be shown if Delete is enabled. Enable this parameter in order to keep those
open contours where the corresponding technology has been previously assigned.
• Put points in open contours: Select where to put points between No, All, Cut contours,
Mark contours and Non mark contours.
• Smooth: If enabled, the segments of the selected geometry will be smoothened. If

selected, the system will allow introducing the Maximum number of elements, Maximum
radius and Tolerance.
• Maximum length for smaller elements: Proceed to enable Cutter radius checkbox to use
it as maximum length. If not enabled, the user will be able to introduce the Length and
Radius.
• Delete small elements and join: If enabled, the system will try to join all the small
elements so that they are visualized more easily.
• Put points in small elements: Proceed to enable this checkbox in order to place points in
small elements.
• Close open contours: Enable this parameter in order to close the existing open contours.
The user can introduce the required Tolerance and allow Modifying the geometric
elements.
• Assign technology: The user can select between the options provided in the drop-down
list < >, Mark, Cut, No cut, Auxiliary geometry.
• Delete: This option will only be enabled if < > has been previously selected. If enabled, the
system will erase all open contours.
• Except elements with technology: This option will also be enabled if Delete option has
been previously selected. Sometimes it might be useful to keep some open contours that
are required to be marked or treated as auxiliary technology. Thanks to this parameter it
340
Drawing Module
is possible to avoid deleting these elements if the corresponding technology has been
previously assigned.
• Assign technology: By means of this parameter the user can assign technology to the
required internal contours, by selecting one of the options provided in the drop-down list:
Assign technology in internal contours, Assign technology in holes and Assign technology in
both of them.
• Technology: Select the technology to assign to the internal contours previously selected.
The following field will vary depending on the technology selected.
• Mode: Select the scale mode between Dimensions and Scale Factor.
• Apply different factor to X and Y: Enable this checkbox in order to apply a different
factor to X and Y. If enabled Required length and Required width fields will become
editable and the user will be able to introduce the required values. On the other hand, if
the parameter is disabled, the user will only be able to introduce Required length field
below.
• Required length: Introduce the required length.
• New dimensions: This field is not editable. It will display the dimensions of the scale by
default or the ones introduced by the user.
341
Drawing Module
Time and Cost
Time and Cost ( ) option allows visualizing all the data related to the Time and Costs
involved in the active job. When this option is selected the system will display Part data window
as shown below.
Figure 298: Part data window
Find briefly described below the different fields provided in the previous window:
• Machine: Select the required machine from the drop-down list or include a new one.
• Material: Select the required material from the drop-down list or include a new one.
• Thickness: Introduce the thickness of the material.
• Sheets: Select the required sheet from the drop-down list or create a new one. If new
button is selected, the system will display Create and modify sheets dialog box. The
reference, material and thickness of the sheet will be automatically generated based on
the selected sub-job. Introduce the required data in the rest of the fields provided and
click OK button to create the sheet.
• Area: Select the required area. The user can select between Rectangle, External, Real,
Rectangle with offset, External with offset and Real with offset options.
• Form factor: Select the required form factor.
342
Drawing Module
• Material area cost: Visualize or edit the cost of material per unit. Select the Navigation
button provided in this field in order to visualize the weight and area of the material.
• Machine time cost: Visualize or edit the cost the machine per unit. Select the Navigation
button provided in this field in order to visualize Start time of cut, Normal cutting time,
Rapid displacements length and Number of cut starts fields between many others.
• Total: It displays the total cost.
• Print: Select this button located at the bottom in order to print all Cost and Time details.
View Geometry
View Geometry ( ) option visualizes the different measurements of the geometry. In order to
visualize them perform the following steps:
1. Select View Geometry option located in Review menu and the system will display Selection
toolbar.
2. Select the geometry to visualize by means of the options provided and click Accept button.
3. The system will display View Geometry window as shown below:
Figure 299: View geometry dialog box
4. Here the user can visualize the specific characteristics and measurements of each element that
compose the geometry and the total perimeter of the selected geometry. After the selected list
of elements, it shows the specific Number of segments, circles, arcs, lines and points.
343
Drawing Module
5. Select Modify button in order to modify the desired geometric elements. Select the required
element from the list and click Modify button, so that the system displays Modify geometry
window, which contains all the values stored for the selected element.
6. Click Delete button to delete the required elements from the list. Select the required element
from the list of geometric elements and click Delete. The system will display a Warning window
as shown below, where the user will have to select Yes in order to erase it and No to cancel the
operation.
Figure 300: Deletion warning message
7. Click Print button to print the measurements and click Close button in order to close View
Geometry dialog box.
Distances and Angle
Distance and Angle ( ) button allows visualizing the distance and angle measurements
between two selected points as follows:
1. Click Distance and Angle button and mark the first point.
2. Move the cursor till the desired point and mark the second point. The system will display
Distance and Angle panel on the right as shown below:
344
Drawing Module
Figure 301: Distance and angle panel
• D: Distance between the two marked points.
• X: Horizontal distance between the two marked points.
• Y: Vertical distance between the two marked points.
• W: Angle at which the second point is marked with respect to the X.
4. Click OK in order to close the dialog box.
Angle between Three Points
Angle between three points ( ) button allows the user to view the angles of three points as
follows:
1. Click Angle between three points button and then mark the first point.
2. Move the cursor till the desired points and mark the second and third points. The system will
display Angle between three points dialog box as shown below:
345
Drawing Module
Figure 302: Angle between three points dialog box
3. It is possible to view the interior angle of the three points in ‘a1’ field and the exterior angle of
the three points in ‘a2’ field.
4. Click Cancel button in order to close Angle between three points dialog box.
Orthogonal
Select Orthogonal ( ) button in order to draw vertical and horizontal geometries by means
of Dragging toolbar. This application will be active until the user clicks again on it to disable it.
Press F2 key on the keyboard in order to enable and disable this application.
Macros
Macros ( ) option enables the creation, deletion and execution of application macros. A
macro is an option that enables the sequential execution of several options of the system. This
option is available in Drawing and Nesting and Machining modules. The created macros will only
be useful for the module in which they have been created. Macros option contains a drop-down
list that displays the existing macros of the system plus the following two options:
• Macro creation: Click Record a macro and all the options clicked afterwards will form part
of the macro. The order will be defined during the options selection. To stop recording
click Stop recording or press Escape.
• Macro edition: Click Macro and the system will display a window that shows the existing
list of macros with the options corresponding to each. A macro can be created, deleted
or executed from this window.
346
Drawing Module
• Macro execution: In order to execute a Macro, click on Macro drop-down list and select
Macro or execute from edition window. It is possible to add buttons to the options
ribbon or quick access bars. When executing a macro:
▪ By pressing ESC, the option in execution will stop and the next will be executed.
▪ By executing another option macro execution will stop.
▪ By pressing Return when the macro finishes, it will be executed again.
Technology
Technology menu allows making use of the different technologies available to cut parts, which
include the following:
Lead-in/Lead-outs
Lead-in / Lead-outs menu encompasses all the options related to the Lead-ins and Lead-outs and
their configuration.
Automatic
Select Automatic ( ) option in order to introduce the lead-in/out in the parts automatically.
Delete
Select Delete ( ) option in order to erase the required lead-in/outs of a part. In order to do it
1. Click Delete and the system will display Selection tool bar.
2. Select the lead-in/lead-out that has to be deleted using the Selection toolbar and then click
Accept button. The selected lead-in/lead-out will be deleted.
Semi-Automatic
Select Semi-Automatic ( ) option in order to introduce the Lead-in/outs semi-automatically. In

this case, it is only necessary to select the base contour in which the lead-in/out has to be
introduced.
347
Drawing Module
Configure Automatic
Configure automatic ( ) option configures the parameters for automatic lead-ins and lead-
outs. If selected, the system will display Automatic lead-in/lead-out values window as shown
below:
Figure 303: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out values window
Here the user will be able to modify the provided parameters as per his requirements and set
them by means of OK button located at the bottom of the window.
Lead-in/Lead outs
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 1 ( ): Perpendicular Lead-in/Lead-outs.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 2 ( ): Perpendicular Lead-in and inclined Lead-out.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 3 ( ): Perpendicular Lead-in and tangential Lead-out.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 4 ( ): Inclined Lead-in and perpendicular Lead-out.
348
Drawing Module
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 5 ( ): Inclined Lead-in/Lead-outs.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 6 ( ): Inclined Lead-in and tangential Lead-out.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 7 ( ): Tangential Lead-in and perpendicular Lead-out.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 8 ( ): Tangential Lead-in and inclined Lead-out.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 9 ( ): Tangential Lead-in and Lead-outs.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 10 ( ): Straight Lead-in/Lead-out on outer corner.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 11 ( ): Tangential Lead-in/Lead-out with beginning and end path.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 12 ( ): Tangential Lead-in/Lead-out with beginning and end parallel

path.
The previously listed are different types of lead-in/lead-outs that can be introduced manually.
The following two types of lead-in/lead-outs (10 and 13) can only be introduced at the corner of a
closed geometry with sides.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 13 ( ): Straight Lead-in/Lead-out on inner corner.
The following lead-in/lead-out is just for circles:
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 14 ( ): Special lead-in/lead-outs for circular holes.
• Lead-in/lead-outs 15 ( ): Special lead-in/lead-out with offset for circular holes.
• Dynamic Lead-in/Lead-outs ( ): Lead-in/Lead-outs by rubber band.
• Put the Lead-in/Lead-outs in bisector ( ): It puts the Lead-in/Lead-outs in a bisector or

intersection point.
• Move point of lead-in or lead-out ( ): It allows moving the point of a Lead-in or Lead-
out.
• Put the lead-out like the lead-in ( ): It puts the Lead-out in the direction of the Lead-in.
349
Drawing Module
• Modify tangent arc lead-in by 2 segments ( ): It modifies the tangent arc Lead-in by
two segments.
• Add element ( ): It adds an element to the Lead-in or Lead-out as follows:
1. Click Add element button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required lead-in/lead-out by means of the options provided, click Accept button and
the system will display Add element to Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box as shown below:
Figure 304: Add element to Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box
3. Find briefly described the fields provided:
▪ Lead-in: Indicates whether the element is added to a lead-in or not.
▪ Lead-out: Indicates whether the element is added to a lead-out or not.
When any of the options above is selected the system will display Direction sections, Always
like segment parameter and Length field.
▪ Lead-in auxiliary element: Select this to add the element in the lead-in direction.
▪ Lead-out auxiliary element: Select this to add the element in the lead-out direction.
▪ Longer element: Select this to add the element in the direction of the longer side where
the lead-in/lead-out is introduced.
▪ Always like segment: It indicates whether the additional element is added like a
segment or not.
350
Drawing Module
▪ Length: Length value of the additional element.
4. Select and introduce the required values in the given fields and click OK button in order to save
them. The additional element will be added to the lead-in/lead-out as set by the user.
Micro-Joints
Micro-joints section allows the user to introduce different types of micro-joints in the parts.
When pointed, the system will list the different micro-joints that can be introduced between
many other options.
Delete
Select Delete ( ) option in order to erase the required micro-joints as follows:
1. Click Delete option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the micro-joint required to delete by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar
and click Accept button located in the same menu.
3. The micro-joint will be deleted.
Micro-joints
• Micro-Joints 1: It introduces an inclined micro-joint on a corner of a closed geometry.
• Micro-Joints 2: It introduces a perpendicular micro-joint on a corner of a closed geometry.
• Micro-Joints 3: It introduces a perpendicular micro-joint to the geometry of a part.
• Micro-Joints 4: It introduces an inclined micro-joint to the geometry of a part.
• Micro-Joints 5: It introduces an inclined micro-joint on the right side.
• Micro-Joints 6: It introduces an inclined micro-joint on the left side.
• Micro-Joints with lead-in on corner: Micro-joint with lead-in on corner (parameterized).
• Micro-Joints with lead-in on corner: Micro-joint with lead-in on corner (180º) and without
lead-out.
Move Point of Lead-in or Lead-out

This option allows moving the point of lead-in or lead-out of a micro joint.
351
Drawing Module
Transform to Geometry
This option converts the selected micro-joints to geometry by means of the selection toolbar.
Configure
This option configures the parameters of the micro-joints. The system will display Micro-joints
Values dialog box:
Figure 305: Micro-joints values dialog box
Introduce the required values in the fields provided and click OK button to save the changes.
Loops
Automatic
Select Automatic ( ) option in order to introduce the loops automatically to all the corners of
a closed geometry. The introduced automatic loop may be a normal or curved loop, based on the
configuration previously set in Loop values.
Delete
Delete ( ) option erases the loops selected by means of Selection toolbar. Once the required
loop is selected click Accept button located in the same toolbar and the system will delete it.
Loop1
In order to introduce a Loop1 ( ) perform the following steps:
1. Select Loop1 option located in Loops menu.

2. Select the required corner of a closed geometry.
3. The system will insert a normal loop in the selected point of the geometry.
352
Drawing Module
Loop2
In order to introduce a Loop2 ( ) perform the following steps:
1. Select Loop2 option located in Loops menu.

2. Select the required corner of a closed geometry.
3. The system will insert a curved loop in the selected point of the geometry.
Round Angles
Round angles ( ) option introduces round angles at the vertices of the geometry. The radii of
round angles can be set in Loop values dialog box.
Semi-Automatic
Semi-automatic ( ) option allows to round the corners of a contour in two ways: contour by
contour or by selecting a geometry of contours to round its corners. If the option “Selecting a
contour” is enabled, the user must select contour by contour. On the other hand, if the option is
disabled, all the contours of the geometry will be selected.
Configuration
Configuration ( ) option enables modifying the different parameters of all loops. The system
will display Loop values dialog box as shown below:
Figure 306: Loop values dialog box
353
Drawing Module
In order to configure the loop values, specify the following parameters:
1. Introduce the maximum angle of the loop in Maximum angle (W) field.
2. In (0-W) Loops section select Loop values check box to set a fixed radius for the loop and enter
the radius value in R field. The user can select the required type of automatic loops to introduce
by means of 1 and 2 checkboxes.
3. Select the required option from the drop-down list provided in Automatic loops field, where
the user will be able to select between In bevels or in round angles, Only in bevel elements and
Only in round angles.
4. Located in Round angles section select Radii button to set the radius of the round angles and
manage them by qualities if required.
5. Introduce the limit angle in Limit Angle (Z) field.
6. In W-Z section, select the required position of the radius for W-Z range and then click Radii
button to set the radius for W-Z range of the loops.
7. Select Do loops in the whole part in automatic checkbox to introduce loops to the entire part
when automatic loop is selected.
8. Select Round angles in the whole part in automatic checkbox to introduce round angles to the
entire part when automatic loop is selected.
9. Select Ignore those elements smaller than the rounding radius when it comes to round
corners to ignore those small elements and arcs already existing in the corner rounding process.
10. Click OK button and the parameters will be saved as configured.
Standard Bevel
Standard Bevel section includes the following:
Delete
This option deletes bevels as follows:
1. Click Delete ( ) button located in Standard Bevel menu and the system will display Selection
toolbar.
2. Select an element of the part by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar and click
Accept button.
3. The selected bevel will be deleted.
354
Drawing Module
Bevel
This option bevels an element as follows:
1. Click Bevel ( ) button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select an element of the part by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar and click
Accept button. The system will display Bevel values dialog box as shown below:
Figure 307: Bevel values dialog box
3. Select the required type of bevel and click OK button.

4. The selected element will be beveled as configured.
Bevel on Contour
This option bevels a selected contour as follows:
1. Click Bevel on contour ( ) button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required contour by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar and click
Accept button. The system will display Bevel values dialog box as shown below:
355
Drawing Module
Figure 308: Bevel values dialog box 2
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button in order to save the changes. The selected
contour will be beveled.
Configure
Select this option in order to configure various parameters for bevels as follows:
1. Click Configuration ( ) button and the system will display Bevel values dialog box.
2. Introduce the required angle values in Initial and Final angle fields and introduce the depth
values in Initial and Final depth fields for both Upper and Lower Bevels.
3. Click OK button and the parameters will be set accordingly.
3D Bevel
In this new section, the user will be provided with options to create beveled parts by defining the
upper and lower faces that will eventually come to form the part. In addition, the user can also
define which connections between the faces must be respected by the machining. Find detailed
below the options available:
Lower Face
In order to define the Lower face ( ), the user must have the geometry of both faces
already drawn. By means of this option, the user will have to select all the closed contours that
define the lower face of the part. Connections must not be drawn and can be later defined.
356
Drawing Module
Connections
By means of Connections ( ) option, the user can define the connections between the
contours in the upper and lower faces, as much as the definition requires. It will be necessary to
select pairs of points that must connect a contour of the upper face with a contour of the lower
face. With each connection, the 3D view will become updated and show the current definition.
The system will interpret all contours without connection as cutting without bevel.
Delete Lower Face and Connections
Delete ( ) option allows erasing connections and the definition of the lower face.
Cut Technology
Cut Technology section allows the user to introduce different technologies to cut a part. When
pointed, the system will display different types of cut technologies that can be assigned, which
are listed below:
Automatic
Select Automatic ( ) button in order to assign technology automatically based on the

previously set configuration in the Tables of Technology.
Automatic Technology will only be applied if it is configured in the machine.
Delete
This option deletes an assigned cut technology as follows:
1. Click Delete ( ) button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the assigned Cut technology required to delete by means of the options provided and
click Accept button provided in the same toolbar.
3. The cut technology assigned to the selected element will be erased.
If the user does not want the marked text to be treated as a unity, it will be necessary to
activate the option Delete cut technology having previously selected the marked text.
357
Drawing Module
Marking
This option assigns marking technology to a part as follows:
1. Select Marking ( ) option and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 309: Marking technology
2. Click on the drop-down list provided in Technology field, select between Powder, Drill, Pen or
Cut and click OK button.
3. The system will display Selection toolbar. Select the geometry where the selected technology is
required by means of the options provided and click Accept button.
4. The selected marking technology will be assigned to the selected element.
No Cut
In order to assign No Cut technology to a required geometry, perform the following steps:
1. Click No Cut ( ) button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the extension to which the user wants to apply No cut by means of the options provided
and click OK button to apply it.
Dynamic
This option assigns a cut technology of a specified quality between two points of a contour based
on the cutting direction as follows:
1. Select Dynamic ( ) button and the system will display the following dialog box:
358
Drawing Module
Figure 310: Dynamic technology
2. Select the required Cutting Technology and Cutting quality and click OK button.
3. Mark the Initial and End points of a contour. The selected cutting technology and quality will be
assigned to the selected extension.
359
Drawing Module
Cutting
When it comes to assign the cutting technology to a geometry, apart from the cutting quality,
the user will be able to assign the type of cut for such geometry. TheThis option assigns cutting
technology of a specified quality to a part as follows:
1. Select Cutting button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 311: Cutting Qualities
2. Select the required Type of cut from the options provided in the drop-down list.
a. Default: If the Default type of cut is assigned, they will be machine with the type of cut
defined in the Machining initialization of the nesting or the one defined with the
options Technology/Type of cut of the Nesting and Machining module.
3. Select the required type of Cutting quality.
Given the case there are cutting qualities that are not being used in a machine, it is possible
to hide them so that they are not displayed in the system by defining the name “<HIDE>” for the
quality that is required to be hidden (parameter A923 for quality 2 and subsequently) in the
technological file of the machine (CT file).
4. If the Cutting quality is Without technology only the type of cut will be assigned, that is to say,
only the type of cutting technology of those elements will be specified, and the cutting quality
will be assigned subsequently or by the automatic technology assignment.
5. By selecting Modify button the system will display Tables of technology dialog box. Here the
user will be able to include, modify or delete the material, thickness and other details. Click OK
button in order to save the changes.
360
Drawing Module
6. The system will display Selection toolbar. By means of the options provided select the extension
to which the user wants to apply the selected technology.
7. Select Accept button located in the same toolbar and the cutting technology of the specified
quality will be assigned to the selected geometry extension.
Microjoint
This option assigns Microjoints as follows:
1. Select Microjoint ( ) button and select where the user wants to assign the Microjoint.
2. Select the position of the micro-joint and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 312: Microjoint value dialog box
3. Introduce the required value and click OK button in order to assign the Microjoint to the
selected point.
Auxiliary Geometry
Auxiliary Geometry ( ) option allows the user to create, modify and delete the non-cut lines.
It is also possible to customize the non-cut lines by specifying their color, style and thickness and
configuring their line properties, as well as their visualization in Draw and Nest view.
In order to enable this option in the Drawing module, it is necessary to create it first from
Auxiliary geometry definition window, which is displayed from Configuration options/Configure:
Draw and Nest/ Auxiliar section. Here the user will be able to specify the name and properties of
the line (color style and thickness).
Text
Text section allows assigning Marked text, Written text and Vectorized text.
Marked Text
In order to assign marked text to a geometry perform the following steps:
1. Select Marked text ( ) option and the system will display Text definition dialog
box as shown below:
361
Drawing Module
Figure 313: Text definition dialog box
2. Define the Text, Size, Technology, Thickness and Fonts directory and click OK button in order to
save the changes made.
3. Mark the insertion point and the text will be inserted. The system will display the available
Dragging options in order to move the text and position it correctly if required.
Symmetry will not be applied to the geometry of marked texts, that is, the text will be
marked correctly when the part is placed symmetrically on the sheet.
Written Text
In order to introduce a text in a part perform the following steps:
1. Select Written Text ( ) button and the system will display Text definition dialog
box as shown below:
362
Drawing Module
Figure 314: Text definition dialog box 2
2. Select the required Font, introduce the required Text and the Orientation and finally click OK
button.
3. Mark the insertion point, and the text will be inserted. The system will display the Dragging
options to move the text if required.
QR Codes
QR Codes ( ) option allows introducing a QR code with those machines that contain a
special marking device. A QR code or Quick Response Code is a two-dimensional bar code. This
code is a machine-readable optical label that contains information about the item to which it is
attached. In this case, the content of the QR codes is exclusively composed of text. This text may
contain literal texts, line breaks and/or texts extracted from the system such as:
• Time data
• Part data
• Sheet data
• Subjob data
QR codes will be represented by means of a drawing based on the size previously defined, which
has the following appearance:
363
Drawing Module
The content of the QR code can be displayed by using (Ctrl + Alt) geometry display option
and passing over a geometric element.
By means of this option, the marking will be performed semi-automatically. Whenever selected,
the system will display Marking definition dialog box as shown below:
Apart from the content of the QR code, here the user can define its orientation as well as its size.
Templates
Templates ( ) option creates an instruction in which the rectangle size of the text is
defined, in order to simulate the space it occupies in the part and treat it In this case, the
postprocessor will be in charge of treating the text for each machine in particular.
Template type of marking will be represented as follows:
364
Drawing Module
The content of the final text can be displayed by using (Ctrl + Alt) geometry display option
This option will assign a marking template to a part. Whenever selected, the system will display
Marking definition dialog box:
The system will ask for the text, its orientation as well as its final dimensions. With this
information, the system will ask the user to select a point in the part, where the template will be
introduced. In order to facilitate this process, the system will simulate the template rectangle so
that the user can get to know the final result prior to validating the point.
Vectorize Text
In order to convert the selected texts to geometry perform the following steps:
1. Select Vectorize text ( ) option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required text to vectorize by means of the options provided and click Accept button.
3. The system will display Vectorize text dialog box as shown below:
Figure 315: Vectorize text dialog box
4. Introduce the Number of tracts for the Beizer curves required and click OK button.
5. The selected text will be converted to geometry.
365
Drawing Module
Machining
The Machining menu includes the following:
Machining
Automatic
By means of Automatic ( ) option the part will be automatically machined.
Delete Instructions
In order to erase the desired machining instructions, perform the following steps:
1. Select Delete Instructions ( ) button located in Machining menu and the system will display
the following dialog box:
Figure 316: Delete instructions options
2. Select between the following options:
• Current instruction
• Machining by selection
• Machining by selection of geometry
• From-to
• All machining
• Configuration
3. Depending on the option selected, select the contours, machining or instructions to delete and
click OK button in order to erase them.
366
Drawing Module
Rapids
A rapid movement is the displacement of the head without cutting. This option inserts a rapid
movement from the current machining coordinates to the desired point. In order to insert a rapid
movement, perform the following steps:
1. Select Rapid ( ) button and the system will initialize the rapid movement.
2. Select the Destination point and the rapid movement will be inserted between the initial point
and destination point. The user can select as many points as required to insert rapid
movements.
3. Press ESC key on the keyboard in order to exit this option.
GoTo
This option allows cutting between the desired points. In order to do it, perform the following
steps:
1. Click Goto ( ) button and the system will initialize the machining.
2. Select the Destination point and the extension between the initial point and destination point
will be machined. The user can select as many points as required to continue the cut operation.
Contours
Figure 317: Contours options
Manual Contours
In order to cut the selected elements of the contour perform the following steps:
367
Drawing Module
1. Point Contour option located in Contour menu and the system will display the options available.
2. Select Manual Contours option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
3. Select the first element of the contour by means of the options provided.
4. Select the remaining elements of the contour if required.
5. Click Accept button located in the same menu and the selected elements of the contour will be
machined.
Automatic Contours
In order to cut the contours automatically, perform the following steps:
2. Select Automatic contours option.
3. Select the required contour to machine.
4. The system will automatically machine the contour.
Parts
In order to machine the entire part, perform the following steps:
2. Select Parts option.
3. Select the part required to machine and the system will machine the whole part automatically.
All Drill Cycles

Select All Drill Cycles option located in Contour menu in order to drill all the points on the
contour.
All Marks
Select All Marks option located in Contour menu in order to machine the contours with mark
technology.
All Cut
Select All Cut option located in Contour menu in order to cut all the contours.
All Contours of One Quality

This option will machine all the contours of a specified cutting quality. For example, if the user
executes this semiautomatic option selecting cutting quality 2, the system will make the
machining of these contours. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
368
Drawing Module
2. Select All Contours of one Quality option and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 318: Cutting qualities
3. Select the required cutting quality and the system will machine all the contours of the selected
cutting quality.
Automatic Cycles
If selected, the system will display Automatic Cycles dialog box with the following parameters:
Figure 319: Automatic cycles dialog box
▪ Type: The user will be able to choose between Simple Drill cycle, Drill cycle with
breaking of shaving, Deep drilling cycle, Tap cycle, Ream cycle, C. Sink cycle, Special cycle
of cut, Special punching cycle and Simple milling cycle.
▪ Only the circles with no cut technology: If this parameter is selected, only the circles
with no cut technology will be drilled.
▪ Delete the circles with cycles: By using this option, the user can decide to leave
geometry on the drawing after machining or not.
369
Drawing Module
▪ Minimum & Maximum radius: The user will be able to define the maximum and
minimum radius.
▪ Test if the tool exists: If this option is enabled, the system will look for a determined
tool. For example, if we find a drill of the same size as the circle’s tool, the system will
make the drilling; if not, the system will cut it.
▪ Use the tool data: If enabled, the system will use the properties of the tool.
Flying Cut in Holes
Flying cut in holes option allows making the flying cut in selected contours.
When selecting this option, the window of flying cut configuration will be displayed. The values
displayed by default are the ones configured in the system and can be updated when necessary.
These new values will not be saved in the system and they will have effect only during the
execution of the option.
Figure 320: Fast cut mode in holes (flying cut) window
370
Drawing Module
Once the configuration values of flying cut mode have been edited, it is possible to select the
contours where they should be applied. And finally, it is also possible to select new contours to
make a multiple flying cut.
Figure 321: Flying cut in holes example
Once the flying cut mode has been applied, the part can be machined manually or
automatically.
If the part contains manual flying cut machining, when applying automatic machining to
the other contours being activated the option of flying cut in automatic mode, this will not be
applied (respecting that way the flying cut manually made).
Whenever the machining instructions of a part are deleted in Drawing Module, all those
instructions that correspond to fast cut will also be deleted and the original geometry will be
restored with the existing technology prior to the machining.
Manual Hole Destruction
Manual Hole Destruction option allows manual hole destruction.
371
Drawing Module
When selecting this option, the user can start drawing the cutting lines for the holes destruction.
Selecting two points of the same internal contour (hole) a cutting line will be created. In addition,
if it moves to another contour, a rapid movement will be created.
Figure 322: Manual hole destruction example 1
If the part (or the contour in which the user makes the cuts) is already machined, the
cutting instructions for the hole will be inserted just before the first instruction of contour
machining.
372
Drawing Module
Figure 323: Manual hole destruction example 2
It is possible to define a distance upon which the destruction of holes will be applied. In order to
do it, the user will have to select the option and define the required value. Find below the result:
Figure 324: Offset for manual destruction of holes
Automatic Hole Destruction

This option works analogously to Destroy Sheet Holes option provided in Nesting and Machining
Module. For further information, refer to Destroy Sheet Holes section.
Cycles
Cycles menu contains the following options:
Simple Cycle
This option allows machining with a center punch the machining points by inserting rapid
movements between the selected points. In order to do it perform the following steps:
373
Drawing Module
1. Select Simple Cycle ( ) button and the system will initialize the machining.
2. Select the Destination point. A rapid movement will be inserted between the initial point and
the selected point. The user will be able to insert as many points as required by selecting more
points.
Linear Cycle
Linear cycle ( ) option allows the user to machine the part by inserting punching machining
points in a sequence. When selected the system will display the following options:
Figure 325: Linear cycle options
• Beginning point and distance: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting
the punching machining points in a sequence at a specified angle and distance as follows:
1. Select Beginning point and distance button and then mark the first punching machining point.
2. The system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 326: Beginning point and distance
Find briefly described below the fields provided in the previous dialog box:
▪ n: The number of punching machining points.
▪ a: The angle at which the punching machining points are to be placed.
▪ d: The distance between the punching machining points.
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The machining will be carried out by
inserting punching machining points at the specified angle and distance.
374
Drawing Module
• Ends and number of points: Select this option in order to machine the part by inserting
punching machining points in a sequence between specified initial and end points as
follows:
1. Select Ends and number of points option and select the initial and end points.
Figure 327: Ends and number of points
3. Introduce the number of punching machining points required in n field.

4. Click OK and the part will be machined inserting the specified number of punching machining
points between initial and end points.
• Distance between two points: Select this option in order to machine the part by inserting
three punching machining points in a sequence as follows:
1. Select Distance between two points option and mark the first machining point.
2. Mark the second and destination points and the part will be machined along the selected
machining points.
Circular Cycle
Circular cycle ( ) option allows you to machine a part by inserting a circular punching
machining sequence. When selected the system will display the following options:
Figure 328: Circular cycle options
• Centre and angles: Select this option in order to machine by inserting a circular sequence
of punching machining points at a specified angle as follows:
1. Select Centre and angles option and mark the center point.
375
Drawing Module
Figure 329: Centre and angles
▪ r: Distance value from the center point.
▪ n: Number of machining points.
▪ a: Angle value between the machining points.
▪ ai: Initial angle value of the first machining point in the circular sequence.
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The part will be machined by inserting a
circular sequence of punching machining points.
• Centre and beginning point: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting a
circular sequence of punching machining points form a specified initial point as follows:
1. Select Centre and beginning point and mark the center and initial points.
Figure 330: Centre and beginning point
3. Introduce the required values in “n” (number of punching machining points) and “a” (angle
between machining points) fields and click OK button.
4. The part will be machined by inserting a circular sequence of the machining points with an
initial point and at a specified angle.
376
Drawing Module
• Distance between two points: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting
the initial and end punching machining points as follows:
1. Select Distance between two points option and mark the Initial point.
2. Mark the second and end points.
3. The part will be machined from the initial point to the end point.
• Arc: Select this option in order to machine an arc by inserting a specified number of
punching machining points as follows:
1. Select Arc button and select the arc required to machine.

Figure 331: Arc dialog box
3. Introduce the number of machining points required in “n” field and click OK button.
4. The arc will be machined with the specified number of machining points.
Grid Cycle
Grid cycle ( ) option allows machining a part by inserting punching machining points in two
different directions if the form of a grid.
Figure 332: Grid cycle options
• Corner and number: Select this option in order to machine a part in the form of a grid at a
specified angle and distance as follows:
1. Click Corner and number button and then mark the initial point from where the user wants to
machine the part.
377
Drawing Module
Figure 333: Corner and number
▪ n1: Number of machining points in the first direction.
▪ n2: Number of machining points in the second direction.
▪ a: Angle value in which the machining is done.
▪ d1: Distance value between the consecutive machining points in the first direction.
▪ d2: The distance value between the consecutive machining points in the second
direction.
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The part will be machined in the form of a
grid.
• Corner and distances: Select this option in order to machine a part in the form of a grid
with five points at a specified distance as follows:
1. Select Corner and distances option and select or mark an origin point.
2. Select or mark initial and end points in X axis. The end point must be at a distance that is an
exact multiple of the initial point in X axis.
3. Select or mark initial and end points in Y axis. The end point must be at a distance that is an
exact multiple of the initial point in Y axis.
4. The part will be machined with the five points at the specified distances.
Milling Nibbling
Milling nibbling ( ) option allows a nibbling in any type of contour with a milling tool and by
using one only instruction. It is possible to select a contour and configure a machining instruction.
The system will nibble the whole contour using this configuration:
378
Drawing Module
Figure 334: Milling nibbling’s example
The whole process for making this operation is shown below:
1. Select the option Contour among the available options for nibbling:
Figure 335: Contour option
2. A configuration window will be displayed then. In this window the user should define all
the properties of the new instruction: milling tool, depth level, etc.
379
Drawing Module
Figure 336: Milling cycle window
3. Once the configuration has been validated, now the user should select an element of
the contour. This element will be later used as the base element in the selection of
the relative position of the nibbling cycle.
Figure 337: Milling nibbling’s example 2
4. Select the rest of elements to nibbling in the contour.
The user can select as much elements as desired but the system will only nibble those which
are part of a contour next to the first selected element (either open or closed).
Figure 338: Milling nibbling’s example 3
5. Finally, establish the relative position (with respect to the base element that was
selected in the first step) of the milling nibbling.
380
Drawing Module
The final result is a new machining instruction that allows to nibble any type of contour and
an easier management in case of, for example, its properties has to be modified from the
machining tree.
Figure 339: Machining explorer (Milling nibbling)
Irregular Cycle
Irregular cycle ( ) option allows machining a part by inserting a cycle on a lead-in/lead-out or

on the points of different selected elements. When selected the system will display the following
options:
Figure 340: Irregular cycle options
• Cycles on Lead-in/Lead-out: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting a

cycle on the existing lead-in or lead-out as follows:
1. Select Cycles on Lead-in/Lead-out button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required lead-in/lead-out by means of the options provided and click Accept button
located in the same toolbar.
3. The cycle will be created in the selected lead-in/lead-out.
381
Drawing Module
• Cycles on points: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting a cycle on
selected points of existing elements as follows:
1. Select Cycles on points option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required points of the existing elements by means of the options provided and click
Accept button located in the same toolbar.
3. The cycle will be created within the selected points.
• Cycles on machining: When we execute machining with a bevel machine, many parts
generate new necessary lead-ins to cut them. This option introduces cycles in automatic
on all lead-ins (also the ones of machining). If any of the generated cycles is not useful,
the user can proceed to delete it from the machining.
“There are special cycles” parameter must me enabled in the general cutting parameters of
the machine configuration. This option is also available whenever the user executes machining on a
sheet.
Milling Pockets
Milling pockets ( ) option allows pocketing any type of irregular geometry using a milling
tool. With this option, the user can pocket any type of geometry using a milling tool.
Figure 341: Milling pockets example
In order to do so, the user should perform the following steps:
1. Select the Irregular Geometry option available in the pocket options.
382
Drawing Module
2. The system displays the configuration window where all the pocket parameters should be
defined, both the general parameters and the parameters corresponding to the phases of
roughing and finishing.
Figure 342: Milling cycle window
3. Now select the geometry to be pocketed. The user should only select one element of the
geometry and the system will try to locate a closed contour from this element.
Besides being a closed contour, this contour cannot have any internal hole.
Once this process has been finished, the final result is a machining instruction that allows to
pocket irregular geometries independently of the shape of the contour, as shown on the image
below:
383
Drawing Module
Figure 343: Machining explorer (Milling pockets)
Modify
Modify ( ) option allows the user to modify all the machining aspects. This option will only be
available when the parts have already been machined. When selected, the system will display the
following list providing the options available:
Figure 344: Modify options
384
Drawing Module
Automatic Micro-Joints at End of Contour

By means of this option, the user can place automatic micro-joints at the end of contours, which
have been already machined, as follows:
1. Point Modify button, select Automatic Micro-joints at End of Contour option and the system
will display Automatic Micro-joints at End of Contour dialog box as shown below:
Figure 345: Automatic Micro-joints at End of Contour dialog box
2. Select By quality checkbox in order to base the micro-joint on the cutting quality.
3. If By quality checkbox is not selected, the system will display Width value of micro-joint field
where the user will have to introduce the required width value.
4. In Apply in contours section, select the required size of Inside and Outside contours to
introduce the micro-joints.
5. Introduce the Maximum length and Maximum width of Small contours.
6. Introduce the Maximum length and Maximum width of Big contours.
7. Click OK button and the micro-joints will be automatically introduced in the machined part.
Order Machining
This option allows modifying the order in which the contours of the part have been machined as
follows:
1. Point Modify button, select Order Machining option and, when choosing the Order cut
sequence option, the system will display Order Cut Sequence dialog box as shown below:
385
Drawing Module
Figure 346: Order cut sequence dialog box
2. Select Show the direction of movements parameter in order to indicate the direction when
modifying the machining order.
3. In Order mode field, select between Before and After.
▪ Before: It indicates whether the machining order is modified from last to first or not.
The first selected contour will be the last to be machined.
▪ After: It indicates whether the machining order is modified from first to last or not.
4. After selecting the required values click OK button.

5. Select the base contour and the next contour whose machining order has to be changed.
Continue to select the contours whose order has to be changed.
6. Press ESC key located on the keyboard in order to stop the selection and the machining order
will be changed.
Regenerate by Selection
This option allows selecting a group of instructions using a selection toolbar to create a structure
as follows:
1. Point Modify option, select Regenerate by Selection option and the system will display
Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required contour by means of the options provided and the system will display
Regenerate dialog box as shown below:
386
Drawing Module
Figure 347: Regenerate dialog box
3. The user can activate the following parameters which are briefly described below:
• Simple punching operations => Linear patterns: It restores single punching in linear
patterns.
• Linear patterns => Linear nibble cycles: It restores linear patterns in nibbling if the
punching of the pattern are lapped.
• Linear patterns => Grid patterns: It restores linear patterns in grid patterns if the
punching’s of the patterns are not lapped.
• Pattern of only two points => Simple punching operations: It exploits patterns of two
points as they are more easily created as simple punching processes.
4. Click OK button in order to save the changes and regenerate the selected extensions.
Modify Lead-In/Outs
By means of this option the user can set the Lead-in/outs as follows:
1. Point Modify option, select Modify Lead-in/outs option and the system will display Modify Lead
In/Outs dialog box which is divided in two different tabs: General and Apply a GAP.
387
Drawing Module
APPLY A GAP
• Apply a gap in lead in/outs: With this option the user can apply a GAP (Micro-joints at the
end of the contour) in all the contours of the part. The system will leave a GAP before
ending each contour.
There are two restrictions:
• The type of lead in-out:
▪ Lead in = Segment – Lead out = Segment
▪ Lead in = Segment – Lead out = Arc
▪ Lead in = Arc – Lead out = Segment
▪ Lead in = Arc – Lead out = Arc
• The angle between the lead in and the contour.
The GAP value can be fix, a percentage of the sheet thickness or an automatic value depending
on the cutter radius (with this option the system allows the user to add an offset in the GAP).
This option is available for cutting and combined machines and it is available in CAD module and
Nesting module.
• Maximum angle to apply the GAP: Introduce the maximum angle to apply the gap.
• Value (d1):
▪ Fixed: It is possible to select the required type of gap value in the Value (d1) section. If
you want the gap to be based on a fixed value, then select Fixed value. You can enter
the required fixed value in Value field.
▪ Percentage of sheet thickness: If the user wants the gap to be based on the sheet
thicknesses then select Percentage of sheet thickness. The Modify leads in/outs dialog
box allows the user to enter a percentage of sheet thickness in Value field.
▪ Automatic depending on cutter radius: If the user wants the gap value to be calculated
automatically based on the radius value then select Automatic depending on cutter
radius, then Modify leads in/outs dialog box allows the user to set the offset distance.
• Offset (d2):
388
Drawing Module
▪ No: Select No if the offset is not required
▪ Fixed: Select Fixed to set a fixed offset distance
▪ Percentage of cutter radius: Select Percentage of cutter radius to set the offset based
on cutter radius percentage
▪ Percentage of sheet thickness: Select Percentage of sheet thickness to set the offset
based on sheet thickness percentage.
• Offset: It is possible to enter the fixed value or percentage of cutter radius or percentage
of sheet thickness in the Offset field.
Avoid Any Holes Already Cut

This option helps the user avoid the collision of the head with the holes that have already been
cut as follows:
1. Point Modify option, select Avoid any holes already cut option and the system will display
Avoid any holes already cut dialog box as shown below:
Figure 348: Avoid holes already cut dialog box
Find the fields and parameters provided in the previous dialog box briefly described below:
• Maximum hollow: It indicates whether the head is allowed to enter the hole or not. In
this case, the user can enter the maximum distance value the head can pass inside the
hole.
• Offset: It indicates whether an offset distance value is set between the head and hole or
not. In this case, the user can enter the maximum distance value between the head
movement and the hole.
389
Drawing Module
• Maximum length with head down: Introduce the maximum length value when the head
is down (mm).
• Maximum number of rapid tracts: Introduce the number of rapid tracts inserted to avoid
collision of head and holes.
• Modify Lead in/Outs: The user can modify the lead-in/lead-out by selecting the required
option from the drop-down list:
▪ No: Select this not to modify the lead-in/lead-out.
▪ By parts: Select this to modify the lead-in/lead-out and positioned in the rapid
movements to avoid the already cut holes.
▪ By contours: Select this to modify the lead-in/lead-out and positioned based on the
contours to avoid already cut holes on the rapid movements.
▪ Only in interiors: The system will only modify those lead-in/lead-outs placed in interiors.
When selecting By part or By contours, then the system displays ‘Retain lead-in/outs defined
in parts’ field.
• Retain lead-in/outs defined in parts: Select this to retain the lead-in/lead-out that is
defined in a part.
• Apply head up at end of each contour: It indicates whether the head is positioned
upwards at the end of the machined part or not.
• Head up for common cut elements: It indicates whether the head is positioned upwards
for all common cut elements or not.
2. Select and introduce the required values and then click OK. The already cut holes will be
avoided based on the above set parameters.
Modify Head Management of Rapids

This option allows introducing head up/head down instructions in rapid movements of the
machining as follows:
1. Point Modify option and select Modify Head Management of Rapids option.
390
Drawing Module
2. Select the machining to transform the head up/head down instructions and the head up/head
down will be introduced.
Continuous Cut Semiautomatically

This option allows converting the rapid movements in continuous cuts as follows:
1. Point Modify option and select Continuous Cut Semiautomatically option.

2. Select the machining of the part that has to be converted to cutting and the system will display
Continuous cut dialog box as shown below:
Figure 349: Continuous cut dialog box
3. Select Delete cycles on lead-ins parameter, if cutting the cycles on lead-ins are required to be
erased.
4. Click OK button and the rapid movements will be converted to cutting. The user can select as
many rapid movements as required.
Transform Machining
This option allows moving the machined part as follows:
1. Point Modify option, select Transform machining option and the system will display Selection
toolbar.
2. Select the required machined part to move by means of the options provided and click Accept
button located in the same toolbar.
3. Mark a Reference point and the system will display Dragging options in order to move it as per
your requirements.
4. Move the cursor until the required point and mark an Insertion point. The machining will be
successfully moved to the selected point.
Copy Machining
This option allows copying the machining of a part as follows:
1. Point Modify option, select Copy machining option and the system will display Selection
toolbar.
2. Select the required machining of a part that has to be copied by means of the options provided
and click Accept button located in the same toolbar.
391
Drawing Module
3. The system will display the following dialog box, which displays the different copy types
available:
Figure 350: Copy machining options
4. Select the required Copy type.

5. Mark a reference point and the system will display Dragging options in order to move the
selected machining.
6. Move the cursor till the required point and mark an Insertion point. The machining will be
copied in the selected point.
Modify Movements
This option allows modifying the movements of the machining as follows:
1. Point Modify option and select Modify movements option.

2. Select the machining whose movements are required to be changed.
3. Move the cursor till the required point and mark it.
4. The movement of the machining will be modified. The user can continue to select as many
machining movements as required to modify.
Modify Compensation of a Contour

This option allows modifying the existing compensation parameters of a contour as follows:
1. Point Modify option and select Modify compensation of a contour option.

2. Select a Base element for which the contours compensation parameters have to be modified
and the system will display Modify compensation dialog box as shown below:
392
Drawing Module
Figure 351: Modify compensation dialog box
Find briefly described below the different fields provided in the previous dialog box:
• Only the selected contour: It indicates whether the changes in compensation of the
contour are only applied to the selected contour or not.
• All the part holes: It indicates whether the changes in compensation of the contour are
only applied to the holes in the part or not.
• All the part outsides: It indicates whether the changes in compensation of the contour
are only applied to the outsides of the part or not.
• All the contours (Insides and outsides): It indicates whether the changes in
compensation of the contour are only applied to all the contours, comprising both insides
and outsides, of the part or not.
• System compensation: It indicates the compensation side in System compensation.
• CN compensation: It indicates the compensation side in CN compensation.
In CN compensation, if the second or third option is selected, the system will display
“Corrector number” field.
393
Drawing Module
• Corrector number: Compensation index value.
3. Select and introduce the required values and click OK button in order to save the changes. The
system will modify the contour compensation.
Options
Optimize
Optimize ( ) option allows making the CNC code simpler and shorter by deleting the repeated
instructions as follows:
1. Click Optimize button and the system will display Optimize corrector changes ( ) option.
2. Select Optimize corrector changes option and click OK. The machining instructions will be
automatically optimized by the system.
Speed Rates
Speed rates ( ) option allows setting the different speed rates for the machine. When selected
the system will display Feed rates dialog box as shown below:
Figure 352: Feed rates dialog box
Here the user will be able to modify and set the different speed rates of the machine as required.
Wheel-tool speed parameter will only be activated if the configuration is for punching
machines.
394
Drawing Module
Postprocessor Words
Postprocessor words ( ) option allows introducing postprocessor instructions in the

machining program. The postprocessor words are special instructions. When selected the system
will display Postprocessor words dialog box as shown below:
Find the different special instructions provided in the previous dialog box briefly described
below:
• OPSTOP: Select this to introduce a Conditional stop instruction in the machining program.
When selecting this, the system displays ‘OP_stop’ word near to the machined part and is
also included in the Instruction list.
• STOP: Select this to introduce an Unconditional stop instruction in the machining

program. When selecting this, the system displays Stop word near to the machined part
and is also included in the Instruction list.
• AUXFUN: Select this to introduce an Auxiliary instruction in the machining program as

follows:
1. Select AUXFUN Auxiliary function and then click OK. The system will display the AUXFUN,
Auxiliary function dialog box.
2. Select Assign value manually checkbox in order to assign a numeric value to the auxiliary
function. When selecting this, Value field will be enabled.
395
Drawing Module
3. Enter the numeric value in Value field and then click OK. The assigned number will be displayed
along with the letter M near to the machined part and will also be included in the Instruction
list.
• PREFUN: Select this to introduce a Preparatory instruction in the machining program as

follows:
1. Select PREFUN Preparatory function and then click OK. The system will display the PREFUN,
Preparatory function dialog box.
2. Select Assign value manually checkbox in order to assign a numeric value to the auxiliary
function. When selecting this, Value field will be enabled.
3. Introduce the numeric value in Value field and then click OK. The assigned number will be
displayed along with the letter G near to the machined part and will also be included in the
Instruction list.
• DELAY: Select this option to introduce the program delay time instruction in the
machining program as follows:
1. Select DELAY Program dwell time and then click OK. The system will display a dialog box.
2. Introduce the delay time value in Value field and then click OK. The program delay time will be
recorded in the Instruction list.
• OPSKIP: Select this option to enable or disable skipping the optional blocks in the
1. Select OPSKIP Optional block skip option, click OK button and the system will display the
Figure 354: Optional block skip options
2. Select ON checkbox in order to enable skipping the optional block or select OFF in order to
disable it.
3. Click OK button. The OPSKIP Optional block skip program will be recorded in the Instruction list.
396
Drawing Module
• PPRINT: Select this option in order to introduce a Comment text in the machining
program as follows:
1. Select PPRINT Comment text, click OK button and the system will display the following dialog
box:
Figure 355: Comment text
2. Introduce the required comments in Text field and then click OK. The comment will be included
in the Instruction List.
• INSNC: Select this option to insert a text in the machining program as follows:
1. Select INSNC Insertion block CN, click OK button and the system will display the following
dialog box:
Figure 356: Insertion block CN
2. Introduce the required text in Text field and click OK button. The text will be displayed near the
machined part and also recorded in the Instruction List.
• CLAMP: Select this option in order to introduce clamp management instructions in the
1. Select CLAMP Management of clamps option, click OK button and the system will display the
397
Drawing Module
Figure 357: Management of clamps
2. Select the required checkbox to manage the clamps and click OK button.
3. The clamp instructions will be recorded in the Instructions list.
• HEADZ: Select this option in order to introduce cutting head instructions in the machining
program as follows:
1. Select HEADZ Head up/down option, click OK button and the system will display the following
dialog box:
Figure 358: Head up/down
2. Select whether the user wants the head up or down and click OK button.
3. The cutting head instruction will be displayed near to the machined part and also recorded in
the Instruction list.
• TRAP: Select this option in order to introduce trap instructions in the machining program
as follows:
1. Select TRAP Open/close trap option, click OK button and the system will display the following
dialog box:
398
Drawing Module
Figure 359: Open/close trap
2. Select whether the user wants to Open or Close the trap, introduce the Number of traps and
click OK button.
3. The trap instruction will be displayed near to the machined part as well as recorded in the
Instruction list.
• COOLNT: Select this option in order to introduce refrigeration instructions in the

1. Select COOLNT Refrigeration option, click OK button and the system will display the following
dialog box:
Figure 360: Refrigeration
2. Select the required refrigeration option and click OK button.

3. The refrigeration instruction will be displayed near to the machined part and also recorded in
the Instruction list.
Contour Attributes
Contour attributes ( ) option allows assigning contour attributes which are the postprocessor
instructions in the machining program as follows:
1. Select Contour attributes option located in Options menu.
399
Drawing Module
2. Select a base contour and the system will display Contour attributes dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 361: Contour attributes dialog box
• Corner management: It indicates whether the corner values are assigned or not. If
selected, the system allows introducing the corner values.
• Microjoint at contour´s end: It indicates whether the micro-joint is assigned at the end of
the contour or not. If enabled, the system will display By quality checkbox.
• By quality: It indicates whether the micro-joint value is based on quality. If enabled, the
system allows introducing the micro-joint value manually.
• User attributes (1-5): Indicate the rest of the values that are assigned to the contour.
3. Select and introduce the required values, click OK button and the system will display Contour
attributes dialog box as shown below:
400
Drawing Module
Figure 362: Contour attributes; Make on
• Picked contours: Select this to assign the attributes to the selected contours.
• All the contours: Select this to assign the attributes to all the contours.
• The contours with same technology: Select this to assign the attributes to contours of
same technology.
• The contours with same technology, form and dimensions: Select this to assign the
attributes to contours of same technology, form and dimensions.
• The contours with same technology and quality: Select this to assign the attributes to
the contours of same technology and quality.
• The contours with same technology, quality, form and dimensions: Select this to assign
the attributes to the contours of same technology, quality, form, and dimensions.
CN Compensation
CN Compensation ( ) option allows selecting the side of compensation and index for numeric
control. It will be only applicable if the compensation type is Numeric Control. When selected the
system will display CN Compensation dialog box as shown below:
Figure 363: CN Compensation dialog box
Select the Compensation side, introduce the Compensation index and click OK button so that the
changes are saved.
System Compensation
System Compensation ( ) option allows selecting the side of compensation and introducing
the cutter radius. This is only applicable if the compensation is made by the system. When
selected the system will display System Compensation dialog box as shown below:
401
Drawing Module
Figure 364: System compensation dialog box
Select the Compensation side, introduce the Cutter radius and click OK button in order to save the
changes.
Component Removal
Part Extraction
Part extraction ( ) option allows the user to evacuate the machined part manually or by means
of traps by performing the following steps:
1. Select Part extraction option, located in Component removal menu and the system will display
Extractor dialog box as shown below:
Figure 365: Extractor dialog box
2. In type field select STOP option in order to evacuate the machined part manually. Select TRAP in
order to trap and evacuate the part.
402
Drawing Module
TRAP type of evacuation will only be available if it is previously configured in the Machine
Configuration.
3. If TRAP option is selected, the system will display TRAP dialog box as shown below:
Figure 366: TRAP dialog box
4. Introduce the Number of traps, Number of boxes, the Increment X and Y and select Move the
part after opening the trap, Fasten the part during the extraction and Vacuum parameters if
required.
Assign Extractions
Assign extractions ( ) option allows assigning the evacuation type of the machined part as
follows:
1. Click Assign extractions option and the system will display Extractor dialog box as shown
below:
403
Drawing Module
Figure 367: Extractor dialog box
Find the fields provided in the previous dialog box briefly described below:
• Type: Type of extractor assigned for evacuation. It is possible to select the required type
of extractor from the drop-down list:
▪ Stop
▪ Trap
▪ None
• Manual: Select this to manually select the evacuation method/position.
• Semi-Automatic: Select this and the system displays the Position section.
▪ Middle: The Extractor is positioned at mid-point.
▪ End: The Extractor is positioned at the end-point.
▪ Picked point: The Extractor is positioned at a selected point.
• Automatic: Select Automatic to evacuate the part automatically.
2. Select the required values and then click OK. The evacuation type will be assigned.
404
Drawing Module
Assign Boxes
Assign Boxes ( ) option allows assigning a box to evacuate the machined parts as follows:
1. Select Assign Boxes option and the system will display Boxes dialog box as shown below:
Figure 368: Boxes dialog box
2. Enable Assign boxes checkbox and Normal and Symmetric fields will be activated in order to
introduce the different angles.
3. Introduce the number of boxes to assign in 0º, 90º, 180º, 270º and Others.
4. The user can click the required arrow buttons in order to assign the same number of boxes at
all angles/symmetrically.
5. Click OK button and the boxes will be assigned at specific angles.
View
Current Status
Select Current Status ( ) located in View menu and the system will display Current Status
405
Drawing Module
Figure 369: Current Status dialog box
This dialog box displays data such as the Units, Cutter radius, Compensation, X and Y.
If Feed rates button is selected the system will display Feed rates dialog box, providing the user
with Cut speed, Beveled speed, Powder mark speed, Drill mark speed, Pen mark speed, Cut mark
speed, Wheel-tool speed and Rapid speed, all of them by millimeters per minute.
Verify Machining
Verify machining ( ) option the system will test if the machining process has been done
properly looking if:
• All the parts and contours are machined
• There is no overlapping between parts
• There are no leads, micro-joints, loops, etc. that overlap with other elements
If any of the previous situations is given the system will display the following completion
message: “All machining on the sheet has been executed”. The dark grey color in the contours
means that the test has been successful.
If the system finds any problem, it will display a warning message, marking the problematic zones
with other color, or if the visualization is too small, with green points.
406
Drawing Module
View
Display
Part Machining List
Part machining list ( ) option allows the user to decide from what machine the user wants
to use machining on the part. The user will need to draw and save a part and then save machining
so as to display the Part machining list window when clicking on Part Machining list display:
Figure 370: Part machining list window
Simulation Window
Click Simulation window ( ) button to visualize the Simulation window of the machined part.
It is possible to set the speed, view the cutter radius, and so on.
Figure 371: Simulation window
407
Drawing Module
Find the different sections provided in this dialog box briefly described below:
• In the first section it is possible to set the percentage of speed.
• The Operation section displays the Cutting quality, Cutting operation with respect to X
axis, Y axis, and the Cutter radius.
• The next section provides information about the heads used and their positions,
compensation system and control.
• Use the arrow buttons to view the required simulation process.
• Use the other buttons at the bottom of the window to pause, stop the operation, fast
forward the simulation, move to the previous operation, current operation, and so on.
Machining Explorer
Click Machining Explorer ( ) option in order to visualize a panel on the left side of the window
with a tree structure that displays the machining instructions of the active part. This option helps
interpreting by converting the sequential instruction list into a structure. Each element of this list
can be visualized sequentially or grouped on several levels for a better comprehension
depending on the case.
According to the behavior of the views in relation to synchronization between them, any
machining view allows modification thereof, originating an update of the rest, so that system
status is coherent in all the views.
Any tree node can be selected with the mouse or keyboard. If the selected node corresponds to
an instruction, it will be highlighted in the drawing view. To display the corresponding
information of that instruction in the machining window, enable the visible option panel from the
options ribbon. Therefore, navigating the instruction tree will display data in the machining
window.
If the selected node in the Machining Explorer corresponds to a classifying group or node all
instructions hanging from the same will be highlighted. In this case the machining window will
not show information unless this group has a single instruction.
Besides visualization per selection, the desired instructions can be highlighted by moving the
mouse over the tree without clicking. This function enables a quick visualization of the desired
instruction or instruction group in the main view without being necessary to select it for edition.
408
Drawing Module
Machining Window
The aim of the Machining Window ( ) is based on a detailed visualization of instructions and
modifications at the same time. This view allows modifications and updates the rest of the views
so that the system status is coherent all the time.
In the edition panel of the machining instruction properties, the instruction data can be visualized
in detail and modified. Changes made can be visualized from Drawing window simultaneously.
It is possible to delete the changes made at any time using Undo option.
3D View of the Part
3D View of the part ( ) option, as the name indicated, provides a 3D view of the part in
question in Drawing module, which aims to be a visual aid when designing parts. This view
behaves as one more panel in the Drawing module.
Figure 372: 3D View of the part
The 3D view also shows the machining (cutting contours and marking contours) of the part
whenever this is machined. Together with the machining, the user will also visualize drawn
arrows that indicate the direction of the machining.
409
Drawing Module
Figure 373: 3D View of the part with machining
It is possible to configure the colors of the background and the material of the part in the 3D
view. In order to do so navigate to Colors tab located in the configuration window of the Draw
and Nest module. The machining colors of the 3D view are the same colors used to visualize the
machining in the Draw and Nest module.
Find below a detailed list of actions available in the 3D view of the part:
• Mouse movement with scroll wheel pressed: rotation of the part.
Red-colored keys (combined with the scroll wheel):
• CTRL + scroll wheel movement: rotation of the part in Y-axis.
• ALT + scroll wheel movement: rotation of the part in Z-axis.
• SHIFT + scroll wheel movement: rotation of the part in X-axis.
• CTRL + mouse movement with scroll wheel pressed: movement (pan) of the part.
• SHIFT + mouse movement with scroll wheel pressed: zoom of the part.
410
Drawing Module
Yellow-colored keys (utility tools):
• F8: zoom all part.
• F9: enable/disable the machining visualization.
• F12: enable/disable the geometry visualization.
Blue-colored keys (movement (pan) keys of the part).
Green-colored keys (view keys):
• Z: zoom out.
• X: zoom in.
• C: center view in 0, 0, 0 point.
• 1: view from above.
• 2: view from right side.
• 3: view from the front.
• 4: view from below.
• 5: rear view.
• 6: view from left side.
• 7: isometric view.
3D view toolbar:
• View from above (equivalent to key 1).
• View from the right (equivalent to key 2).
• View from the front (equivalent to key 3).
• View from below (equivalent to key 4).
• Rear view (equivalent to key 5).
• View from the left (equivalent to key 6).
• Isometric view (equivalent to key 7).
• Zoom all part (equivalent to key F8).
411
Drawing Module
• Enable/disable the geometry visualization (equivalent to key F12).
• Enable/disable the machining visualization (equivalent to key F9).
Change Co-ordinates
Change Co-ordinates ( ) button allows the user to change co-ordinates of the geometry with
respect to an axis. When pointing to this application, the system lists different ways to change
the co-ordinates as follows:
• Move to a point ( ): Click this to move the co-ordinates of the geometry to a point.
• Rotate by an element ( ): Click this to change the co-ordinates by rotating an element.
• Rotate an angle ( ): Click this to change the co-ordinates at a specified angle.
• Symmetry on axis X ( ): Click this to change the co-ordinates symmetrically with

respect to X axis.
• Symmetry on axis Y ( ): Click this to change the co-ordinates symmetrically with

respect to Y axis.
• Symmetry on axis XY ( ): Click this to change the co-ordinates symmetrically with

respect to X and Y axis.
• Make by default ( ): Click this to consider the current co-ordinates as the default co-
ordinates whenever opening the CAD module.
• Restore ( ): Click this to replace the current co-ordinates are replaced with the default
co-ordinates.
Axis
Select Axis ( ) button to display the X and Y axis on the Drawing window. This application will
be active until the user clicks it again in order to disable it.
412
Drawing Module
Sheet Simulation
Select Sheet Simulation ( ) option in order to simulate the sheet of the part. This application
will be active until the user clicks it again in order to disable it.
Figure 374: Sheet simulation example
The user can also press F12 key on the keyboard to use this application.
Special Display
Special Display ( ) option enables visualizing the parts by color as per tools used, organizing
the color by part reference, shape or type as follows:
1. Select Special display option located in Display menu and the system will display Color display
Figure 375: Color display dialog box
2. Select the required option from the ones provided in Fill the part and By tool fields.
3. If Fill parameter is enabled, the part will be filled with the corresponding color.
413
Drawing Module
Auxiliary Geometry
Auxiliary Geometry ( ) option allows the user to create, modify and delete the non-cut lines.
It is also possible to customize the non-cut lines by specifying their color, style and thickness and
configuring their line properties, as well as their visualization in Draw and Nest view.
In order to enable this option In the Drawing module, it is necessary to create it first from
Auxiliary geometry definition window, which is displayed from Configuration options/Configure:
Draw and Nest/ Auxiliar section. Here the user will be able to specify the name and properties of
the line (color style and thickness).
Show Parts
Show parts ( ) option enables opening and visualizing the several parts of a job
simultaneously in the Drawing module. This functionality allows modifying aspects such as the
geometry and machining of many parts, with no need of opening them one by one separately.
1. Select Show parts option and the system will display a list with the following options:
▪ All parts: This option displays all the parts included in the job.
▪ Selected part: With this option it is possible to view all the parts associated to the same
machine as selected part.
▪ First part: This option allows the user to open the initial part from the parts opened.
▪ Previous part: With this option it is possible to open the preceding part.
▪ Next part: This option helps the user to open the succeeding part.
▪ Last part: It displays the final part among the opened parts.
2. Once the required parts to open have been selected, it will be possible to navigate through
them individually as per the requirements.
Redraw
Redraw ( ) option allows visualizing the drawing of the machined part as shown below:
414
Drawing Module
Figure 376: Redraw example
Zoom
Zoom All
Select Zoom All ( ) option in order to zoom the part to the maximum size of the screen.
Zoom Window
Select Zoom Window ( ) option in order to zoom the selected part as follows:
1. Click Zoom Window option and mark the first point of the window to select the part that has
to be enlarged.
2. Move the cursor till the desired end point and mark the end point of the window.
3. The selected part will be enlarged.
Zoom Previous
Select Zoom Previous ( ) in order to go back to the previous screen.
The user can also press F7 key on the keyboard to use this application. +
415
Drawing Module
Zoom Dynamic
Select Zoom Dynamic ( ) option in order to zoom the part to a required size as follows:
1. Click Zoom Dynamic button and the system will display a pink window on the part.
2. Click and move the cursor until getting the desired window size and then right click.
3. You can repeat the steps 1 and 2 until getting the desired size and the right-click. The part will
be enlarged based on the window size.
Zoom Scale
Select Zoom Scale ( ) option in order to zoom the part based on proportionate values as
follows:
1. Click Zoom Scale button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 377: Zoom scale values
2. Introduce the proportionate values and then click OK button.

3. The part will be enlarged based on the specified proportionate values.
The user can also press F7 key on the keyboard to use this application
Zoom Base
Select Zoom Base ( ) option in order to zoom the part within the default limits.
The user can also press F6 key on the keyboard to use this application
416
Drawing Module
Define Limits
Define Limits ( ) option allows the user to define the limits of the screen for Zoom Base view.
The user will have to select the required part of the screen by clicking two points to set the limit.
Full Screen
Select Full Screen ( ) option in order to visualize the full drawing screen without the tool bars.
The system will display Full Screen button on the drawing window, which the user will have to
click in order to return to the normal screen.
Simulation
Simulate
Simulate section allows simulating the required machining instructions. It is possible to visualize
the machining instructions and the position of the required machining instructions between
many other options. It includes the following:
Program
Select Program ( ) button in order to visualize all the instructions of a machining program.
When selected the system will display Instruction list dialog box as shown below, listing all the
machining instructions:
417
Drawing Module
Figure 378: Instruction list dialog box
Here the user can visualize the position number of the machining instruction together with the
type and the specific text of the instructions. It is possible to print these instructions by means of
Print button provided at the bottom of the dialog box.
ISN Position
ISN Position ( ) option allows simulating the machining instruction of the selected program
line number as follows:
1. Click ISN Position button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 379: ISN Position value
2. Introduce the required program line number of the machining instruction in Value field and
click OK button.
3. The machining instruction of the selected program line will be simulated.
Mouse Positioning
Select Mouse Positioning ( ) option in order to simulate the machining instruction up to the
selected machining position as follows:
1. Click Mouse Positioning option.

2. Select the point on which the user wants to position himself.
3. The system will simulate the machining instruction up to the selected machining position.
Begin
Select Begin ( ) button in order to simulate the first machining instruction.
Previous
Select Previous ( ) button in order to simulate the previous instruction.
418
Drawing Module
Next
Select Next ( ) button in order to simulate the next machining instruction when having
previously moved from the current instruction to the previous one or first one.
End
Select End ( ) button in order to simulate the last machining instruction when having
previously moved from the current instruction to the previous one.
Run
Select Run ( ) option in order to visualize the simulation of the machining process including
the rapid movements, evacuation and so on. When selected, the system will display Simulation
window as shown below:
This application will only be enabled once the part is machined.
Previous Tool
Select Previous tool ( ) button in order to move to the previous tool.
Next Tool
Select Previous tool ( ) button in order to move to the next tool.
419
Drawing Module
Notes
Dimension Notes
Automatic
Select Automatic ( ) option in order to visualize the dimensions of the geometry

automatically.
The user will only be able to visualize the dimensions if Texts and dimension option is
enabled on the View menu.
Semi-Automatic
Select Semi-automatic ( ) option to view the dimensions of the selected element of the
geometry automatically.
If Prompt for text checkbox is enabled in Dimension definition dialog box, the system will
allow the user editing the dimension text by displaying Text dialog box.
Delete
Select Delete ( ) option in order to erase an existing dimension as follows:
1. Click Delete button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. By means of the options provided select the dimensions required to delete and click Accept
button.
3. The selected dimension note(s) will be deleted.
Dimension Notes (1-7)

The different Dimension notes provided below display the dimensions selected between two
points of different type:
• Dimension Notes 1 ( ): It visualizes horizontal dimension notes of the geometry.
• Dimension Notes 2 ( ): It visualizes vertical dimension notes of the geometry.
420
Drawing Module
• Dimension Notes 3 ( ): It visualizes inclined dimension notes of the geometry.
• Dimension Notes 4 ( ): It visualizes radius dimension notes of the geometry.
• Dimension Notes 5 ( ): It visualizes diameter dimension notes of the geometry.
• Dimension Notes 6 ( ): It visualizes angle dimension notes between three points.
• Dimension Notes 7 ( ): It visualizes angle dimension notes between two elements.
Configuration
Select Configuration ( ) option in order to configure the dimension notes as follows:
1. Click Configuration button and the system will display Dimension definition dialog box as
shown below:
Figure 381: Dimension definition dialog box
• Font: Font of the dimension notes. Click the button in this field to select the type, style,
and size of the font.
421
Drawing Module
• Decimal places in text: Number of decimals to be displayed in the dimension note.
• No decimal places for exact dimension notes: It indicates whether or not the dimension
notes are displayed with decimals.
• Put bench marks: In this section, it is possible to select the required check box to align
the bench marks according to dimensions. The different options include the following:
▪ According to minimum dimension
▪ According to maximum dimension
▪ According to diagonal dimension
• Percentage: Percentage value of the dimension note, which is the maximum text size
with respect to the part size.
• Automatic text: In this section, it is possible to enter the before and after text for the
linear, radius, diameters, and angle dimension notes.
• Prompt for text: It indicates whether the before and after text is displayed automatically
or not. If this check box is selected, when using the semi-automatic and manual
dimension notes, the system displays a dialog box allowing the user to change the
dimension text.
• Set dimension attributes a dependent scale factor: It indicates whether the dimension
attributes (lines and arrows of the dimension notes) are dependent on the geometry and
based on the Put bench marks section or not. If the Select dimension attributes as a
dependent scale factor check box is not selected, the length value of the dimension
attributes has to be entered. In this case, the Dimension definition dialog box allows the
user the user entering the length value for the attributes. Enter the length of the
dimension attributes in ‘a’, ‘b’, ‘c’, and ‘d’ fields.
• Automatic dimension notes: Select the required type of geometries for which the
dimension notes have to be displayed. The different types are:
▪ Horizontal
▪ Vertical
▪ Radius
422
Drawing Module
▪ Diameters
• Only one radius if there are several elements: It indicates whether or not the dimension
note is displayed for only one element in case there are several elements of equal radius.
• Only one diameter if there are several elements: It indicates whether or not the
dimension note is displayed for one element in case there are several elements of equal
diameters.
• Prompt for this data: It indicates whether or not the system allows the user to calculate
the co-ordinates for the Horizontal and Vertical dimension notes. It is also possible to set
this data by selecting the required co-ordinate system in the Vertical and Horizontal
section.
2. Select and introduce the required details and click OK button. The parameters will be set
accordingly.
Change Data
Select this option in order to change the parameters of the manual dimension notes (dimension
notes 1-7) as follows:
1. Click Change data ( ) button and the system will display Dimension definition
window as shown below:
423
Drawing Module
Figure 382: Dimension definition dialog box (Change data)
2. Edit the required data.

3. Click OK button in order to set the parameters accordingly.
In order to activate all the fields Change data checkbox must be selected.
Modify Dimension
Select this option in order to change the position of the dimension notes to a desired position as
follows:
1. Click Modify dimension ( ) button and select the bench mark to modify.
2. Place the bench mark in the desired place and the system will display a dialog box.
3. Introduce the required value in Text field and click OK button in order to save the changes.
The system will only display the dialog box with Text field if Prompt for text checkbox is
enabled in Dimension definition dialog box.
424
Drawing Module
Explode Dimensions
Select this option in order to convert the dimensions’ geometry to an uncut geometry as follows:
1. Click Explode dimensions ( ) button and then the system will display
Selection toolbar.
2. Select the dimension note that has to be exploded by means of the options provided and then
click Accept button.
3. The dimension note will be exploded and converted to an uncut geometry.
Text
Text
This option allows the user to introduce a text as follows:
1. Click Text ( ) button and the system displays Text definition dialog box as shown below:
• Font: Font of the text. Click the button in this field to select the required type, style, and
size of font.
• Text: Text that is introduced on the part.
• Orientation: Angle value of the text. The user can select the required angle from the
drop-down list.
425
Drawing Module
• Vectorize: It indicates whether the text is converted automatically to geometry or not.

When selecting this field, then the system displays Number of tracts for the Beizer curves
field.
• Number of tracts for the Beizer curves: Select the number of tracts for the Beizer curves.
2. Select and introduce the required values and then click OK button. The text will be displayed in
the Drawing window.
3. Mark an insertion point to insert the text. The system will display the Dragging options in order
to place the text in the desired point.
Modify
Select this option in order to modify the required text as follows:
1. Select Modify ( ) option and select the text to modify.

2. The system will display a dialog box providing Text field, where the user will have to introduce
the required text.
3. Click OK button and the new text will replace the old one.
Marked texts can be modified in the same way as informative texts and writings. The option
Modify text allows selecting a marked text to replace the current text with another. In this case, the
system will replace the geometry of the current marked text by the geometry of the new one.
View
Text and Dimensions
Select Text and Dimensions ( ) option in order to display or hide the texts and dimension
notes from the geometry.
This option will only be applicable for those texts that have not been converted to geometry
by means of Vectorize option.
Utilities
Utilities menu provides the following options:
426
Drawing Module
Cut of Double or Triple Bevels
Cut of double or triple bevels ( ) option allows the user to cut the edges with the same kind
of bevel (For example: triple with triple, double with double) from the start point value entered
and hence the system automatically machines the selected part.
Double bevel: The machine must have three heads, one for vertical cut, one for upper bevel and
the third for lower bevel. In this case all the values must be filled, and for variable bevels the
values must be different from left to right side. The bevels must be assigned manually to each
part using one of the four kinds of bevels on the bevels toolbar.
Partial Cut of a Contour

With this option, the user can only cut part of a contour in cutting and combined machines. The
part of the new contour to be cut will be defined dynamically with the snap mode. Perform the
following steps:
1. Select Partial Cut of a Contour ( ) option and the system will display the Partial cut of a
contour dialog box as shown below:
Figure 384: Partial cut of a contour dialog box
2. Select Lead-in/Lead-out length is fixed checkbox, if the user wants to enable the D field. With
this option, it is possible to specify D, A, and F (distance, angle and length) for lead-in and/or
lead-out.
• Compensation mode: Select the required type of compensation mode.
• Head radius: Introduce the required radius value.
427
Drawing Module
• Apply quality: Select this checkbox to assign cutting technology of a specified quality.
By clicking the Navigation button, the system will display Cutting quality dialog box. Select the
required type of Cutting quality and click OK button.
Click Modify button in order to modify the material, thickness, and so on. If selected, the system
will display Table of technology dialog box to include, modify, delete the material, thickness, and
other details.
Click OK and the system will display Selection toolbar. Select the required element using the
options provided and Accept button located in the same menu. The selected element will be
assigned with the cutting technology of the previously specified quality.
Open Drafting
Open drafting ( ) option will open the drafting module without closing the drawing/nesting
ones. If the system detects changes in the machining when selecting this option, it will prompt
for saving them. If the user performs changes in the drafting module, the system will ask to save
them again before going back to the drawing/nesting module.
Compare Geometries
Compare Geometries ( ) option allows the user comparing two different geometries.
If two identical geometries are compared, the system will display a warning message stating
that the geometries are identical.
In order to compare two geometries, perform the following steps:
1. Select Compare Geometries option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the first geometry by means of the options provided and click Accept button.
3. Select the second geometry that has to be compared with the first and click Accept button one
more time.
4. The differences between the geometries will be highlighted.
Bitmap
Bitmap ( ) option allows visualizing a Bitmap image on the Drawing window as follows:
1. Select Bitmap option and the system will display Open dialog box.
428
Drawing Module
2. Select the required bitmap image ant click Open button.

3. The system will display the selected bitmap image on the Drawing window.
Mosaic
This option allows creating multicolor compositions (with different materials) as well as any
shape for the parts that compose it. The user can access this option with a design (previously
verified and saved) with the shape of the mosaic required to generate. It needs to be a single
composition with the parts together and not several separate compositions as in the example
provided below:
Whenever the system is launched, the system carries out a recognition of all the parts that
compose the mosaic. To this end, all the contours of the drawing must have a beginning and an
end on another contour.
The user must assign the required material to each one of the parts between the ones available in
the system. This process must be repeated as many times as required until the composition is
completed.
When it comes to generating parts by validating the panel, the system will generate a print-out if
configured to do so together with an image of the composition and all its parts.
Add Arcs in Pockets

Depending on the external geometry of a part, there may be problems when evacuating it. For
example, if there are small pockets, the part may be hooked to the sheet so that the part cannot
be picked up by the evacuator.
This option looks for those pockets that can cause problems and adds an arc with the purpose of
separating this part from the sheet with more security.
429
Drawing Module
It allows the user to define the maximum straight-line length of the arch to be added, the
maximum depth of the pocket to add the arc and the distance from the outer contour to the
edges of the arc.
Figure 385: Add arcs in pockets
Add Arcs in Pockets Manually

This option is a complement to the previous one and aims to give the user a tool to create those
arcs in elements that the automatic option has not been able to find.
In this case, the option asks for a diameter to define the circle that will be used to create the arcs
and the distance from the outer contour to the edges of the arc.
The user must only move the mouse over the pocket and the option will automatically show the
arches that are on the outside of the contour.
Figure 386: Add arcs in pockets manually
Dragging Options
The Dragging toolbar enables the rotation of the selected elements in the desired angle and
direction.
430
Drawing Module
Figure 387: Dragging options
This button sets the step angle, for rotating the selected geometry using the mouse.
• Step of rotation: The selected geometry will rotate in the angle indicated in the displayed
dialogue.
• Step angle: Clicking on one of these buttons or the keys that appear in lower case at the
bottom of each button (Ctr - 1, Ctr - 5, Ctr - 0, Ctr - 3, Ctr - 4, Ctr - 9), the selected geometry
will rotate in the corresponding angle.
• Rotate (1-5-10-30-45-90) degrees: Clicking on this button or Ctr - A, the selected geometry
will rotate until reaching the symmetrical geometry with respect to the vertical axis of the
mouse position.
• Symmetry X: Click on this button to choose the rotation direction.
• Finish: Validates the selection. The same effect can be achieved by clicking the right
mouse button or pressing the <INTRO> key.
When dragging a part in automatic and it needs to be rotated in order to fit in a gap, the system
automatically detects if there are collisions when rotating, and if so, it will look for a closer point
without collision. This automatic detection works when rotating a part using the keys Ctrl+Q or
Ctrl+W and clicking the left mouse button.
Moreover, when right mouse button is held down and the part is dragged, the system
automatically looks for better rotation for each position, so it is easier to fit a part in a gap. In
case of the same behavior as until now when rotating the part with the right mouse button, press
Ctrl button.
Selection Options
The different program options require elements selection. In order to select elements, the
button bar with different selection options appears. The options provided change according to
the actions that can be applied at each moment. The most common selection button bar is the
following:
431
Drawing Module
Figure 388: Selection options
• Element: Selection of elements by clicking the mouse on them (or deselection if they are
already selected).
• Window-Capture: Selection of elements with a rectangular window. The same effect as

clicking the left mouse button in an area in which there are no elements.
• Trap: Selection of elements by means of an area generated by polylines. All the elements
trapped inside this area will be selected.
• Join: The elements whose ends coincide with the last element selected are selected. The
same effect can be produced by clicking the middle mouse button.
• All: Selection of all the drawing elements.
• Dots: Selection of all the drawing points.
• Line segments: Selection of all the drawing segments.
• Arc segments: Selection of all the drawing arcs.
• Full circles: Selection of all the drawing circumferences.
• Lines: Selection of all the drawing lines.
• Invert selection: It inverts the current selection.
• Accept: It accepts the selection.
• Finish: It finishes the execution of the option.
432
4 NESTING AND MACHINING MODULE

The Nesting and machining module is the area of the program, which is most directly related to
the final machining of the part. It is in charge of the right positioning of the parts in the sheet and
calculating the machining sequence and creating the CNC program among other things.
In order to gain access to this module, select the option Nesting and machining ( ) in Home
menu of Lantek Expert – Jobs (CAM) menu and the system will display the following window:
Figure 389: Nesting and Machining module
Title bar
The Title bar located in Nesting and machining window helps to identify the work in progress at
any time. The three factors that define a particular job (Machine, Material and Thickness) are
displayed in the center of the title bar. In addition, the user will also be provided with the name of
the active Module, the name of the active/current Job and the active Database.
433
Drawing Window
The Drawing window is located in the center of the cutting and machining window. This is the
drawing operative area where the nesting and machining of sheets can be visualized.
If something is required to be modified in a part that is already nested, it is possible to open

it by right clicking on it while pressing Control key.
Status Bar
The status bar provides up to date information about the steps to perform and the active
coordinates of the cursor.
• Sheets dimension: Those are the X and Y dimensions of the current sheet.
• Percent of sheet occupied by the parts: This is the size of the whole sheet occupied by
the nested parts.
• Percent of remnant occupied: In this case, referred to the size that the nested parts
occupy in the remnant.
• Maximum cutting coordinates: Maximum X and Y distances where the machine head will
arrive.
• Sheet reference: This is the reference given when the sheet has been created.
• CNC filename: This is the name of the CNC file that will not be generated until the job has
been saved.
Apart from all the data shown previously located at the bottom of the window, there is also an
icon representing the active option. This icon, together with the name and group it belongs to,
plus a text displaying the user´s requirements at any time (a point, a selection, etc.) makes the
program user friendly and guides the user through the execution of the different options.
Customize Quick Access Toolbar

Customize quick access toolbar option permits the user to access the different functionality
areas of the software quickly and in a visual way, as they are coming in the nesting and machining
module. This frequently used toolbar is accessible on the top left corner of the window. This
provides the user with one click shortcut commands for the commonly used functions, such as
434
creating a new job/part, opening the selected part of the job/existing job and saving it between
many other options.
By means of this option the user will also be able to include additional icons such as Print,
Properties and Projects for example. Undo ( ) and Redo ( ) options enable the user to
select the number of actions that is going to use. It is necessary to unfold the list of last
performed actions and to select the action or actions ready to undo or redo from the list.
The user can add any frequently used commands to the quick access tool bar by right
clicking on the command icon and selecting Add to Quick Access Tool Bar.
More commands... option located in the drop-down menu provided on the right corner of the
Quick Access Toolbar, displays Customize dialog box which includes the following tabs:
• Quick Access
• Hide options
• Shortcut keys
• Ribbon
Each command displays a certain activity area. The Commands section in each group carries out a
command or displays a menu of commands. Using this hierarchy, similar commands are grouped
together making the Customize access toolbar very task oriented. Because in all the modules,
some commands are available directly on each tab and it is not necessary to search for those
options in submenus.
Contextual Menu
New
New ( ) option enables the user to create a new element.
Open
Open ( ) option allows the user to open the selected element.
435
Open Parts
Open parts option allows the user to open All parts of the job, open parts with the Same
machine, open parts of a Same subjob and open Selected parts.
Figure 390: Open parts options
Block
Block ( ) option allows the user to block the selected element.
Delete
Delete ( ) option allows the user to delete the selected elements. When selected, a warning
message asking whether the user wants to delete the selected element will be displayed:
Figure 391: Warning message (Delete)
436
Import
Import ( ) option allows the user to Import pending parts of manufacturing orders list, Import
parts from database and Import DXF files.
If the user wants to import pending parts of manufacturing orders list, it will be necessary to
select Pending parts of manufacturing orders list option. The following window will be displayed:
Figure 392: Manufacturing products window
If the user wants to import parts from database, it will be necessary to select Import parts from
database option so as to display the following window:
Figure 393: Import parts window
If the user wants to import DXF files, it will be necessary to select Import DXF files option. The
following window will be displayed:
437
Figure 394: Open window
Quantity
Quantity ( ) option allows the user to change the quantity of the selected element. When
selecting this option, the following window will be displayed:
Figure 395: Number of parts window
Priority
Priority ( ) option allows changing the priority of the selected element. When selecting this
option, the following window will be displayed:
438
Figure 396: Priority window
Information
Information ( ) option displays the properties of the selected element. When selecting this
option, Part parameters window will be displayed, in which the user will be able to visualize the
following data:
Figure 397: Part parameters window
Part Rotations
By clicking Part Rotations, the user will be able to choose between following options: 0º, 90º,
180º, 270º and Others. It will also be possible to make some configurations. In order to do so, the
user will need to click on Configure button so as to display the following window:
439
Figure 398: Part rotation window
Properties
When clicking Properties option the user will be able to choose between the following options:
• Assign boxes to parts: From this option the user can assign the boxes from where the
parts will be evacuated. When selected, the following window will be displayed:
Figure 399: Boxes dialog box
There are two different sections: Normal and Symmetrics. On both, the user can configure
different boxes depending on the angle they are placed on the sheet.
440
The arrow buttons allow making this configuration faster if the box is the same. For example,
filling the 0 degrees’ normal position with the box number 2 and clicking on the down button will
make the system to fill all the rotation fields with the same number.
Also, the user can choose to apply the changes just in the current sheet or for every sheet of the
job. In addition, it is possible to activate the default box when selecting Assign boxes option.
• Valid part for nest in common cut: This option is used to define whether this part can
have a common cut or not despite of the nesting for common cut turned on. With this
option turned on the common cut between the parts are made. If this is turned off and
even though the nesting for common cut is turned on there will be no common cut for
this part. But the common cut will be there for other parts.
• Automatic round angles: It indicates whether to include the round angles automatically
• Machine with cut fast options: This option allows doing the automatic flying cut
machining. It is useful in two contexts:
▪ When the flying cut is not activated automatically a part that can be machined in this
way.
▪ When the flying cut is activated automatically and the user does not want to activate it
in a part machined this way.
If the part contains automatic flying cut machining, the option will appear selected and the part
will be machined again but without flying cut.
If the part does not contain flying cut machining, the option will appear unmarked. If it is
selected, the part will be machined with flying cut according to the configuration set.
If the part has been previously machined in the drawing module, the option will appear disabled
because the system prioritizes manual machining.
If the part contains manual flying cut machining, the option will appear selected.
If this option is selected for parts already nested on a sheet, the new machining will not be
applied on them. It will only be applied on the new sheets. If the user wants to apply the new
machining on already nested parts, it will be necessary to regenerate the nesting.
441
Group
When clicking here, Block on select option is displayed. This option allows the user to block the
selected elements.
Order
It allows the user ordering by name, by size, by quantity and by priority.
View
When clicking here, Only pending parts option will be displayed.
Size
When clicking Size, Bitmaps size dialog box is displayed:
Figure 400: Bitmaps size dialog box
Cancel
Cancel ( ) option closes the contextual menu.
Subjobs
Subjobs tab includes the following options:
Open
The manufacturing order can be divided into different jobs which include all the parts made with
the same material and thickness for one machine.
From this option of the menu, the system will show all the jobs of the current manufacturing
order into a list allowing the user to select one for being opened and edited. When selecting
Open ( ) option, the system will display Subjob selection dialog box.
When clicking New button, the user can create a new subjob without any part on an order. In
order to open a new subjob, the user has to define a machine, material and thickness. The parts
can be imported directly on the sheet.
442
Previous
This option allows going through the subjobs following a creation order. Whenever Previous (
) option is selected, the system will open the subjob previously created. If the option is
disabled in the menu, this means that the current manufacturing order is only made of one
subjob.
Next
Next ( ) option allows going through the subjobs following a creation order. Whenever this
option is selected, the system will open the next subjob in the list that was previously created. If
the option is disabled in the menu, this means that the current manufacturing order is only made
of one subjob.
Save
Save ( ) option allows saving all the jobs of the current manufacturing order. The sheet that
is going to be saved will appear in the status toolbar. With this protected option the user is
allowed to automatically generate a text file with many machining and nesting information. This
application uses the file FMecData.tem as template, where the user can define the information
and the format of the output.
In order to provide a WOS oriented configuration, the default image format is PNG and is
automatically generated in color. Images can be saved with or without filling, sheet geometry,
machining initialization or machining up to the current instruction.
It is also possible to generate the image size in proportion with the minimum rectangle of the
geometry to be drawn so that bland spaces are avoided. In addition, an XML document will be
generated in order to store the position of the clamps and the color of each nesting part when
saving. The background in which the images are stored can also be defined with or without
background and with sheet simulation background.
Save All
Save all ( ) option allows saving all the parts, taking into account all the specifications
previously made.
443
Save As
Save as ( ) option allows saving a part or saving the changes made to an existing part. This is
similar to the Save application except for the fact that this can be used to create a new part
similar to an existing one.
When selecting this option, the system will display Part saving dialog box. The user will be able to
make the required changes and assign a new name to the part.
It is possible to generate multiple image files per part and sheet. For that purpose, it is necessary
to save the image in the corresponding database table and to indicate the file type. BMP, PNG,
WMF, JPEG and GIF formats are allowed. When parts are created from importers their images
can only be 70x60 or 700x600.
Visualization type can be configured in black and white color, as well as showing the filling and
the machining.
Drawing
Drawing ( ) option will open the Drawing module (previously detailed) without closing
Nesting and Machining module. If the system detects changes in the machining when selecting
this option, it will prompt for saving them.
If the user does any modification in the drawing module, the system will ask to save them before
going back to the Nesting and Machining module.
Import Stored Nesting
By means of Import Stored Nesting ( ) option the user can load a previously saved nesting in
the active order. When selected the system will display Import stored nesting dialog box as shown
below:
444
Figure 401: Import stored nesting dialog box
Perform the following steps in order to import a stored nesting:
1. Select the nesting type (Stored nesting or Nesting from database).

2. Select the nesting from the table and introduce the number of sheets to import in the quantity
column. By selecting the Load nesting data checkbox, the drawing would be shown indicating
whether the nesting is done or not. The references of the parts included in the nesting, as well
as, the quantity of nested parts appear in the Parts list table. When selecting a row in this table,
the system will show the image of the selected part.
3. If the user wants the system to display only the nested parts of the selected job to be displayed,
then it will be necessary to select Only nestings with parts of the job checkbox. A list of stored
nestings or nestings from the database will be displayed containing only the parts available in
the job. Selecting this option, the user is able to select At least one or All the nesting parts
related to a particular job where it is possible to edit the quantities of each nesting parts from
the displayed list.
445
4. Select Modify the zero point of the sheet in order to modify the initial point of the nesting.
5. The following conflict situations could arise:
• Not enough parts in job: The part or parts involved in nesting appear highlighting the
parts in the table. Click OK button to import the nesting part and even the necessary
parts of a job can be imported by selecting the Add parts option. This adds to the job the
necessary parts before importing.
• Not enough sheets in database: In this the nesting part is highlighted in the nesting table.
Click OK button to import the nesting part and even the necessary parts of a job can be
imported by selecting following options: Add sheets or Create sheets. If the first option is
selected, the system will add to the database the required quantity of sheets before
importing. If the Create new sheets option is selected, the system shows, before
importing the nesting, a sheet creation window with the sheet dimensions.
• Machined: If the selected nesting is machined and the Load nesting data option is
activated, the system displays a span indicating this situation and two new options:
Delete existing machining and Regenerate. By selecting any of them the system performs
the corresponding operation on the selected nesting before importing it to the order.
The Regenerate option includes Delete the machining.
6. It is possible to make filters on the Nesting list by using the Criteria option. When selecting the
Navigation button provided in Criteria field the system will display Import stored nesting
[Criteria] dialog box as shown below:
446
Figure 402: Import stored nesting [Criteria]
It is possible to select the required machine, material, thickness, reference, user data, length and
width of the parts. The import stored nesting parts can be viewed by selecting the Creation date
and Last modification date from the From date and To date calendar checkbox. After entering the
required criteria’s, click OK button. Only those parts will be displayed that meet the specified
criteria.
The parts lists allow indicating that the user wants to view the nestings which contain the parts
of the list in the right and with the specified quantity. The list on the left side initially shows all the
parts of the job, and, by default, it shows all the nestings that contain any of these parts and any
that is not in the list.
447
Store Nesting
Store Nesting ( ) option allows the user to store the nesting. When selected, the following
window will be displayed:
Figure 403: Reference
Export Nestings to File
Export nestings to file ( ) option allows exporting the parts of the nesting to a file and the
selected files that can be exported from a database to the local directory. This option provides
information about machines, materials, sheets, products and designs to carry out the
exportation. When selected, the system will display Export nestings dialog box as shown below:
Figure 404: Export nestings dialog box
By means of this option, the user will be able to configure the following:
• Configuration files and machine tools: This option allows exporting files and machine
tools from the database to a specified .bck (backup) file to a local directory. If selected,
the system will carry out this option automatically.
• The current sheet: The user will be able to visualize and export the job of the current
sheet to a file.
448
• Every sheet of the subjob: Select this option in order to export all the sheets of the
subjob to the file,
• Every sheet of the job: Select this option in order to export all the sheets of the current
job to a file.
• Display drawing: By means of this option the user will be able to visualize the sheet of the
job, as well as every sheet of the database. Therefore, when selecting the nesting to be
exported, the user will be able to select nestings from other jobs apart from the active
job.
• Criteria: This option will be enabled once Every sheet of the job option is activated. If
selected, the user will be able to visualize all the parts that belong to the nesting and to
modify details like material, machine, thickness, reference, date, length, jobs and parts.
Import
Import Pending Parts of Manufacturing Orders List
Thanks to Import pending parts of manufacturing orders list ( ) option, the user can
import parts pending in manufacturing orders list. When selected, the system will display
Manufacturing products dialog box as shown below:
Figure 405: Manufacturing products dialog box
A list of parts will be displayed together with their Reference, Machine, Material, Thickness,
Delivery date, Quantity, Dimensions, Order, Customer and User data.
By clicking Criteria Navigation button, the user can create new parts by assigning the required
machine, material, thickness, reference, user data, length and width.
Select the required part from the list and click OK button in order to import it.
449
Import Parts from Database
Import parts from database ( ) option enables the user to import parts from the existing list
or Part list to the current manufacturing order section. When this option is selected the system
will display Import parts dialog box as shown below:
Figure 406: Import parts dialog box
This dialog box displays the list of parts available in the database and each part provides the
Reference, Quantity, Delivery date, Order and Manufacturing order.
By clicking Criteria Navigation button, the user can create new parts by assigning the required
machine, material, thickness, reference, user data, length and width among other aspects.
Select the required part from the list and click OK button in order to import it.
DXF Files
DXF files ( ) allows importing geometries of a DXF file. If selected, the system will display
Open dialog box, which lists all the .dxf files available. This window provides a drawing simulation
located on the right side. In addition, Configure button directs the user to Import configuration
window, where all the parameters related to importations can be configured.
Select the required .dxf file and click OK button so that the system imports it to the current job.
450
Help
In this section, the user will find useful information in Documents and Online Resources. For
further information, please refer to 3.6. Help section.
Print
Print
This option allows printing all the details of the required part.
The system allows calculating sums with respect to the numerical properties of cutting parts
from a sheet. These fields offer the possibility to calculate the total number of cutting parts from
a sheet or the total weight of these parts. The user can check the whole list of existing fields and
their respective identifiers as well as a small description of them in the technical help.
The image of the parts can be displayed either in color or in black and white, depending on
“V080” parameter of LantekPr.cfg configuration file.
451
Figure 407: Print
Print Preview
By means of this option the system will generate the Workshop Sheet containing the following
information:
• Sheet reference
• Order name, date and time
• CNC file name
• Sheet dimensions
• Nesting representation
• Machine, material, weight, height, sheet usage percentage, remnant
452
• Total time
• Supplier, transporter
• Part references and information
Figure 408: Print preview
The information here displayed depends on the configuration made for each machine in Work
centers / Utilities / Configure / Machines / General Properties / Boxes.
453
When selecting Configuration options, the system will show the following options:
Figure 409: Configuration options (Nesting and Machining)
System
4.6.14.1.1 Common Cutting Parameters

There are different options to set up if the user wants to use common cut.
• Common cut: This section configures how the common cut is going to be done:
▪ Between two parts: When this option is selected, a new button will appear for
configuring the lead in/out values for the common cut.
▪ Using button the user can configure the lead outs of the auxiliary contours in
common cut.
▪ Between several parts: The common cut will be done between more than two parts, if
possible.
• Order by lead-in/lead-out position: When making common cuts among various parts, it is
possible to order these cuts so that the last part cut finishes in the same area where the
automatic placement of part lead-ins/lead-outs are configured. If this parameter is
enabled, it arranges the part cutting order with the common cut in order to optimize the
number of startups so that the part cut always finishes in the same side or corner of the
part. This option is mainly used to get an optimum position for evacuation when part
cutting is finished.
454
• Length of pre-cutting elements: If the system is cutting parts together sometimes it

happens that already cut parts should move or incline a little, which is dangerous for the
head because of collision. To avoid this kind of situations, the system allows introducing a
security value that will be used so that there are no collisions.
• It is allowed to reverse contours: If enabled, the system will reverse the contour sense of
the cut if it suits the process.
• Using button user can configure the lead in/outs of the auxiliary contours in common
cut. When selected the system will display Lead-in/Lead-out values dialog box as shown
below:
the system will leave without cutting when using the common cut feature. This prevents
situations like the figure, where the machining starts from the smaller parts, and once
they are cut, the machine cuts the small segment between the two parts. With a small
factor value, the system will leave it without cut.
• Execution mode: This option allows to choose the common-cut order that the machine
will follow.
• Nesting for common cut: All the next options change the nesting process for allowing
automatic common place of the parts on the sheet. For working automatically properly,
455
the user should configure the same settings on nesting for common cut and on common
cut, and then, use automatic nesting and machining. The other way is to place the parts
manually on the sheet and, if the common cut is enabled, the user can make the
automatic machining allowing the system to try to apply the common cut to the manual
nesting.
▪ Between two parts: The nesting will be optimized for placing parts together two by
two.
▪ Between several parts: The system will try to use the common cut at most possible
parts.
• Minimum length: The value given here is the minimum length that the contours must
have to apply the common cut.
• Only between same length elements: If enabled, the common cut will only be applied if
the common contours have the same length.
• Only place on nesting direction: If enabled, the nesting will be done optimizing the
common cut instead of lower sheet usage.
• Always respect the distance between parts: If enabled, this option makes the system test
the minimum separation between parts among certain elements when performing the
common cut. This option also tests whether the other elements not involved in the
common cut respect the minimum separation between parts. In some cases, it is more
restrictive than the user might expect, since two elements not respecting this minimum
distance, prevent parts entering the common cut, when the user had no problem in
bringing these elements closer than that separation between parts.
• System compensation: The compensation can be treated by the program or by the

numeric control. When using common cut, it is possible to determine if the compensation
is not going to be used, if it is going to be used only in the main contour of the common
cut parts, or in all the contours. When using any of the system compensation modes, be
sure that the machining is configured to use system compensation: Utilities / Configure /
Machines / Automatic Machining / Cut - System compensation.
▪ Main contours: The compensation will be applied to the common cut main contours.
▪ All the contours: All the contours will use the system compensation.
456
• Islands: Because of the use of common cut, some holes between parts may appear. The
system provides two different treatments for them.
▪ No treatment: Do not apply any treatment.
▪ Cut the parts inside the islands first: If the island is big enough, it may contain another
part nested inside, with this enabled, the system will cut first these parts before cutting
the island.
▪ Cut all the islands first: The machining will start always for cutting all the islands, and
then the part's contours.
▪ Cut islands when cutting the parts: If this option is enabled islands can be cut when
parts are cut. Cutting an island will not be finished until all the parts within this island
are cut. The island will be cut as the parts generated by the islet are cut.
4.6.14.1.2 Automatic Nesting

The configuration here made will be applied when the nesting process is carried out
automatically.
GENERAL
• Level of optimization: In this field the user can select any of the predefined levels of
optimization from the drop-down list provided. The system provides five predefined
levels, each one with their own set of parameters. The execution time and result of these
predefined levels is balanced, that is, the longer the execution time, the better result.
Every one of the predefined levels corresponds to a predefined Level of optimization
configuration. The user can modify the configuration of any of the existing predefined
levels and save it as a user defined level of optimization. The configuration of the existing
predefined levels will not be modified.
In order to visualize the parameters of any of the predefined levels or to modify them and save
them as user customized level of optimization, it will be necessary to click on the arrow button
provided next to the drop-down list ( ). If this button is selected, the system will display Level
of optimization window. In this window the user can configure all parameters related to the level
of optimization. Between the fields provided in this window, the user will only find enabled the
ones that correspond to the user optimization and not system optimization.
457
Figure 411: Level of optimization window
▪ Use modules: If the user enables this parameter, the system will generate modules of
two parts in Nesting module whenever it is possible. However, the parts in question
must fit together very well so that the system considers them as a module. The system
will only use those ones that provide a good performance.
▪ Test starting from a different corner for each part: If the user enables this parameter,
the system will use a specific algorithm that places the parts automatically in the
different corners of the sheet. If this parameter is disabled, this is how these parts
would be placed in the sheet.
If this parameter is enabled, it will place each part in a different corner of the sheet, achieving an
exceptional efficiency.
458
▪ Rotate parts to maximize holes between them: As the name indicates, this parameter
will rotate in order to try creating bigger holes between them. This way, if there is any
part that may fit in the gap created, the user will be able to place more parts and
therefore will get a better efficiency.
If this parameter is disabled, parts are not being rotated and therefore the space that may be
formed inside is clearly not being exploited fully.
If this parameter is enabled, the system will rotate the parts, maximizing the hole between them.
This way it is possible to introduce another part inside and increase the efficiency of the nesting.
▪ Define the number of irregular methods to apply: The bigger number specified by the
user, the more methods the system will test in order to place the parts and look for the
best result. The system will try several algorithms looking for the best sheet advantage
and will use the ones on which the space profit is best. The number of methods applied
will depend on the number of irregular methods to apply defined by user, which will
consequently result in a longer execution time. Setting a higher value ensures a better
result. There are eighteen irregular methods. The user must try with different values
459
and check the efficiency percentage in order to select the most suitable one. This option
is useful for those cases in which there are different parts with irregular geometries and
small quantities.
▪ Use regularity method: This parameter adds regular methods to the previous irregular
ones. Both parameters can be enabled at the same time if required. As in the previous
case, the bigger the level selected, the more possibilities to get a better nesting.
However, it adds more testing time to the nesting. This method basically looks for part
modules towards a better sheet efficiency. This parameter is useful for those cases in
which there is a big quantity of the same part (at least to fill half the sheet).
o Level 1: The system will create column modules and apply them with basic
criteria.
o Level 2: The system will modify the column modules created initially, looking for a
better sheet advantage.
o Level 3: The system will create different column sizes. This level will suppose
more testing; therefore, the automatic nesting will take more execution time.
o No regularity: Without any regularity method, the nesting of the following part
would be as shown below:
Level 1: Once Regularity method level 1 is activated, the difference would be remarkable.
460
▪ Try to nest in horizontal and vertical: Sheets can be nested horizontally (nesting the
sheets by rows) or vertically) nesting the sheet by columns). If this parameter is
activated, the system will test both horizontally and vertically and will use the one on
which the best efficiency is reached.
▪ Force a specific precision: If this parameter is enabled, the system will force the
precision set in this field by the user. Whenever activated, the system will display a
drop-down list with the following options:
o Very low (fastest)
o Low
o Normal
o High
o Very high (slowest)
o Value: In this case, the user will be provided with a precision bar in order to set
the required value:
Figure 412: Precision bar
▪ Force a specific rotation angle: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system will
display the following fields:
461
▪ Rotation angle for parts: Select between the provided options in the drop-down list (15,
30, 45, 90 and 180).
▪ Search special rotation angles for the parts: If enabled, the system will execute various
tests and search for the most appropriate rotation angle for the parts, which will result
in a better efficiency.
▪ Force a specific type of modules: If this parameter is enabled, the arrow ( ) button
located on the right side will also become enabled. Whenever the user selects this
button, the system will display Modules window, where the user can select between the
provided options, which are divided into Simple modules, Complex modules and Special
modules.
Once the user has defined the required parameters in Level of optimization window, it is possible
to save them for a later use by means of Save as… button located at the bottom of the window.
The system will display New reference window where the user will have to introduce the required
name for the level of optimization that has been defined and click OK button in order to save it.
• Maximum time to calculate the best efficiency: Here the user must introduce the
maximum time that will be taken to test the methods (that have been previously set).
Remember that the time must be introduced in seconds. During the automatic nesting
execution, once the time here specified is reached, the system will stop testing methods
and will choose the best one (most efficient) found up to that moment.
• Precision: This field allows the user setting the required exactitude or preciseness of the
automatic nesting. The user will be provided with a drop-down list with the following five
options:
▪ Very low (fastest): In the case of all those elements that are not neither horizontal nor
vertical, the less precision applied, the system will apply more distance between parts.
▪ Low
▪ Normal
▪ High
▪ Very high (slowest): With more precision, the distance between parts will be closer to
the minimum distance between parts.
462
The higher the precision level selected, the longer it will take the system to execute the
automatic nesting.
• Allow part rotations: Depending on the shape of the part it may be very useful to rotate
it in order to get a better nesting. For example, in case of circles, it would not make any
sense since their output is the same whichever the angle the user chooses.
▪ Rotations: Here the user can select the rotation angle required. The drop-down list
provides the following options: 15, 30, 45, 90 and 180 degrees. For example, given the
case 15 degrees is selected, the system will test placing the part on every 15 degrees’
position, which will result in 24 tries.
▪ Search special rotation angles for the parts: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the
system will look for special angles that may be useful for the parts as well as result in a
better sheet efficiency. This parameter will test more rotation angles than in the
previous case, and therefore will result in a longer execution time.
• Separation of parts: Here the user must introduce the required value to use as separation
between parts. This separation value is intended to safeguard the quality of parts.
Usually, this value is defined by the restrictions of the machine that is being used.
• Allow different separation in Y: This parameter is aimed at those cases in which the user
works with big thicknesses. It allows setting a different separation in Y in order to avoid
putting a disadvantage (penalizing) both dimensions due to the auxiliary elements (such
as lead-in/lead-outs, loops and micro-joints).
If this parameter is disabled, the separation between parts either in X or in Y is exactly the same.
The separation between parts will correspond with the value introduced in the previous field.
Whenever the user enables this parameter and introduces a different value for the separation in
Y axis, after performing the automatic nesting the difference will be very obvious (as shown in
the image below).
463
• Allow mirroring: If this parameter is enabled, the system will place the parts in the
nesting with symmetries. However, this parameter is usually restricted by the material
that is being used since the quality is not always the same in both sides of the sheet.
• Fit every part to sheet borders: If this parameter is enabled, as the name indicates, parts
will be fitted to sheet borders. If disabled, the system will always maintain half of the
separation set between parts (based on the value given in Separation of parts field).
However, this condition may be restricted by the machine that is being used.
If this parameter is enabled, the part will adjust either to the sheet margin (in case there is any) or
to the sheet border. If it is disabled, the system will always leave half of the separation between
parts (half of the value given in Separation of parts field).
• Create equal sheets: Here the user will be able to select the required option between the
three options provided in the drop-down list: No, Yes and Ask. Given the case either Yes
or Ask option is selected, the system will check whether it is possible to generate
repetitions of the current nesting (which is already very efficient) if the existing quantity
of parts and sheets so permits.
• Corner: Here the user will be able to select the required corner from which the system
will start placing the parts. The nesting process will start from the selected corner and
continue in the opposite direction.
464
ADVANCED
• Calculate modules for parts: Whenever the user activates this parameter, the system will
calculate modules of two parts always looking for the best efficiency. Once this
parameter has been enabled, the arrow button ( ) located on the right side will also
become enabled. Whenever this button is selected the system will display Modules
window. Modules window displays the existing types of modules, which are divided into
three different groups: Simple modules, Complex modules and Special modules:
Figure 413: Modules window
• Simple modules:
▪ Basic: It is formed by the same part.
▪ Advanced: It is formed by a basic module and other parts. Once the basic module has
been calculated, the system will fill in the holes left in the nesting with other parts.
• Complex modules:
▪ Multi-part: It is formed by several parts, which also tries fitting the parts together.
▪ Staggered: It consists in a staggered combination of the parts.
• Special modules:
465
▪ Multihead: This type of module is specific for machinery with multihead and will only be
displayed whenever the machine that is being configured has them.
• Nesting priority direction: Sheets can be nested horizontally (nesting the sheet by rows)
or vertically (nesting the sheets by columns). Depending on the measures of the sheet it
might be more efficient to nest in one direction or the other. This parameter provides a
drop-down list and allows the user selecting between Horizontal and Vertical.
▪ Horizontal: As shown in the nesting below, parts will be placed horizontally.
▪ Vertical: In this case, parts will be placed vertically.
• Rectangular mode is allowed: By means of this parameter, the system allows treating
those parts that are almost rectangular in order to improve the speed of nesting
calculations. Given the case this parameter is enabled; it would be the very first algorithm
to execute whenever performing an automatic nesting.
Once this parameter has been enabled, the arrow button ( ) located on the right side will also
become enabled. Whenever this button is selected, the system will display Rectangular nesting
setup window:
466
Figure 414: Rectangular nesting setup window
• Type: It provides a drop-down list where the user can select the type of rectangular
nesting between the following options:
▪ Normal: The system will treat parts as rectangles as will search for the best combination
of those rectangles (the ones that meet the Squareness percentage) in the sheet.
▪ Optimize for linear cut of parts: In order to optimize linear part cutting, the user must
get the largest number of parts of the same size (both length and width) nested in
columns. This parameter aims to look for part columns with the same width and is very
useful for machines with common cut. Once this option has been selected, the arrow
( ) button located on the right side will be enabled. If the user selects this button, the
system will display Optimize for linear cut of parts window, where it will be possible to
set the following parameters: Minimum height of the column relative to the sheet and
the Separation of parts in millimeters.
▪ Optimize for chain cut: In order to optimize chain cutting, nesting will be done in
columns by parts of the same length. The system will apply special bridges between the
parts so that the parts remain in the sheet until the last vertical cut is executed. Once
this option has been selected, the arrow ( ) button located on the right side will be
enabled. If the user selects this button, the system will display Optimize for chain cut
window, where the user will have to configure the following parameters:
▪ Minimum height of the column relative to the sheet: Here the user must introduce the
minimum height of the column by introducing a percentage. This percentage will be
applied to the sheet measures in order to calculate the value in question.
467
▪ Separation of parts: The separation of parts can be set either by the Default value, the
Cutter diameter (multiplied by a number) or a fixed Value. Remember that this
separation must be set in millimeters.
▪ Part time: The user will be provided with the following four options:
▪ Bridges automatically: If this parameter is enabled, the user can select between the
following two options:
▪ Bridge width parameter: This parameter will also be enabled. Here the user will be able
to select between The semi-separation of part, Cutter radius (multiplied by a number)
and a fixed Value. Remember that this separation must be set in millimeters.
▪ Squareness percentage: The user can introduce the required Squareness percentage
that will be used in the system to consider parts as rectangular. If a part does not reach
the percentage set, it will not be considered as rectangular.
▪ Optimize remnant of the last sheet: Thanks to his parameter, parts can be placed using
the minimum X in order to generate the best remnant possible. Usually, when there is a
big job which includes more than one sheet, this optimization is applied to the last
sheet of the job.
▪ Calculation level: This field provides a drop-down list where the user can select between
0, 1, 2 and 3.
• Minimum usable area to insert parts in apertures: Whenever the area of a hole is big
enough, if possible, the system places parts inside them. In this field, the user can
468
introduce the minimum area required in order to consider a hole as valid for placing parts
inside.
• Nesting for kits: This parameter allows prioritizing those parts that compose kits during
the automatic nesting execution. Once this parameter has been enabled, the arrow ( )
button located on the right side will also become enabled. Whenever this button is
selected, the system will display Nesting for kits window:
Figure 415: Nesting for kits window
▪ Mix different kits in same sheet: If this parameter is disabled, the system will wait until
the whole kit has been nested in order to start nesting the following kit. On the other
hand, the system will incorporate parts which belong to different kits in the same
sheet.
▪ Use nestings of original kits as modules: Thanks to this parameter if a kit has already
nestings which are very efficient, given the case the measure of the existing sheets and
the number of parts allows it, the previous nestings will be used as modules.
• Part order in nesting: This parameter set how parts will be placed in the nesting. It
provides a drop-down list where the user will be able to select between the following
options:
▪ By area: From the biggest area to the smallest area.
▪ By rectangular area: Based on external area.
▪ By perimeter: From the biggest perimeter to the smallest perimeter.
▪ By length: From the longest to the shortest.
• Group parts with similar order value: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system
will prioritize those methods that introduce the highest number of big parts instead of
the ones that place small parts, regardless of their efficiency.
469
UNITARY
• Sheet margins: Here the user can introduce the required margins for the sheets. These
margins will ensure that the machine does not work outside the sheet as well as leaving
enough material so as to support the parts. The value must be introduced in millimeters.
• Ignore open contours: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system will not take into
account an open contour (such as, for example, lead-ins) in order to estimate the sheet
required.
• Create the sheet in database: If enabled, whenever creating a new sheet for the unitary
nesting, the system will introduce the sheet in question in the database and therefore, it
will be displayed in the sheets list.
• Prompt for this data: If this parameter is enabled, the system will prompt a window
asking for this data whenever automatic nesting option is selected and prior to executing
it so that the user can select the required parameters in each case.
4.6.14.1.3 Automatic Machining

Refer to 1.24 Automatic Machining section located in this manual.
Draw and Nest
4.6.14.2.1 Auxiliar
Refer to 3.5.16.1.1. Auxiliar section.
4.6.14.2.2 Do All
Refer to 3.5.16.1.2. Do All section.
4.6.14.2.3 Print
Refer to 3.5.16.1.3. Print section.
4.6.14.2.4 Colors
Refer to 3.5.16.1.4. Colors section.
470
4.6.14.2.5 Display
Refer to 3.5.16.1.5. Display section.
Interface
Interface option enables the user to create a new toolbar and change the existing toolbar
1. Click Interface button and the system will display Customize dialog box as shown below:
Figure 416: Customize Quick access
• Quick access
• Hide options
• Shortcut Keys
• Ribbon
471
toolbar.
) button.
• In Hide options tab the user will be able to select between Basic, Advanced and
Customized Configurations. On the other hand, in Hide options section, the options
available are Current machine, Machines of same type and All machines.
Figure 417: Customize Hide options
472
Select an application and then introduce the key from the keyboard which the user wants to
assign as New Shortcut key for the previously selected application. Click Assign button and the
selected key will be assigned as shortcut key as well as visualized in Existing keys field. The user
can also select an existing shortcut key from the Existing keys field and click Delete button in
order to remove it.
• In Ribbon tab the user can edit the view and the items provided in the Ribbon.
473
groups.
group.
It is not possible to add two separators together, neither at the beginning nor at the end of
the group.
file.
display a Warning window asking “Do you want to delete all ribbon customizations for
474
Exit
Exit ( ) option allows abandoning the nesting and returning to the Main module. If the
system detects changes in the job, it will prompt for saving them.
Home
Sheets
New
If New ( ) option is selected, the system will display Sheet selection dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 420: Sheet selection dialog box
This window displays the list of sheets applicable to the active job according to some defined
viewing criteria. Between the information displayed the user will find the length, width, quantity,
reference and required user data of the sheet, and will be able to know whether the sheet is a
remnant or it is blocked. In order to select a new sheet, double click on it or select it, click OK
button, and the system will open it.
475
OK button will be disabled if the number of the selected sheet is “0”.
• Add: With this button, the user can add quantities of a previously defined sheet. Just
select the sheet from the list, click the button and input the number of sheets to add.
• Remove: It removes a number of a previously defined sheet. For making this, select the
sheet from the list, click this button and input the number of sheets to subtract to the
current quantity. If the resulting quantity is 0, the system will delete the sheet from the
database.
• Blocking: This option allows blocking and unblocking all the sheets of the corresponding
subjob.
If this option is selected, the system will display a window asking if the user wants to block or
unblock the sheets from the list (all sheets will be blocked or unblocked). This functionality is
similar to the one existing in the sheets management window of the Main Module.
It is also possible to carry out this action using a shortcut: pressing Control button while clicking
on the checkbox of a sheet to change its block status. This change will be applied on the rest of
the sheets.
• Create: This option creates a new sheet using the current job´s material and thickness.
When selected, the system will display Create and modify sheets dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 421: Create and modify sheets dialog box
476
▪ Reference: This is the reference for the sheet. The system will show the name given here
always in the sheets list.
▪ Length and width: The system needs the length and width.
▪ Quantity: Add the quantity of sheets to include into the database.
▪ Priority/Block: The system provides two parameters to configure how each sheet will be
used in the automatic process (like in Do All). The user can assign a priority to the sheet.
Those whose priority value is higher will be used the first when doing the Do all process
automatically. If the sheet has been blocked, it will not be used in automatic processes
until is unblocked again. The previous data must be filled for creating the sheet.
▪ User data (1-3): Data of the sheet. It is possible to navigate to the existing Data list and
select the required element or enter a new element. The new element will be added in
the Data list for future use. Configure this field in Expert – Jobs (CAM) / Start menu /
Configuration / Identifiers tab.
The Current Sheet
4.7.1.2.1 The Current Sheet
By means of The current sheet ( ) option, all the active jobs, subjobs and order of the jobs of
the current sheet can be removed.
4.7.1.2.2 Every Sheet of the Subjob
By means of Every sheet of the subjob ( ) option, the user can delete every sheet of the
subjob that has been created.
4.7.1.2.3 Every Sheet of the Job
By means of Every sheet of the job ( ) option, the user can delete every sheet of the job that
has been created.
Assign Image
Whenever Assign image ( ) option is selected, the system will provide the following two
options:
477
4.7.1.3.1 Assign Image
By means of Assign image ( ) option, the user will be able to assign an image to the sheet
background and to know exactly how is the surface where the parts will be nested. This way, the
user will be able to select the best areas, avoiding those that might be damaged.
Whenever this option is executed the system will ask the user to select the file of the image
required to be loaded. Once selected, the system will automatically adjust the size of the image
to the sheet dimensions. The user can re-execute this option as many times required changing
the dimensions by means of the different options provided in the panel, which allow scaling the
image.
In addition, it is possible to modify the reference point required to be used to adjust the image to
the sheet. The user can select between the four corners of the sheet or use the same point
defined as FROM point.
4.7.1.3.2 Remove Image
By means of Remove image ( ) option, the user will be able to erase the image assigned to a
sheet.
Previous
With Previous ( ) option it is possible to go back to the previous sheet or remnant used in the
active job.
478
Next
With Next ( ) option it is possible to advance to the next sheet or remnant used in the active
job.
Change Data
Change data ( ) option allows modifying the user data, margin and dimensions of the current
sheet, of all the sheets of the subjob or of all the sheets of the job. In order to do it, perform the
following steps:
1. Select Change data option and the system will display the following options:
Figure 422: Change data options
2. Select the required option to specify which sheets to change so that the system displays Change
data dialog box as shown below:
Figure 423: Change data dialog box
3. Introduce the required Length, Width and Remnant margin as well as User data and Description
if required.
4. Click OK button in order to save the modifications and Cancel button in order to discard them.
Change Quantity
Change Quantity ( ) option displays Number of sheets dialog box as shown below:
479
Figure 424: Number of sheets dialog box
This dialog box provides the current number of sheets and the maximum amount that can be
assigned, depending on the number of sheets left to place and the number of sheets available in
stock. The user will specify the number of equal sheets, considering the specified maximum limit.
If equal sheets can be done, the system will generate a CNC but will increase the times this CNC
must be done in the work sheet.
Click OK to save the changes and update the rest of the quantities.
Go to
Go to ( ) option allows going through the different sheet and remnants used in the active job.
It displays Sheet selection dialog box providing a list with all the sheets used as shown below:
• Display drawing: If enabled, the system will show the nesting of the selected sheet.
480
• New: By means of this option the user can insert a new sheet in the current job.
Nesting
Nesting menu includes the following options:
Do All
By means of Do all ( ) option, once a sheet has been selected and depending on the
configuration previously set on Automatic Nesting configuration, automatically performs all the
jobs of the manufacturing order. It will nest and machine all the parts of every job if the number
of sheets allows it.
• Do all on selected sheets ( ): This option allows the user selecting a set of sheets on
which to perform the do all option. Whenever this option is executed, the system will
display a window with all the available sheets in the Database.
• Do all filling sheets ( ): This option will simply fill in those sheets that have already
been used in the job, without creating new sheets (even if there is available quantity in
the database and there are unnested parts left). This option will not remake the existing
nests, it will try to fill the gaps that may have remained.
Active Subjob
Active subjob ( ) option allows performing the nesting and machining of the active subjob. If
any sheet was previously machined, the system will allow keeping the previous machining or
recording the previous machining.
• Active subjob on selected sheets ( ): This option allows the user selecting a set of
sheets on which to nest all the parts of the active subjob. Whenever this option is
executed, the system will display a window with all the available sheets in the Database.
• Active subjob filling sheets ( ): This option will simply fill in those sheets that have
already been used in the job, without creating new sheets (even if there is available
quantity in the database and there are unnested parts left). This option will not remake
the existing nests, it will try to fill the gaps that may have remained.
481
One Sheet
4.7.2.3.1 One Sheet
By means of One sheet ( ) option, once a sheet has been selected and depending on the
configuration set on the Automatic nesting section of the machine configuration, the system will
insert into the sheet as many parts as possible.
4.7.2.3.2 Redo One Sheet
By means of Redo one sheet ( ) option, it is possible to redo a nesting that was already
carried out in a sheet. In order to enable this option, it is necessary to have at least one part in the
sheet.
One Window
Thanks to One window ( ) option the user can perform a nesting inside a window. The system
defines a window from its upper-left and lower-right corners, and the system will make the
nesting of the parts inside. When selecting this option, the system will display the following
dialog box:
Figure 426: One window
The way this nesting will be done depends on the configuration of the following parameters:
• Type: Select between the following options:
▪ All: the system will use all the parts of the job for the nesting inside the window.
▪ Part selection: The system will make the nesting inside the window only with the
selected part.
482
• Nesting method: The user will have to configure here how the nesting will be done inside
the window:
▪ Rectangular
▪ True shape
• First point: When creating the window, the system needs two points (upper-left and
lower-right corners). Depending on the option here selected, the first point could be:
▪ Picked point
▪ Corner of the sheet
▪ Corner of the nesting
Unitary
By means of Unitary ( ) option, the system can create automatically sheet with the length of
the part’s exterior rectangle. When selected, the part list will be displayed and once one is
selected, the sheet will be automatically created with the part nested inside.
Delete
4.7.2.6.1 Delete
Delete ( ) option allows deleting parts nested on a sheet. In order to do it, the user will only
have to select the parts required to remove by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar
and click Accept button.
4.7.2.6.2 Delete Every Part
Delete every part ( ) option allows removing all the parts from the current sheet, from all
sheets of the subjob or from all sheets of the job, without removing the sheets. In order to do it,
select the required option between:
• The current sheet
• Every sheet of the subjob
• Every sheet of the job
Once selected click OK button in order to delete the parts of the selected option.
483
Semi-Automatic
By means of Semi-automatic ( ) option, once the user has selected the job sheet, it is possible
to make the automatic nesting part by part every time this option is executed. With this method,
the user can follow the automatic nesting process enabling a better interaction with the parts
placement.
Place
Place ( ) option works like semi-automatic option, except for the fact that the user can select
which part to nest into the sheet. Once the sheet has been selected, the user will have to execute
the option from the menu o click Place button and then select the part to nest from the Part list
provided.
Grid
Grid ( ) option allows selecting the most similar sheet to the part size and placing it on the
sheet.
Transform
Collisions
Collisions ( ) option enables and disables the part collision control for manual nesting. If
activated, the user will not be able to nest a part that overlaps an already nested one. The system
will respect the distance between parts in semiautomatic or manual nesting operations. Although
the user tries to place one part inside other, the system will move it until the correct distance.
Figure 427: Collisions example
Disabling Collisions control may be useful in cases like when the system does not place the part
automatically because it does not fit in the sheet due to the sheet margins.
484
Nesting for Common Cut

This option modifies the nesting process to allow automatic common placing of the parts in the
sheet. In order to work automatically properly, the user should configure the same settings on
Nesting for common cut and on Common cut and then execute Automatic nesting option. It is also
possible to place the parts manually on the sheet with Nesting for common cut enabled.
The parts will be placed vertically, in such a way that the vertical hollow is the minimum possible
to ensure that the X dimension of the nesting is the smallest possible and thereby achieving a
bigger horizontal remnant.
Multihead
Multihead ( ) option will display Multihead data dialog box as shown below:
Figure 428: Multihead data dialog box
The capabilities of each head are shown with the following icons:
The user must configure the number of enabled heads to use. If the icon near the number is in
red color , the system will use that head. The user can disable heads clicking on this icon so
that it becomes black .
The reference torch cannot be disabled.
• Automatic distances: If enabled, the system will calculate the optimal distances between
heads for the related nesting, then, in the report it will output them. Given the case it is
485
disabled; the user can manually introduce the distances. In order to make it easier, and if
the distance is fixed between heads, Equal distances button can be pressed after
introducing one value so that the rest of values are automatically filled in.
• Work with fixed number of heads: If this parameter is enabled, the system will perform
the nesting always trying to use all the active heads at the same time.
Copy
Copy ( ) option allows the user to copy a group of nested parts in a nesting. In order to do it
1. Select Copy option located in Transform menu and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required parts to be copied by means of the options provided and click Accept
button.
3. The system will display Selection options dialog box where the user will have to select the
desired part. When clicking Accept button, Drag options will be displayed so as to move and
copy this part.
Advance Copy
Advance copy ( ) option facilitates the copy of the parts of a sheet. The user will only have to
select the required parts to copy, and once the selection has been executed, it will be possible to
start copying. In the case of working without collisions, the system will ask for a point in order to
reference the selected parts. Depending on the Copy type selected, the dialog box displayed will
provide different parameters to fill in.
Figure 429: Copies dialog box
486
• Window: The copies of the selected parts will be place in a user-defined window. If
selected, the following parameters will be activated:
▪ Visualize: When drawing the rectangle, the system will show the possible result in every
moment if this option is enabled.
▪ Copy by rectangles: Enabled, the distances will be the separation between the minimal
rectangles of the parts.
▪ Horizontal and vertical separation: These are the separation between parts that will be
used when making the copies. The meaning of these values will change depending on
the parameter.
▪ Copy with the part technology on sheet: Using this option, the copies will be made
including the applied technology to the original parts (leads, micro joints, etc.).
▪ Copy with the part machining on sheet: If this has been enabled, the copies will be
made including the machining.
• Multiple: After selecting the parts to copy the user should point with the mouse where to
place the copies or input the coordinates.
• Grid: The user can make copies of the selected parts in a grid disposition starting from the
initial part position, going in the copy direction and making the horizontal and vertical
specified copies (limited by the number of available parts.).
▪ Copy direction: Select the required copy direction from the drawing provided below.
▪ Copy by rectangles: Enabled, the distances will be the separation between the minimal
rectangles of the parts.
487
▪ Horizontal and vertical copies: Introduce the required number of copies to perform
both horizontally and vertically.
If the Horizontal and Vertical copies value is 0, the system will insert as many parts as
possible until arriving to the sheet limits and there are available parts.
▪ Horizontal and vertical separation: These are the separation between parts that will be
used when making the copies. The meaning of these values will change depending on
the parameter.
• Multihead: If the machine has been configured as multihead, this option will be enabled.
The system will try to make copies using the maximum number of heads possible.
▪ Copy direction: The user will have to select between the two copy directions available.
▪ Number of heads: Introduce the number of heads to use.
▪ Distance between heads: Introduce the required distance between the heads.
▪ Number of columns: Write down the number columns required.
▪ Distance between columns: Introduce the required distance between the columns
▪ Copy with the part technology on sheet: If this has been enabled, the copies will be
made including the technology.
488
Place Near
From Place near ( ) option the user can access to different manual nesting possibilities which
allow attaching a part to a group of parts with other parts in a specific way. When selected the
system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 430: Place near options
: This option attaches the source and target elements in parallel mode. The system will ask
for the distance between the initial and final elements.
: This option attaches the source and the target elements in perpendicular mode. The
system will prompt for the distance between both elements.
: This option is a generalization of the two previous ones. It allows attaching source to a
target element but not only with parallel or perpendicular motion. It literally attaches the top-
bottom or right-left area of the source elements to the top-bottom or right-left area of the target
element. When the user selects the initial and final elements, it is also very important to click the
required side of the geometry. The system will prompt for the distance.
: By means of this option the user can attach two parts, in case of from the sides, it will
take into account the clicked points. In this case, the system will not only get the sides, it will use
the clicked points and the distance given by the user in order to move the parts.
: This option allows attaching a circular element to two target elements that are
perpendicular. This can be done establishing the initial and final element. The user will have to
select the required parts, the tangent element and introduce the distance value.
489
: This option attaches the imaginary lower-left vertex of the minimum rectangle of the part
to a defined point. The user will have to select the parts required to lean and the destination
point.
Move
Move ( ) option allows moving and rotating a group of parts previously nested in a sheet. In
order to move a group of parts perform the following steps:
1. Select Move option located in Transform menu and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required group of parts by means of the options provided and click Accept button.
3. Select the Reference point by means of the Moving options provided by the system.
4. Select the Insertion point using the mouse and the Dragging options and click Accept button
one more time. The group of parts will be successfully moved.
Fit
Fit ( ) option adjusts a nesting to one of the sides of a sheet. The user must select the side of
the sheet where the adjusting will take place by clicking with the mouse near to the required
side. The nesting will be automatically adjusted to the selected side.
Margins
Margins ( ) option allows temporarily deactivating the use of sheet margins when the user
makes a manual nesting of parts. This utility can be useful in case the nesting is better when
exceeding the established margins.
If the user deactivates the use of margins, these margins will disappear and the user will be able
to nest parts exceeding them. When the use of margins is activated again, the system will use the
values that were configured before in the current sheet.
 The user is responsible to make sure that the sheet can be cut without any problem when
exceeding margins.
The use of margins will always be active by default and its deactivation will be temporary: it will
not be saved with the sheet and it will be automatically active when changing sheet or subjob.
490
Besides, it will be automatically reactivated when making an automatic nesting. The use of
margins will always be active when accessing the Nesting and Machining module.
Remnants
Create Remnant
Create remnant ( ) option generates remnants automatically depending on the configuration

previously made on the machine’s sheet remnant configuration section.
Delete
Delete ( ) option allows deleting the remnants generated in a sheet. In order to do it, the
user must select the remnants required to erase by means of Selection toolbar and click Accept
button.
Configure
Configure ( ) option the user can configure the parameters of a machine’s Remnant data
section. When the machining of a sheet only takes up a small part of the total area (which
normally happens with the last sheet of a nest) sometimes there is a piece of the sheet the user is
interested in keeping for future use, which is referred as a remnant. The system can automatically
generate these remnants and manage them in the database. When selecting Configure option
the system will display Sheet Remnants dialog box as shown below:
491
Figure 431: Sheet Remnants dialog box
• Generate remnants when you save: Enabling this function, the system will automatically
generate a remnant for the current sheet when saving. There are two ways to generate a
remnant. The first one is to use the original sheet taking away the machined areas. The
second method adds one or more cut lines creating remnants for the remaining areas.
• Generate remnants with the completed sheets: The system will keep on the database the
whole sheet after cutting the parts. Sometimes this is useful if the sheet has been
machined with a few parts and is better not to cut it for remnants. The user can get this
sheet for nesting and machining more parts taking advantage of the remaining space of
the sheet.
• Create the cutting line of the remnant automatically: This function allows generating
remnants following the options shown in the bitmaps. Each option will generate different
number of remnants with different remnant shapes as well.
Figure 432: Cutting line types
Regarding the remnant shape, the system decides what kind of remnant will create depending
on the area value.
All the shapes and cutting lines depend on the values of the offset between the parts and the
lines, the minimum width of hollows and the minimum area of the remnant.
• Minimum X and Minimum Y: The system will not create a smaller remnant than the
configure values for X and Y. If the remnant is smaller, the system will use these values to
create the remnant. This option is only valid for the 6 firsts options on the menu.
• Offset between the parts and the line: This value will determine the distance between
the remnant's cutting line and every part nested on the sheet.
• Minimum width: The value of this parameter is the minimum allowed for using a little
space of the sheet which is between parts in the limit of the remnant's cutting line.
• Round the remnant line and Radius: With this option the user can round the remnant line
automatically when it is generated. The first parameter allows to active this option and
492
the second one asks the value for the round radius. This option is also available for
combined machines.
• Delete the remnant area around parts: With this parameter disabled, the system will use
as remnant any area of the sheet including those which are inside parts like holes. If the
user doesn't want to use these areas, this parameter must be enabled.
• Minimum area of remnants: The value of this parameter is going to be used to generate
remnants always bigger that the given square meters.
• Consider the auxiliary geometry: If this check is deactivated remnants will be generated
without considering auxiliary geometry. On the other hand, if it is activated remnants will
be generated taking into account auxiliary geometry. This option is configurable so it
creates a contour on auxiliary rectangular geometry so that:
▪ 0: The base has a value 10 times linear tolerance.
▪ Cutter diameter: The base has this value.
• Remnants can be rotated: The remnant will be generated as configured, but with this
parameter enabled, the system will look for the best position of the remnant for placing
the cutting head (from-point) of the machine into the sheet.
• Allow turning over the remnant: If enabled, the system will allow mirroring the remnant
when it comes to loading the sheet remnant in the machine.
• Prompt for references when generating remnants: The system generates a reference
automatically for each remnant. But if this checkbox is enabled, at the moment of
generating a new remnant from the sheet, the system will ask for the reference.
Draw the Edge

Draw the edge ( ) option allows drawing a polylines using dots and arcs in order to limit the
remnant. The polylines must start and finish in the external area of the sheet so that the remnant
is valid. It must also meet some requirements such as minimum area and not trespassing the
cutting margins of the parts. In order to draw the edge, perform the following steps:
1. Select Draw the edge option located in Remnants menu and the system will display Remnant
line drawing options as shown below:
493
Figure 433: Remnant line drawing options
2. Define it as a dot, as an arc or as a dynamic remnant line.

3. Given the case the remnant line is defined by dots or arcs, follow the instructions given in the
status bar.
4. If Dynamic remnant line option is selected, the system will display Sheet Remnants window,
where the user will have to introduce the following values:
Figure 434: Sheet remnants dialog box
▪ Offset in the parts: It is the minimum distance between the cut and the parts.
▪ Offset in the edge of the sheet: It configures the distance between the cut and the edge
of the sheet.
▪ Cut in holes: This checkbox will determine if the holes are going to be cut or not.
▪ Horizontal
▪ Vertical
5. Click Finish option so that the system considers the created line as valid.
494
Draw the Exact Edge

Draw the exact edge ( ) option enables the user creating a remnant line between parts in
semiautomatic. The remnant is created drawing manually cutting lines between the gaps created
when cutting the parts.
The first and last point of the remnant must be placed out of the sheet. In each part there must
be two points defined, the entry point and exist point.
Automatic Edge
Automatic edge ( ) option creates the cutting line of the remnant automatically depending on
the configuration previously set on the machine’s sheet remnant configuration section.
Delete the Edge

Delete the edge ( ) option removes all remnant lines generated in the sheets, if they are not
machined. If the remnant has already been generated, the correct option to delete it is Delete
Remnant.
Remnant Reference
Remnant reference ( ) option allows defining the reference points of the remnant to place on
the machine.
Rotate Remnants
Rotate remnants ( ) option allows flipping a remnant in X or Y axis or rotating it in a defined

angle, which must be multiple of 90º. When selected the system will display Rotate remnants
Figure 435: Rotate remnants dialog box
Select the Rotation type and click OK button.
495
In order to be able to execute this action, the sheet must be a remnant and it cannot contain
geometry, otherwise the option will be disabled.
Review
Time and Cost
When selecting Time and cost ( ) option the system will display the dialog box shown below
where the user will be able to visualize the following data:
Figure 436: Machine Time and Cost
The user will be provided with the Machine hourly rate, Employee hourly rate, Total time and
Cost of material between other information. The user will get the Cost of material, Cost of
machine time, Employee cost, Cost of consumables and Total cost of the Markup, Sheet,
Remnant and Scrap. The provided quantity and manufactured quantity of each part will be
provided together with the time required. The system will also provide the sheet reference along
with its length, width, quantity and CNC. The user will be able to visualize a drawing of the sheet
by activating the check provided.
Between the options available the user will be able to print the part, sheet, part list and sheet list
as well as being able to Create a quotation.
496
Export Data
Export Data ( ) option allows exporting information from the system to an Excel document.
The information that the user can export is the one related to the time and cost calculation of the
nestings and parts of the current job. This option is protected.
The user will select the template that will be used to export the data, and will define the data to
export as well as an Excel document that will work as a template to define where and how the
data will be exported.
When executing the option, the Excel document that works as template will be copied on a
directory and name specified by the user, and the information will be exported on this document
copy. By default, the name will be the one of the current job. If the file already exists in this
directory of the system, the system will ask whether the user wants to overwrite it or not.
Information related to all the parts and nestings or just the one related to the subjob or the
current sheet can be exported.
At the end of the option execution, an Excel program will be displayed to visualize or modify the
generated document.
Figure 437: Export Data dialog box
497
Figure 438: Excel document example
Figure 439: Excel document example 2
4.7.5.2.1 Templates Creation

Apart from the templates defined in the installation (Directory Reports\Export), it is possible to
create customized templates by the user.
In order to do that, the user has to carry out the following steps:
498
1. Create an Excel file where the design, the format and the formulas the user wants to apply
when exporting information are specified.
2. Create a XML file (cfgx extension) where the information the user wants to export, the
spreadsheet and the cell where each data will be exported are defined.
3. The information that can be exported is the same as the data used by the user when it is
defined the workshop sheet in the nesting printing (Technical documentation: Printing parts
and nestings in boxes).
4. To be able to use the new template it is required to include the references in the following XML
where the template, ExpExcel.cfgx. This new template is placed in the installation folder in
Reports/Export.
Access to Points
Access to Points ( ) menu helps the user selecting the particular point required. When
selected the system will display the following drop-down list providing the options detailed
below:
Figure 440: Points options
499
• Default snap mode: Go back to the previous snap mode.
View Geometry
View Geometry ( ) option visualizes the measurements of the geometry. The system will
display Selection options toolbar in order to select the required geometry. Once selected click
Accept button and View geometry dialog box will be displayed as shown below:
Figure 441: View geometry dialog box
The dialog box provides the Type of geometry, Point o-ordinates, Number of segments, Number of
circles, Number of arcs, Number of lines, Number of points and Total of segments all of them
500
together with their Perimeter value. The user will also be able to print all these data by means of
Print button.
Distances & Angle
Distances & Angle ( ) button allows visualizing the distance and angle measurements between
two selected points as follows:
1. Click Distances and Angles button and then mark the first point.
2. Move the cursor till the desired point and mark the second point. The system will display
Review - Distance and Angle panel on the right side:
Figure 442: Distance and angle dialog box
• D: The distance between the two marked points. It is not possible to edit this field.
• X: The horizontal distance between the two marked points. It is not possible to edit this
field.
• Y: The vertical distance between the two marked points. It is not possible to edit this
field.
501
• W: The angle at which the second point is marked with respect to the X. It is not possible
to edit this field.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box.
Angle Between Three Points
Angle between three points ( ) button allows the user to view the angles of three points as
follows:
1. Click Angle between three points button and then mark the first point.
2. Move the cursor till the desired points and mark the second and third points. The system will
display Angle between three points dialog box as shown below:
Figure 443: Angle between three points dialog box
3. It is possible to view the interior angle of the three points in ‘a1’ field and the exterior angle of
the three points in ‘a2’ field.
4. Select Cancel button in order to close the dialog box.
Orthogonal
Orthogonal
Orthogonal ( ) option draws vertical and horizontal geometries by means of the Dragging
toolbar. This application is active until clicking this again to disable it.
Press F2 button in order to enable or disable this option.
Macros
Macros ( ) option enables the creation, deletion and execution of application macros. A
macro is an option that enables the sequential execution of several options of the system. This
502
option is available in Drawing and Nesting and Machining modules. The created macros will only
be useful for the module in which they have been created. Macros option contains a drop-down
list that displays the existing macros of the system plus the following two options:
• Macro creation: Click Record a macro and all the options clicked afterwards will form part
of the macro. The order will be defined during the options selection. To stop recording
click Stop recording or press Escape.
• Macro edition: Click Macro and the system will display a window that shows the existing
list of macros with the options corresponding to each. A macro can be created, deleted
or executed from this window.
• Macro execution: In order to execute a Macro, click on Macro drop-down list and select
Macro or execute from edition window. It is possible to add buttons to the options
ribbon or quick access bars. When executing a macro:
▪ By pressing ESC, the option in execution will stop and the next will be executed.
▪ By executing another option macro execution will stop.
▪ By pressing Return when the macro finishes, it will be executed again.
Technology
Lead-in/Lead-outs
Automatic
Automatic ( ) option places a Lead-in/Lead-out automatically in the part.
Figure 444: Automatic Lead-in/lead-outs example
503
Delete
Delete ( ) option deletes the Lead-in/Lead-outs by selection. In order to do it perform the

following steps:
1. Click Delete option and the system will display Selection Toolbar.
2. Select the required lead-in/lead-out to delete by means of the options provided and click Accept
3. The selected lead-in/lead-out will be deleted.
Semi-Automatic
Semi-automatic ( ) option places a Lead-in/Lead-out semiautomatically in the part. When

selected the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 445: Semi-automatic Lead-in/Lead-out
Select the required option and click OK button in order to place the lead-in/lead-outs in the
selected parts.
Configure Automatic
Configure automatic ( ) option configures the parameters of the automatic Lead-in/Lead-outs.

The system will show Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out values dialog box:
504
Figure 446: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out values dialog box
The position of the lead, the type of leads to use depending on the different contours and all the
distances must be configured. Find the different fields provided in the previous dialog box briefly
described below:
configuring different values for the lead-in/lead-out when using the automatic
assignation. If enabled, the window will show twelve tabs which are related to each of
the twelve available cutting qualities.
try first for placing the lead. It is possible to select different position for exterior contours
of parts and for holes.
505
There are different kinds of contours which system can distinguish. In the following table, there
are two examples for each contour type. All the geometries on red color are those on which the
selected lead-in/out type will be applied:
Figure 447: Contour types
• Modify: By means of this option the user can assign a different lead-in/lead-out for each
contour type. The first type will not assign any lead-in/lead-out to the contour. When
selected the system will display Lead-in/lead-out values dialog box as shown below,
where the user will have to specify some particular dimension values per each lead-
in/lead-out.
506
• Piercing radius: This option allows the user to define the piercing radius depending on
quality, thickness, and material. The new radii will replace all the previous piercing radii.
These values can be defined depending on the default piercing radius, as a percentage of
it, or as an absolute value. When one of those values changes, the other value will be
updated.
• Lead-in and lead-out minimum length: It is used when the Overlapping test parameter is
enabled with the Shorten option. It defines the minimum length that a lead-in or lead-out
can have when one of them is shortened due to the overlapping.
• Constraints: This describes about the basic parameters/constraints for all the elements of
lead-in and lead-out that are to be placed. When selected the system will display
Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box as shown below:
Figure 449: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box
Introduce the required data and click OK button.
• Change position in sheet: This option allows the user to change the position of the lead-in
or lead-out in the sheet. There are three options: No, Along the cutting sequence, and
Avoiding the oxycut effect.
507
▪ Along the cutting sequence: The leads-in/leads-out is modified by selecting this option.
They are placed in the nearest hole in order to avoid them. At the same time, it is also
possible to select only for inside or only for inside and outside option.
▪ Avoid the oxycut effect: It works as the interrogation mark option. This option places
the lead-ins/leads-out to avoid the warming heating of sheet.
• Overlapping test: It is possible to configure checking the overlaps in the automatic lead-
ins. This test will take into account if there will be a pre-punching or a cycle in order to
know if the lead-in is overlapped or not. In case of overlapping, the system will perform
the action previously selected between the following:
▪ Shorten: The lead-in/lead-out geometry will be shorten trying to avoid the overlapping.
The value is the maximum shortening allowed.
▪ Change position: The lead-in/lead-out will be placed in other position, and system will
try as different positions as the number given on Number of attempts.
▪ Change position and shorten: This solution is a combination of the previous. The system
will try on each position to short the lead-in/lead-out geometries and if this not solved
the overlapping, will change the position.
▪ Change quality: In this case, system will try changing the cutting quality of the lead-
in/lead-out. With this, the configuration for lead-in/lead-out will change getting the
values configured of the new cutting quality.
▪ Change position and quality: On each position, the system is going to try to change the
cutting quality of the lead-in/lead-out, and if not, change position as many times as
specified attempts.
▪ Change position, quality and shorten: For each position, the system will try changing
the cutting quality, and shorten the lead-in/lead-out on each position, and if the
problem persists, change position as many times as the value given.
▪ Change quality and shorten: First, the quality will be changed and if still there are
overlaps, the lead-in/lead-out geometries will be shortened.
• Shortening: This parameter determines the size percentage of the lead-in/lead-out

required to be shortened.
508
• Number of attempts: Introduce the required number of attempts for the system to
perform the selected Overlapping test.
• Copy: Because there are 12 possible cutting qualities, the same parameters must be
configured many times. To make the data entry easier, system provides this button which
permits to copy the automatic lead-in/lead-out configuration from existing cutting quality
values.
Lead-in/Lead-outs
By means of the following options the user can introduce different lead-in/lead-outs to the parts.
Depending on the Lead-in/lead-out type selected the user will have to introduce different data,
given that the dimensions of each type are different.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 1 ( ): Perpendicular Lead-in/Lead-outs.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 2 ( ): Perpendicular Lead-in and inclined Lead-out.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 3 ( ): Perpendicular Lead-in and tangential Lead-out.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 4 ( ): Inclined Lead-in and perpendicular Lead-out.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 5 ( ): Inclined Lead-in/Lead-outs.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 6 ( ): Inclined Lead-in and tangential Lead-out.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 7 ( ): Tangential Lead-in and perpendicular Lead-out.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 8 ( ): Tangential Lead-in and inclined Lead-out.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 9 ( ): Tangential Lead-in and Lead-outs.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 10 ( ): Straight Lead-in/Lead-out on outer corner.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 11 ( ): Tangential Lead-in/Lead-out with beginning and end path.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 12 ( ): Tangential Lead-in/Lead-out with beginning and end parallel

path.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 13 ( ): Straight Lead-in/Lead-out on inner corner.
• Lead-in/Lead-outs 14 ( ): Special Lead-in/Lead-outs for circular holes.
• Dynamic Lead-in/Lead-outs ( ): Lead-in/Lead-outs by rubber band.
509
• Custom lead-in/lead-outs ( ): Select this option to introduce a customized lead-in/lead-

out.
• Put the Lead-in/Lead-outs in bisector ( ): It puts the Lead-in/Lead-outs in bisector.
• Configuration ( ): It configures the parameters of the Lead-in/lead-outs. The system

will show Lead-in/Lead-out values dialog box:
1. Here the user will be able to modify the provided parameters as per your requirements and set
them by means of OK button located at the bottom of the window.
• Move point of lead-in or lead-out ( ): It allows moving the point of a Lead-in or Lead-
out. This change can be applied to the rest of identical parts and with the same angle in
the nest.
• Put the lead-out like the lead-in ( ): It puts the Lead-out in the direction of the Lead-in.
• Modify tangent arc lead-in by 2 segments ( ): It modifies the tangent arc Lead-in by
two segments.
• Add element ( ): It adds an element to the Lead-in or Lead-out. The system will display
Add element to Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box as shown below:
510
Figure 451: Add element to Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box
Here the user will have to select which element or elements to include as well as the direction
and length. Introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save the changes and
introduce the new elements.
Micro-Joints
Automatic
Automatic ( ) option inserts micro-joints automatically in the nesting.
Delete
Delete ( ) option deletes the selected micro-joints from the nesting. In order to do it perform
the following steps:
1. Click Delete option and the system will display Selection Toolbar.
2. Select the required micro-joint(s) to delete by means of the options provided and click Accept
3. The selected micro-joints will be deleted.
Semi-Automatic
Semi-automatic ( ) option places micro-joints semiautomatically by selecting the required

parts of the nesting. In order to do it perform the following steps:
1. Select Semi-automatic option.

2. Select the required micro-joint.
3. Place manually with the mouse the required micro-joints in the parts.
511
Configure Automatic
Configure automatic ( ) option configures the parameters of the automatic micro-joints. The
system will display Automatic Micro-joints values dialog box as shown below:
Figure 452: Automatic micro-joint values dialog box
• Micro-joint types: These are all the micro-joints the system supports automatically. For
each one, there are some parameters to configure as shown on the graphs. Enter D, A, S,
and Radius parameters for lead-ins and lead-outs.
• Circles angle: This value is used for system to test positions for placing micro-joints. The
point. For example, if the value is 90, the system will try first the clicked point for placing
micro-joint, then 0, 90, 180, 270 degrees’ position from the first point.
• Distance between micro-joints: This is the minimum distance, the system will not allow to
place one micro-joint at a distance lower than this value.
• Minimum and maximum number of micro-joints for each contour: Using this option, if
the contour has a very big perimeter and the maximum number of micro-joints has been
added, the system will distribute the micro joints halfway (without taking care to the
minimum separation).
If the contour is small and the micro joints are too close, the system will redefine them and will
locate them halfway on the contour. These parameters may affect to machine general
configuration and material-thickness dependent data.
512
Available Micro-joints
The available micro-joints are the following:
• Micro-Joints 1: It introduces an inclined micro-joint on corner.
• Micro-Joints 2: It introduces a perpendicular micro-joint on corner.
• Micro-Joints 3: It introduces a perpendicular micro-joint.
• Micro-Joints 4: It introduces an inclined micro-joint.
• Micro-Joints 5: It introduces an inclined micro-joint on the right side.
• Micro-Joints 6: It introduces an inclined micro-joint on the left side.
These micro-joints can be introduced either on a nesting prior to machining or after machining.
Move Point of Lead-in or Lead-out of a Micro-joint
Move point of lead-in or lead-out of a micro-joint ( ) option allows moving the point of a
micro joint. In order to do it perform the following steps:
1. Click Move point of micro-joint button and select the lead-in/lead-out required to change.
2. Move the cursor till the desired point and mark it.
3. The new point of the lead-in/lead-out will be places at the selected point.
Transform to Geometry
Transform to geometry ( ) option converts the selected micro-joints to geometry by means of

the selection bar. Perform the following steps:
1. Click Transform to geometry button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required micro-joint to convert by means of the options provided and click Accept
button.
3. The selected micro-joints will be converted to geometry.
Configure
Configure ( ) option configures the parameters of the micro-joints. The system will display
Micro-joints Values dialog box:
513
Figure 453: Micro-joints values dialog box
Introduce the required values in the fields provided and click OK button to save the changes.
Loops
Delete
Delete ( ) option deletes loops by selection. The system will display Selection toolbar in order
to select the loop required to erase. Select it by means of the options provided and click Accept
button so that it is deleted.
Semi-Automatic
Semi-automatic ( ) option introduces loops semiautomatically in the parts. Select the point(s)
where the loop is required, and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 454: Semi-automatic loops
Select between the options given and click OK button, so that the system introduces the loop in
the selected points of the parts.
Loop 1
Loop 1 ( ) option introduces straight loops in the selected parts. Click this option and select a
corner in order to introduce loops to a closed geometry with sides.
514
Loop 2
Loop 2 ( ) option introduces circular loops in the selected parts. Click this option and then
select a corner in order to introduce a curved loop to a closed geometry with sides.
Configuration
Configuration ( ) option configures the parameters of the loops. The system will display the
following window:
Figure 455: Loop values dialog box
Introduce the required value for each type of loop and click OK button to save the information.
Round Angles
Round Angles ( ) option allows rounding corners of nested parts according to how their edges
will be machined. It will be active as long as there is an open nesting, regardless of whether it is
machined or not.
Bridges
Automatic
Automatic ( ) option places bridges automatically on the nesting. Bridges will be of the
previously selected type. The parameters that will be used are configured on the Bridge values
section of the machine configuration.
515
Delete
Delete ( ) option deletes the selected bridges of the nesting. The system will display Selection
options in order to select the bridges required to erase. Once selected click Accept button
located in the same toolbar and the bridges will be deleted.
Semi-Automatic
Semi-automatic ( ) option places bridges automatically on the selected parts of the nesting. It
allows connecting the selected parts on the sheet as follows:
1. Select Semi-automatic option and click the parts on the sheets required to join.
2. Right click on the selected parts to join them with a bridge.
516
Bridge 1
Bridge 1 ( ) option introduces a negative bridge. It defines a bridge in such a way that the
machined part is completely cut. The area of the part where the bridge is defined is machined
twice which is a drawback. Select this option and click the parts required to join, and the system
will introduce the bridge.
Bridge 2
Bridge 2 ( ) option introduces a positive bridge, which keeps the two parts joined after the
machining. Select this option and click the parts required to join, and the system will introduce
the bridge.
Configure
Configure ( ) configures the parameters of the bridges. The system will show Bridge Values
dialog box:
Figure 456: Bridge values dialog box
• a distance: This is the length of the bridge between parts.
517
• Maximum length: This value is the maximum distance allowed to create a bridge
between contours.
• On corners: The bridges will be applied on the parts corners. In the example provided
below there are bridges on corners that allow making all the machining without raising
the head:
Figure 457: Bridges on corners example
• Bridge type: There are two possibilities, free and orthogonal. The last one will force the
bridge to be always with straight lines although the clicked coordinates are not
orthogonal between them:
Figure 458: Bridge types
Introduce the required values and click OK button in order to save the changes.
Cut Technology
Delete
This option deletes an assigned cut technology as follows:
1. Click Delete ( ) button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the assigned cut technology required to delete by means of the options provided and
click Accept button provided in the same toolbar.
518
3. The cut technology assigned to the selected element will be erased.
Type of Cut
Type of cut ( ) option allows the user to introduce different technologies to cut a part. When
pointed, the system will display the following dialog box providing the different types of cut
technologies that can be assigned:
Figure 459: Type of cut
The user will be able to select between Oxycut, Plasma, High definition plasma, Laser and Water.
Once selected click OK button in order to apply it.
Marking
This option assigns marking technology to a part as follows:
1. Select Marking ( ) option and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 460: Marking technology
2. Click on the drop-down list provided in Technology field, select between Powder, Drill, Pen or
Cut and click OK button.
Figure 461: Marking technology, Make on
4. Select the required option and click OK button.
519
5. The selected marking technology will be assigned to the selected element(s).
Cut Technology
This option assigns cutting technology of a specified quality to a part as follows:
1. Select Cutting ( ) button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 462: Cutting qualities
2. Select the required type of Cutting quality.

3. When selecting Modify button the system will display Tables of technology dialog box. Here the
user will be able to include, modify or delete the material, thickness and other details. Click OK
button in order to save the changes.
4. The system will display a dialog box where the user will have to select where to apply the
changes.
5. Select the required option and click OK button.
6. The cutting technology of the specified quality will be assigned to the selected geometry
extension.
No Cut
In order to assign No Cut technology to a required geometry, perform the following steps:
1. Click No Cut ( ) button and the system will display Selection options toolbar.
2. Select the extension to which the user wants to apply No cut by means of the options provided
and click Accept button in order to apply it.
520
3. Right double-click or select Finish option located in the same toolbar in order to finish the
execution of the option.
Text
Find detailed below the different options available under Text section.
Marked Text
Whenever Marked Text ( ) option is selected, the system will display Text definition dialog box
as shown below:
1. Introduce the required information in the following fields:
• Text: The text that is assigned. The navigation button provided on the right will
display Text definition dialog box:
521
On the left-hand side of the previous window, the user will find a list with all the Available fields.
In order to mark and define the order of the fields, the user will have to move them to the list
located in the right side called Ordered fields by means of the arrow buttons located in the
middle.
The possible types of fields are grouped into the following groups:
▪ General: It is possible to mark a fixed text, line break or index. The last one will be a text
with a value that will be increased per each part placed in the sheet. The initial value of
the index and number of characters may be configured, as well as if the index is
different per type of part or sheet.
▪ Time: It is possible to mark the year, month, week and current day, so that the current
date can be marked on the part.
▪ Part: It is possible to mark those fields related to the part.
▪ Sheet: It is possible to mark the sheet reference, description and identifiers. The part
will have a different mark text depending on the sheet in which the part is located. In
case of working with sheet inventory, it will be possible to mark the information related
to the inventory, such as the tracking number of the sheet.
▪ Nesting: It is possible to mark the reference or the quantity of the nesting. The part will
have a different mark text depending on the nesting in which it is located.
▪ Job: It is possible to mark the fields related to the job.
522
• Size: The font size of the text.
• Orientation: The angle value of the text.
• Technology: The type of technology to mark the text. You can select the required type
from the drop-down list.
• Automatic separation between characters: It indicates whether or not the separation

distance between the character is set automatically. If this check box is not selected, then
the system displays “Horizontal separation between characters” field.
• Horizontal separation between characters: The distance value between characters.
• Thickness: Thickness value of the text. When you enter the thickness value, the system
allows you select the required style for the text. When you select the last two styles, then
the system displays ‘Continuous text’ check box.
• Continuous text: It indicates whether or not continuous style for the text is included. If
the navigation button located on the right side is selected, the system will display
Continuous text dialog box as shown below:
Figure 464: Continuous text dialog box
Here the user will have to fill in % Text size (D) and Angle (W) fields. When you select this
checkbox, the system will allow selecting the navigation button in this field to introduce the
continuous text size and angle value for the text.
• Fonts directory: The path of the text font. The user can select navigation button in this
field to select the required directory.
2. In Make on section, indicate in which element is required to insert the text:
• Sheet: The text can be introduced in any position and will not be related to neither a part
nor a remnant. In the case the sheet is erased, the text will also be erased.
523
• Remnant: The text will be introduced in a remnant and will, therefore, be related to it.
Given the case the remnant is erased; the text will also be erased. Since it is related to the
remnant, the text can indicate data such as reference, length, width, area, weight,
material and thickness. However, the text can also be composed of other fields not
related to the remnant. The system will ask the user to select the point where the text
must be inserted. If the point in question is not located inside a remnant, a system error
will occur.
• Part: The text will be introduced in a part and will, consequently, be related to it. Given
the case the part is erased, the text will also be erased. Since it is related to the remnant
the text can indicate data such as reference, length, width, area, weight, material and
thickness. However, the text can also be composed of other fields not related to the
remnant such as general data of the time, sheet, nesting and job.
• The selected part / Identical parts with the same angle / All identical parts: These options
will ask the user to select the point where the text must be inserted and depending on
the option, the text will be introduced in the corresponding parts.
3. Once the required values have been introduced click OK button. The marked text will be
displayed.
4. Mark the insertion point and the text will be inserted. The system will also display Move
toolbar to move the text.
524
Written Text
Written text ( ) option allows introducing a written text. The system will display the following
dialog box:
1. Introduce the required information in the following fields:
• Font: Font of the text. Click on the navigation button of this field and the system will
display Font dialog box to select the required font.
• Text: The text that is assigned.
• Orientation: The angle value of the text.
• Vectorize: Enable this checkbox in order to vectorize the text. Once enabled, Number of
tracts for the Beizer curves and Technology fields will become enabled.
2. In Make on section, indicate in which element is required to insert the text:
• Sheet: The text can be introduced in any position and will not be related to neither a part
nor a remnant. In the case the sheet is erased, the text will also be erased.
• Remnant: The text will be introduced in a remnant and will, therefore, be related to it.
Given the case the remnant is erased; the text will also be erased. Since it is related to the
remnant, the text can indicate data such as reference, length, width, area, weight,
material and thickness. However, the text can also be composed of other fields not
related to the remnant. The system will ask the user to select the point where the text
525
must be inserted. If the point in question is not located inside a remnant, a system error
will occur.
• Part: The text will be introduced in a part and will, consequently, be related to it. Given
the case the part is erased, the text will also be erased. Since it is related to the remnant
the text can indicate data such as reference, length, width, area, weight, material and
thickness. However, the text can also be composed of other fields not related to the
remnant such as general data of the time, sheet, nesting and job.
• The selected part / Identical parts with the same angle / All identical parts: These options
will ask the user to select the point where the text must be inserted and depending on
the option, the text will be introduced in the corresponding parts.
3. Once the required values have been introduced click OK button. The text will be displayed on
the part.
4. Mark the insertion point, and the text will be inserted. The system will also display Move
toolbar to move the text.
QR Codes
QR Codes ( ) option allows introducing a QR code with those machines that contain a
special marking device. A QR code or Quick Response Code is a two-dimensional bar code. This
code is a machine-readable optical label that contains information about the item to which it is
attached. In this case, the content of the QR codes is exclusively composed of text. This text may
contain literal texts, line breaks and/or texts extracted from the system such as:
• Time data
• Part data
• Sheet data
• Subjob data
QR codes will be represented by means of a drawing based on the size previously defined, which
has the following appearance:
526
The content of the QR code can be displayed by using (Ctrl + Alt) geometry display option
By means of this option, it will be possible to mark QR codes on sheets and remnant semi-
automatically, and parts automatically and semi-automatically.
The automatic marking option corresponds to “All parts” option.
Templates
Templates ( ) option creates an instruction in which the rectangle size of the text is
defined, in order to simulate the space it occupies in the part and treat it In this case, the
postprocessor will be in charge of treating the text for each machine in particular.
Template type of marking will be represented as follows:
527
The content of the final text can be displayed by using (Ctrl + Alt) geometry display option
This option will assign a marking template semi-automatically to a sheet or remnant. Whenever
selected, the system will display Marking definition dialog box:
Delete
Delete ( ) option allows the user erasing any of the marked texts and written texts previously
introduced. The system will display the Selection options so that the user selects the required
text to erase.
Machining
Machining
Machine All
4.9.1.1.1 Machine All
Machine all ( ) option allows machining automatically all the nested parts of all the sub-jobs as
follows:
1. Click Machine All option and the system will display the following dialog box:
528
Figure 466: Existent machining management
2. Select the required machining management type between the Existing machining management
options:
• Select Keep the machining to retain the machining for the existing machined parts and
machine only those parts that are not machined.
• Select Remake the machining to machine all the parts of all the subjobs including the
existing machined parts.
3. The system will display Machining initialization dialog box and set the required initialization
parameters and click Finish. The parts on all the sheets of all the subjobs will be machined.
4.9.1.1.2 Machine Active Subjob
Machine Active Subjob ( ) allows the user machining automatically all the nested parts on the
sheets of a selected subjob as follows:
1. Click Machine Active subjob option and the system will display Existent machining management
dialog box, as in the previous option.
2. Select the required machining management type between the Existing machining management
options:
• Select Keep the machining to retain the machining for the existing machined parts and
machine only those parts that are not machined.
• Select Remake the machining to machine all the parts of all the subjobs including the
existing machined parts.
3. The system will display Machining initialization dialog box and set the required initialization
parameters and click Finish. The parts on all the sheets of the active subjob will be machined.
529
Automatic
By means of Automatic ( ) option the part will be automatically machined. The machining will
be carried out depending of the options previously configured in Automatic Machining section of
the Machine configuration.
Copy Machining of a Part
• Insert label begin ( ): With this option the user can place a begin label in the desired
machining position.
• Insert label end ( ): With this option the user can place an end label in the desired
machining position.
• Copy machining of a part ( ): With this option the system will copy the machining of
the selected part (if any) to the desired parts. Select a part and the system will display
Copy machining dialog box as shown below:
Figure 467: Copy machining dialog box
▪ Make on: The selection of this parameter determines in which positions of the clicked
part will be copied the machining: on The selected part, Identical parts with the same
angle, or All identical parts (no matter if they are rotated or not).
▪ Retain the existing machining: Enabled, the system will leave already machined
contours of the parts. It will just copy the machining of the contours that were not
machined when the option has been selected.
530
• Copy machining of a set of parts ( ): This option will copy more than one part's
machining. For example, if there are two manually machined parts, the user can copy the
machining of them into the others parts:
Figure 468: Copy machining of a set of parts example
As with the previous option, the user can keep the existing machining if required.
Regenerate
Regenerate ( ) option erases all the machining of the parts including the technology
geometries: lead-ins/lead-outs, microjoints, loops, bridges, etc. But the nesting will be kept
allowing to start the machining from the beginning again.
Delete Instructions
In order to erase the desired machining instructions, perform the following steps:
1. Select Delete Instructions ( ) button located in Machining menu.
The image here displayed will correspond to the last option used from the list provided
below.
2. Select between the following options:
• Delete current instruction ( ): The current instruction will be erased.
• Delete machining by selection ( ): The user must select the machining to delete.
• Delete machining by selection of geometry ( ): The system will display the Selection
options to help the user select which geometry machining is required to be deleted.
531
• Delete machining of selected parts ( ): The system will display the Selection options to
help the user select which part machining is required to be deleted.
• Delete from-to ( ): The system will display Instruction list dialog box so that the user
selects the instruction or instructions to delete. It will just be necessary to select it/them
and click on OK button.
• Delete all machining ( ): As the name indicates, this option will erase all the existing
machining.
• Configuration ( ): whenever this option is selected the system will display the
Figure 469: Delete instructions – Configuration
▪ Delete the macro as a whole: Disable this parameter and the system will allow erasing
the machining of the sheet framework line by only selecting one of the segments that
compose it. If this option is enabled, it will be necessary to select the whole machining
associated to the sheet framework destruction.
▪ Machining by selection: This section provides the following parameter:
o Simulate machining selection when mouse is moved: If enabled, whenever the

mouse is moved over the machining, the system will simulate its selection.
3. Select the required option and click OK in order to delete the instructions.
532
Initialize
Initialize ( ) option, as the name indicates, initializes the machining. This operation must
always be done before doing any machining operation. The system will perform several
operations which make possible starting the use of the machine:
• Apply the settings configured on machine´s startup configuration.
• Place the clamps as configured on machine´s sheet clamps configuration.
• Initialize the work zone as set up on machine´s work zone configuration.
• Initialize the from-point as configured on the from point configuration.
• The system will show the upload/download configuration if enabled on machine´s

upload/download sheets configuration.
• Apply the configured cutting parameters.
• Apply the general machining options.
Rapids
A Rapid movement is the displacement of the head without cutting. This option inserts a rapid
movement from the current machining coordinates to the desired point. In order to insert a rapid
movement, perform the following steps:
1. Select Rapids ( ) button and the system will initialize the rapid movement.
2. Select the Destination point and the rapid movement will be inserted between the initial point
and destination point. The user can select as many points as required to insert rapid
movements.
Go To
This option allows cutting between the desired points. In order to do it, perform the following
steps:
1. Click Goto ( ) button and the system will initialize the machining.
2. Select the Destination point and the extension between the initial point and destination point
will be machined. The user can select as many points as required to continue the cut operation.
533
Contours
Manual Contours
In order to cut the selected elements of the contour perform the following steps:
1. Point Contour ( ) option located in Contour menu and the system will display the options
available.
2. Select Manual Contours ( ) option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
3. Select the first element of the contour by means of the options provided.
4. Select the remaining elements of the contour if required.
5. Click Accept button located in the same menu and the selected elements of the contour will be
machined.
Manual Contours by Means of Two Points

By means of this option, the user can machine a contour just giving the input and output points
as follows:
1. Select Manual contours by means of two points ( ) option located in Contours menu.
2. Select the input point of the contour.
3. Select the output point of the contour and the system will display Manual contour by means of
two points dialog box as shown below:
Figure 470: Manual contour by means of two points dialog box
Find the fields provided in the previous window briefly described below:
534
▪ Lead-in/Lead-out lengths: Lead-ins and Lead-out can be inserted here and will be applied
in the clicked input and output points and set with the values here introduced.
▪ Cut sense: The system will make the machining from the input to the output points in
the sense here selected:
▪ Finish the contour: If enabled, the system will force to detect all the contour of the
clicked points and, if possible, it will machine it.
▪ Lead-ins on the same point: If selected, the lead-ins will be located in the same point.
▪ Delete auxiliary geometry: If enabled, as the name indicates, the auxiliary geometry will
be erased.
4. Introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save the changes.
Manual Contours between Micro-joints
Manual contours between micro-joints ( ) option is used to cut elements which are between
micro-joints. The user will have to select the geometry and the system will insert the machining in
the contour which is between the two micro-joints.
Automatic Contours
In order to cut the contours automatically, perform the following steps:
1. Point Contour option located in Contour menu and the select Automatic contours ( )
option.
2. Select the required contour to machine.
3. The system will automatically machine the contour.
Continuous Contours
This option allows executing the whole machining process by means of the mouse. The user will
have to select the required points. If one of these points belongs to the contour of a part, the
system will automatically introduce the machining orders for the part. If the contour does not
535
have lead-in/lead-out assigned, these will be automatically assigned. In order to assign

continuous cut, perform the following steps:
1. Point Contour option located in Contour menu and the select Continuous contours ( )
option.
2. The system will display Continuous cut dialog box as shown below:
Figure 471: Continuous cut dialog box
3. Select whether deleting cycles on lead-ins is required or not and click OK button in order to save
the changes.
4. Select the required destination points by means of the mouse.
If the button used is the right one, the system will execute the movements as rapid
movements with the head up at a higher speed.
Parts
In order to machine the entire part, perform the following steps:
1. Point Contour option located in Contour menu and select Parts ( ) option.
2. Select the part required to machine and the system will machine the whole part automatically.
Set of Selected Parts

This option will make the machining of a group of selected parts by performing the following
steps:
1. Point Contour option located in Contour menu and select Set of selected parts ( ) option.
536
Figure 472: Set of selected parts
3. Introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save the changes.
4. Select the required set of parts and the system will machine them.
Automatic Cycles on Lead-ins

Select Automatic Cycles on Lead-ins ( ) option located in Contour menu in order to make holes
with drills in those points where the piercings are located and facilitate the cut. Whenever this
option is selected, the system will display Machining initialization window. Once all the required
parameters have been set, proceed to select Finish button so that all the automatic cycle is
applied on the lead-ins.
The lead-ins must be previously placed on the contours so that this option works properly.
All Drill Cycles
Select All Drill Cycles ( ) option located in Contour menu in order to drill all the points on the
contour.
All Marks
Select All Marks ( ) option located in Contour menu in order to machine the contours with
mark technology.
537
All Holes
Select All Holes ( ) option so that all the holes are machined. This option is usually used
before Continuous contour machinings.
All Cut
Select All Cut ( ) option located in Contour menu in order to cut all the contours.
All Contours One Quality

This option will machine all the contours of a specified cutting quality. In order to do it perform
the following steps:
5. Point Contour option located in Contour menu and select All Contours One Quality ( )
option and the system will display a dialog box displaying the available Cutting qualities.
6. Select the required cutting quality and the system will machine all the contours of the selected
Cutting quality.
Remnant Line
Remnant line ( ) option will machine the remnant contour, given that a remnant has been
previously created.
Remnant Line Manually
Remnant line manually ( ) option allows cutting the selected contour of the remnant line. The
user will have to select a specific point of the cutting line of the remnant and the system will start
cutting from the nearest point to the clicked point.
Compensated Movement
By means of Compensated movement ( ) option the system will show Compensated

movement dialog box asking for the Cutter radius value as shown below:
538
Figure 473: Compensated movement dialog box
The system will place the head in the correct point depending of the Cutter radius. It will machine
taking into account the compensated trajectory for every selected point. Select Make the offset
dry-run parameter in order to machine continuously without rapid movement.
The Sheet Framework (Automatic)
The sheet framework (Automatic) ( ) option makes the machine cut the sheet framework in
horizontal and vertical cuts. The system will display Cut the sheet framework dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 474: Cut the Sheet framework dialog box
539
▪ Only when the remnant line is cut: If enabled, it will force the script to be cut always
after the remnants have been cut.
▪ Maximum length in X and Y: It determines the maximum rectangle that will be

generated as scrap.
▪ Offset in the parts: Minimum distance between the cut and the parts.
▪ Offset in the edge of the sheet: It configures the distance between the cut and the edge
of the sheet
▪ Cut in holes: This checkbox will determine if the holes are going to be cut or not.
▪ Start in the middle: Instead of cutting the framework lines from up to down, the
segments will be cut from the middle to one side, then it will go to the center again and
to the other side. It is possible to make a lead-in/lead-out in the middle of other types of
cutting segments which belong to a sheet framework such as In any cut, Cuts between
parts, In cuts outside parts and In all cuts.
▪ Order: Using this parameter the user can define the sheet skeleton (frame). The user
will have to select between the following three options:
o By Proximity
o Horizontal + Vertical
o Vertical + Horizontal
The Sheet Framework (Manual)

The sheet framework (Manual) option makes the machine cut the scraps in horizontal and
vertical cuts. The instructions will be inserted in the clicked points. When selected, the system will
Destroy the sheet framework dialog box as shown below:
540
Figure 475: Destroy the Sheet framework dialog box
• Offset in the parts: It is the minimum distance between the cut and the parts.
• Offset in the edge of the sheet: It configures the distance between the cut and the edge
of the sheet.
• Cut in holes: This checkbox will determine if the holes are going to be cut or not. For
example, in the figure if the clicked point:
• Start in the middle: Instead of cutting the framework lines from up to down, the
segments will be cut from the middle to one side, then it will go to the center again and
to the other side.
• Direction: Depending on the selection, i.e. Horizontal or Vertical the system will include
sheet framework destroying hits in the clicked points.
• Order: Using this parameter the user can define the sheet skeleton (frame). The user can
configure the three options they are:
▪ By Proximity
▪ Left + Right and Right + Left: For horizontal cut
▪ Up to down and Down to up: for vertical cut
541
Destroy Sheet Holes

This option is for cutting or combined machines with grid. The system will execute a process in
order to destroy the holes on the sheet. The sheet is placed over the table´s grid. Depending on
the distance of the grid´s lines, sometimes when cutting a hole, it may keep on the table instead
of falling down the table. If it keeps in horizontal position there is no problem, but if the sheet
inclines between two grid lines, it should stand out and the head can collide with it resulting in
head damage. In order to prevent this, the system provides this option so that the holes are cut
in small parts to be sure they always fall down the grid. When selected the system will display
Destroy sheet holes dialog box as shown below:
Figure 476: Destroy Sheet holes dialog box
Introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save the data.
Common Cut between Two Parts

The user will have to click on a part’s segment that is of common cut, and the system will execute
the common cut between the two parts. Once the segment has been selected the system will
display Common cutting parameters dialog box as displayed below:
542
Figure 477: Common cutting parameters dialog box
• Common cut between two parts: This navigation button configures how the common cut
will be executed.
the system will leave without cutting when using common cut.
• Continuous cut: If the lead-out of the first part does not coincide with the lead-in of the
second part, then this option allows making that movement cutting or with a rapid
depending on the selected option.
▪ No: In this case, the movement will always be rapid ones.
▪ Yes: In this case, the movement will be cutting always.
▪ If the distance is small: If the distance is the same or lower than the given one, then the
movement will be made cutting, if higher, with a rapid.
• Execution mode: This option allows selecting the common-cut order that the machine
will follow.
Common Cut of a Grid
4.9.2.21.1 Linear Common Cut of a Grid

By means of this option, the user can cut a grid of parts with common cut. First, the common cut
elements will be cut, while the external contour of the whole set is cut later. Once this option is
543
selected the system will display Selection options toolbar in order to select the parts to machine.
Select them through the options provided and click Accept button located in the same toolbar.
The system will display Common cut of a grid dialog box:
Figure 478: Common cut of a grid dialog box
• Common cut: The user can select between Horizontal + Vertical and Vertical + Horizontal.
• Islands: The user will be able to select between the following options:
▪ Show an error if islands are generated
▪ Cut islands before common cut
▪ Cut islands during the first stage of common cut
544
▪ Cut islands during the second stage of common cut
▪ Cut islands after common cut
• Outside: The user will also be able to configure how to start the common cut.
• Deal with external elements as internals: If enabled, the system will treat external
elements as if they were internal. It will be possible to cut all horizontal elements first and
all the vertical ones afterwards, both the external and internal elements.
• It is allowed to reverse contours: Select this checkbox to invert the contours and to place
the lead-in.
4.9.2.21.2 Common Cut of a Rectangular Parts Grid by Steps

This option allows cutting by steps a set of rectangular parts that have been nested in a common
cut grid on stairs. The system will cut those external elements forming an “L” of both sides of the
grid in the first place. Subsequently, it will cut by parts starting from those elements that have
been already cut.
Parts will be cut from the corner defined by the user as shown in the following image:
Depending on the selected corner, the system will start cutting the external elements of the grid
that form an “L” with such corner. In addition, the user will be able to define the sense in which
these elements are required to be cut:
Once defined how to cut the exterior, the user will be able to decide the order in which parts will
be cut. The options provided are On stairs, In columns and In rows. Apart from this, the user will
also be able to decide the sense in which these elements are required to be cut, as shown in the
following image:
545
Furthermore, there is a chance to configure different lengths for lead-ins and lead-outs, both for
those elements at the beginning or end that compose the “L” of the cutting start:
As well as for the beginning and end of the rest of elements that are cut by means of common
cut between parts:
4.9.2.21.3 Common Cut of a Grid Element of Rectangular Parts

This option is directed to those scenarios with a series of rectangular parts nested in common cut
and aligned either horizontally or vertically. These parts constitute what would be a single grid
element, either with a constant height or with a constant width. By means of this option the user
will be able to follow a C-C-C-D pattern of cutting instructions. Whenever selected, the system will
display the following panel:
546
Figure 479: Common Cut of a Grid Element of Rectangular Parts
First of all, it is necessary to select the nesting parts required to be machined. From the panel
itself the user can access different methods of part selection.
The panel allows the user to configure the following parameters:
▪ Direction: It refers to the direction that the cutting head will follow:
o From left to right: This will be the machining direction in the case of a horizontal
grid element. If it is a vertical grid element, tis selection would be equivalent to
“From bottom to top”.
o From right to left: This will be the machining direction in the case of a horizontal
grid element. In the case of a vertical grid element, this selection would be
equivalent to “From top to bottom”.
▪ Sense: It refers to the sense in which the cutting instructions are machined for each part
(Clockwise or counterclockwise).
▪ Lead-in/lead-out values: For each part, perpendicular to the contour.
Linear Cut of Parts

This option allows cutting the parts in a linear way. It is used to cut the semiautomatic contours
of a group of parts. During the cutting process, the vertical contours of the part will be cut first,
followed by the horizontal ones. After each vertical cutting, the sheet between the parts cut will
547
be evacuated. The system will display Selection options toolbar in order to select the parts to
machine. Select the ones required by means of the options provided and click Accept button
located in the same toolbar. The system will display Linear cut of parts dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 480: Linear cut of parts dialog box
• Vertical: It is possible to choose from which corner of the sheet the machine starts to cut
to the sense of the cuts.
• Horizontal: It allows choosing where the cut starts and the sense of them.
• Cut the first vertical elements at the beginning, before any internal element: This option
allows performing the first sheet cleaning before any other machining of the selected
parts. The system will perform the vertical cut of those elements located at the beginning
of the sheet prior to any other thing, which is intended to perform a first cleaning of the
sheet.
• Inside: The cutting of segments takes place in three ways: first, it cuts the holes inside the
parts and then it cuts the external contours. The machining of the cutting parts is done
both in vertical and horizontal way. In horizontal direction, the cut takes place part by
part and inside the cut takes place line by line.
548
• Only cut the parts: By selecting this option, the sheet framework will not be cut but the
system will cut the vertical elements from the sheet's edge or from one part to another
one. This option will only cut the parts and evacuate them separately.
• Evacuate the scrap as soon as possible: If enabled, the system will proceed to evacuate
the scrap as soon as possible.
• Maximum length of horizontal cut among several parts: Introduce the required
maximum length of horizontal cut.
• Lengthen elements from the cutting radio: This option allows avoiding lengthening of
elements so that some elements will not be cut and so they will be jointed to the sheet.
• Avoid piercing on common cut: If this option is selected, the system tries to avoid the
piercings in those places where the elements have been already cut and they are not
vertex of other cut elements. This option tries to prevent the notches from the piercings.
The system does two passes for that element and avoids those marks.
• Maximum longitude of horizontal cut among several parts: If the system finds several
segments from different parts which are on the same level, it will try to cut one after
another and the number of segment cut will be defined by this parameter.
Repositions by Zones
Repositions by zones ( ) option is available whenever there is no machining and it executes the
machining of the whole sheet. It divides the sheet in a Number of zones (horizontal), which is
configurable in the option itself. The option machines the zones completely from top to bottom
and from bottom to top depending on the initial point of the machining. In each zone it machines
the parts located inside it. In order to do so, sometimes it is necessary to break those parts
located between different repositions. Therefore, it is essential to configure this parameter in
order to allow cutting contours partially in the zone.
Cycles
Cycle menu contains the following options:
Simple Cycle
This option allows machining with a center punch the machining points by inserting rapid
movements between the selected points. In order insert simple cycles perform the following
steps:
549
1. Select Simple Cycle button and the system will initialize the machining.
2. Select the Destination point. A rapid movement will be inserted between the initial point and
the selected point. The user will be able to insert as many points as required by selecting more
points.
Linear Cycle
This option allows the user to machine the part by inserting punching machining points in a
sequence. When selected, the system will display the following options:
Figure 481: Linear cycle options
• Beginning point and distance: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting
the punching machining points in a sequence at a specified angle and distance as follows:
1. Select Beginning point and distance button and then mark the first punching machining point.
Figure 482: Beginning point and distance
▪ n: The number of machining points.
▪ a: The angle at which the punching machining points are to be placed.
▪ d: The distance between the punching machining points.
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The machining will be carried out by
inserting machining points at the specified angle and distance.
550
• Ends and number of points: Select this option in order to machine the part by inserting
punching machining points in a sequence between specified initial and end points as
follows:
1. Select Ends and number of points option and select the initial and end points.
Figure 483: Ends and number of points
3. Introduce the number of punching machining points required in n field.

4. Click OK and the part will be machined inserting the specified number of punching machining
points between initial and end points.
• Distance between two points: Select this option in order to machine the part by inserting
three punching machining points in a sequence as follows:
1. Select Distance between two points option and mark the first machining point.
2. Mark the second and destination points and the part will be machined along the selected
machining points.
Circular Cycle
Circular cycle option allows the user to machine a part by inserting a circular punching machining
sequence. When selected the system will display the following options:
Figure 484: Circular cycle options
• Centre and angles: Select this option in order to machine by inserting a circular sequence
of punching machining points at a specified angle as follows:
551
1. Select Centre and angles option and mark the center point.
Figure 485: Centre and angles
▪ r: Distance value from the center point.
▪ n: Number of machining points.
▪ a: Angle value between the machining points.
▪ ai: Initial angle value of the first machining point in the circular sequence.
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The part will be machined by inserting a
circular sequence of punching machining points.
• Centre and beginning point: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting a
circular sequence of punching machining points form a specified initial point as follows:
1. Select Centre and beginning point and mark the center and initial points.
Figure 486: Centre and beginning point
552
3. Introduce the required values in “n” (number of punching machining points) and “a” (angle
between machining points) fields and click OK button.
4. The part will be machined by inserting a circular sequence of the machining points with an
initial point and at a specified angle.
• Distance between two points: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting
the initial and end punching machining points as follows:
1. Select Distance between two points option and mark the Initial point.
2. Mark the second and end points.
3. The part will be machined from the initial point to the end point.
• Arc: Select this option in order to machine an arc by inserting a specified number of
punching machining points as follows:
1. Select Arc button and select the arc required to machine.

Figure 487: Arc
3. Introduce the number of machining points required in “n” field and click OK button.
4. The arc will be machined with the specified number of machining points.
Grid Cycle
This option allows machining a part by inserting punching machining points in two different
directions if the form of a grid.
Figure 488: Grid cycle options
• Corner and number: Select this option in order to machine a part in the form of a grid at a
specified angle and distance as follows:
553
1. Click Corner and number button and then mark the initial point from where the user wants to
machine the part.
Figure 489: Corner and number
▪ n1: Number of machining points in the first direction.
▪ n2: Number of machining points in the second direction.
▪ a: Angle value in which the machining is done.
▪ d1: Distance value between the consecutive machining points in the first direction.
▪ d2: The distance value between the consecutive machining points in the second
direction.
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The part will be machined in the form of a
grid.
• Corner and distances: Select this option in order to machine a part in the form of a grid
with five points at a specified distance as follows:
1. Select Corner and distances option and select or mark an origin point.
2. Select or mark initial and end points in X axis. The end point must be at a distance that is an
exact multiple of the initial point in X axis.
3. Select or mark initial and end points in Y axis. The end point must be at a distance that is an
exact multiple of the initial point in Y axis.
4. The part will be machined with the five points at the specified distances.
554
Irregular Cycle
This option allows machining a part by inserting a cycle on a lead-in/lead-out or on the points of
different selected elements. When selected the system will display the following options:
Figure 490: Irregular cycle options
• Cycles on Lead-in/Lead-out: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting a

cycle on the existing lead-in or lead-out as follows:
1. Select Cycles on Lead-in/Lead-out button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required lead-in/lead-out by means of the options provided and click Accept button
located in the same toolbar.
3. The cycle will be created in the selected lead-in/lead-out.
• Cycles on points: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting a cycle on
selected points of existing elements as follows:
1. Select Cycles on points option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required points of the existing elements by means of the options provided and click
Accept button located in the same toolbar.
3. The cycle will be created within the selected points.
Modify
Micro-Joints
Micro-joints ( ) option allows introducing micro-joints in the parts after the machining process
has been done. When selected the system will display Micro-joints dialog box as shown below:
555
Figure 491: Micro-joints dialog box
Introduce the Width value of micro-joint, which is the distance that will be left as micro-joint in the
clicked parts. Depending on the clicked point and the option selected here, the micro-joint can be
inserted in different sections of the contour which comprehend Middle, End and Picked point. This
change can be executed in more than just the clicked part depending on the option selected in
Make on section. The user will be able to select between The selected part, Identical parts with the
same angle and All identical parts.
Automatic Micro-joints at End of Contour
Automatic micro-joints at the end of contour ( ) option allows placing automatic micro-joints
at the end of the contour. When selected, the system will display Automatic micro-joints at the
end of the contour dialog box as shown below.
Figure 492: Automatic micro-joints at the end of the contour dialog box
556
1. Select By quality checkbox in order to base the micro-joints on cut quality. If it is not selected,
the system will display Width value of micro-joint field to be filled by the user with the required
value.
2. In Apply in contours section, select the required size of inside and outside contours to introduce
the micro-joints.
3. Introduce the Maximum length and Maximum width of small contours, as well as the Minimum
length and Minimum width of big contours.
4. After introducing the required data, click OK button in order to introduce the micro joints at
the end of the contour automatically.
Delete Micro-joints
Delete micro-joints ( ) option allows deleting the selected micro-joints without erasing the
rest of the machining of the part. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
1. Select Delete micro-joints option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required micro-joint(s) by means of the options provided and click Accept button so
that the system will automatically deletes it.
3. Click Finish button in order to disable this option.
Cut Micro-Joints after Cutting of Contours

Cut micro-joints after cutting of contours ( ) option allows cutting the micro-joints and the
elements with no cut technology after machining the sheet. Whenever this option is selected, the
system will display a panel on the right side of the window. On this panel, the user can configure
the following parameters:
Figure 493: Modify – Cut Micro-joints after Cutting of Contours
• By contours: If enabled, the cutting of the micro-joints will be after cutting each contour.
557
• Also on No Cut: If enabled, the cutting of the micro-joints will be after cutting each
working zone.
• Maximum Distance of No Cut: Here the user can determine the micro-joints to be cut
with a smaller length than the one here introduced.
• By multihead: By means of this checkbox the user can decide whether the system will use
a multihead or not.
• Position: Here the user can decide the position of the cut between the Beginning (on the
part´s contour), the Middle of the micro-joint or the End of the micro-joint.
Beginning End Middle
Order Machining
Once the machining has been executed, Order machining ( ) option allows modifying the
order in which the parts will be machined. When this option is selected the system will display
Order cut sequence the following four options:
Figure 494: Order Machining options
The dialog box displayed will vary depending on the selected option as shown below:
• Order Cut Sequence: By means of a sequential selection the system orders a set of
machining instructions.
558
Figure 495: Order cut sequence dialog box
• Order Cut Sequence by Window: Using the selection by window the system orders a set
of machining instructions.
Figure 496: Order cut sequence by window dialog box
• Order the Parts Cutting: By means of a sequential selection, the system orders a set of
parts. The system will display the current cutting order, so that the user can make the
desired changes until the required order is achieved.
Figure 497: Order the cut of the parts dialog box
• Order the Parts Cutting by Window: Using the selection by window the system orders a
set of parts. The system will display the current cutting order, so that the user can make
the desired changes until the required order is achieved.
559
Figure 498: Order the cut of the parts by window dialog box
• Order Cut Sequence in a Common Cut Grid: Using this option the user can change the
cutting order after executing Common Cut Grid option. It allows the user to select
vertical and horizontal cuts to set them in the required order. First of all, the base contour
must be selected, followed by the next contours to order.
Move Special Text
Move special text ( ) option allows moving the written text in the different parts of the
nesting. When selected, the system will display INKJET dialog box as shown below:
Figure 499: INKJET dialog box
• If Automatic checkbox is not enabled, the system will do it manually. On the other hand, if
enabled, new fields will be displayed in the dialog box.
• The user will have to introduce the Correct position of the Offset and Search step in X and
Y dimensions (mm).
• Delete the text if it does not fit in the part parameter, as the name indicates, deletes the
text that does not fit in the part.
• Once all parameters have been set as required, click OK button in order to move the
selected text.
560
Real References of the Remnant
Real references of the remnant ( ) option provides a solution to the differences between
references when a remnant is generated. The system will display Real references of the remnant
Figure 500: Real references of the remnant dialog box
Modify Initialization
This option allows modifying the following initialization parameters of the machine:
• Start up ( ) option enables the configuration of parameters of the Initialization section

of a machine.
• Place the clamps with the keyboard ( ) option allows modifying the number of clamps,
as well as the distance between them, all of it by means of the keyboard.
• Place the clamps with the mouse ( ) option allows modifying the position of the
clamps using the mouse. The user must select the points where the clamps will be
located. The same number of points must be entered as the number of clamps the
machine contains.
• From point ( ) option enables the configuration of the parameters of the From points
section of a machine. The From point defines the default values of the initial coordinates
relative to the position of the cutting head.
• Move the from point interactively ( ) option allows changing the from point of the
machining by means of the mouse.
• Sheet parameters ( ) option enables the user to configure the Sheets parameters for a
machine.
• Upload/download sheets ( ) option enables the user to configure the Sheet

loading/unloading parameters of a machine.
561
• Cutting parameters ( ) option allows configuring the general cutting parameters

together with the auxiliary parameters, contour attributes and compensations by quality.
• Postprocessor data ( ) option allows configuring the system to ask for some values
which will be used by the postprocessor in order to generate the CNC code. By means of
this option, the user can change the data of these parameters before the postprocessor
is executed.
Do Not Pass Over The Sheet Clamps

Do not pass tool over the sheet clamps ( ) option makes sure that no process will exceed the
clamps at any moment during the machining process.
Labels Treatment
Labels treatment ( ) option allows modifying the labels. The user can also create labels to
generate subprograms, which is useful l to define them with the needed instructions.
• Insert label begin ( ): With this option the user can place a begin label in the desired
machining position.
• Insert label end ( ): With this option the user can place an end label in the desired
position.
• Create label ( ): With this option the user can create labels to generate subprograms.
The system allows the user creating labels regardless of whether other labels already
exist for the selected instructions. If the system detects labels related to one of the
selected instructions, it will display a dialog box asking the user whether it is required to
delete the related labels in order to add the new one. If so, the related labels will be
erased and the new one added. On the contrary, the system will display a message
indicating that it has not been possible to add the new label. The system will detect those
instructions associated to the ones selected in order to include them inside beginning and
end labels. The location of labels will be based on the following two principles:
▪ Prior to the first instruction, the system will search for the following types of
instructions: tool load, compensation, corrector, beginning of subprogram, etc. So that
they are placed right after the beginning of the label.
▪ After the last instruction, the system will search for instructions such as evacuation and
end of subprogram, between others, so that they are placed before the end label.
562
Regarding the selection mode of the machining instructions, the system will display as pre-
selected the instructions comprised between the two selected. Once the first instruction has
been selected, those instructions hovered over will become highlighted so that the user has a
clear picture of what is being selected.
• Delete labels by selection ( ): With this option the user can delete the selected labels.
• Delete inner labels ( ): With this option the user can delete only the inner labels.
• Delete outer labels ( ): With this option the user can delete only the outer labels.
• Delete all labels ( ): With this option the user can delete all labels.
Subprogram Treatment
When the machining is repetitive and involves a considerable number of parts, performing the
calculation automatically can take a long time. With Subprogram treatment ( ) options,
machining is defined for only one part and then the information is copied for the rest of the
parts.
4.9.4.11.1 Rectangular Subprogram
Rectangular subprogram ( ) option allows to execute a part in a subprogram. It will prompt

for the number of executions, and if the user wants to order the machining or to execute it part
by part.
4.9.4.11.2 Delete All Subprograms
Delete all subprograms ( ) option enables the cancellation of all the definitions and
performances of the subprograms that have already been machined. This option deletes all the
generated subprograms.
Modify Extraction
Modify Extraction ( ) option enables the user modifying the chute cycles by means of
Selection toolbar.
Delete Extraction
Delete Extraction ( ) option allows deleting the required chute cycles by means of the options
provided in Selection toolbar.
563
Insert Manual Lead-in/Lead-outs on Machined Contours

By means of this option, the user will be able to create lead-ins/lead-outs manually and apply
them to contours that are already machined. This is especially interesting for those cases in which
the user introduces manual contours or when several parts are machined in common cut.
If the first or the last element of a contour is a lead-in/lead-out or a micro-joint, the user will not
be able to introduce this type of manual lead-ins/lead-outs.
Modify Lead-in/Lead-outs
Modify lead-in/lead-outs ( ) option allows setting the required lead-in/lead-outs for your parts.
The user will be able to modify their position and data, as well as applying a gap and offset.
EcoPierce
This new machining mode reduces the number of required piercings to cut the parts of a
nesting. By means of this mode, whenever cutting a part, the system performs a series of cuts
(EcoPierce) on the sheet framework so that the cutting of the rest of the parts starts from these
cuts. This avoids having to make a complete piercing on these parts, since the cut starts on the
material that has been already cut. In these cases, as the cutting starts in a zone without material,
the piercing will be much faster and reduce the consumable consumption, thereby saving time
and costs.
Find detailed below the options related to the new machining mode:
• Automatic EcoPierce ( ): In a nesting with machined parts, this option will generate
automatically the possible EcoPierce between parts to avoid the highest number of
piercings. The system will automatically check between which parts it would be best to
insert an EcoPierce as well as the insertion position. Whenever this option is executed the
564
system will ask the user the geometrical data of the EcoPierce together with a series of
parameters to control its placement:
▪ Maximum distance: It refers to the maximum distance between two parts to be able to
place an EcoPierce between them.
▪ Lead-in minimum length: It refers to the minimum distance between the cut (EcoPierce)
and the part in which the lead-in is executed. If the system does not obtain a position
that respects this minimum lead-in length, the corresponding EcoPierce will not be
generated.
▪ Apply in contours: It specifies whether it is only possible to apply it between external

contours or if it is possible to generate EcoPierce between internal and external
contours.
• Manual EcoPierce ( ): This option allows introducing an EcoPierce manually between

two contours selected by the user. In addition to this, the user will also be able to specify
the position where the EcoPierce is required to be inserted. In order to execute this
option, the user will be asked the following parameters:
▪ Automatic position: If enabled, the system will search for the best position to introduce
the EcoPierce between the two selected contours. In order to do this, the user must
specify the Maximum distance and Minimum lead-in length detailed in the previous
section.
565
▪ Move only orthogonally: If disabled, the position of the EcoPierce will be directly
defined by the two pints selected by the user. On the other hand, if enabled, the
position of the EcoPierce will be modified over time to try that wherever possible the
lead-in is perpendicular to the first cutting element of the part.
▪ Overlapping test: If enabled, the system will check whether there is overlapping
between the EcoPierce and the parts. Given the case there is overlapping, the EcoPierce
will not be introduced.
In the event that there is already an EcoPierce between the selected contours, this option
will delete the existing EcoPierce and introduce the new one with the data and position specified by
the user. This way, by means of this option the user will be able to modify the EcoPierce between
two contours.
• Delete EcoPierce ( ): This option allows deleting the EcoPierce selected by the user. In
order to select the required EcoPierce the user will be provided with the usual selection
options: element selection, by window capture, by trap, all and invert selection.
Whenever an EcoPierce is deleted, all its elements will also be deleted. That is to say, the
cuts on which the piercing must be executed and the lead-in element related to those
cuts.
566
Avoid Any Holes Already Cut

Avoid any holes already cut ( ) option helps the user avoiding the collision of the head with
the holes that have been already cut.
Modify the Head Management

Modify the head management ( ) option allows the user adjusting the head management
manually.
Delete Every Head Up/Down Instruction
Delete every head-up/down instruction ( ) option cancels and deletes every head-up/down
instruction that has been previously generated.
Modify Head Management of Rapids
Modify head management of rapids ( ) option allows introducing head-up/down instructions

in rapid movements of the machining.
Continuous Cut Automatically
Continuous cut automatically ( ) option will change the rapid movements into cutting
movements. In other words, the displacements will be executed cutting.
Continuous Cut Semiautomatically
Continuous cut semiautomatically ( ) option, as the previous option, converts the rapid
movements to continuous cutting. The difference consists in the fact that it is executed
semiautomatically.
567
Modify Movements
Modify movements ( ) option, as the name indicates, allows modifying the movements of the
machining. This option is very useful to avoid the turrets that pass over a dangerous zone.
Modify Compensation
Modify compensation ( ) option allows the user defining the compensation type that will be
used for all the machining process and which is located in the Automatic machining section of the
machine configuration. It allows modifying applied compensation parameters for the contours of
all the parts that have been nested on the sheet.
Modify Compensation of a Contour

Modify compensation of a contour ( ) option allows modifying the existing compensation
parameters of a contour taking into account both System compensation and CN compensation.
Quality Dependent Compensations
Quality dependent compensations ( ) option allows applying system compensation and

control corrections depending on the cutting quality of the parts and the type of cut. This option
enables defining a different compensation for each one of the twelve cutting qualities.
Copy Machining of a Part
Copy machining of a part ( ) option allows copying the machining of a parts that has been
already executed to equal parts in the sheet. It is very useful when the user makes the machining
of a part in a very specific way and wants to make the rest of the parts following the same
process.
Delete Machining of Selected Parts
Delete machining of selected parts ( ) option will automatically delete all the machining of the
parts selected by means of Selection options.
Modify the Reposition Point
Modify the reposition point ( ) option makes the system ask for the reposition point once the
machining has been executed. It is used for changing the place where the head or the pistons
have been lower for reposition.
568
Modify the Zero Point of the Sheet
Modify the zero point of the sheet ( ) option modifies the reference point of the sheet by
placing a point on the required place.
Replace Head with Another
Replace head with another ( ) option allows the user giving in just one instruction a set of
instructions.
Group Cycles on Lead-ins
Group cycles on lead-ins ( ) option allows the user grouping cycles on lead-ins. This helps to
optimize and reorder and allows the user setting he maximum distance between cycles, among
other options.
Figure 501: Group cycles on lead-ins window
• Generation of labels: This parameter indicates if the user is going to generate labels and
of which type. It is possible to generate labels By parts or By group.
• Orthogonality tolerance: It indicates the maximum tolerance (respecting the X or Y axis)

between two parts.
Special Cut for Detached Arcs

Special cut for detached arcs ( ) option can be used to cut the arcs added to the external
pockets in the part module, so that the external part is damaged as little as possible. This option
always cuts these arcs form the middle to both ends, which prevents ignition on the outside of
the contour.
Options
Optimize
4.9.5.1.1 Optimize Corrector Changes

Refer to section 3.8.5.1 Optimize corrector changes.
569
Speed Rates
Refer to section 3.8.5.2 Speed Rates.
Postprocessor Words
Refer to section 3.8.5.3 Postprocessor Words.
Contour Attributes
Refer to section 3.8.5.4 Contour Attributes.
CN Compensation
Refer to section 3.8.5.5 CN Compensation.
System Compensation
Refer to section 3.8.5.6 System Compensation.
Change Cutting Direction

Refer to section 3.6.4.12 Change Cutting Direction.
Contour Ordering
Refer to section 3.6.4.13 Contour Ordering.
Component Removal
Part Extraction
Refer to section 3.8.6.1 Part Extraction.
Assign Extractions
Refer to section 3.8.6.2 Assign Extractions.
Assign Boxes
Refer to section 3.8.6.3 Assign Boxes.
View
View CNC
View CNC ( ) option shows the CNC code of the sheet. The nesting has to be saved in order to
generate the CNC code.
570
Current Status
Refer to section 3.8.7.1 Current Status.
System Efficiency
System Efficiency ( ) option displays System efficiency dialog box as shown below:
Figure 502: System efficiency dialog box
The previous dialog box provides information about the use of sheets for the performed task and
the number of machined sheets.
Clamps and Work Zone
Clamps and Work zone ( ) option will display Clamps and work zone dialog box. This dialog
box provides the following information:
• Clamps: Locations and zone, and whether the fixed position of the clamps will be shown
or not.
• Work Zone: Length and Width, Minimum and Maximum X and Y coordinates in the
current part reposition, ant the added reposition which is the sheet´s cutting point of
origin.
Verify the Machining

Refer to section 3.8.7.2 Verify the machining.
Verify Unstable Contours
As the name indicates, Verify unstable contours ( ) option checks whether the contours are
stable or not. This option is related to the Grid configuration (refer to 1.2. Grid section) and will
only be useful whenever there is a grid configured. The system will display Verify unstable
contours dialog box as shown below:
571
Figure 503: Verify unstable contours dialog box
• Do only with cut parts: It verifies unstable contours only with cut parts.
• Apply micro-joints in machined unstable contours: This option applies the micro-joint to
parts that fall or may fall off the grid. It is possible to apply it by quality or to introduce a
determined width value for the micro-joint.
• Display parts with unstable contours: This option allows the visualization of the parts
situation whether it may fall or not. The image represents the shape in which the part is
going to be scratched taking into account the color used. If special visualization is
selected, it will not appear when applying this option, as it would be useless (the
scratching will not be seen). For some reason if the parts have to be moved on the sheet,
this option should be re-selected to update the scratch type. This is a temporary option,
and will no longer be visualized once the sheet has been changed.
Multihead
Multihead ( ) option displays the list of heads along with the capabilities and distances of
each one. The system will display Multihead data dialog box as shown below:
572
Figure 504: Multihead data dialog box
The capabilities of each head are shown with the following icons:
Sheet
Reposition
Reposition ( ) option allows the user carrying out hand-operated repositions. The user must
select the positioning point of the pistons, headstock or shear as well as a positioning point for
the operation area.
Move Clamps
Move clamps ( ) option allows fixing the sheet with the turret head or with the piston
while moving clamps.
Sheet Turn Over
Sheet turn over ( ) option enables the configuration of the parameters located in Sheet turn
over section of the machine. The system will display Sheet turn over dialog box as shown below:
573
Figure 505: Sheet turn over dialog box
• Turn over type: The user will be able to select between the following three options:
▪ Manual rotation of 180º
▪ Manual rotation of 90º
▪ Manual symmetry
• Cancel reposition when executing the turn over: Using this option the user can cancel
reposition. If there were any reposition before the turnover of a sheet, after making the
turnover, all the reposition will be cancelled keeping the working zone as it was at the
beginning.
• Offset of the work zone after the turn over: With this option, after the turnover of the
sheet, the system will apply an offset to the working zone, which means that the working
zone will be a little bit displaced from its position before the turnover.
This parameter is only useful if the contact point of the sheet and the machine pin are not
coincident with the initial sheet border. In this case the sheet will be separates in X from its initial
position.
574
View
Display
Nesting Explorer
Nesting explorer ( ) button allows visualizing a tree structure by subjobs, nestings and
nested parts of a job. When selected, the system will display Nesting explorer window at the left
hand side.
This window visualizes the active job, the nesting and the most important information related to
them, as well as all the nested parts in each nesting. It displays the name of the sheet, dimensions
of the sheet, quantity of parts and number of equal sheets in the bracket.
Information related to subjobs, nestings and parts is displayed in three different ways attending
to their position in the tree, their icons or the text each element shows. They are as follows:
1. Position: Elements in level 1 of the tree are always subjobs, those in level 2 are nestings and
those in level 3 are parts:
2. Icons: The list of icons that are included here divided into three parts, such as:
• Subjobs: This includes both active and non-active jobs. The subjobs show information
about the active jobs, available machine, material and its thickness. To make changes in
the sheet, right-click on the sheet of the subjob that allows the user to delete, block,
open, automatic nesting/machining, and view the properties of the sheet part.
• Nestings: Those parts that are displayed under nesting are: In design, Available, In
workshop, Finished and Multiprogram and so on.
Nesting Viewer
Nesting viewer ( ) option shows the subjob part in thumbnails mode. It is possible to view or
hide a part that has to be nested and machined. When selected the system will display or hide
Nesting viewer window next to Nesting explorer on the left hand side of the window.
The user is provided with nested parts, reference, quantity, dimensions, use percentage, CNC,
sheet and weight of the nested sheet.
575
Machining Window
Machining window ( ) option visualizes information about the Machining instructions and the
Parts. Machining instruction section provides data such as type of contour, compensation, length
and corrector. On the other hand, Part section provides the length, width and angle, as well as
the part parameters.
Modules Viewer
Modules viewer ( ) option allows the user to add, delete, insert and block the desired modules
in a very handy way. This panel can be activated and deactivated from the View tab located in the
Ribbon (Ribbon controls). The user will find the option Modules viewer between the options
Machining window and Part viewer. When right-clicking on Modules viewer, the following
options are displayed:
Figure 506: Modules viewer options
• New: Through this option the user will be able to create customized modules selecting
the parts or the modules given in a sheet. Once the parts that will form the new module
are selected, the selection will be accepted, and the module will be displayed in the panel.
It is in the contextual menu and is always visible.
• Create modules: Through this option the user will be able to create modules based on the
ones already created. It is possible to have modules with different geometry.
• Semi-automatic: This option will select the module that better suits the sheet and will
introduce it, without giving the option to select it or position it. It is in the contextual
menu and is always visible.
• Explode: Once the modules are introduced in a sheet they work as a single entity, which
is not always the most convenient option. By means of this option a complete module
becomes a group of independent parts. This option only takes effect in the module
576
placed in the sheet, having no impact on the modules created in the panel. It is in the
contextual menu and is always visible.
• Import stored modules: This option allows visualizing and importing the stored modules
in the current job. The imported modules will be displayed in the Modules Viewer and the
user will be able to use the same options as with the rest of modules (Insert, Place,
Block/Unblock, Explode, Delete, etc.). An icon will be displayed in the Modules Viewer to
specify that it is an imported module and help the user distinguish between the different
types of modules.
Whenever the option is selected, the system will display Import Stored Modules window,
which displays the modules stored in the database and provides filter and display options
for an easier selection of the modules to be imported.
• Store module: This option allows storing a module in the database. The user must select
the parts that will compose the module from the current nesting and specify a reference
for the module in question. The parts may have technology (lead-ins/lead-outs, micro-
joints, cutting technology, etc.) and/or be machined, and they will always be stored in the
module with the technology and machining they have in such nesting. When it comes to
import the module, the user will be able to decide whether the module will be imported
with those technologies and machinings. This option only stores the module in the
database. The selected parts will not be modified, and the generated module will not be
imported in the current job.
Part Viewer
Part Viewer ( ) option shows the list of parts of a subjob in thumbnails mode. It is possible to
view or hide a part that has to be nested and machined. The system will display or hide Part
Viewer window at the bottom of Nesting and Machining window.
It indicates the nested parts, blocked parts, selected parts with available quantity, nested
quantity and blocked quantity between other details. Whenever the cursor is hovered over the
image of any element of the view or the list, the system will display an enlarged image along with
a number of textual information. This way, the identification process of elements becomes much
577
easier. The enlarged image can be enabled or disabled and the position of the screen in which it
should appear can be set by the user. In addition, it is also possible to configure the visualization
time as well as the image to display. Find below a table that details the existing part statuses as
well as their graphic information:
Figure 507: Part statuses and graphic information table
578
Part List
Part List ( ) option shows the list of parts to be machined in a job. The user will visualize the
Reference of the part together with the Labor ticket, Pending quantity, Nested quantity and
Dimensions.
When the user drags the mouse on any part in the part list window as shown above, the part
name and part dimensions will be displayed in the tool tip. If the system is in mm, the system will
display 3 decimal positions and if the system is in inches, the system will display 5 decimal
positions.
The user can access to the contextual menu clicking with the right button of the mouse over the
part list. The available options are:
• New: The system will open the drawing module allowing to create a new part which will
be automatically inserted into the job.
• Open: The selected part will be edited in the drawing module
• Block: The part will appear blocked and will not be used for the nesting until is unblocked
again.
• Delete: The part will be deleted from the job, but not from the database.
• Import: The user will be able to import pending parts of manufacturing orders list, import
parts from database and import DXF files.
• Quantity: The user can increase the quantity of available parts from this part list.
• Priority: When doing automatic nesting process, the system will try to place first the
parts with higher priority.
• Properties: From the part list it is possible to edit the part properties using this option.
• Group/Block: The user can BLOCK or UNBLOCK several parts together. By activating this
option, the selected part will change their status.
• View: With this option the user will be able to select Large icon (existent mode) and List.
Using this list mode, the parts will be displayed on a grid with the part reference and an
icon showing the status of the part. The possible statuses are the following:
579
Pending quantity > 0< Blocked part
Pending quantity = 0 Closed part
Pending quantity < 0 Wrong part
• Order: The order the parts are shown in the part list can be changed from here
• Size: In the part list there is a bitmap representation of each part, the size of this small
draw can be changed here.
Filler Parts Viewer

The Nesting and Machining module has two different panels in order to differentiate whether the
part is a filler part or a normal one. This treatment intends to transform those filler parts available
in the database into normal parts, due to the fact that the manufacturing of a certain number of
those parts is required.
Filler parts have an unlimited number by default, which can be modified at any time. This
treatment allows having the same part twice in a same job, both as normal and as a filler part
which is very useful in those cases in which only a particular number of parts is necessary, but
would be useful to have more if possible.
Filler Parts Viewer List

It is possible to visualize the filler part in the form of a list. There are the following details:
• Reference: It shows the reference of the associated part.
• Labor ticket: This is a part numbering system for database identification.
• Pending quantity: Number of parts which have not been nested.
• Nested quantity: It shows the parts which are already nested.
• Dimensions: It indicates the minimum rectangular dimension to nest the parts.
580
Simulation Window
Simulation Window ( ) option shows the Simulation window of the machined part where the
user can set the speed and view the cutter radius between other options:
Find the different sections provided in the previous window briefly described below:
• In the first section it is possible to set the Speed percentage.
• Operation section displays the cutting quality, cutting operation with respect to X axis, Y
axis, and the cutter radius.
• The next section provides information on heads used and their positions, compensation
system and control.
• Use the arrow buttons to view the required simulation process.
• Use the other buttons at the bottom of the window to pause, stop the operation, fast
forward the simulation, move to the previous operation, current operation, and so on.
This window provides information regarding the cutting quality only when the machining
operation is executed.
Multihead Window
Multihead Window ( ) option shows the Number of heads (up to 20 heads at the same time.
of the active machine and the Distance between them in millimeters. Here you will be able to
apply Automatic distances or modify the previous data and save it.
There is an option related to the way parts corresponding to multihead are placed together. The
user will be able to indicate whether the distance between the heads is free or automatically
581
established. In case of being free type, the distance is established in the window. On the
contrary, in case of being automatic, the distance between them is minimized. Apart from these
two options, it is also possible to adjust the parts to the sheet.
By means of the second option, the user can indicate the system to make use of the current
configuration in Multihead window of Automatic nesting. Thanks to this it is possible to introduce
some parts manually to a determined distance and complete the sheet maintaining that distance
regardless of what has been previously configured in Multihead data window. If this option is
enabled, the user will be able to activate Work with fixed number of heads parameter, which will
use the number set in the window. The number of heads can also be variable; therefore, it is
possible to make use of the configured number of heads or less.
Sheet Simulation
Sheet Simulation ( ) option simulates the sheet of the part. This application will be active until
the user clicks it again to disable it.
It is also possible to press F12 key on the keyboard to use this application.
Color Display
Color Display ( ) option allows visualizing parts with filling colors to facilitate associating the
parts nested on the sheet with those on the part viewer.
Figure 509: Special display
The system will display Color Display dialog box as shown below:
582
Here the user can set how to display the Nesting and the Machining, whether it is required to Fill
the sheet, as well as the Color assignment mode. This last field provides access to the reference
field selection window:
In this window, the user can choose a field from all the available ones, and the nesting parts will
be colored according to the value contained in such field.
Redraw
Select Redraw ( ) option in order to visualize the drawing of the machined part.
583
It is also possible to press the F9 key on the keyboard to use this application.
Zoom
Zoom All
Select Zoom all ( ) option to zoom the part to the maximum size of the screen
It is also possible to press F8 key on the keyboard to use this application.
Zoom Window
Select Zoom window ( ) option in order to zoom the selected part as follows:
1. Select Zoom window button and mark the first point of the window to select the part that has
to be enlarged.
2. Move the cursor till the desired end point and mark the end point of the window.
3. The selected part will be enlarged.
It is also possible to press F4 key on the keyboard in order to use this application.
Zoom Previous
Select Zoom previous ( ) option to go back to the previous screen.
It is also possible to press F7 key on the keyboard in order to use this application.
Zoom Dynamic
Select Zoom Dynamic ( ) option to zoom the part to a required size as follows:
1. Select Zoom dynamic button and the system will display a window on the part.
2. Click and move the cursor until getting the desired window size and click.
584
3. Repeat the previous steps until the desired size is reached and right click. The part will be
enlarged to view based on the window size.
Zoom Scale
Select Zoom Scale ( ) option in order to zoom the part based on proportionate values as
follows:
1. Select Zoom Scale button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 510: Zoom scale values
2. Introduce the required proportionate values and click OK button.

3. The part will be enlarged based on the proportionate values previously specified.
585
Full Screen
Full screen ( ) option allows visualizing the full drawing screen without the toolbars. The
system will display Full screen button on the drawing window, which the user will have to select
in order to return to normal screen.
Simulation
Refer to section 3.10.1 Simulate.
Program
Refer to section 3.10.1.1 Program.
ISN Position
Refer to section 3.10.1.2 ISN Position.
Mouse Positioning
Refer to section 3.10.1.3 Mouse Positioning.
Begin
Refer to section 3.10.1.4 Begin.
Previous
Refer to section 3.10.1.5 Previous.
Next
Refer to section 3.10.1.6 Next.
End
Refer to section 3.10.1.7 End.
Run
Refer to section 3.10.1.8 Run.
Previous Tool
Refer to section 3.10.1.9 Previous Tool.
586
Next Tool
Refer to section 3.10.1.10 Next Tool.
Previous Reposition
Previous reposition ( ) option allows navigating in the simulation program to the previous
reposition.
Next Reposition
Next reposition ( ) option allows navigating in the simulation program to the next reposition.
Previous Multihead
Previous multihead ( ) option the user can go back to the last change of head in the
machining program.
Next Multihead
Next multihead ( ) option the user can go back to the next change of head in the machining
program.
Previous Chute
By means of Previous chute ( ) option the simulation program will be placed just after the
previous extraction or chute movement.
Next Chute
By means of Next chute ( ) option the simulation program will be placed just after the next
chute or extraction movement.
Simulate CNC
CNC Simulation ( ) option carries out a 3D CNC simulation of the active job.
587
Applications
Assign Palletization Suction Cups
Assign Palletization suction cups ( ) option enables the user assigning suction cups to parts
to be palletized. This application is managed by the following four commands:
• Automatic ( ): Automatic assignment of suction cups.
• Delete ( ): Deletes all the suction cups assigned by Automatic and Modify options.
• Modify ( ): Allows modifying the assignment manually.
• Configure ( ): Allows defining the configurations to use while executing Automatic

option.
Assign Download Point to Pallet
Assign download point to pallet ( ) option allows the user fixing a predefined stacking
position to a part option protected-pallet information. It will assign to sheared parts or remnants
the download point to pallet. It will display the position, stacking position and information to
recognize if it is symmetry of the original part.
Machining of a Part with 2 Heads
Machining of a part with 2 heads ( ) protected option determines whether the contours that
can be cut with one single head are going to be cut using multiple heads, in other words, whether
the contours will be cut simultaneously or not. This option is
Machining of the External Area of a Part with Multihead
Machining of the external area of a part with multihead ( ) option allows the user defining
the order of cutting. Select the part to machine and the system will display Machining of the out
of a part with multihead dialog box as shown below:
588
Figure 511: Machining of the external area of a part with multihead dialog box
• Contours machining order: Select the desired contour direction.
• Left & right cut direction: Select the required cut direction.
• Horizontal cut direction: Select the required cut direction.
• Use system compensation in generated open contours: Select this checkbox in order to
use the system compensation in generated open contour.
• Lead-in/lead-out in vertical elements: Here the user can select between the following
options:
▪ Perpendicular lead-in and without lead-out: The lead-ins in vertical elements will be
perpendicular to them and no lead-out will be generated.
▪ Lead-in/lead-out in the same direction: The lead-ins/lead-outs carried out in vertical

elements will be perpendicular to these elements. The lead-in/lead-out length will be the
one configured in the automatic lead-in/lead-out values of type contour 1 (option 6) for
that quality.
Common Cut with Multihead
Common cut with multihead ( ) option allows machining different lines of rectangular parts
of different width and length nested in common cut with multihead. By means of this option, all
the horizontal cuts of the parts will be machined with multihead using all the heads needed to cut
them in one go. Vertical cuts will be carried out with only one head.
Select the part to machine and the system will display Common cut with multihead dialog box as
shown below, which provides the same information as in the previous option:
589
Figure 512: Common cut with multihead dialog box
Linear Common Cut with Multihead
Linear common cut with multihead ( ) option allows common cutting of linear elements of
different parts with multihead. All the necessary cuts will be machined with multihead using the
required heads. In order to activate this option, the common cut with several parts has to be
activated with the parts nested.
Parts Evacuation by Lift after Machining
Parts evacuation by lift after machining ( ) option allows evacuating parts by lift on cutting
machines after performing the machining. This option is protected and Lift option will have to be
disabled in the machine configuration in order to be able to run it. When selected the system will
display a drop-down list providing the following options:
• Automatic ( ): The system will perform the evacuations automatically, testing all the
available pressing points defined by the testing grid. The system will decide the best
evacuation point for each part depending on the best gravity center, the maximum
number of active suction cups…etc.
• Delete ( ): Deletes the evacuation previously defined. In order to select the

evacuation, the user must select the Lift point. Select the chute cycle to delete by means
of the options provided in Selection toolbar provided by the system.
• Configure ( ): This option displays the configuration window in order to define the
suction cups carriage, suction cups, stripes… and all the headed parameters to evacuate.
The most important difference to the Standard lift is the pressing point.
590
Figure 513: Configure parts evacuation
If More button is selected, the system will display Lift dialog box as shown below:
Figure 514: Lift dialog box
If the Navigation ( ) button is selected, the system will display Suction cups carriage data dialog
box:
591
Figure 515: Suction cups carriage data dialog box
Introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save it.
• Manual ( ): The user can define the evacuations interactively, selecting the part to be
evacuated, the strip positions and the active suction cups by means of the options
provided in Selection toolbar.
• Move ( ): This option allows moving interactively a previously defined evacuation. In

order to select the evacuation to modify, the user must select the required Lift point.
• Modify ( ): This option allows modifying interactively a previously defined evacuation.

In order to select to evacuation to modify, the user must select the required Lift point.
• Copy ( ): This option allows copying all the data of a previously defined evacuation to
any other equal part. In this case, to user must also select the required Lift point.
• Display ( ): The system will display the parts that have already been evacuated, which
will help the user identify the ones not evacuated.
Evacuation of All the Parts by Lift after Machining
Evacuation of all the parts by lift after machining ( ) option enables the assignation of joint
download of all machined parts. This option is protected and will only enabled once sheet
machining has been done. In order to use this application, the evacuator suction cups must be
previously defined in a file. These are defined by indicating the number of suction cup grids the
lift has, where the grids have a defined number of rows and columns. The point where the lift
must be placed also requires definition. All this is configured in LiftSCups.cfg file.
When selected the system will display a drop-down list with the following options:
592
• Automatic ( ): This option performs evacuations automatically, testing all the available
pressing points defined by testing the grid. The system will decide which is the best
evacuation point for each part, taking into account the best gravity center and the
maximum number of active suction cups.
• Modify ( ): Thanks to this option the user can define the evacuations interactively,
selecting the part to evacuate, the strip positions and the active suction cups.
• Visualize ( ): This option allows visualizing all the suction cups.
Remnant to Part
Remnant to part ( ) option is very useful for a better sheet usage and efficient material waste
management. Once all parts have been placed on the sheet, automatic nesting has been carried
out and the user has been left with unused material portion, this option is a powerful solution to
avoid material waste and achieve profit. This option will convert the remnant into a part.
Utilities
Open Drafting
Open drafting ( ) option will open the drafting module without closing the drawing/nesting
ones. If the system detects changes in the machining when selecting this option, it will prompt
the user to save them. If the user performs changes in the drafting module, the system will ask to
save them before going back to the drawing/nesting module. The system will return to the
previous state when returning to the drawing module.
Dragging Options
Refer to section 3.13 Dragging Options.
Selection Options
Refer to section 3.14 Selection Options.
593
Cutting Example
5 CUTTING EXAMPLE
Find below an example of a simple cutting process in order to practice your skills:
1. Home / Utilities / Databases / New
The user will visualize a Loading window. Once the Database has been created, the system will
direct the user to Home Jobs (CAM) window.
2. Jobs / Jobs / New
Figure 517: Job dialog box
The reference will be automatically generated by the system. Introduce the required Name. The
user can also introduce various User data and a Description if necessary. Click OK button in order
to save the changes.
594
Cutting Example
Figure 518: Job explorer tree
3. Manage / Components / Machines / New
Figure 519: Machine definition dialog box
Install a new cutting machine as follows:
Figure 520: Install: Machines dialog box
The list on the left lists the Available machines while the one on the right provides the Installed
ones. Make use of the arrow ( , ) buttons in order to move the required machines from the
available list to the Installed one and click OK button.
The selected machine will appear on Machine definition dialog box, where the user can introduce
the required name.
Click OK button and the selected machine will be displayed in Configure: Machines dialog box.
Select close button to come back to Home module.
595
Cutting Example
4. Manage / Materials
Figure 521: Materials dialog box
Select the required material from the list of the Standard Materials located on the left and make
use of the arrow ( , ) buttons in order to add them to the Database materials list, which is
located on the right side.
5. Home / Modules / Drawing module ( )
Lantek Expert Drawing window will be visualized.
6. Home / Draw / Rectangles 2 points ( )
Select the first and second points and a rectangle will be drawn based on the points selected.
Figure 522: Rectangles example
7. Home / Draw / Circles – Centre and radius ( )
596
Cutting Example
Create a full circle defined by its center and radius.
Select the circle center and input the circle radius in Value field provided in the dialog box
displayed.
Figure 523: Circles example
8. Home / Modify / Fillets ( )
Fillet a corner by selecting the first and second elements and input the Radius value in the dialog
box displayed by the system. Execute the same action twice.
Figure 524: Fillets example
9. Home / Modify / Bevel ( )
Bevel a corner by introducing d1 and d2 values in the dialog box displayed. Afterwards, select the
first and second elements and the system will bevel them.
597
Cutting Example
Figure 525: Bevel example
10. Home / Transform / Copy ( )
Select the required geometry to copy by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar. In
this case select the whole geometry and rotate it 180º by means of the Dragging options. Place it
next to the initial geometry symmetrically and click Finish in order to exit from this application.
Figure 526: Copy example
11. Home / Transform / Union ( )
Select base contour and the second contour, the system will unify the selected elements.
Figure 527: Union example
12. Save the part ( )
598
Cutting Example
Introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save the part.
The system will direct the user back to Jobs (CAM) window.
13. Home / Modules / Nesting and machining

14. Home / Sheets / New
The system will display Sheet selection dialog box as shown below:
599
Cutting Example
Select the required sheet from the list and click OK button in order to open it.
15. Home / Nesting / One sheet
Figure 530: One Sheet example
The system will automatically nest on the current sheet, always looking for the best part
combination and sheet usage.
16. Home / Remnants / Configure ( )
The system will display Sheet remnants dialog box as shown below:
600
Cutting Example
Figure 531: Sheet Remnants dialog box
Select the required type of remnant and introduce the required data. If Create the cutting line of
the remnant automatically parameter is enabled, the system will create the remnant
automatically when One sheet option is executed. Click OK button in order to save the
information and create the remnant.
17. Home / Remnants / Create remnants ( )
The system will generate the remnant automatically, based on the data previously introduced in
Sheet remnants dialog box.
The user will visualize the nesting as follows:
601
Cutting Example
Figure 532: Automatic remnant creation example
18. Technology / Lead-in/Lead-out / Automatic
The system will place the Lead-in/Lead-outs automatically on the parts as it is possible to see in
the following image:
Figure 533: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-outs example
19. Machining / Machining / Automatic
The system will display Machining initialization window as shown below:
602
Cutting Example
Figure 534: Machining initialization window
Introduce the required data in the different sections provided and click Finish button in order to
execute the machining.
Figure 535: Machining example
20. Machining / View / Verify the Machining ( )
By means of this option the system will test if the machining process has been done properly
looking if:
• All the parts and contours are machined
603
Cutting Example
• There is no overlapping between parts
• There are no leads, micro-joints, loops, etc. that overlap with other elements
If any of the previous situations is given, the system will display the following completion
message: “All machining on the sheet has been executed”.
Figure 536: Verify the machining completion message
The dark grey color in the contours means that the test has been successful:
Figure 537: Verified machining example
21. Start menu / Save
Save the nesting in order to generate the CNC code.
22. Machining / View / View CNC
View CNC ( ) option shows the CNC code of the sheet:
604
Cutting Example
Figure 538: CNC code example
605
Metal Digital Transformation
Parque Tecnológico de Álava

Ferdinand Zeppelin, 2 (Lantek)
01510 Miñano (Araba/Álava)
SPAIN
info@lanteksms.com
www.LantekSMS.com

Expert Cut Manual (En)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Expert Cut Manual (En)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lantek Expert Cut

METAL Platform FACTORY Management SYNERGY Intelligence

Parque Tecnológico de Álava Lantek. The reproduction, distribution, public

2 JOBS (CAM) MODULE ..................................................................................... 163

JOBS ................................................................................................... 163

VIEW .................................................................................................. 251

3 DRAWING MODULE ....................................................................................... 255

DRAWING WINDOW...................................................................................... 255

4 NESTING AND MACHINING MODULE ..................................................................... 433

TITLE BAR ............................................................................................... 433

5 CUTTING EXAMPLE ........................................................................................ 594

Configure Cutting Machines and Tools

Jobs (CAM) Module

Nesting and Machining Module

1 CONFIGURE CUTTING MACHINES & TOOLS

Figure 1: Configure Machine window

Figure 2: Multihead data configuration

Figure 3: Heads table

The capabilities of each head are shown with icons:

Figure 4: Heads positions dialog box

Figure 5: Grid configuration

The parameters to configure are 2D Points and Continuous Line/Arc.

▪ X and Y: the coordinates of the first point.

▪ n1 and n2: the number of horizontal and vertical points respectively.

• Maximum length of the hole

• Minimum length of the hole

• Maximum width of the hole

• Minimum width of the hole

Figure 6: Problematic holes example

• Automatic micro-joints in unstable contours: It is possible to configure automatic micro-

▪ No: Do not place any micro-joint.

▪ Both: Both previous options will be selected.

Figure 7: Sheet clamps – Position configuration

• Positions: Positions indicate the distance between different clamp positions.

▪ Number of positions: Total number of positions of the linear turret.

Figure 8: Sheet clamps position distance example

Figure 9: Sheet clamps – Clamp zone configuration

• Clamp zone: It is possible to set up the measurements of the clamp zone.

Figure 10: Clamp zone simulation

Figure 11: Sheet Clamps – Auxiliar configuration

• Apply clamp check: Select this checkbox to apply clamp check.

Figure 12: Fixtures dialog box

Figure 13: Extractions configuration

Figure 14: Lift/Grip configuration

Figure 15: Lift dialog box

• Pressing position: X position where the lift picks the sheet.

Figure 16: Upload/Download Sheets configuration

Figure 17: Work zone configuration

Figure 18: From Point configuration

Figure 19: Reposition – General configuration

• Speed in Y: The feed rate applied to the back off move.

▪ Fit to the edge of active work zone

Figure 20: Reposition – Advanced configuration

• Y minimum position: This configuration parameter, which defines Y minimum position,

Figure 21: Reposition – Device configuration

Figure 22: Reposition – Strategy configuration

▪ Normal: Standard one for the machine.

Figure 23: Sheet Parameters configuration

Sheet Turn Over

Figure 24: Sheet Turn Over configuration

Bevel Head Data

Figure 25: Bevel Head Data- Head Data configuration

o When selecting Type A the AB corresponds to X axis and CC to Z axis.